PF 3111 
.B38 
1910 
Copy 1 




Glass. 

Book. 



J2&2_ 



Ibeatb's flDo&ern language Series 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 



BY 

FRANCIS KINGSLEY BALL, Ph.D. 

INSTRUCTOR IN GREEK AND GERMAN IN THE PHILLIPS EXETER ACADEMY 
AUTHOR OF "A GERMAN DRILL BOOK," ETC., ETC. 



BOSTON, U.S.A. 

D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 

1910 






Copyright, 1906 and 1907, 
By D. C. Heath & Co. 






TO 

GEORGE ANTHONY HILL 

WITH GRATITUDE AND REGARD 



iii 



PREFACE 

THE author's German Drill Book has been so kindly received 
and so kindly spoken of both here and in England that he 
feels warranted in hoping the present book will be welcomed and 
prove of real service. Its predecessor, the Drill Book, which is 
intended as a companion to this or to any other German grammar, 
has served as a framework, or background. The grammar has 
had the advantage also of being tested in the classroom, the 
proof sheets having been used in the Academy in five different 
classes. 

The author believes that students should learn their grammar 
from one book, with the contents of which they should become 
thoroughly familiar. This means that the book must be simple 
enough for the beginner and complete enough for the advanced 
student. The grammar here offered aims to meet these require- 
ments. And while it has only 256 pages, it contains more exer- 
cises and in some respects more information than many larger 
grammars. 

The arrangement of the matter is topical, that the important 
facts about each subject may be had in one place. Each section 
(with the exception of the first) occupies but two pages, and 
constitutes a day's lesson for the average class of beginners in 
the high school or the academy. Each section contains but a 
single topic, to keep the attention of the student focussed for 
that day upon but one point of grammar, so that in this way he 
may feel he is learning each day some part of a definite whole. 
At the same time, each section is so numbered that for more 
elementary classes it may easily be divided into two or three 
parts, or the exercises from English into German may be omitted 



VI A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

until the book is taken up in review, although it is the opinion 
of the author that progress in gaining a real knowledge of the 
language will in general be more rapid and more satisfactory 
by taking the English exercises along with the German exercises. 
For the benefit of those students who begin the study of German 
without proper or sufficient training in English grammar, ten 
pages of the supplement are devoted to some of the more im- 
portant facts of English and German grammar, treated side by 
side, which may profitably be studied before the regular exercises 
of the book are begun. 

The exercises of each section have sufficient continuity to 
furnish materials for conversational use if that is thought desir- 
able. Practice in the order of words is begun at the very first 
and continued through the book. Nouns are not introduced by 
classes until section XVI. Weak verbs are introduced at the 
start. Strong verbs appear in section X; and while they occur 
frequently thereafter, they are repeated in sections LIII — LVIII, 
arranged by classes. The classification is not always historically 
correct, but made according to the forms of the verbs as we now 
find them, as this seems more profitable in a book of this kind. 
For example, bclfcn ( like other verbs with i in the second person 
singular of the present indicative) was once ()ilfert (like birifcert, 
Class III), but it is more easily learned with verbs that have 
similar vowel change (192, 193). Class VII includes forms too 
irregular to be grouped easily elsewhere. Prepositions and 
conjunctions are introduced in the earliest sections, but they are 
all treated systematically and in detail toward the end of the 
book. Sections LXII — LXIV furnish reviews on the syntax of 
the cases, and the last three sections embrace peculiar construc- 
tions, the suffixes, and compound words. 

In reviewing the book, or in using it in the second or the 
third year work, the exercises can be varied by changing singu- 
lars to plurals, plurals to singulars, questions to statements, 
statements to questions, direct to indirect discourse, etc. 



PREFACE Vll 

The supplement contains tables of the inflections and classi- 
fied lists of nouns. Each vocabulary will be found complete in 
itself, without the necessity of looking up forms elsewhere. The 
inflection of the nouns is indicated and the principal parts of all 
the verbs are given, whether strong or weak, inseparable or sep- 
arable. The long vowels are marked long and the accent of 
doubtful words is indicated. The index is made full, to afford 
easy access to the contents of the book. The references through- 
out the book are to page and section, or to page and footnote, 
and should be so read. For example, 49, 3, should be read 
"forty-nine, three"; and 49 1 should be read "forty-nine, footnote 
one." This system of reference will be found convenient and 
a great saver of time, for page and section are found far more 
quickly than sections numbered consecutively. 

The author takes pleasure in acknowledging his indebtedness 
to Dr. Maurice W. Mather, of Cambridge, Mass., and Miss Helen 
Cilley, of Exeter, for reading pages 1-137 in manuscript. Mr. 
Arthur F. Hertell, of the Academy, has rendered valuable assist- 
ance in reading both the manuscript and the proofs. For other 
suggestions the author thanks Dr. D. F. Wells, of Exeter, and 
Miss Elizabeth O'Leary, of Lawrence, Mass. Again he wishes 
to record his obligation to his friend Mr. G. A. Hill, of Cam- 
bridge, Mass., to whom this book is dedicated, for his constant 
encouragement, advice, and assistance. 

FRANCIS KINGSLEY BALL. 

Exeter, N. H., April, 1907. 

This (the third) edition has been revised throughout. The author thanks 
all who have assisted him. For the revision of the German exercises he is 
indebted to several skilful native German scholars, particularly to Mr. Otto 
Meierfeldt, Prussian Exchange Instructor at the Academy. 

F. K. B. 

Exeter, March, 1909. 



CONTENTS 



CHAPTER PAGE 

I. Introduction: The Germans and Their Language; 
The Alphabet; The Vowels and Diphthongs ; The 

Consonants; Exercise I, Pronunciation . . . 1-5 

II. The Present and the Past Indicative of ©em . . 6, 7 

III. Siefer, fetter, Seber, and 23eld)ev 8,9 

IV. The Definite Article 10, 1 1 

V. The Present Indicative of Weak Verbs . . . 12, 13 

VI. The Past Indicative of Weak Verbs . . . 14,15 

VII. The Personal and Intensive Pronouns . . . 16,17 

VIII. The Reflexive Pronouns and Reflexive Verbs . . 18, 19 

IX. ®em, (Sin, and the Possessive Adjectives . . . 20, 21 

X. The Present and the Past Indicative of Strong Verbs 22, 23 

XI. The Present and the Past Indicative of SSerben . . 24, 25 

XII. The Perfect and the Pluperfect Indicative of Weak 

Verbs 26, 27 

XIII. The Perfect and the Pluperfect Indicative of Strong 

Verbs 28, 29 

XIV. The Perfect and the Pluperfect Indicative of Verbs 

inflected with (Seitt 30, 31 

XV. The Future and the Future Perfect Indicative . . 32, 33 

XVI. Nouns: Class I, Strong 34,35 

XVII. Nouns: Class II, Strong . . ._ . .36,37 

XVIII. Nouns: Class III, Strong. ..... 38, 39 

XIX. Nouns: Class IV, Weak 40,41 

XX. Nouns: Class V, Mixed 42,43 

XXI. Nouns: Proper Names 44> 45 

XXII. Adjectives: Class I, Strong 46, 47 

XXIII. Adjectives: Class II, Weak 48, 49 

XXIV. Adjectives: Class III, Mixed 50, 51 

XXV. Adjectives: Comparison . . . „ . 5-j 53 

XXVI. Adjectives: Irregular Comparison . . . 54, 55 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



CHAPTER 

XXVII. Adverbs .... 

XXVIII. The Cardinal Numbers . 

XXIX. The Ordinal Numbers 

XXX. The Possessive Pronouns . 

XXXI. The Demonstrative Pronouns 

XXXII. The Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 

XXXIII. The Indefinite Pronouns. Part I 

XXXIV. The Indefinite Pronouns, Part II 
XXXV. The Present Indicative of Peculiar Verbs 

XXXVI. The Imperative Mood 

XXXVII. The Conditional Mood 

XXXVIII. The Mood Auxiliaries, Part I . 

XXXIX. The Mood Auxiliaries, Part II. 

XI.. Irregular Weak Verbs 

XL I. The Prepositions with the Genitive . 

XLII. The Prepositions with the Dative 

XLIII. The Prepositions with the Accusative 

XLIV. The Prepositions with the Dative or the Ac- 
cusative . 

XLV. The Separable Prefixes 

XLVI. The Inseparable Prefixes 

XLVII. The Doubtful Pr< 

XLVI 1 1. The Subjunctive Mood 

XLIX. The Coordinating Conjunctions 

L. The Subordinating Conjunctions, Part I 

LI. The Subordinating Conjunctions, Part II 

LI I. The Passive Voice . 

LI II. The Strong Verbs, Class I 

LIV. The Strong Verbs, Class II 

LV. The Strong Verbs, Class III 

LVL The Strong Verbs, Class IV 

LVII. The Strong Verbs, Classes V and VI 

LVIII. The Strong Verbs, Class VII 

LIX. The Normal Order . 

LX. The Inverted Order . 

LXI. The Transposed Order 

LXII. The Genitive Case . 





CONTENTS 


xi 


CHAPTER 




PAGE 


LXIII. 


The Dative Case .... 


. 128, 129 


LXIV. 


The Accusative Case. 


• 13°, l 3 l 


LXV. 


Peculiar Constructions 


• 132, 133 


LXVI. 


•The Suffixes ..... 


• 134, 135 


LXVII. 


Compound Words .... 


• I3 6 > 137 


LXVIII. 


The German Script .... 


. 138-140 



Some Essentials of English and German Grammar . 141-151 

Nouns, or Names 141 

Adjectives 141 

Pronouns 142 

Verbs 143-148 

Sentences, Conjunctions, Adverbs, and Prepositions . 149 

English Conditional Sentences ..... 150 

German Conditional Sentences . . . . . 151 

The Inflection of Nouns 152-163 

The Classes of Nouns . . . . . . 152 

The Gender of Nouns according to their Meanings. . 152 

The Gender of Nouns according to their Classes . 153 

How to determine the Class of a Noun .... 154 

Class I, Strong 155 

Class II, Strong 156, 157 

Class III, Strong 158, 159 

Class IV, Weak 160, 161 

Class V, Mixed 162 

Proper Names ........ 163 

The Inflection of Adjectives . ..... 164-167 

Class I, Strong 164 

Class II, Weak 164, 165 

Class III, Mixed 165 

The Numerals 166, 167 

The Predicate Superlative, etc 167 

The Inflection of Pronouns, etc 168-171 

The Personal and Intensive Pronouns . . . . 168, 169 

The Possessive Pronouns 169 

The Demonstrative Pronouns ..... 170 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



The Relative and Interrogative Pronouns . 

The Indefinite Pronouns .... 

The Definite Article; Punctuation 
The Inflection of Verbs .... 

Verb Stem, Principal Parts, Weak and Strong Verbs 

The Endings 

The Tense Auxiliaries: fja&cn, have^ [eilt, be. 

The Tense, Mood, and Voice Auxiliary: tterbett, become 

Weak Verbs: ffigeit, say; fotgen, follow 

Strong Verbs: [ingert, sing; finfen, sink 

The Passive Voice: lichen, love . 

Reflexive Verbs: fid) f vouch, rejoice 

The Mood Auxiliaries: Milieu, may; fouueu, can; mo 
$tn,ntay; mimeii, must; foDen, shall;* unMlcn, will 

Separable Verbs: roie'berffigen, say again 

Inseparable Verbs: entffi'gen, renounce 

Weak Verbs with Peculiarities in Inflection. 

Strong Verbs with Peculiarities in Inflection 

Irregular Weak Verbs 

The Strong Verbs classified according to their Vowel 
Changes ....... 

An Alphabetical List of the Strong and Irregular Verbs 

The Mood Auxiliaries and fiaffen. 

The Prepositions in Verse .... 

Grimm's Law 

German -English Vocabulary 
English-German Vocabulary 
Index 



PAGE 




I70 




I70 




171 


172 


-202 




172 




173 


174 


175 


176, 


177 


178 


*79 


ISO 


181 


132 


183 


I84 


185 



186, 187 
188 
189 

190 

190 
191 

192, 193 
194-199 

200-202 
203 

204 

205-226 
227-236 

237-244 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



I. INTRODUCTION 
The Germans and their Language 

GERMAN, English, and nearly all the other languages of 
Europe and southwestern Asia are related, and belong 
to what is called the Indo-European, Indo-Germanic, or Aryan 
family; for our ancient forefathers lived in the same commu- 
nity, just where is unknown, and spoke the same language. 

When our ancestors spread over Europe, climate and other 
conditions changed their habits and their language : growing 
farther and farther apart, they grouped themselves into differ- 
ent communities, and to-day are represented by distinct nations 
with distinct languages. 

To the Germanic branch of the family belong the Gothic, 
the Scandinavian, the Low German, and the High German 
dialects, the Gothic being an elder sister of the others. Low 
German, which is most closely related to Anglo-Saxon, is 
spoken in the lowlands of northern Germany ; High German, 
in the uplands of central and southern Germany. 

High German has three periods : Old High German, ex- 
tending from the sixth century to the time of the Crusades ; 
Middle High German, beginning with the Crusades, and ex- 
tending about to the time of Luther ; New High German, 
from Luther's to our own time. Chiefly through Luther's 
translation of the Bible (1522-15 34), High German became 
known among all classes. In four centuries it has undergone 
many changes, but it remains throughout Germany the lan- 
guage of the educated, and has a large and varied literature. 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



German Form 


Roman Form 


Name 


Sound 


Example 


% a 


21 a 


A 


a 


ah 


Grana'da 


Sat'jftcfie 


23 6 


58 b 


B 


b 


bay 


bishop 


beliebt' 


IS c 


a c 


C 


c 


tsay 


kits 


Ga fe, 6a' jar 


$ b 


2) b 


D 


d 


day 


debt 


benf'enb 


g e 


© e 


E 


e 


ay 


they redden 


fjcr'jeriben 


8 f 


5 f 


F 


f 


ef 


for 


^atl 


© 9 


© 8 


G 


g 


g a y 


go, d) 


ftiftig 


£ $ 


* » 


H 


h 


hah 


Hannah 


l)in'a,eficn 


3 > 


3 i 


I 


i 


ee 


machinist 


2Bi'bertoffle 


3 1 


3 i 


J 


J 


yot 


you 


Jung 


fl f 


S t 


K 


k 


kah 


key 


fait 


2 i 


2 1 


L 


1 


el 


lid 


lang 


aw m 


3H m 


M 


m 


em 


met 


SKufff 


92 n 


92 n 


N 


n 


€)l 


no ink 


etu'tnnfen 


D o 


C o 








oh 


chrd'mfl 


bdr/ffltmnett 


% P 


* P 


P 


P 


pay 


pay 


%\\\ 


Q q 


Q q 


Q 


q 


koo 


qu ==kv 


q u i cf 


32 V 


92 r 


R 


r 


er \ 


ray 


attttfl 


3 [3 


3 [S 


S 


s 




this is she 


auo biefet Stfibe 


a t 


I t 


T 


t 


toy 


toy 


Ifil 


it u 


it n 


U 


u 


00 


fruitful 


ttr/fprftng 


S b 


8 u 


V 


V 


faw* 


for 


Skater 


S3 m 


SB to 


w 


w 


vay 


vain 


SBaffet 


X i 


3E S 


X 


X 


!X 


box 


••ocre 


9 i) 


g | 


Y 


y 


ipsilon 


German ii, i 


^ij'rif, Jrjrann' 


3 5 


3 5 


z 


z 


tset 


mits 


^erj 



(S has two forms for the small letter : § # used at the end of a syllable, 
except before p or t not in compound words ; elsewhere, f : as. 53ismarrf, 
Man*, MaiiC'tuv (= §au§j £5* ; but, SSefpe, Stftronomie / ) ; lefen, ftefoen, ^an'- 
bclSftabt 

The double consonants are di, cf (Ut when divided, 4, 21, ft, £. In the 
Roman type (137), s is used for 3 or f ; ss for jf ; B for ft (but, in capitals, 
SZ). For the script, see 138 ; for the capitals, 141, 1. 

1 As in "ere," but with the "r" trilled. 2 As in "fowl." 



THE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS 3 

The Vowels and Diphthongs 

As a rule, vowels are long before silent h, or when accented i 
before single consonants, or when doubled. Otherwise they 
are short. If long, they remain long before suffixes : 

Long a = Grana'da: as, tfifim, ffi'gen, §aar ; fag'bar. 
Short a = Grana'da: as, SDMnn. 

Long c = they: as, geht, le'ben, £>eer ; (eb'io§. 

Short c = red : as, SBctt. 

Obscure final e = redden : as, ret' ten, ret'te, fjamflie. rSin'dien 

Long i (generally written ie) = machinist : as, tbm, fit'na, Ue'6en ; 

Short i = machinist : as, trtnf'en. 

Long o = chro'mo : as, roofi'nen, 9KB'nat, S3oot ; trjofin'6ai\ 

Short o = chro'mb : as, ©dtt. 

Long u = fruitful: as, £ufin, rit'fen; rwfft. 

Short u = fruitful : as, Mt'ter. 

Long t) = generally German U (3, 2) : l as, Stj'riL 
Short tj = generally German t : as, ©Jjmna'fiunu 

a, 0, u often have modification (Umlaut), shown by two dots 2 
over the letter, a, o f ii ; da becomes a, and 00 becomes ii: 2 

Long a = there : as, ^Sfi'ne, $f)'re, ©S'le (from ©oat) ; ^ttfin'lein. 

Short a = red : as, s Mn'ner. 

Long ij = nearly fern : as, ©ofr/ne, 6' fen ; S36'te (from 33oot) ; ©Bhn' chert. 

Short = nearly her : as, Bffnen. 

Long it = French une: 1 as, fttbt, U'6ung, Ubft. 

Short it = French tu : x as, SKut'ter. 

ax, at), et, et) = aisle (except in words of French origin at = S : as, £ 
Satfon') : as, Wax, Satj'er, fret, Sftety'er. 

att ■= our (in words of French origin = 9) : as, brcmn ; but, QfiauffeT. 
ait, eu = oil : as, Xvau'mt, ttett* 

1 Hold the lips rounded as if to whistle, and try to say ee. 

2 The two dots represent an original e, which in proper names is sometimes 
written after the letter to be modified : as, ©oet&e. 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



The Consonants 



lb pronounced with the preceding vowel = p : as, f)ctfot, Iefi'(o§. 

c before e, i, i), a, o = ts (in words of French origin = ss : as, Sau'ce) ; 
elsewhere = k: as, GS'jar; (Safe. 

1^= d) (after a, o f u, roughen h in hard ; elsewhere, in he) : as, •madden, 
bredj'en. 

eft in words of French origin = sh : as, (Sftara'be. In most words of Greek origin 
eft = k: as, (Xftro'mf, Creftejt'er ; but sometimes before c or i = eft : as, Gftemie'. 

d)3 f when the § is a part of the root of the word, = ks : as, £d)3. 

b at the end of a syllable = t : as, .foonb, cub' lid). 

A at the end of a syllable = d) : as, 93crg, log, tag' ltd). But see ttg. 

g before c in words of French origin = azure: as, (ioind'gc. 
gn in words of French origin — companion : as, (Fhampagn'eVj 

I) beginning a word or a suffix = ha ; elsewhere = ah and shows that 
the preceding vowel is long : as, gauS, (iiu'l)cit ; a,ef)cn. But see d). 

j = you (in words of French origin = azure): as, \a ; but, journal'. 

II in words of French origin = billion : as, billet' (bill-yet 7 ). 

ng = singer: as. filiflcn, Atngcv. 

n! == ink : as, tristten. 

qu = kv (in words of French origin = ki : as, Quelle; but, 93ouqiie't / . 

g at the end of a syllable = ss : elsewhere = z : as, au3'a,el)en; 3ot)n, 

fd) = sh: as, Aifd), rrijuic. [unfer. 

fp at the beginning of a syllable = shp : as, Spriugen, aui'fpringen. 

ft at the beginning of a syllable = sht : as, Sturm, auf'ftehcii. 

£ is written for ff after a long vowel or a diphthong, before t, at the 
end of a syllable, or when a following c is dropped : as, friij?e3, fliefeen ; 
muj?ten : gujj, ?slu\i ; auv'odajniev (for auS'gelaffener) : but, SfymffeT ( French). 

t in the terminations rial' and tion' = ts : as, martial', 9?att5n'. 

tfy = t: as. XI)ca'tcv, Ideologic'. 

to (written for g§) = ts : as, .oific, 3ifc. 

tj = f (initial or medial in words of French or of Latin origin = v; : 
as, SJatet ; but, SHclfnc, 2*emV (pronounced Vesuf ). 

In dividing words, consonants are put at the beginning of syllables 
when easily so pronounced ; but ft is not divided, and compounds are di- 
vided according to their parts; d when divided is written t-t : as, 9(p'|el, 
23ikt)cr, arHdjer, £ttt*je, $htoi=pc. |m=gen, Bo^t'e, StaMe, Strode, SSaMer , 
but, be=ne : &ien&tag, §m^m'*cptyn ; Srufsfe (Sriirfc). 



THE ALPHABET 5 

Exercise i, Pronunciation 

Tit Warn, bte banner, bfi§ §Beib, bie SKetber, bie gran, bte 
granen, bfiS granletn, bte granletn, bte Sttagb, bte -Iftagbe, bag SftSb* 
Jen, ber SSater, bte SSater, bte Gutter, bte TOtter, ber Sofjn, bte 
gfifjne, bte Xodjter, bte Iod)tcr, ber 33ruber, bte 23rUber, bie 2d)ir>e^ 
fter, bte Sd)ir>eftern, ber Dttfel, ber Sfteffe. 

Tcr 2lrm, bte tone, bte ganb, bte ganbe, ber ginger, bie ginger, 
fe Singe, bie 2(ngen, bag §aar, ber gitft, bie gUJ3e, ber <Sd}ttt), bie 
2d)u()e, ber §anb'fdjuf), ber Mantel. 

£ie 5rbe, bie (Sonne, ber SDconb, ber ©tern, bie (Sterne, btfg -3^^) r r 
bie -3a1)re, ber grueling, ber (Summer, ber gerbft, ber 3B inter, ber 
9J?6'nat, bie SJio'iiate, ber ^fin'uar, ber ge'brnar, ber TOr^, ber 2tyrtP, 
ber 20ki, ber -3 u '™r oer -Su'tt, ber 2Ingnff, ber (septem'ber, ber Dfto'= 
ber, ber 9toem'ber, ber ^De^em'ber, ber £fig, bie £age, ber Sonn'tag, 
ber DJion'tag, ber £)ieng'tag, ber SJcitt'mod), ber £)on'nergtag, ber 
prei'tag, ber (Sonn'abenb, ber Sftorgen, ber SBor'mtttag, ber Stttt'tag, 
ber Sftacfy'mittag, ber S'benb. 

£)fig <pang, bie gtiufer, ber fifen, bie Sfen, bfig gener, bag 4Bett, 
bie 23etten, ber <Stuf)l, bie ©tul)Ie, ba$ £3rot, bie ^Butter, bag 33uf* 
terbrot, bag gru^ftiid, bag 3Diiftaggeffen, bag t'benbbrot, bag ©tag, 
bie ©tfifer, bag Xrinlen, bag Staffer, bie TOtd), ber taf'fee, ber £ee, 
bte jjrudjt, bie gritdtfe, ber 2Ipfet, bie Spfel, ber SDtaft, ber gtfd), bie 
Atfdie, bie $afce, ber §unb, bie Sttang, bie 93?anfe, bfig @djaf, 

£ie Sd)ule, ber SdjUter, bag ^Suc^, bie 33udjer, bie (Sframmfit'tf, 
bie 9ttatf)emattF, bie Slritfymettf, bie ©eograptjte', bie ^Ijttofopuje', bie 
Xfjeologie', bie So'gif, bie ©efdjictj'te, griedjifd). 

ab r an, bin, btg, bag, ben, benn, bU f eg, t)tn, tn, tt)n, rat, tl)m, man, 
mtt, ob, urn, mag, meg, men, menn, bie 3trt, ber 35art, erft, jnerff, bie 
®eburt', grog, bag JHofter, bie $ISfter, bag %Ra% ba$ Sbft, U^ 
^ferb, bte Strafe, merben, mert. 



A GERM AX GRAMMAR 



II. THE PRESENT AND THE PAST INDICATIVE OF ZtXXL 



Present 


Past 


icf) 


6tn 


I am 


id) 


mar 


/ was [were 


bit 


btft 


thou art, you are 


bu 


marft 


thou wast, you 


er, fie, 


e§ if* 


he, she, it is 


er, fie 


e§ roar 


he, she, it was 


toft 


ftnb 


we are 


lutr 


luaretl 


we were [were 


t§r 


feib 


ye are, you ai'e 


t(n- 


roart 


ye were, you 


fie 


ftnb 


they are 


lie 


marcn 


they were 


2ic 


jutb 


you on: 


Hie 


iravctt 


you were 



$u (singular), thou, you, and ifjr (plural), ye, you, are used in solemn 
or familiar style, as in prayer, poetry, fables, or in speaking to near rela- 
tives, intimate friends, or children. Otherwise, the formal Sic, you, is 
used. It is the third person plural (written with a capital), but is used 
in speaking either to two or more persons or to one person : as, 

i. bu btft frnnf, filter, y, w are sick, father. 

2. Jyrii* nub SJlaric, urn mart il)r? Fred and Mary \ where were you? 

3. umrcn 3ic ha, Tyrait 3rtimit>t ? were you there, Mrs. Smith/ 



Vocabulary 

bcr, the, masculine ; bie, the, femi- bcr 3ommcr, the summer 

nine ; bfi3, the, neuter 
bcr ^rfibcr, the brother 



(ylt'fnbctn, Elizabeth 

bic Jyrnn, the woman 

ftrtcbrtcf), Frederic(k)\ Jyritt, Fred 

bcr (Garten, the garden 

b&3 £>au*, the house 

bcr s ?3iamt, the man 

Wane or $)iartc', Marie' , Mary 

bic Gutter, the mother 

bic ccfitDcftcr, the sister 

bcr 3of)tt, the son 



bic £orf)tcr, the daughter 
bcr i*atcr, the father 
SBtUjelltt, William 
bcr Winter, the winter 
flrftii, green; rot, r^vf 
fjci^, A»/j,* fair, A?/*/ 
juna., young; franf, ill, sick 
roarm, warm; fufjl, ^0/ 
f)icr, Atfyvy ba, //^r^ 
\a,yes; ncin f wy nicf»t f ;/^/ 
tntt f 7c'///^; unb, #//</ 
ate, &?w ? roo, where f 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD 7 

Unless emphatic, an adverb of time precedes an adverb of I 
place: as, 

i. G(ifnDctf) ttmr geftern fjicr f Elizabeth was here yesterday : 

2. fie ttmr geftern fner mit ^yrtlj f she was here yesterday with Fred. 

3. e3 ttmr geftern fait fjtcr f it was cold here yesterday. 

Exercise 2, German into English 

i. 2Bo ftnb ber Wlann unb bte grew? ©tub fie nidjt fjier? 2 
2. 9cetn, fie ftnb ntdjt fjier. 3- £)er SDtomt mar geftern ()ier mtt 
2Btff)elm. 4. 3inb ber SJtann nnb bte gran SBrnber unb 6tf)toefter ? 
5. 9icin, fie ftnb ^Better nnb Sodjter. 6. SSar bte gratt geftern 
fjter ? 7- Sftetn, fie roar nidjt fjier, ber ©ofju mar fjier. 8. SSar 
e3 geftern roarm fjier ? 9. 3a, e3 mar roarm, ber SStnter tft ntdjt 
fait 10. 3Ete mar ber ©ommer? 233ar er (it, the summer, mas- 
culine) fjeif]? 11. 9cein, er mar fait. 12. Sa3 |>au3 mar ntdjt 
roarm, unb id) unb Sdjrocfter Woxxt roaren franf, 13. 3ft dearie 
ntdjt jung ? 14- 3a, fie tft jung ; Sftarte, too Gift bit ? 15. 2)a 
iff Stfarte mtt $ater nnb s Dcutter. 16. 2So tft griebridj? 3ft 
er ntdjt fjier? 17. Dfetn, %x\% tft nid)t fjier, tft er ntdjt franf? 
18. (£r mar geftern franf, maren @ie ntdjt ba ? 

Exercise 3, English into German 

19. Where is the house ? 20. There are the house and the 3 
garden ; the house is red and green. 21. How is the sum- 
mer ? Is it (er, ber (Sommer, masculine) cool ? 22. It is hot, 
and brother Fred is ill. 23. Where is Fred ? Is he not 
here ? 24. No, he is not here ; he was here yesterday with 
father. 25. Where was William yesterday ? Was he here ? 
26. Yes, he and Mary were here. 27. Where are father and 
mother ? 28. Mother is not here. 29. Father, are you there ? 
30. Yes, and here are William and Elizabeth. 31. Elizabeth, 
were you here yesterday with father? 



8 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

ill. Siefer, £$encr, ^ebcr, AND 28eftf)er 

The German language has four cases : 

Nominative = the English nominative. 

Genitive = the English possessive, or the objective with of. 

Dative = the English objective, with or without to or for. 

Accusative = the English objective, with or without a prepo- 
sition. 

£ icier, tetter, ieber, and toeltfjer have special terminations, called 
strong endings, to indicate gender, number, and case : 







Masculine 


Feminine 


Neuter 






N. 


Meier 


biefe 


biefeS 


this 




G. 


biefeS 


Meier 


biefe 3 


of this 


Singular 


D. 


Ma" cm 


Meier 


biefetn 


to or for this 




A. 






biefe 3 


this 




N. 


biefe 




biefe 


these 




G. 


Meier 




Meier 


of these 


Plural 


D. 


Meicu 




Meicu 


to ox for these 




A. 


biefe 




biefe 


these 



Vocabulary 



bicfer, bicfc, biefeS or bie§, this 
jencr, jene, jcitc*, that 
jebcr, ict>c f jebeS, 

mcltficr, n>clci)c, n>cld)Cv, which t 

bos Srdt, the bread 

bcr ftnf'fcc, the coffee 

bcr itSfc, the cheese 

bte 3KUdj, the milk 

bcr SBagett, the wagon, the carriage 

bao SBajfer, the water 

flcilt, little, short i of persons) 



nit, old; \T\)d) t fresh, sweet (of milk, 

butter, etc.) 
Inner, sour; fuf;, sweet 
fdjtoars, black ; rocif;, white 
nbcr f but, hm 
foiibcru, but, following a negative 

clause and contradicting it 
in, prep, with d., in; with a., into 
nut, prep, with d.. with 
Wa§, what? [are going 

cr gcl)t, he is going; fie flcf)cu, they 



THE CASES 9 

Exercise 4, German into English 

1. SKo finb ^atcr unb Gutter, (Stifaoetf) ? Sinb fie in btefetn 
IBagen ? 2. Stutter unb griebricf) jtnb l)ter, after better ift ba, er 
t]el)t mit SSitfjelm tit jencit (Garten. 3- W\i toetdjer Sdnucfter ift 
grig in jenem SSagen? 4. (£t ift mit dearie in jenem 3Sagen. 
5. $)iefer (Garten ift rTein, after luie grim unb fu()l er ift ! 6. Unb 
hue fait bieS SBaffer ift ! 7- Sn roetdjem SSagen finb bex ®affee, 
bie WM) unb ba3 S5rot ? 8. £er S=taffee unb bie 9Jcild) finb ha in 
jenem SSagen. 9. 2ffter raa£ ift in biefem SBagcn ? gutter unb 
2kot ? 10. ga, fjier finb bie Gutter unb bas SBrot ; biefem 53rot ift 
pmarg, unb btefeS ift toeijs. 11. 2ffter bieje£ Q3rot ift nicfjt frifdj, 
fonbern aft. 12. <pier finb SSitfjetm unb 9Jcarie mit SSaffer, 
|affee unb ftafe. SBte ift biefer SMfe, grtfc ? Sft er alt ? 13. Sa 
putter, biefer tafe f)ier ift alt. 14- Sft biefe3 Staffer fjeifj, 
SOtarie ? 15. Set, es ift fjeift, unb biefer Slaffee ift fjeijs unb fiifj. 
16. £)iefe 9Jitfd) ift nid)t fait, after fie ift nict)t fauer. 

Exercise 5, English into German 

17. Father and Fred are not with mother in this carriage. 
18. They are going into that garden. 19. Which brother 
is with Elizabeth ? William ? 20. No, William is not there ; 
he is with Mary in this garden. 21. Is this garden warm ? 
22. No, it is not warm, but green and cool ; but that garden 
is warm. 23. Father is in this garden with coffee, bread, 
and cheese. 24. How is this coffee, father? Is it hot ? 
25. Yes, it is hot ; but is that milk not sour ? 26. It is 
sweet, but warm ; the milk in that carriage is sweet and cold. 
27. Which bread is fresh ? 28. This bread is fresh, but it is 
white. 29. This bread is black and old. 30. Is this cheese 
old, mother ? 31. No, this cheese is not old, but that cheese 
is old. 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



IV. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 



i £er, the, is inflected like biefer (8, 2), except that the femi- 
nine singular and the plural have tc instead of c, and the neu- 
ter singular nominative and accusative have a§ instead of e6: ] 







Masculine 


Feminine 


Neuter 






N. 


bcr 


bic 


boc 


the 


Singular 


G. 
D. 


beS 
bem 


bcr 

bCl* 


beS 
bem 


of the 

to or for the 




A. 


bClt 


bic 


ba$ 


the 




N. 


bic 


bic 


bic 


the 


Plural 


G. 
D. 


bcr 
ben 


bcr 
ben 


bcr 
ben 


of the 

to ox for the 




A. 


bte 


bic 


bic 


the 



2 When unaccented, the dative or the accusative singular of bcr is often 

contracted with a preposition: as, tin (= in bem , in the; foS (= in ba§), 
into the; jftm (= ju bem), to the; jut (= gu ben, to the. 



Vocabulary 



bcr l^iorgcn, the morning 

bcr ^I'bcnb, the evening 

bic >i irrlic, the church: in bcr Utrriic, 

at church; in bic (or jfir) Uirdtc, 

A? church; uatl) bcr fttrrijc, /#- 

ward the church 
bic 3d) file, ///f schoolhouse, the 

school: in bcr 3cf)iilc, #/ school; 

\\\ bic (or jar) Sdjtitc, to jt/W/ 
bflv Sftca'tcr, // ; f theater: int Xhco= 

tcr r 0/ £fe theater; ?n§ ifjeater, 

A? ///6' theater 



geftern, yesterday: geftern ntorgen, 
yesterday morning; gcftcrnabcnb, 

/^jV night 
flClltC, to-day: f)ClttC ntorgcit, Mtf 

morning; fjeute abenb, Mu t'jy<?«- 

///£-, to-night 
morgen, to-morrow : ntorgen fritf), 

to-morrow morning (friilj, early) 
nnd), prep, with D., toward, to: 

itnrf) .N>nnfc, //cw^ 
5S, prep, with D., to, at: 511 £>anfe, 

at home 



1 liefer, jener, jeber, tnekner, and bcr are inflected with strong endings 
(8,2) and may be called Meier-words. 



THE DEFIXITE ARTICLE II 

When any part of the predicate of a sentence stands first in the I 
sentence (as in asking questions or for emphasis) the subject is put 
after the verb. This is called "the inverted order": as, 

1. tt)0 ift $rit? Ijcttte? where is Fred to-day? 

2. bo gcf)t cr in ben ©ortcn, there he goes into the garden. 

3. ift Glifabctf) %Vi Jpaufe? is Elizabeth at home? 

4. tttorgen fleljt fie ttott) £>cutfc, she is going home to-?norrow. 

Exercise 6, German into English 

1. ©eftcrn roar ber $torgen fait unb ber ?(6enb inarm. 2. 28ar 2 
e£ geftern nidjt warm in ber ©cljitte? 3. 3a, in ber ©crjute tear e3 
lietf]. 4. 33o roaren ^ater unb gri| geftern abenb? 3m Sweater? 
5. Sftein, im Sweater roaren fie nicrjt, fonbern in ber ®ircr)e. 6. 5(6er 
Ejeute ift es> fait, unb fie geljen 1 nidjt in bie £ird)e. 7« ©efjen 1 
fie morgen tn§ heater? 8. 9cein f morgen gerjen 1 fie nictjt in3 
Sweater, fie gerjen fritt) nad) <§>aufe. 9. 3ft (Slifabett) tjeute in ber 
(Sdjule? 10. 9cein, rjeute gel)t fie mit SSilfjelm nad) ber £irdje. 
11. ©er)t gri| nidjt in bie 6dju(e? 12. 3a, er getjt in bie ©crjule, 
unb morgen bin 1 id) aud) (also) in ber ©djute. 

Exercise 7, English into German 

13. Was it warm at church yesterday morning? 14. Yes, 3 
the church was warm. 15. Marie was at church, and she was 
not cold. 16. Last night it was cold, but Elizabeth was with 
father at the theater. 17. Were William and Elizabeth at 
school to-day? 18. William was at school, but Elizabeth was 
at home. 19. The winter is cold, but the schoolhouse is 
small and warm. 20. There is Mary; she is going with mother 
toward the garden. 21. Is Fred in the garden? 22. No, he 
is with Elizabeth in the carriage; he is going home. 

1 The present is often used for the future. Cf. "We sail to-morrow." 



12 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

V. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE OF WEAK VERBS 
I 3d) f age, / say, I do say, or / am saying: 





say 


open 


answer 


have 




id) 


jngc I say, etc. 


offne 


anfroovtc 


f)cibe 


t 


bu 


fagft. //W sayest, etc. 


offneft 


ant'ttjorteft 


m 


KOft 


er 


fagt /^ j-^yj, etc. 


offnef 


ant'movtct 


hat 


<e)t 


luiv 


fagCtt w^ j-<:zy, etc. 


Lnincn 


ant'iuovtcn 


babCtt 


tw 


iDv 


fagt _y<?z/ jvzy, etc. 


tiftnet 


ant'iuortct 


habt 


<e)t 


fie 


jagCtt they say, etc. 


offnen 


ant'toortett 


biafrcn 


en 


Ste 


fagetl .iv>// say, etc. 


bffnett 


ant 'm mien 


da ben 


en 



When the endings ft and t are not easily pronounced with the preced- 
ing letters, the connecting vowel c is generally retained: as, bfftieft. 

In a subordinate clause the verb is put at the end of the clause. 
This is called "the transposed order." A subordinate clause is 
separated from the rest of the sentence by a comma : as, 

1. cr frnflt, Juu 3ic n,cftcru iuarcn, he asks where you were yesterday. 

2. id) fane, baf; cr l)icr rooiwt, / say that lie lives here} 

Vocabulary 

ct'roav (colloquially, tva*), some- IjBrcn, hear 

thing; ttidjtS, notJiing Icrncu, learn 

bat? Jycucr, the fire lichen, love, like 

fragen, ask a question : fragen nadi, marficit, make: toa$ mad)cn 3ic? 

with i)., ash after, ask for what are you doing? 

bov Jyrnulcut, the young lady ffitfjen, seek, look for 

btc dJeograpf)ic / r the geography uon, prep, with D., from, of 

ber £»crr, the lord, the gentleman: niaiut, when? jefet, now 

(fQCVT) Xohor 3d)mibt, Doctor ber 2Bittb, the wind 

Smith Wof)n en, dwell, live 

1 \Vhen ban, that, is omitted, the verb in the subordinate clause is in its 
usual place (after its subject): as, id) fage, -er toofjnt fjter, I say he lives here. 



THE INDICATIVE M I 3 

The present indicative (commonly with fdion, already) is i 
often used like the English perfect to denote that an action 
or a state previously begun is still going on: as, 

i. Wofjncn Sic fcffon (ange f)tcr? have you been living here long? 

2. jo, id) bin f djrrn langc l)icr, yes, I have been here a long time. 

Exercise 8, German into English 

i. gtf) fibre ntdjts bott %x% tucts bbrft bit, dearie? 2. 2Ba^ 2 
fragft bu, (Hifabetf)? 3. 3d) frage, toa£ bit boit grit) fjorft 
4. s -l>on grtli mdjfco, aber id) ()bre may Hon graideut {Miss) 
Sdjmibt, fie imb «£>err 2)oftor ©djmibt ftitb ba. 5. grits tft franf 
§u ^oaufe r er gefit ntdjt in bie Sdjule. 6. 2Ba3 fagft bit, dearie? 

7. 3d) fage, gri^ tft Iran! 511 ©catfe unb gefit ntdjt in bie ©djute. 

8. 28a3 mad)t ©lifabetfi jefet? Sernt fie fictile toa<§? 9. 3a, 
granletn ©dfimibt, id) terne jejt ©eoarapfiie. 10. |)ter tft Softer 
Sdjmibt! (Sndjen ©te toas, ©err SDoftor? 11. Dcein, icfi fudje 
ntdjtS. 12. gragt grig nad) Gdifabetfi? 13. Dcetn, er fragt ntdjt 
nad) (Sftfabetfi, fonbern nad) 93krte. 14. SBtft bn $>a, dJlaxit? Ste 
anttnortet mdfit 15. £a gefit fie in ben ©arten, fie fud)t $ater, 
a6er er ift nidjt ^n gaufe. gorft bn ben SBinb ? 

Exercise 9, English into German 

16. I hear something; do you hear nothing, Doctor Smith? 3 
17. Yes, you hear the fire and the wind. 18. Where is Miss 
Smith to-day, and what is she doing? 19. What does Mary 
ask? 20. She asks where Miss Smith is to-day and what she 
is doing. 21. But Doctor Smith does not answer. 22. What 
are you looking for, Marie? 23. I am looking for the geog- 
raphy. 24. Here it is; I have it. 25. Are you learning some- 
thing to-day, Marie? 26. What do you say, Doctor? 27. I ask 
what Mary is learning to-day. 28. She is learning geography. 
29. There go father and mother into the garden. 



H 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



VI. THE PAST INDICATIVE OF WEAK VERBS 

The past indicative of weak verbs is formed by adding it or 
etc to the stem (like d and ed in English) : as, 



sent Infinitive 




Past Indicative 




jag-en 


(stem fag) 


fag-te 


say 


off'n-en 


(stem off n) 


offn-ete 


open 


ant'roort-en 


(stem anttoort) 


ant'ioort-ete 


answer 


fjab-en 


(stem I) 6b) 


tHlt-tc (for l)ab-tc) 


have 


ta'bel-n 


(stem tabcf ; 20 2 ) 


ta'bcl-tc 


blame 


tuan'ber-n 


(stem toanbcr ; id 1 ) 


roan'ber-te 


wander 



The past indicative is used to express the continuance or the 
repetition of an action or a state in past time, and is the tense 
of narration or of description : as, irf) fngtc, / was saying, I did 
say, or / said: 



kb 


ffigte 


Bffnete 


ant'iiKHtete 


battc 


r)te 


bit 


fagteft 


offuctcft 


mu'iiuntcteft 


tnlttcft 


(Cttft 


er 


ffigte 


Bffncte 


ant'nuntctc 


ttfttc 


c U 


loir 


[agten 


offneten 


ant'iuortctcn 


belt ten 


s(e)te« 


i bi- 


[agtet 


Bffnetet 


nnt'iuovtctct 


lulttct 


<e)tet 


ne 


[agten 


off 'iic ten 


ant'iuortctcn 


fatten 


=(C;tClt 


Sie 


[agten 


off 11c ten 


anftuortcten 


Itfttcn 


=(cjtcn 



Stoma, Anna; $an§, Jack 

ar'beiten, ar bcitctc, work 

att§, prep, with D., out of 

bcr Settler, the beggar 

b\§ f prep, with a.. ////, until 

btc SBBrfe, the purse 

banfen, banitc, with p., /7/tf«£ 

citcn, ciltc, hurry 



Vocabulary 

(ben Jyrcitag, Friday 
b&§ ftanz, the house 
tangc, a long time, long 
ftf)itfen, fcf|icftc p send 
1 bcr: 3onntag, Sunday 
fptcfen, fptclte, play 
marten, tuartcte, wait 
nmnfdjcn, nritnfdjte, wish 



THE IXDICATIVE MOOD 15 

The past indicative (commonly with jcrjon, already) is often 
used like the English pluperfect to denote that an action or a 
state previously begun was still going oji (cf. 13, 1) : as, 

1. lute (ange ttmrcu 3tc jn &aufc ? how long had you been at home? 

2. id) nmr frfjott lougc 511 Jpailfe, I had been long at home (and was still 

there). 

Exercise 10, German into English 

I. 23te Icmge toarteten $am unb ©djtoefter 2(mta, Glijabetf)? 
2. 28a3 jragten 8te, grautein ? 3. 3d) fragte, tute (ange |)an3 
irtb 3d)iuej"ter 2(nna ()ier toarteten. 4. pernio toartete bis greitag 
Iter, unb 2lnna mar 6t^ geftern abenb f)ter. 5. ©cftcrn jpiclten id) 
unb $(nna in jertem ©arten; liur ttJarteten langc, aber better off- 
nete ba3 <<pau3 m«f)t. 6. ^satcr arbettcte mit SStlfjetm hit ©arten. 
7. @r fd)td'te ben Settler au3 bent (Garten, mo er jdjon lartge tear* 
tik, tctidk aber 2lnna ntdjt. 8. „$Sa§ toiinfdjen ©ie?" fragte 
$ater ben Pettier. 9; „23rot unb ®affee," anttoortete er. 10. „3Btr 
tjaben utdjts," fagte id) ^u bent Settler, unb fair etlten mit &ater 
in3 §au3. 

Exercise n, English into German 

II. Where was Miss Smith yesterday morning ? 12. She 
and Anna were with the beggar in the garden. 13. Did the 
beggar have the purse ? 14. Yes, he had the purse. 15. Had 
the beggar been waiting there long ? 16. Yes, he had been 
there a long time. 17. Did Miss Smith and Anna wait in the 
garden ? 18. No, Miss Smith thanked the beggar and hurried 
home with Anna. 19. Where was Jack this morning ? 20. He 
was working here in the garden. 21. Did he work long? 
22. Yes, William and Fred worked there till Sunday, but Jack 
worked until this evening. 23. Yesterday morning father 
sent Fred and William home. 



i6 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



VII. THE PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS (142, 168) 





/ 


you 


he 


she it 


N. 


id) 


I 


bit 




cr 


fie e» 


G. 


mehter 


of me 


beiner 




fciucr 


tfjrer fetner 


D. 


mtr 


to ox for me 


btr 




Hjtn 


tfjr tfjm 


A. 


mid) 


?ne 


bid) 




if) It 


fie eS 


N. 


mtr 


we 


tt,r 


3ic 


fie they 


fie they fie ///y 


G. 


nnfer 


of us 


cucr 


?sl)rcr 


iljrcr 


tljrcr tljrcr 


D. 


ttttS 


to or for us 


cud) 


gluten 


tljiteu 


tljncn tljucit 


A. 


Ultv 


us 


curt) 


Sic 


fie 


fie fie 



For the use of bit, ifjr, and 3ic, see 6, 2. In the genitive singular are 
shorter forms, mcin, bciu, and fein, which are older, but are now used 
only in a few familiar phrases : .1-. gebeu tt ntciii ! remember me. 

The uninfected intensive pronoun fclbfr, self is used for emphasis in 
all genders, persons, and numbers : as, 

1. bic Wuttcr fcluft mar bn, the mother herself was there. 

2. wir nmrcit felbft t>a, we were there our 

The indirect object is generally expressed by the dative without a 
preposition, and precedes the direct object; but if the two objects are 
pronouns, or refer to persons, the accusative generally precedes the 
dative : as, 

1. id) frijirfc iljm bit* 83ttd), I am sending him the book. 

2. id) fffjufe cs il)in, I am sending it to him. 

3. id) frliirfc il)it yt Gutter, I am sending him to mother. 



Vocabulary 

bct r prep, with d.. at. near, with, at fiiftrctt, fiifjrtc, lead 

the house of: bcim = bci bem 
burftcn, biirftete, impersonal : c5 

biirftet mid), I am thirsty (17 1 ) 
frciiCH, frcutc, with a., piease 



bcr fttrifcr, the emperor 

fdjoncu, fd)5ittc, with g. or a., spare 

fefjr, very, very much 

rjcigcit, rjcigtc, show 



THE PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS *7 

(£<§, it, is often used to introduce a sentence, the verb of i 
which agrees with the predicate nominative ; but used with 
another personal pronoun, e3 stands in the predicate : as, 

i. c§ War ciumat cut Siihttfl, there was once a king. 

2. c§ ttmrcu ciumat jttiei JRfiitficr, there were once two robbers. 

3. Sic jiub e3, it is you; finb Sic C§ ? is it you ? 

Exercise 12, German into English 
1. 3ft ba$ {that) $cmS ba tm ^ao,m? 2. Dtein, e3 tft nicf)t 2 
£an3. 3. Sift bit eS ntc^t, <pans ? 4. O f ©ie finb e3 f §err SDof= 
tor ! 5. 3a, ja, id) bin e3 fetbft. 6. 3d) nnb Slnna, loir marcn fjeute 
bet 3()ncn. 7. 3ft $atermd)tfjter? 8. 9tein, er aroeitete geftern 
Jeljr fcrjtrjer, l)cnte aber fdjont er fid) (himself). 9. 2)u nnb Slnna, 
fragtet i()r nad) trjnt? 10. 3a, id) nnb fie (or id) nnb bit), loir frag* 
ten nad) il)m. 11. 35ater fdjtcft btr btefert ftfife. 12. @r fdjtcft Ujn 
mir? 13. Sa, er fdjtcft i()n bir. 14. 2Jftc§ tiungert, 1 £>err Stofc 
tor, finb @te nid)t and) tjtmgrig? i5- 3a f mid) rjitngcrt unb bur* 
ftct. 1 16. gier tft SBrot, ftafe nnb ftaffee; e3 fre'ut mid) fei)r, baj] 
@ie fjier finb. 

Exercise 13, English into German 

17. You and she were (S)u nnb fie, ttjr mart) at my house. 3 
18. Yes, and you and I were at his house. 19. Did you show 
him the garden ? 20. I showed it to him, and led him into the 
house. 21. The emperor himself was at our house yesterday 
morning. 22. We showed him the house and the garden. 
23. It pleased us very much that he was here. 24. Are you 
hungry, .Anna ? 25. No, I am not hungry, but I am very 
thirsty. 26. Are Fred and Marie at your house to-day, Anna ? 
27. Yes, they are here ; it is they in the garden. 

*In common impersonal verb phrases like e§ fyimcjert mid), I am hungry, the 
subject (e§) is generally omitted when the inverted order is used (11, 1): as, 
mid) Ijungevt, I am hungry. 



18 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



VIII. THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS AND REFLEXIVE VERBS 





myself 


yourself 


himself herse 


Y itself 


G. 
D. 
A. 


metuer 

uttr 
mid) 


of myself 

to ox for myself 

myself 


bcincr 

blr 

bid) 


fciucr tfjrcr 
fid) fid) 
fid) fid) 


fciucr 

fid, 

fid) 


G. 
D. 
A. 


uufcr 

unl 

uu3 


of ourselves 

to or for ourselves 

ourselves 


cucr ^lircr 
cud) fid) 
cud) fid) 


Ujrcr Hirer 
fid) fid) 
fid) fid) 


tfjrcr 

fid) 

fid) 



Review 16, i, 2, and 6, 2. In the plural the reflexive pronouns often 
mean each other, but, to avoid ambiguity, the uninflected reciprocal pro- 
noun ciunu'bcr may be used instead : as, fie liebcu fid) (or ciuaubcr,, they 
lore each other. 

Many verbs may be used with reflexive pronouns to form idiomatic 
phrases, and are then called reflexive verbs: as, id) fdjiimc mid), / am 
ashamed; id) frfjnnttc mid), / ned: 



id) 


kliamc 


mid) 


idi 


fd)amtc 


in idi 


t>n 


idiam ft 


bid) 


bfi 


id)5 111 tc ft 


bid) 


ev 


[djffmt 


lid) 


ev 


jdidmtc 


fid) 


tutt 


fdiamcn 


unS 


WW 


idiam ten 


uii§ 


ttn- 


ichaiiit 


Clldl 


itiv 


iditimtct 


cud) 


iic 


fdiamcn 


iid) 


fie 


fdiamtCtt 


fid) 


8ic 


fdiamctt 


fid) 


3ic 


fdiamtcn 


fid)' 



Vocabulary 



ait f prep, with d. or a., on (beside), 
at: am= du bem, au*= a\i i>a$ 
auf, prep, with d. or a., on (upon; 
bdo ^enfter, the window 
bcr lifd), the table 
fid) crtiil'tcu, catch cold 



fid) frcucn, be glad, be pleased 

fid) fiirdjtcu, be afraid 

fid) irrcu, be mistaken 

fid) fefieu, sit down (seat yourself) 

fiber, prep, with d. or a., over 

Dor, prep, with d. or A., before 



THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS, ETC. 1 9 

Some reflexive verb phrases are followed either by the geni- 
tive without a preposition, or by the dative or the accusative 
with a preposition : as, 

i. id) frfjfimc mid) betncr, I am ashamed of you. 

2. tdj fdjeime mid) itber ctttm3, I am ashamed of something (the accusa- 

tive with ii&er, because ctroc3 has no genitive ending). 

3. id) fiird)te mid) uor 3'fjnen, / am afraid of you. 

Exercise 14, German into English 

1. 3d) unb ytnna (ieben un3 (or einanber), SOcarte unb ©lifa* 
betr) (teben fict) (or einanber). 2. 9Iber bit unb SSiftjetm, liebt ifjr 
end) (or etnanber)? 3- Set, unb totr arbeiten, aber §anS unb grig 
arbeiten ntdjt unb freuen fid) baruber. 1 4. Scrjcimft bit bid) ttjrer, 
Stutter? 5- 9xetn, 2(nna, id) fdjame mid) attest tfyrer, fonbern 
meiner fel&ft. 6. gitrcrjten ©te fid) Dor §an3, graufein ? 7. 9 can, 
id) fi'trcfjte mid) nicfjt t)or ifym. 2 8. 23o tft $ater? 8e§t er fid) 
bor bag geuer ? 2 9- St raar am genfter, 2 jegt aber fegt er fid) 
an ben £tfdj. 10. ^rrft bu btcr) nictjt ? 2$tlr)elm fegt fid) auf 
bm Xtfcfj, aber $ater tft ant geuer. 2 11. greuft bu bid) itber 
ba$ S3ud) f 9Jcarie? 12. ^cfj freue mid) fefjr baruber. 1 

Exercise 15, English into German 

13. You are mistaken, Fred. 14. Yes, I am mistaken ; they 
love each other. 15. Was she not afraid of him ? 16. She 
was afraid of him. 17. But now she is not afraid of him. 
18. Were you ashamed of him ? 19. Yes, I was ashamed of 
him and of her. 20. They do not work and they are not 
ashamed of it (baruber). 21. Where are father and mother? 
Are they catching cold ? 22. They sat down at the fire, but 
now mother is working at the window. 

1 barU'ber over it, at it. 2 The dative with a preposition generally expresses 
the place where ox from which ; the accusative, the place whither. 



20 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

IX. ^eitt, (gilt, AND THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES 

I ®etrt, em, and the possessive adjectives are inflected like btcfer 
• (8, 2), except that the nominative singular masculine and neu- 
ter and the accusative singular neuter have no case endings, 
and are called defective : l 







Masculine 


Feminine 


Neuter 






N. 


fein 


fcinc 


fein 


720 


Singular 


G. 
D. 


feincc* 
fcincm 


fcincr 
fcincr 


fcinctf 
fcincm 


of no 

to ox for no 




A. 


feincit 


fcuic 


fein 


no 




N. 


feme 


fcinc 


fcinc 


no 


Plural 


G. 


fcincr 


fcincr 


fcincr 


of no 


D. 


feinen 


fcinc it 


fcincn 


to ox for no 




A. 


fcinc 


fcinc 


fcinc 


no 



2 When the meaning is clear, the definite article (10, 1) is often used 
instead of a possessive adjective, and is sometimes accompanied by the 
dative of the person affected : as, 

i . 3tc brcdicit nttr t>cn Stmt, you arc breaking my arm. 



Vocabulary 

fein, fcinc, fctn, no 1 
cut, cine, cut, a, an (no plural) 1 
mciu, mcinc, incut, my 1 
bctn, bcinc, t>ciu, t/hy, your, in 
familiar address to one person 1 
fctn, fcinc, fctn, his, its 1 
tf)r, tfire, tfjr, Jicr 1 
unfer, nnfrc,- unfer, our 1 



ener, enre, 2 ener, your, in familiar 
address to two or more persons 1 

thr, II) re, tf)r, their* 

^Ijr, ^sl)rc, ^sl)r, your, in formal 
address to two or more persons 
or to one person 1 

bcr ^yrcunb, the friend 

baz 3i mmcr r the room 



1 -Hcin, ein, etc. are inflected alike and may be called fetn-words (cf. io 1 ) 
- When a stem ends in el, en, or er, the e of the ending is commonly dropped 
if possible ; otherwise, the e of the stem : as, unierm, cuern, imfre. 



THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES 21 

Exercise 16, German into English 

i. 2Bar 3 live £odjter Metric geftera gu §aufe? 2. jftetn, fie 
tear bei ifjrer 3dju>cfter 9(nua. 3- 3lber vjeute ift fie 511 .sSauje, 
unb ilyre 2cl)iuefter ift bet ilir. 4. SSann gefjt itire ©tfjtoeftet 
2(nna nad) §aufe? 5- 9)taric, fragc 1 betne 3d)iuefter 2(nna, 
to cum fie nad) £)aufe gefjt! 6. 5ie gef)t morgen ntit meinem 
23ruber nad) §aufe. 7- 3ft t()r SBruber &1110 in ber Srfntle? 
8. 3a, er ift in ber Sdjule mit feiner 2diraefter (Eiifabeti). 9. Ito 
fer §an<§ ift ftein, bod) {still) (ernt er tt>a3 in ber Sdinle. 
10. <pat er feinen SBruber? 11. 3a, er r)at einen 23ruber, %d% 
ift fetn Q^ruber. 12. 3ft grt| bet feinem s l^atcr? 13- 9tein, er 
ift rjier, er ift in meinem 3tntmer. 14. Unfer «&au£ ift ftein, unb 
dearie tnorjnt 6et unfrer Socrjter 2lnna. 15. §ier finb |)anS unb 
grit? ; too ift bein $ater, !Qan$ ? 16. (gilt 1 in ben ©artett, §an§ 
unb grit}, unb fudjt 1 euern $ater! 17. ©efjen 2ie 2 in 3rjr 
^intmer, grdulein! better ift fdjon ba. 18. 3ft euer greunb 
5Si(f)etm 6ei eucfj ? 19. 9tein, er ift nidjt t)ier, er ift bet feiner 
Gutter. 

Exercise 17, English into German 

20. Have you water in your room, Fred? 21. I have no 
water in my room, and no table. 22. Your table is in our 
room. 23. Elizabeth, does your brother Jack go to school ? 

24. Yes, he goes to school, and lives at our sister Anna's. 

25. Where is your sister Anna to-day? 26. She is at our 
father's. 27. His brother is there in the garden. 28. Does 
he have a room at your house ? 29. No, he lives at his 
daughter's. 30. Ask 1 my brother when he is going home. 

1 Familiar imperative, formed by adding c (singular), (e)t (plural) to the stem ; 
the subject (bll, ihr, 6, 2) is unexpressed unless emphatic: as, frage ! ask. 

2 Formal imperative, formed by adding cit to the stem. The subject, <StC 
(6, 2), is always expressed and stands after the verb: as, gctjClt 3ie ! go. 



22 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

X. THE PRESENT AND THE PAST INDICATIVE OF 
STRONG VERBS 

The past indicative of strong verbs is not formed by add- 
ing te or etc to the stem (as in weak verbs, 14, 1), but merely 
by changing the stem vowel, as in English : as, 



Present Infinitive 


Past Indicative 






ftng-en (stem ftng) 


fang 




sing 


ftnb-ert (stem ftttb) 


fanb 




Jind 


fd)leid)-en (stem fdjlctcf)) 


fdiltd) 




sneak, creep 


fdncib-en (stem fdjrcib) 


fdiricb 




write 


fomm-ctt (stem fomm) 


fain (for 


famm) 


come 







Present ( 1 


!, 




Past (14, 


») 


id) 


fmge 


fin be 


famine 


fang 


fanb 


tarn 


bit 


fingft 


pnbefl 


to 111 111 ft 


fangft 


fanbeft 


fa 111 ft 


ev 


fingt 


fill DC t 


foiitint 


fang 


fanb 


fain 


tott 


fhtgen 


fmben 


fomntcn 


fa 11a, en 


fan ben 


tauten 


t bi- 


jtngt 


t'inbet 


f 0111111 t 


[angt 


faubct 


faint 


fie 


fiitacn 


[in ben 


fomiiicn 


[angen 


fanben 


fantcn 


Sie 


fhtgen 


finocn 


fomntcn 


fangen 


fa it ben 


faincn 



3 In the past indicative the third person singular is like the first and 

has no personal ending. 



Vocabulary 



aUctn', alone 

ulctben, bltcb, remain, stay 

bcr $rtcf, the letter 

bcr %\\\% the river 

gut, good; bcffcr f better 

Ijeificu, f)tc£, be called: tote fictiit 
er? what is his name? er hcitft 
&axl r his name is Charles 



fpringen, fprang, spring 

trtttfett, trattf, drink 

gef)(C)n (irregulan, gutg, go: tote 
gcht l§ 3& ncn ? h° w do yon do t 
(how goes it for you ?; C3 gef)t 
tntr gtit, / am well 

ftften (irregular), ffijj, sit 

frch e it irregular), ftonb, stand 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD 2 7, 

Exercise 18, German into English 

i. STne t}c()t e3 Oliver Gutter rjeute aoenb, grdulein? 2. Sdj 
jbanfe 3t)tten, A>crr £)oftor, e3 gef)t ifjr beffcr. 3- 3ie fint am gener 

unb trin ft i)cildj. 4. ?(ber gefterrt gtng e£ ifjr mcrjt gut. 5- ©eftent 
morgen gtng mem SBruber SBUrjelm nad) ber &trd)e. 6. ^or 
ber Sltrdje faub er fetnett greimb Star! ©dmubt. 7- Star! fragte 
SSt(()elm: „2$ann fommt $ater nacl) §aufe?" 8. 2£ilrjefm ant* 
tuortcte: „(St fommt ntdjt Iieute, fonbern morgen abenb." 9. 23tl* 
|elm fiitjrte Star! in jeucu ©arten uub fprang iu ben gtug. 
10. SOcetne Gutter faf] am genfter, §err £)oftor, uub fitrdjtete 
fid) fef)i\ 11. ©ie je^te ftcfj an ben Siftf) uub fcfjried ifyrem 
^ater etnen 23rtef. 12. 2(6er SBtlrjelm uub $arl olteben ntcfjt 
lange ba, fonbern fdjlidjen in3 $)av&. i3« 3d) ging tn<§ ,3ims 
mer uub fanb Gutter fefir franf. 14. 3d) Mteb lange bet if)r. 
15- 3d) bletbe (n 1 ) rjeute, grduletn; gerjen ©te (21 2 ) 511 3fyrer 
(Sdjmefter ! 16. 2)a lommt metn timber 2Bt(f)elm. 17- 2SUrje(m, 
bletbe (21 1 ) fjeute bet Gutter ! 3d) gelje ju ©djtoefter tota. 

Exercise 19, English into German 

18. William, what is your friend's name ? 19. His name is 
Charles. 20. How is he to-day ? 21. He is well, Miss Smith. 
22. Did he stay at your house last night ? 23. Yes, he was 
here last night, and he stays at our house to-day. 24. Yester- 
day he went into the garden and sprang into the river. 25. He 
found the water cold. 26. He did not remain there long, but 
crept into my room. 27. Did he write his sister a letter ? 
28. No, he sat at the fire a long time, but he wrote her no 
letter. 29. When is he going to his sister's? 30. To- 
night; and he stays at her house till to-morrow. 31. There 
sits Charles in the garden. 32. Charles, stay (21 1 ) with me 
to-day ; Miss Smith is going home. 



24 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XI. THE PRESENT AND TEE PAST INDICATIVE OF 3Sctbctt 



Pre 


sent (12, i) 


Past (14, 2) 


id) toerbe 


/ become, etc. 


id) 


luiirbC / became, etc. 


bfl tDtrft 


//ww becomest, etc. 


bfi 


iDurbcft //W becamest, etc. 


er ttrirb 


/^ becomes, etc. 


er 


luurbc /^ became, etc. 


lutr ttJerbett 


2£><? become, etc. 


111 IV 


luuvbcn W6' became, etc. 


tt)r tuerbet 


_y^ become, etc. 


tin- 


luiivbct j'f became, etc. 


fie merbett 


///<?y become, etc. 


fie 


iinivbctt ///6j became, etc. 


®te luerbett 


_>/0« become, etc. 


2ic 


ltutvbCtt j/0# became, etc. 



2 In the present indicative the stem vowel c is changed to i in the 
second and third persons singular (as in some other strong verbs, 72, 3). 
In the second person singular b is dropped, and in the third person there 
is no personal ending. 

3 The past indicative is formed by changing the stem vowel (22, 1) and 
adding the personal ending c (cf. 22, 3). In the singular the forms id) 
nmvb, bfi Wiirbft, er uinrb are now poetic ; but in compound forms they 
occur sometimes in prose : as, bcr finite ftarb uub nmrb begra'ben, the poor 
ma J! died and was buried. 



Vocabulary 



ttl§, when, introducing a subordi- 
nate clause (12,3) expressing a 
single act in past time 

mcitit, whenever^ introducing a sub- 
ordinate clause (12, 3) expressing 
repeated action in any time ; if 
e\'cr. if 

bo* @t§, the ice 

frcunbltri), friendly 

MU'frcuublitf), unfriendly [against 

gegen, prep, with a., toward^ 



^ofinun', John 

ntiibc, tired ; with G. or A., tired of 

tic 3acf)C, the tiling, the affair 

bcr 3d]ucc, the snow 

fri)5n f beautiful, pretty 

Weil, because, introducing a subor- 
dinate clause (12,3) 

bic $t>cft, the world 

merben, become, get : werben an*, 
become of; tuerben ,>>u, turn to 

ttJtcbcr, again 



THE IXDIC ATI VE MOOD 2$ 

Exercise 20, German into English 

1. 3e|t if t e3 SBtnter, unb ikvo SSaffer nrirb gu Sdjttee nnb 311 
Gic; ! 2. 3m SSinter, benn c$ fait mirb, gcljt es meinem SSater 
oie( {muck) 6effer. 3« SDtir felbft gefyt e3 beffer im Sommer, toenn 
t£ toieber fyetfj rotrb. 4- 5((y id) franf tear, iDitrbe bie SSelt 2 fait 
unb unframbltd) gegen mid). 5- 2)te SSelt uutrbc fait gegen bid), 
(iiifabetl), luctl bu unfreunb(id) gegen fie (it) marft. 6. SBcntt 
bu felbft freunbfid) gegen bie 28e(t roirft, mirb fie 1 arieber marm 
unb fdjon. 7- $fa3 bir nrirb nid)t3, menu bu unfreunbfid) unb 
fait btft. 8. SSurbe bein greunb Sotjann auct) {also) fait gegen 
bid), (Htfabetf) ? 9. (£r tourbe fef)r unfreunblid) gegen mid) unb 
bid). 10. <peute ift er felbft franf, er murbe geftern franf, a(3 
er an* ber 8d)ufe fam. 11. SSemt e3 mieber Summer ift, 
tDtrb er 1 franf. 12. Gsr ift ber ©d)ule fdjon (ange miibe, unb 
menu e3 fjeif} ift, nrirb er 1 aud) ber SSelt miibe. 13- 3a, ja, bu 
unb er, il)r merbet aft! 14. SSerbet (21 1 ) mieber jung, unb bleibt 
jung tm (Sommer unb im SBtnter ! 

Exercise 21, English into German 

15. Now it is getting summer again, Anna, and you are 
better when it is warm. 16. But I am getting tired of the 
affair. 17. Yes, but John became unfriendly to you because 
you were cold to him and to his brother. 18. They are now 
becoming friendly again to us. 19. When you are ill, the 
world becomes 1 cold and unfriendly to you. 20. It becomes 
cold to you because you yourself are cold to it. 21. How 
are you to-day ? Are you getting better ? 22. I am getting 
better, but I have been ill a long time (13, 1). 23. I was not 
at home when you became ill. 24. I am very glad (id) freue 
mid) fefjr) that you are getting better. 

1 The inverted order; for an entire clause precedes the subject (n, i). 



26 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXL THE PERFECT AND THE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE OF 
WEAK VERBS 

The principal parts of a verb are the present infinitive, the 
past indicative, and the past participle, as in English. The 
past participle of weak verbs is formed from the stem by pre- 
fixing ge (denoting completion) and adding t or et : as, 



Present Infinitive 

fag-en (stem fag) 

off n-en (stem off it) 

anfmort-en (stem antniorr) 

I)ab-cn (stem Ijab; 



Past Indicative 

fag-te 
offn-ete 
anfroort-ete 
fjfft-te (for liah-to 



Past Participle 

ge-fag-tf say 

ge-offn-et open 

ge-anftoort-ei answer 

gc-f)fib-f nave 



2 The perfect and the pluperfect of most verbs are inflected 
as in English, by using the tense auxiliary IjaOcn, have : as, id) 
[)nOc flcfdflt, I said, I have said, or I have been saying ; irf) fyattc 
gefagt, / had said or / had been saying: 



Perfect 


Pluperfect 


id) 


babe 


gefagf 


id) 


hattc gefagf 


iui 


haft 


gefagf 


bu- 


battcft gefagf 


er 


llilt 


gefagf 


tt 


hattc geffigf 


nur 


ha ben 


gefagf 


nur 


hdttcn gefagf 


tin- 


babt 


gefagf 


ftir 


hditct gefagf 


fie 


ha hen 


gefagf 


fie 


fatten gefagf 


3ie 


ha ben 


gefagf 


2ie 


fatten gefagf 



Vocabulary 



bann, then; janJofjl' , yes indeed 
^eturid), Henry j &ein,5, Harry 
Ijolcu, fjoltc, gefjoft, fetch 
floyfcn, flopfte, gcfloaft, knock 
legeu, legtc, geiegt, lay, put 



ftcllcit, ftclltc, gcftctlt, place, put 

bic £ib(e), //^ door 

marten, roartctc, gcroartct, wait: 

marten anf, with a., wait for 
roer, who? 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD 2J 

In questions or statements not in narrative or description 
(14, 2) the perfect is used like the English past. As a rule, 
the participle stands at the end of its clause, but in a sub- 
ordinate clause it stands before the auxiliary verb : as, 

1. wcr f)at bie %\\x rjcuffuct ? who opened the door? 

2. itf) fragc, wcr bie %'\\x tjciiffitct fjat, / ask who opened the door. 

Exercise 22, German into English 

1. 2Ser fjat an bie %vx geflopft, SDtarie? 2. Sfyce Gutter fiat 
geffopft. 3- |)ctt fie ba$ genfter geoffnet ? 4. Deem, a6er id) f)a6e 
e$ geoffnet. 5- ©aft bit and) btefen X\)d) an§ genfter geftellt? 
6. graulein W arte Ij at i()n baran x geftcllt. 7. ©te §at mit beinem 
SBruber gefpielt. 8. 3a, ratr fyaben lange mit tfjm gefpielt. 9. §at 
fceinridj ben 33rtef getjolt ? 10. (£r Ijat tl)n fjeute morgen gefyolt 
unb auf ben £tfd) gelegt. 11. 2So mar ©ein^ geftern? .patte er 
ntdjt auf mid) gemartet? 12. 3araof)[ r er fjatte fefjr lange auf 
bid) gemartet. 13- £>ater Ijat ©ein^ nadj §aufe gu Gutter 
gefd)tdt. 14. Gsr f)atte nad) feiner EOcutter gefragt ! 15. 3a, er 
tjatte nad) tijr gefragt. 16. 3d) tjabe geanttuortet, baJ3 fie $u ©aufe 
bet 3f)nen tft. 

Exercise 23, English into German 

17. Have you waited long for us ? 18. No, we have not 
waited long. 19. Did you knock on the window? 20. No, 
but Henry knocked at the door. 21. Did Henry have my 
book with him (bet fid)) ? 22. Yes ; he laid it on that table. 
23. Who put this table at the door ? 24. I put it (ifjn) at the 
door, but I did not open the door. 25. Did you not play in 
the garden ? 26. We did not play ; I sent Harry home to his 
sister. 27. I sent him home because she had been asking 
for him. 28. He did not wait for his brother Charles. 
1 baran', on it, at it. 



28 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XIII. THE PERFECT AND THE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE OF 
STRONG VERBS 

I The past participle of strong verbs is formed from the stem 
by prefixing gc (denoting completion) and adding cu, the stem 
vowel often being changed (as in English) : as, 



Present Infinitive Past Indicative 


Past Participle 




ftng-en (stem fmg) 


jong 


ge-fung'-en 


sing 


finb-en (stem finb) 


fa nb 


nc-iun'b-cn 


find 


jdncib-en (stem frfjrcib) 


idiricb 


nc-idnic'b-cn 


w?'ite 


trtnf-en (stem truth 


tvnnf 


ge-tntnf'-cn 


drink 


jlfe-en (stem \\\\, irregular) 


inn 


nc-ici'i -en 


sit 


fteij-(e)n (stem ftcl), irregular) 


it n nb 


gc-itmi'b-en 


stand 





Perfect 






Pluperfect ( 


26, 2) 


id) 


lid be 


gefung'en 


icb 


badte 


gefung'en 


ba 


haft 


gefung'en 


bu 


hiittcft 


gefung'en 


Of 


bat 


gefung'en 


er 


lnittc 


gefung'en 


rofr 


babe it 


gefung'en 


11UV 


batten 


gefung'en 


ibr 


habt 


gefung'en 


ibr 


battct 


gefung'en 


fie 


babe ll 


gefung'en 


[ie 


batten 


gefung'en 


2ie 


baben 


gefung'en 


5ie 


batten 


gefung'en 



Vocabulary 



Inffcit, ftefj, gelfiffcn, let. leave 
frillnfcu, friiltcf, gefdjlofen, sleep 
friilagcn, ftfjtug, flcirtilagcn, strike^ beat 
tragen, trftg, getragen, carry 
geben, gab, gegeben, give 
lefcit, la*, gclcfcu, read 
fcfjcit, fat), gefefjen, see 
beificn, btf? f gebiffen, bite 
bredjen, bratf), gebrdtfjcit, break 



bclfcn, ba(f, n^bolfcn, with d., help 
ttetjnten, iiafjm, flcnommcn (irregu- 
lar), take; with n., take from 
fprctfjen, iprad), gcfprorfien, speak 
tun, tat, gctan', irregular, do 
rcrfjt, right : rcd)t gut, very well 
bcr finger, the finger 
fcer .§unb, the dog 
ber Otiitg, the ring; me, never 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD 29 

After verbs meaning take, the dative expresses the object 1 
from which the person or the thing is taken : as, 

1. Ijat cr Mr beinett fcnnb flcnommcu ? did he take your dog from you t 

2. ja, cr f)at iljlt mir jicnommcn, yes, he took him from me. 

Exercise 24, German into English 

1. Seirt ^ater ()at mid) in jeinem 3 ulimcr a ^' m getaffett. 2 
2. .ftabcn 2ie gut gcjd)(afen? 3- 3d) banfe btr, id) l)abe red)t gnt 
gejdjlafen. 4. 23a3 f)aben <Ste f)eute moreen getan ? 5- 3d) l)abe 
bie* 53ud) gcfefen, beine ^cutter ijat e£ mir gcgeben. 6.* <paben Sie 
metnen timber grt| gefefjen? 7- 3a, ja, id) ()abe i()it geferjen. 
8. 2So rjabert 8ie if)n gejebjen ? 9- 3d) I^abe irjn bjeute morgen im 
(Garten gcje()en. 10. 5l6er bte bjeute fjatte id) tfut nie gefeften. 
11. 3d) habt and) beine @d)roe(ter tm (Garten gefeften, ate ber 
§nnb anS bem §anfe in ben ©arten jprang unb fie big. 12. §a* 
ben ©ie ben £umb gefd)lagen? 13. 3a, .id) ()abe tfjn gefd)(agen 
unb beine ©djroefter inS §au3 gctragen, beine Gutter ftat mir ge= 
rjolfen. 14. Seine ©djtuefter t)atte einen Dting am ginger gebjabt, 
bein Q3rnbcr Slart fjatte tftn it)r genommen. 

Exercise 25, English into German 

15. Did mother leave you alone in her room, Charles ? 3 
16. No, she left us with (Bet) your brother. 17. Did you not 
see father ? 18. We saw him this morning in the garden. 
19. Have you never seen my sister ? 20. Not till this morn- 
ing ; but how did she break her arm ? 21. A dog bit it (i()it) 
and broke it. 22. My brother beat the dog, and I helped him. 
23. Who carried her into the house ? 24. Doctor Smith and 
I carried her into the house. 25. We carried her into your 
room. 26. Did you find my book ? 27. Yes, and I gave it 
to your sister. 28. She has been reading it. 29. Have you 
not seen the doctor ? 



30 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XIV. THE PERFECT AND THE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE OF' 
VERBS INFLECTED WITH Seitt 

Many verbs have the perfect and the pluperfect inflected 
with the auxiliary fcht (not (ja6ert, 26, 2). These verbs are 
feht, tocrbcn, and blctOcn;and intransitive verbs (or their com- 
pounds) that denote change of position or of condition p- as, 

1. cr ift 511 -franfe gcbltcbcn, he remained at home. 

2. fie ift ins Gaffer gcfallcn, she fell into the water. 



Perfect 


Pluperfect 


id) 


bin 


gefotgf I followed. 


id) luai' gefunfen I had sunk, 


hi 


luff 


gefolgt' etc. (26, 2) 


bu roarft gefunfen etc. (26, 2) 


er 


i\t 


gcfolgf 


er toar gefimfen 


loir 


uni) 


gefotgf 


toil waxen gefurtfen 


tin- 


feib 


gefotgf 


tin- mart gefimfen 


fie 


jinb 


gefotgf 


fie woven gefimfen 


3 ic 


jinb 


gefolgt' 


Sie luarcn gefunfen 



3 A few intransitive verbs denoting change of position are inflected with 

Ijabcn when used without reference to the starting painty the direction, or 
the stopping point of the motion : as, 

1. bu tjnft Diet gcrctft, you have traveled much. 



fcht, war, ift geroefen, fe 
Werben, tuitrbc, ift gciudrbcn, become 
Olctbcn, blicb, ift gcbltcbcn, remain 
etlcn, Ctlte, ift gecttt, hasten, hurry 
folgcn, folgte, ift gefolgt, with d., 

follow 
retfen, rcifte, ift gcrctft, travel 

1 Cf. the French "il est parti 



Vocabulary 

faljrcn, fftfjr, ift gefafjren, drive, 

ride, go 
fallen, ficl, ift gcfallcn, fall 
gel) c it, gtitg, ift gegangen, go 
funtntcn, fain, ift gefommen, come 
finfen, fant, ift gefunten, sink 
iudd)fcn, wild)*, ift geamefjfen, grow 

and the English " he is gone." 



te 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD 3 I 

Exercise 26, German into English 

1. 33o tft metrt $ater, grduleut? 3ft er geftern bet 3f)nen ge= 
mcfen? 2. (£r mar bet tm£, aber er if t niiibe getoorben unb nacl) 
fcaufe gefabrcn. 3. 3ft er attcin gefafjren? 4. 9iein, er tft mit 
Marl in ttnfcrm SSagen gefa()ren. 5. lint) if t meine Gutter audi 
bier gemefen? 6. Seine flutter tft bet 5(nna gemefen, aber fie ift 
beinem $8ater gefotgt unb nacl) £)aufe gegangen. 7. SSann tft fie 
gegangen? 8. Sie tft geftern abenb mit meincr ©djmefter gegan= 
gen. 9. 3ft 3l)r 23ruber (ange bet 3f)uen gemefen? 10. 9tein, 
nur b\§ beute tft er gebtieben. 11. St ift jegt nad) £>aufe geetlt, 
toetf mir morgen 511 ibm gebjert. 12. 3d) unb meine (Scrjmcfter 
tjaben nie gereift, unb 33ruber gri£ §at ntd)t fcnel gereift. 13. Seib 
if)r ntdjt 511 euerm S3ruber gereift? 14. 2£ir finb nie §11 ibm ge- 
reift. 15. 333er ift an ber £itr? 3t)r 23ruber «&ait£? 3Bte ift er 
gcmadifen! 16. (Sr ift fetjr gemadjfen, ift aber bod) flein ; bieibe 
(2 1 1 ) bet un§, §amo! 17. ©eftent abenb, a (3 er im (Garten mar, 
tft er in§ SSaffer gefallen unb gefunfen. 18. 2)ein 23vuber mar 
tf)m gefotgt unb fyrang tnS SBaffer ibjtn ju |)t(fe (to his aid). 

Exercise 27, English into German 

19. Where was your brother yesterday ? 20. He was at 
Anna's, but last night he came home. 21. He had never 
been at Anna's. 22. To-day he has been at home, but to-night 
he has gone to my brother's. 23. Did his friend go with him ? 
24. Yes, he went with him. 25. Elizabeth did not go because 
she had become ill. 26. She has never traveled much ; she 
has never been at her brother's. 27. Yesterday she fell into 
the water and has become very ill. 28. She is in her room 
to-day, and father and mother have remained a long time with 
(bei) her. 29. They have now gone home with Charles. 
30. He came yesterday and stayed until this morning. 



32 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XV. THE FUTURE AND THE FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE 

The future of a verb is formed by adding its present infini- 
tive to the present indicative of lucrbcn ; the future perfect, by- 
adding its perfect infinitive : as, 



Future Indicative 


Future Perfect Indicative 




id) trjerbe ftigcit 


id) trjerbe gcfngr' fjabcn (26, 2) 


say 


id) toerbe 1) alien 


idi ttjcrbe ncljalif fjalicn " 


have 


id) trjerbe fingett 


idi tDcrbe gcfuttg'cn IjfiOcn " 


sing 


id) tcerbe fcin 


idi tuerbe gcmcfcn fcin (30, 1) 


be 


idi roerbe wcrbcn 


id) tnerbe gcwor'bcn fcin " 


become 


idi toerbe fiitfen 


idi tnerbe gcfnnf'cn fcin " 


sink 



2 ^\d) toerbe jiiflcn, / shall say or I shall be saying; id) uierbe 
(tcjltufcit fcin, / shall have sunk or I shall have been sinking: 



Future 


Future Perfect 


id) 


tnerbe 


[agen 


id) 


tuerbe gefunFen 


join 


bu 


llHl'ft 


[agen 


bu 


luirft gefunFen 


fcin 


er 


tntrb 


[agen 


er 


tirirb gefunFen 


fcin 


tr»tr 


ttjerbctt 


[agen 


toil 


tuerbcti gefunfen 


fcin 


tl)V 


toerbet 


[agen 


i Di- 


merbet gefunfen 


fcin 


lie 


luevbcn 


[agen 


iic 


roerben gefunfen 


fcin 


3ic 


luevbcn 


iaoicn 


5tc 


roerben gefunfen 


fcin 



Vocabulary 



ornuriicn, urnutfitc, gcbraurfit, need 
glnnbcu, glnubtc, gcglnttbr, believe 
faufen, fnnftc, gefauff, buy 
ladicn, hidjtc, gelrtcf)t, laugh : (adjen 

fiber, with a., laugh at 
lad)cln, tad)cltc, gctacficlr, smile: 

ladjcln fiber, with a., smile at 



fmtfett, lief, ift gefnufen, run 

balb, soon j bod), still \ surely ', 1 hope 

)o, soy often used to sum up a 
clause, and then not to be trans- 
lated 
tobi\i, perhaps, probably, I suppose 
ttJoru'bcr, over what? at what t 



THE INDICA TIVE MOOD 3 3 

The future is often used to express a supposition or a prob- I 
ability in present time ; the future perfect, in past time. Em- 
phasis is given by adding U)of)( or bocf) : as, 

i. bic3 Joirb tt)of)( bctn 2>ruber fctit, I suppose this is you?- brother. 
2. cr roirb bit* Qau§ botf) gcfauft (jaf«cit r he has surely bought the house, 
I hope he has bought the house. 

Exercise 28, German into English 

1. 3d) toerbe unfertt greimb Rati halo fefjen, oraudjt er etn)a§? 2 
2. SEcmn roerben ©ie il)it fefjen? 3- SJtorgert abenb; loirb er 
morgen fritf) 511 3f)tten fommen ? 28orii6er latfjett @ie ? 4- ftfcer 
Sic! Unfer gretmb tft }e§t jcrjort bet rair! 5. <£ie toerben 
i()ii bod) nicrjt gefcfjen fjaben! 6. Satoof)!, unb roemt totr ntdjt 
ins Ii beater gerjen, fo ratrb er itber un§ ladjen. 7. 3d) toerbe 
mid) fdjdmen, toenn er itber mid) (ad)t. 8. SBerben ©ie [id) 
Dor ifjm fitrdjten? 9. 9cetn, unb id) toerbe ntdjt gtauben, baf$ 
er itber mid) tad)en totrb. 10. SOcetne 6d)toefter totrb and) fjeute 
abenb fjter fein, fie tft geftem nad) §aufe gefafjren. 11. SSernt 
fie fjeute tm§ Xrjeater gef)t, fo toirb fie fefjr mitbe toerben. 12. 3d) 
gtaube, fie toirb gu §aufe btetben. 

Exercise 29, English into German 

13. Shall you see my father ? 14. Yes, and my brother 3 
will see him. 15. Will Charles laugh at me if I stay at home ? 
16. I do not believe he will laugh at you. 17. When will 
your brother come home ? 18. He will drive home to-morrow 
night. 19. If we go into the garden, we shall find mother. 
20. If she stays in the garden, she will catch cold. 21. When 
will she go to your brother's ? 22. She will go to-night, and 
I shall go with her. 23. I suppose this is your mother. 
24. Yes, it is she (17, 1). 25. Mother, you will catch cold if 
you stay here. 26. If you catch cold, you will become ill. 



34 



A GERM A A' GRAMMAR 



XVI. NOUNS: CLASS I, STRONG (152, 1, 154, 155) 
Masculine : Most nouns ending in unaccented el, en, cr ; 
ber $dfe, cheese. 

Feminine: bie Gutter, mother, bic Sodjtcr, daughter. 
Neuter: Some nouns ending in unaccented el, en (includ- 
ing all infinitives used as nouns), er ; all diminutive nouns end- 
ing in djcn, fcin ; most nouns of the form ®c — c. 

In the plural, a, 0, u are modified (3, 2) in bie flutter, bie Xodjtcr, W 
JUdftcr, and about twenty masculines (155. 3). 

Feminine nouns of all classes remain unchanged in the singular ; in 
the dative plural all nouns end in it. 



this wagon 


the 


mother 


the painting 


tin 


)M))1C 


b icier SBagen 


bic 


SKuttcr 


bntf ©emcU'be 


bcr 


92&me(n) x 


bieictf 2Bagen3 


bcr 


SKutter 


bcc< ©emat'beS 


bed 


SRamenS 


bieicm SBagen 


bcr 


abutter 


bent ©emsl'be 


bem 


92 amen 


biefeti SSagen 


Die 


2Kuttet 


Dac< ©emaTbe 


bCU 


teamen 


biefe 2Sagen 


bic 


2Riittet 


bic ©emal'be 


bic 


v Ji aincit 


biefe* SSagen 


bcr 


aJKittcr 


bcr ©emal'be 


bcr 


^1 a 111 en 


biefeti SSagert 


ben 


3Riitterti 


ben ©emal'betl 


bClt 


Xiamen 


biefe SBagen 


bic 


v J3i ii iter 


bic ©emaTbe 


bic 


Dtfamen 



bet 


Wiener 


bie Xtcncr 


servant 


bie Xorfitcr 


bie Xorf)tcr 


daughter 


ber 


.<onitfc(U) 


bie <\?aufcn 


heap 


bfi3 Staffer 


bic JUSftcr 


cloister 


bet 


t'cljrcr 


bie iiclircr 


teacher 


ber ^Ipfct 


Die s l(pfcl 


apple 


bet 


Cnfcl 


bie Citfcl 


it tide 


ber Srnbet 


bie ^rfibcr 


brother 


Dae 


gfettftet 


bie e^ettftex 


window 


ber ©arrcu 


bie C^drtcu 


garden 


b&e 


^cr§ 2 


bie .N>cncn 


heart 


ber Cfcn 


bie Cfcn 


stove 


bSe 


^teffer 


Die 3Reffer 


knife 


ber Sgfiter 


Die i>Stcr 


father 


bag 


better 


bie ^Setter 


weather 


ber $oge( 


bie 33ogel 


bird 



!The nominative without n is preferable (155, 4). 

2 Irregular in the singular: Dae £er,, bee £er$ene, bem fcerjen, bae $er$i 



tfOUNS: CLASS /, STRONG 35 

Exercise 30, German into English 

1. gct&ett Sic Starts Dnfel gefefjen? Gsr teat im (SJarten mit i 
unferm Sefjrer unb nnfern Q3riibern. 2. §8on ben genftern meine3 
Qimmer<o fefje id) ben (Sarten. 3. 2(bcr id) tjabe feinen Dnfet 
iiicijt gefefyen, cr ift nidjt au3 bent (Garten gefommen. 4. 3Bo finb 
bie £od)ter meine3 SefyrcrS? 5. §eute morgen roaren fie im 
SUofter. 6. SSenn ba3 ^Better fcfjon tft, roerben fie balb mit 
bem SDiener l)ier fein. 7- §oren ©ie bie S8ogel in unferm ©ai> 
ten? 8. 3cmjof)l, ba$ §erg flopft mtr, menn id) fie Ijore. 
9. SSenn @te mit mir in ben (Garten getyen, fo roerben roir bie 
SSijgel fefjen. 10. SSir roerben and) 5lpfe( finben. 11. £ner 
finb bie Spfel in §aufen, fyaben (Sie ein Sfteffer bet fid) ? 12. 3d) 
f)a6e ()ente fein SD^effer bd mtr, meine iDceffer finb in mcinem 
dimmer. 13. 9?ef)tnen @ie mein SD^effer ! 14. SDtefe Spfel finb 
fcfjim ! 15- 23ir fjaben feme $lpfel ^n §aufe unb feinen (Partem 
16. £>, rote fdjon tft ber Hftorgen ! 3Bie fcfjim fingen bie $#gel ! 

Exercise 31, English into German 
17. I did not see William's teacher yesterday, and I shall 2 
not see him. 18. Who is his teacher? 19. My uncle John; 
he is the brother of my mother. 20. There he is in the car- 
riage with my father. 21. Did you hear the birds this morn- 
ing ? 22. I opened my window, but I did not hear them. 
23. You will hear them to-morrow morning if the weather is 
fine (fd)on). 24. Here is the servant with apples ; here is a 
knife. 25. Have you seen the paintings in the cloister ? 

26. Yes indeed, the paintings are old and very beautiful. 

27. How small the rooms of this cloister are ! 28. They are 
small and cold, they have no stoves. 29. How beautiful the 
windows are ! 

Inflect "my window," "his daughter," "your cloister," "your gar- 3 
den," " our brother," " her bird," " their heart," and " his knife." 



36 



A GERMANY GRAMMAR 



XVII. NOUNS: CLASS II, STRONG (152,1, 154, 156) 
Masculine : Most nouns of one syllable ; all nouns ending 
in id), tg, ling; many nouns, mostly of foreign origin, ending 
in l r it, x f t r and accented on the last syllable. 

Feminine: About 35 nouns of one syllable; all nouns end- 
ing in funft ; some nouns ending in ttUf, jrtl. 

Neuter : About 60 nouns of one syllable ; most nouns end- 
ing in nig, fal ; many nouns of foreign origin (not denoting 
persons), ending in 1, n, r, t, and accented on the last syllable. 

Most nouns of one syllable have a, o r it, nil modified in the plural : if 
masculine, generally; 1 if feminine, always; if neuter, almost never. 2 



this 


tree 


the hand 


the 


year 


the secret 


btefet 


SBaum 


bie 


.\>anb 


\m 


?\aliv 


briS ®e$eim'niS 


biefeS 


SBaumeS 


bet 


.\>anD 


iCC 


a live 3 


ccv? ©eljeim'nifj e3 a 


bid" cm 


SBautnC 


Dcr 


Manb 


bent 


^alnc 


Dent O'ctieim'uiiic 


biefen 


SBaum 


Die 


.\>anb 


Dn* 


r\aliv 


ba$ (tfclicim'ni* 


biefc 


SBaume 


Me 


MiinDC 


Die 


a live 


Die ©etjeim'niffe 


Dicier 


SBaumc 


bet 


.\>anDc 


Dcr 


a tire 


Dcr Oktieim'niijc 


Mejctt 


SBaumen 


Den 


.s>anDcn 


Den 


3 aincn 


Den '^ciicini'iiiiicn 


biefe 


SBaume 


Die 


MaitDC 


Die 


3 a live 


Die (^etieim'niue 



Vocabulary 








mountain 


Die 


flnrfjt 


bie ^arfjtc 


night 


foot 


Die 


3tdM 


Die 3tdbtc 


city, town 


son 


Do* 


Scin 


Die Petite 


leg 


arm 


b&§ 


v 4>dar 


bie SjSaare 


pair 


shoe 


bg§ 


^fcrb 


Die s ^fcrbc 


horse 


day 


b23 


Iter 


bie Xicrc 


animal 


month 


b53 


2Bort 


bie s £>ortc 


word 



bev $crfl Die Gertie 

Dcr Jyftf? Die 7v it f^ c 

Dcr 3otm bie 3ot)uc 

ber Slrm Die Shrine 1 

ber 3d)ftf) bie Sc^iifjc 1 

bev Ian bie icuic 1 

bev Wnat bie TO'nate month 



1 3lrntC, £imbc, 3cfiuhe, Jage, and some others are not modified (156,3). 
2 ba§ (or ber) gfl5fj, raft. Die jvioi?e: Dae 33oor, Jarf; Die £oore or Sote (3,2). 

3 Before case endings the g of ni? is doubled. 



NOUNS: CLASS If, STRONG 37 

The accusative is used to express the extent of time or of i 

space : as, 

i. btcfcn 9)ioitat hicibt cr Ijicr, this month he will remain here. 
2. cr ift cinen Slop] grufjer, he is a head taller. 

Exercise 32, German into English 

1. £a ift Der ©ot)n 5f)re3 greihtbeS, fefjett Ste if) it ! 2. (£t 2 
Iiat fctncn |ntt unb feme ©djufje. 3. SSenn bic Saume grim 
fittb unb bie 9cad)te inarm, toofmt er tmter {among) ben Steven 
ouf bent Serge. 4. 5l6er tm SSutfer btetbt er bet meinent Solme. 
5. ©etne Irate unb Seine ftnb nod) fe£)r fc£)rrjacr) f auf bent Serge 
tturb c3 tfjm tnof)l beffer gefjen. 6. £ontmen ©te nut nttr nad) 
ber (Btabtl SSir roerben fet)en, tua3 er ba tun ftrirb. 7- SSerben 
<E>ie t()m etnja^ in ber ©tabt faufen ? 8. Gsr ge()t oft (often) 
nad) ber @tabt r rjat a6er fein s $ferb unb leine ©d)ul)e, id) toerbe 
t()in em ^aar ©cljtdje (of shoes) faufen. 9. Sfyre SSorte ftnb 
fefyr freunb(td), and) id) luerbe ib,m etmaS faufen. 10. ©tefen 
9)conat roobmt er t)ier auf bent Serge. 11. (£r roirb biefen SSm* 
tcr in ber ©tabt bleiben, tuo er in bie ©d)ule gef)t. 12. ®ein 
Sater unb feme Gutter ftnb gut gegen tbm, a6er toed fie fo 
arm (poor) ftnb, l)e(fen fie if)ren ©ofmen ntd)t biel 

Exercise 33, English into German 

13. Have you seen the sons of my friend ? They are very 3 
poor. 14. I saw them yesterday morning among the horses 
and the animals on the mountains. 15. This summer they 
will live on the mountains. 16. But to-day they have gone to 
town. 17. The hands and feet of this son are very small. 
18. Has he no shoes ? 19. No, he has no shoes, but the days 
are warm. 20. Will the sons stay here this winter? 

Inflect "which day," "no animal," " your word," " my horse," "my 4 
shoe," " which horse," "your city," " his son," and " our mountain." 



3° A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XVIII. NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG (152, i, 154, 158) 
Masculine: 8 nouns of one syllable; ber 3> r rtu"m, mistake, 

ber 9icidjrlim, riches. 

Neuter: About 60 nouns mostly of one syllable; almost all 

nouns ending in titm. 

All nouns have -a, 0, it, ait modified in the plural. 



this 


man 


the error 


the house 


the antiquity 


bicicr 


9Jlann 


ber ^rv'tfun 


ba# iga u3 


bad SH'tertfitn 


bicfcS 


SKanneS 


be$ Srr'tiimS 


bSS .\>auic3 


be3 Sn'tertfimS 


bieicm 


SRarme 


bem ^rr'tfun 


bem Manic 


bem Sl'tertfim 


biefeti 


jilftcmn 


ben ^rr'tiim 


bntf £au3 


batf SU'tertftm 


bicfe 


Wanner 


bie 3vr' turner 


bie Lanier 


bie SU'tcrtflmcr 


Meier 


Wanner 


ber ow'tfiincr 


ber Mauier 


ber SH'tertfimet 


bieicn 


Wannern 


ben ^iTtuinern 


ben Mauicru 


ben Wtestfimem 


bieje 


Wanner 


Me oir'tmncr 


bie .\>auier 


bie 2U'terrfimc* 







Vocabulary 






ber ©ctfi 


bie OJcifter 


spirit 


ber Mcinb 


bie ffiaitbcr 


edge 


ber (Stott 


bie ©otter 


god 


ber 9Sa(b 


bie {tftilbcr 


forest 


ber Scib 


bie Better 


body 


ber SSurtn 


bie SB&rttter 


worm 


ber SRattn 


bie SRamter 


man 


ber ^srrtunt 


bie ^rrtfuuer 


error 


ber Crt 


bie Drier 


place 


ber JHctdjtum 


bie J}ictd)tumcr 


wealth 


bffS 8iU> 


bie Silber 


picture 


bra 5Ucib 


bie JUctbcr 


dress 


bo's ©urfj 


bie $urf|er 


book 


bra L'aub 


bie fianber 


land 


ba> Tncii 


bie Tiirfjcr 


roof 


bra I'idjt 


bie Stdjtcr 


light 


ba§ ^orf 


bie S)5rfer 


village 


bra SJicb 


bie £icber 


song 


bra ei 


bie Gtcr 


e gg 


bra 3d)(o£ 


bie 3d)lui;cr 


castle 


bra $cU> 


bie gfelber 


field 


bff§ Srfiiocrt 


bie 3rf)roertcr 


sword 


bra ©elb 


bie Ctfctbcr 


money 


bra %a\ 


bie Safer 


valley 


bra ©cftrfjt' 


bie ©cfirfi'tcr 


face 


bra $otf 


bie mtttt 


people 


bra ©fa3 


bie GHtifcr 


glass 


bra SScto 


bie 29et6cr 


woman 


bra Siutb 


bie fiinber 


child 


bff§ SBort 


bie Shorter 


word 1 


1 ^Sorter = words 


(singly); 2$ 


>orte (36, 4) = words (connected). 



NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG 39 

When the article bcr limits a noun followed by an explana- i 
tory genitive, clause, or phrase, it is accented (demonstrative) 
and should not be contracted with a preposition (cf. 10, 2): as, 

1. in ba3 (not in§) £ait3 mciucr 9)httter, into the house of my mother. 

2. on bent (not am) Xage, ai§ cr ftarb, on the day that he died. 

3. in bent (not tm) 2Uter toon 50 Safjren, at the age of fifty years. 

Exercise 34, German into English 

1. @otte3 ©eift ift an jebem Orte, uoit bent £ei6e be3 Cannes 2 
bi3 gu bent SSurme an bem 9fonbe beg 2Balbe§. 2. 9M_unen ©ie 
Sfyre $M)er imb lernen <5ie biefe Sorter ! 3- ®ann tuerben 
nnr auf bie gelber gefjen. 4. ©ef)en <Sie bte Stdjter in jenem 
2)orfe ! 5. £)te £)&cf)er ber §aufer btefeg ^otfeg finb flein abcr 
ftfjon. 6. 2)a finb 2Beiber unb ^inber, fie ftngen bte Steber be^ 
Sanbeg. 7. £)ie SSetSer I)a6en fetn @elb, after if)re S!Ietber unb 
tfjre ©efidjter finb fctjon, unb bte SHnber finb i()r SRettfjtum. 
8. 28te fd)on finb bte Staler unb bie SBerge! 9. Qa§ $otf 
6raucf)t fetn ©djloft unb feme ©djtoerter. 10. SSemt ©te eg 
toimfdjen, toerbe id) @te in bieg |)aug fiifjren. 11. ©e^en ©te 
fid) fjier ang genfter unb trtnlen <ste aug biefent @(afe ! 12. £)te 
SSeiBer tuerben ung SBrot, Sttildj unb (£ier f)olen. 13- @et)en @te 
bieg ®inb ! (£g ift bag ©6enbtlb {image) fetner Gutter. 

Exercise 35, English into German 

14. How beautiful the fields are ! 15. Have you seen the 3 
villages in this valley ? 16. See the women and the children ; 
are they not pretty ? 17. And how pretty their dresses are ! 

18. The men of this valley have no castle and need no swords. 

19. They will be friendly to us, and the women will sing the 
songs of the people. 20. How green the valleys are to-day ! 

Inflect " my forest," " my land," " which village," " no light," " your 4 
dress," " our field," "her child," " his castle," and " their god." 



40 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XIX. NOUNS: CLASS IV, WEAK (152, 1, 154, 160) 

Masculine: About 20 nouns of one syllable; all nouns end- 
ing in c denoting males ; many nouns of foreign origin, mostly 
denoting persons, ending in t, and accented on the last syllable. 

Feminine: About 75 nouns of one syllable; all feminine 
nouns of more than one syllable, 1 except bie flutter and bie 
£ocf)ter (34, 1) and nouns ending in funft, ni§, or fal (36, 1). 



this fool 


the boy 


the feather 


the queen 


bicfer £ot 


bee £$unge 


bie 0,-ebev 


bie ftB'nigin 


bicfc^' 3: oven 


be$ ^nngett 


bcr geber 


bcr .fto'nigin 


biefcm 3" oven 


bem 3«»fl en 


bcr Jebet 


bcr At 6' night 


biefen J oven 


ben Qfongett 


bie grebet 


bie MB'nigin 


bicfc J oven 


bie ^uttgen 


bie gebettl 


bie .riB'nigtnncn 2 


bicjer £oten 


bcr 3ungen 


bcr ac be in 


bcr fto'niginncn 


biefen J oven 


ben gungett 


\>t\\ ftebetn 


ben tto'niginncn 


biefe Joven 


bie ^ungett 


Die ac Do in 


bie too'niginncn 



Vocabulary 






hero 


bet ft italic 


bie ftnabcu 


boy 


master 4 


bCV &5tt)C 


bie Sitirocn 


lion 


man 5 


ber JHicfc 


bie JHicfcn 


giant 


prince 


ber 3H6oc 


bie 3flaueu 


slave 


fool 


bet 3olbar' 


Die 3otba'tcn 


soldier 


woman 6 


bie $fumc 


bie Stiimcn 


flower 


battle 


bie (Irbe 


bie (*rben 


ea?'th 


forehead 


bie JRcife 


bie 9ictfctt 


jourtiey 


deed 


bie Strafe 


bie Strain 


street 


time 


bie Stunbc 


bie Stuubcn 


hour 



bet £>clb bie -ftclbcn 
bet <s>crr 3 bie .'pcrrcu 
bet SDZenfdj bie Sftciifdjcn 
bet %x\\\is bie ^rinjen 

bet Sor bie Xorcit 

bie gfrem bie Jyroucn 

bie 3ti)Ind)t bie 3rf)tarf)tcu battle 

bie 3ttrttic) bie Sttntcn 

bie <Zat bie £aten 

bie 3cit bie 3eiteu 

iThis includes all nouns ending in et', ie', if; in, ton'; t)eit r fett; fdjctft, ung, 
tat'; and roost nouns ending in e, fir'. 

2 Before case endings the n of in is doubled. 

3 Irregular in the singular: ber £err, be$ §erra, bem £errn, ben £errn. 

4 Or lord, ox gentleman. 5 mankind, mortal. 6 Or wife. 



NOUNS: CLASS IV, WEAK 4 1 

Exercise 36, English into German 

1. Wk fagen rf auf ber Gnrbe" unb „auf ©rben." 1 2. 2Iuf 1 
uttfrer Gsrbe finb ^Otenfdjcn unb £iere* Jraucn unb Scanner, 
9itefen unb Xoren, Sgdunte unb 53(umen. 3- 2Bir baben and) 
gelben unb SjSringen, .Sjerrcn unb Solbaten. 4. ©eftcrn gingen 
nur ftnabcn auf bie Strafe unb bfieben etne ©tunbe. 5« 5(ber 
bcnte I)a6e icf) feme 3ett u ^b blcibe 5U ^aufe. 6. 2lfe luir auf 
bie ©trafje gingen, fa() id) einen «£>errrt mil feiner grau. 7» 3#) 
fpracf) mtt bem §errn Don bem 2)orfe im ^ta(e. 8. £ie @efid)ter 
unb bie ©tirnen ber banner unb granen in biefcm Sorfe finb 
fefjr fdjon. 9. £)ie banner fjaben leiue 8f(anen unb arbettcn 
fetbft auf ben gelbern. 10. Unb bie grauen madjen leine Sfteife 
nad) ber (Btabt 11. 3Benn e£ 3(6enb nnrb, figen fie in if)ren 
§aufern unb lefen unb fpredjen bon ben Sd)(ad)ten unb ben 
%aten ber «&elben. 12. 2)iefe£ £af fjeiftt , f £oiuenta(,'' ba$ Xat 
ber Sbtoen. 13. 3)ie Scanner Ijei^en ^inuenfjeqen," toeil fie 
§eqen tote {such as) bie Soften fjaben. 

Exercise 37, English into German 

14. Have you seen the valley of the lions ? 15. We shall 2 
make a journey into this valley. 16. The men and boys work 
in the fields, and the women remain at home. 17. You will 
see these heroes and talk with them. 18. The men are the 
lords of the earth. 19. If you have time, we shall read of 
the deeds of these men. 20. And you will see their fields 
and their flowers. 21. The women are beautiful, and are the 
queens of the earth. 22. And the men of the valley have the 
heart of a lion. 

Inflect "our soldier," "no fool/' "which slave," "his deed," "his 3 
master," " no woman," "which flower," " your boy," and " our street." 

1 In auf (Sl'ben and sometimes in poetry the old ending (e)n (c, D., A.) is seen. 



42 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XX. NOUNS: CLASS V, MIXED (152,1, 154, 162) 
Masculine : A few irregular nouns ; almost all nouns of 

foreign origin ending in or. 

Neuter : A few irregular nouns ; some nouns of foreign 

origin ending in I, m. 

In this class the singular is strong and the plural weak (1^2, 1). 



this peasant 


the state 


the doctor 


the museum 


bicfcr SBauer 


bcr 


Stoat 


bcr % of tor 


ba$ s Khtje'um 


bicic3 SBauerS 


bc$ 


©taateS 


bec* Tof'tovS 


be$ Sftuje'umS 


bicjcm Salter 


bcm 


2taatc 


bcm 3)oFtor 


bcm 3Jlufe'mn 


biefett SBauer 


ben 


Staat 


ben T of 'tor 


ba$ s Hcuje'um 


bicic 89auertt 


bic 


Staatcn 


bic ToftS'rcn 


bic SDhife'en 1 


bicfcr SBauerti 


bcr 


Staaten 


bcr Tofto'rcn 


bcr SDhije'en 


btefen SBauern 


ben 


Staaten 


ben Tofto'rcn 


ben 9Kufe 7 e« 


biefe SBauero 


bic 


Staaten 


bic Tofto'vcn 


bic SKufe'en 





Vocabulary 






bcr Winter 


bH§ Matters 2 


bic ^aucrn 




peasant 


ber Wndibnr 


bee Warfiunr* 3 


bic 9latf)baxn 




neighbor 


bet Sdjmcrj 


oB Srf) merges 


bic Srfjmcr^cn 




Pain 


ber Sec 


bl§ 3cce 


bie 3ccn 




lake 


ber 3traf)l 


beg 3traf)(c* 


bic 3traf)lcn 




ray 


ber better 


bgg $ctter£ 


bie 3>crtcrn 




cousin 


ber £of tor 


be§ ^of'tor* 


bic Xofto'rcn 




doctor 


bff§ Sluge 


beg 2fa0e3 


bie 3(ugcn 




eye 


bS3 %ctt 


beg $ctte§ 


bie 2krtcn 




bed 


^av ©ttbe 


bee- 6nbc^ 


bie (Snbett 




end 


bff§ ,s>cmb(e) 


be§ £>cmbc3 


bie ^cmben 




shirt 


ba§ Dljr 


be§ Df)re§ 


bie ibfjren 




ear 


b&§ Stu'bmm 


bee 3tu'butm§ 


bie 3tu'bten 




study 


bH§ Material' 


b& 9ftatcrtai3' 


bie Sftatcria'lten 1 


material 


1 Nouns ending 


in at' and it' have the 


plural in =i=en: 


as, 


baz gfofffl', bic 


%Q\\Vi\^U, fossil. 


2 Or bes 23auerru 3 Or 


bee Dtorijbarn. 



NOUNS: CLASS J", MIXED 43 

Exercise 38, German into English 

1. ©iefer 23auer ift mem 9iad)bar getoefen unb luofjitt mit i 
fritter gran am ©ee. 2. 2Sol)nen @te bemt nidjt in biefem 
<£taatc? 3- 9tein, id) tootnte nidjt [)icr, fonbern bet bent better 
3f)re3 £)oftor£. 4- ®utb @te fdjon tange am 5ee? 5- Sa, 
totr toofmen fdjon einen 9}Zonat (37, 1) ba. 3ft ber ©of tor }e|t 
gu §aufe ? 6. 3arool)t, ba ift ber Sicner be3 2)oftor3. 7- Unb 
©ie loerben ben SDoftor fc(6ft in jenem gimmer finben. 8. $[00= 
fen ©ie nidjt an bie %ux, fonbern gerjen ©ie in§ 3immer nnb • 
fegen ©ie fid) an ba$ Qntbe be3 £ifd)e3! 9- @tnb S^rc lugen 
rtictjt fefyr gut? 10. jftein, meine 2lugen finb mct)t gut, meil id) fo 
t)tet tin 23ette lefe. 11. 5I6er fie roerben me beffer roerben, menn 
®ie tm S3ette lefen ; eS ift diet 6effer, menn ©ie am genfter ft|en. 
12. 3Sie get)t eS mit Stjren ©tubten? 13- 3e§t gefjt e£ 6effer r 
aber in ben Dfjrert l)abe id) oft ©djmerjen. 14* Unb fo bin id) 
§um Potior getommen. 15. 3ft ber better be3 2)oftor3 je|t 5 it 
§au|e? 16. !lftem, roeit id) gu ^rjtten gefommen bin, bteibt er bet 
unferm 9?acfjbar; er arbeitet mit ben SBauern auf bem gelbe; fie 
rjaben je|t in ber (Srnte (hawest) oiel (much) 5U tun. 

Exercise 39, English into German 

17. Do you see the end of the lake ? 18. Yes, my eyes 2 
are better to-day, and I see the house at the end of the lake. 
19. That (ba$) is the house of my neighbor ; your doctor will 
stay at his house. 20. Has the cousin of my doctor come ? 
21. He came yesterday, and the doctor himself will come to- 
night. 22. This summer they will live at my neighbor's on 
the lake. 23. To-morrow I shall see the doctor and ask him 
how it is going with his studies. 

Inflect " his study," " his neighbor," " your bed," " your cousin," " her 3 
eye," " their doctor," and " their lake." 



44 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXI. NOUNS: PROPER NAMES (163) 



William 


Emma 


Max 


Louisa 


Smith 


SSU'fjetm 


Smma 


SKaj 


Sut'je 


Sdjtnibt 


2Sil'f)e(m3 


©mtnaS 


SDtorettS 


2ufjc(tt)8 


SdjmibtS 


SSU'fjeint 


(imma 


3Kaj 


Sut'fe 


Sdimibt 


SHW'fjetm 


(rmma 


3Kaj 


Sut'fe 


Sdjmibt 


28it'f)eime 


(SmmaS 


2Jlare 


Sui'fen 


SdjmtbtS 1 


SBil'fjdmc 


SmmaS 


3ttare 


Sui'feti 


SdjmibtS 


SBU'fjdmett 


Smma3 


Warctt 


Sw'fett 


2cbmibt3 


2Bil'f)dine 


(immae* 


9Kare 


Stiffen 


SdjmibtS 


Germany 


Switzerland 


America 


Berlin 


Paris 


TcntjdUauD 


bie Sdjrorig 


xHnio'iit'a 


SBeritn' 


$art§' 


3)eutfd)lanb3 


bcr Sdjrorig 


Slme'rifaS 


SBerlftt'S 


44,4 


Teutidilanb 


bcr Bchmci., 


Slme'rifa 


Scrim' 


Paris' 


TaindUanb 


bie Scfyroeia 


Vlmo'rifa 


Scrltn' 


inutv' 



Given names ending in an s-sound (8, ft, U, $, g) have the genitive 
singular ending in end ; but surnames and most foreign given names have 
merely the apostrophe: as, 

1. tyrilJClt!?, Fred's; but. 2>o|V, J'oss'sy Sopfjoffc^', Sophocles' sP- 
In the names of places ending in an s-sound the genitive relation is 
expressed by adding another word or by the dative with turn : as, 

1. btc 3trnf;cu bcr 2tnbt !$art§, the streets of the city of Paris. 

2. bic Strofjcn Don $uri£, the streets of Paris. 
The names of countries (except those always having the definite article 

171,3) and of towns are neuter: as, 

1. bo5 alte Gnglanb, old England; but, in bcr SdjttJdj, in Switzerland. 



Vocabulary 
fyranf'retrfj, France bffS 2$crf, bie 28erfe, work 

bet £ihtig, bie £8'mgc, king rooljcr', whence? from where? 

ber ^rofcf for, professor (42, 1, 3) toof)tn', whither? wliere? 

1 As, @d)ttlibtS futb rjter, the Smiths are here. 2 Or Sophocles'. 



NOUNS: PROPER NAMES 45 

The genitive case expresses the time within which; the 
dative, the time at which ; the accusative, the time how long 
(37, 1). But the accusative is often used loosely for the geni- 
tive or the dative : as, 

1. etnc£ Xagew tarn er 311 mir, one day he came to me. 

2. am folgcnbeu Xagc (or ben folflcnbeu £ag) tarn cr, the following, etc. 

3. jcben 3)Zorgcn blctut cr JU §<mfc f every morning he stays at home. 

Exercise 40, German into English 

1. 2Bof)trt tft gri|en3 unb $D2arte3 greunb gegattgett ? 2. (St 

ift fjeute nadj ber (Stabt gegemgen, jeben DJcorgen gel)t er mit 
fcaj. 3- 2tfter ber gretmb g^re^ ©of)ne3 Slarl 1 bletbt 511 §aufe, 
toeil <5cf)mtbti> rjeute morgett 6et ifjm ftnb. 4. 9So luofjnen 
pdjmibt^ jettf? 5- 2)ct ift. gerrn (or be<§ ^errn) 1 Sprofeffor 
5)oftor ©tfjmtbtS 1 §auj3, after ba3 ,£>au3 be3 grau(em3 ©tfjinibt 1 
ift tut SDorfe. 6. §eute mtrft bu ba$ ©djlofj be3 ®onigS Hon 
(Sngtanb fetjen. 7. 2)iefert ©ommer fasten roir nacf) $Pari3 unb 
£>eittfrf)(artb. 8. £>a tpirft bu bag Sd)lo& ®aifer 2Btlt)elm3 be3 
3^etten 2 fetjen. 9. ^e£t toerben ftrir etroag au§ ©oetb,e lefen. 

Exercise 41, English into German 

10. These works are the works of a Schiller; 1 where did 
they come from? 11. Max has bought the books, and we 
shall take them with us to France. 12. In Paris we shall re- 
main a month, in the house of your Miss Smith. 13. Then 
we shall go to Berlin. 14. This winter we shall live in Ger- 
many, at the Smiths. 15. Then the Smiths will come to 
America. 16. Max's sister will remain in the city of Berlin. 1 

1 A proper name used with a biefer-word or a fein-word (io 1 , 20 1 ), or follow- 
ing a noun so used, is uninflected unless depending on a noun after it. §erv 
is always inflected: as, ein ^reitnb meiner Sftarie; ber greunb 3fire§ $errn 
©djmibt; be§ £errn ©djmibts ^veunb (but, be§ §errn ^5rofeffor§ ©cfimibt $reuub). 

2 An added title is always inflected : as, beg < 3 lx,e itcn, the Second (48, 1). 



4 6 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXII. ADJECTIVES: CLASS I, STRONG 

Not preceded by a btefer-word or a fern-word (io 1 , 20 1 ), at- 
tributive adjectives or attributive participles take the strong 
endings of btefer (8, 2), except that before a genitive singu- 
lar ending in (e)3 they take the weak ending en (164 2 ). 



long 


, cold winter 


good old friendship 


laugcr, 


falter 


Winter 


gutc altc Sreunb'fdjaft 


Icmgett, 


faltcn 


SSinterS 


gutcr alter greunb'fd&aft 


long cm, 


fa Item 


SBtntet 


gutcr alter SJfreunb'fdjaft 


langcn, 


fatten 


SBinter 


gute altc £f-veuub'fd)aft 


laugc, 


faltc 


2B inter 


gutc altc tfrcunb'frfjaftctt 


(anger, 


falter 


SStnter 


gutcr alter 7vrcuub'jd)aftctt 


langett, 


faltcn 


SBintertl 


giitcn altcn ^Tcuub'jdiaftcn 


laugc, 


faltc 


933 in tcv 


gutc altc ?i-vcuub'jd)aftcn 


good 


cold water 


cold, biting winter 


gutce* 


falter 


SBaffet 


falter, fdmci'bcnbcr SSinter 


gutcn 


faltcn 


SBafjerS 


faltcn, fdmei'benbetl ©intcrS 


gfitein 


fa Item 


SBaffer 


faltcm, idmci'bcubcm s £>iuter 


guteS 


fattcS 


SBaffet 


fatten, fd)uei'bcnbett SBiutet 


gute 


faltc 


SBaffct 


faltc, fdiuei'benbe s 23intcr 


gutcr 


falter 


SBaffet 


falter, fdjnci'benber 23iutet 


gutcn 


faltcn 


SSaffertt 


faltcn, jd)nei'benben SSintern 


gutc 


faltc 


SBaffer 


faltc, fdjnet'benbc SBinter 



Vocabulary 



bcrfifjmt', famous 
bumnt, stupid ; flug, clever 
faul, lazy ; flci'^tg, diligent 
gri% great, tall (of people) 
pradj'tig, splendid; fdjarf, sJiarp 
frfjlcdjt, poor, bad 



tap'fer, brave; ^tuci, two 
bS3 (Bebau'be, bie ©ebau'be, building 
bie Scute, neuter plural, people 
bie UntDcrjitaV, bie UnioerjitS'ten, 

university 
teljren, lefjrte, getef)rt, teach 



ADJECTIVES: CLASS /, STRONG 47 

A noun in apposition with another noun generally agrees i 
with it in case (but see 45 *) : as, 

1. tdj tt>of)ne dci meittcm Dnfcf, bcm Sruber mciner Wlvdtcv, I live at my 

uncle's, the brother of my mother. 

2. in bcr <Stabt diom (uninfected, 45 1 ), in the city of Rome. 

Exercise 42, German into English 

I. hunger greunb, fjeute abenb fatjren fair nadj bcr ^tabt Ser- 2 
tin. 2. Sdj bin nod) me in Berlin gemefen, aba id) ftabe uiel 
t>on £)eutfd)tanb gelefen. 3- 2)ie ^tabt Berlin ijat 6eritf)mte 
pftajsen, pradjttge ©ebdube nnb gro^e (Garten mtt alten ©to 
men nnb mtt ©lumen nnb Xieren. 4. (&te l)at aud) tapfre ©o(= 
baten, fluge Seute, gute @d)ulen nnb eine Uniberfttdt. 5- ©erufjmte 
alte ^rofefforen lefyren an ben ©d)ulen. 6. 3d) f)a6e gute alte 
greunbe in ber ©tabt. 7- ©te f)aben groet Huge junge ©ofjne 
mtt fd)arfen 2lugen unb Dtjren. 8. £)u rntrft fie fetjen unb mtt 
tfmen in bte (Sdjute. gefjen. 9- 3nj3 tft nid)t faut unb bumm, 

er gef)t nte in bie ©dmle, met! er fd)(ed)te 5Iugen t)at. 10. 2Str 
fyaben jegt ratted, fdjnetbenbeS ^Better, aber bu rntrft beffer leraen, 
menu e3 latt tft. 

Exercise 43, English into German 

II. Summer (ber ©ommer, 171, 3) is here with warm days 3 
and green trees. 12. We shall now go to Paris and Berlin. 

13. These cities have splendid streets and beautiful buildings. 

14. They have also great museums and famous universities. 

15. When we go to Switzerland, we shall make little journeys 
into pretty villages. 16. In Switzerland the people live in 
little houses on the mountains and on the lakes. 17. They 
have famous mountains and beautiful lakes. 

Inflect "old bread," "warm winter," "hot water," "hot summer," 4 
and " beautiful friendship " (^reimi/fcfjaft). 



4 8 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXIII. ADJECTIVES : CLASS II, WEAK 
Preceded by a btejer-word (io 1 ), attributive adjectives or at- 
tributive participles take the weak ending en, except in five 
forms in the singular (nominative masculine, feminine, and neu- 
ter, and accusative feminine and neuter), in which they take £, 



this long, cold winter 


the good old friendship 


biejcr fange, fatte ©inter 


bic gute aftc ^reunb'fdjaft 


btefcS (angett, fatten ©inters 


bcr eulten a (ten greunb'fcrjaft 


biejem fangen, fatten ©inter 


bcr grttett alten gromb'fdjaft 


biejen fongett, fatten ©inter 


bic gfitc altc ^reunb'fcliaft 


biefc fangett, fatten SBinter 


bic gutetl attcn ^rcunb'jcliaften 


bicicr [angett, fatten Sinter 


bcr autcn alten ^rcunb'fcl)aftctt 


biefen tongeti, fatten ©intern 


ben gutetl attcn Jreunb'fdjaftetl 


btefe (angett, fallen SBinter 


bic gutetl attcn Tyrcuub'ktiaUCH 


the new Berlin knife 


the never-to-be-fo?gotte?i winter 


bfiS none SBerti'ner 3Kcffct 


bcr me 5O bergeffenbe ©inter 


bid ncucn SBerli'ner SftefferS 


bcc< nic ul bergeffenbetl ©inters 


bem ncucn SBerK'ner SDleffet 


bem nie ,^rl bergeffenbett ©inter 


bac< ncuc SBerli'net SReffet 


ben nie 3U bergeffenbetl ©inter 


bic ncucn SSerK'ner SKeffer 


bic nie gu bergeffenbetl ©inter 


bcr ncucn Sertt'ner SDfceffer 


bcr nie gn bergeffenbetl ©inter 


ben ncucn Serif ner 9Rejfer» 


ben nie gn bergeffenbetl ©intern 


bic ncucn SBertt'ner SKeffer 


bic nie go bergef jenben ©inter 



4 Adjectives ending in er derived from the names of towns are unin- 
flected and begin with capital letters (48, 3). 



Man, blue; n»ctr, wide, far 
fertt(e), far, distant 
gcbrntft', pressed, printed 
Ijittter, prep, with d. or a., behind 



Vocabulary 

bie 3>u'genb, youth 
bie 3ee, bie 3een, sea (cf. 42, 4) 
benfen, think; traumen, dream 
ttuc, as, like ; immcr, always 



ADJECTIVES: CLASS II, WEAK 49 

Many phrases are used as attributive adjectives : as, I 

i . btc an bcr See liegcnbctt ^orfcr, the villages lying on the sea (the 

on-the-sea-lying villages). 
2. btc Don ifjm gefefirtebeuen 25udjcr, the books written by him. 

The present participle is formed by adding cub to the verb 2 
stem. In transitive verbs it is often used with 511 in a future 
passive sense, and called the gerundive : as, 

1. ber me 511 rjergeffenbe Sag, the never-to-be-forgotten day. 

2. fdjbnc, nie su rjergeffenbe Sage, beautiful, never-to-be-forgotten days 
(46, 1). 

Exercise 44, German into English 

1. 2>er gute grig 1 fjat and) bent armeit Qam 1 etma£ gegeben. 3 
2. 3n bent neuen, oon ifjm gefcf)rie6ertcn 23utf)e fjat grig Don fet= 
ner ^ugenb gefprocfjen. 3- -Da^ ftetne, in Sparis gebrud'te S3ucf; 
ift fefjr jtf)on. 4. grig fdjretbt: „3n metner Sugenb tear bie 
SSeft mie etn (Garten, groft nnb frfjon, mtt Q3aumen nnb SBtu? 
men. 5. ^n biefem groften, fdjonen ©arten fptelte id) mtt met- 
it en SBrubern. 6. $l6er mtr tranmten unmet: Don bm meit oor 
un§ liegenben Sarjren. 7- Segt ftnb nrir alt geroorben unb ben- 
fen Diet an bie fernen, blauen SBerge unb an bie fcfyone Sugenb, 
mo bag §er§ jung mar." 



Exercise 45, English into German 

8. The new book written by Jack is beautiful. 9. In this 
beautiful little book he writes of the days of his youth. 
10. When we are young, we dream of the great world lying 
before us. 11. When we are old, we think of the never to be 
forgotten days when our hearts were young. 

1 Proper names in such expressions as "poor Fritz," "beautiful Germany," 
require the definite article (except in direct address, where they may take the 
personal pronoun: as, bu armer %x\%, you poor Fred). 



So 



A GERMAN- GRAMMAR 






XXIV. ADJECTIVES: CLASS III, MIXED 
Preceded by a leirt-word (20 1 ), attributive adjectives or at- 
tributive participles take the strong endings of bicfcr (8, 2) in 
the three forms in which fern is defective (nominative masculine 
and neuter, and accusative neuter ; 20, 1) ; elsewhere, they 
take the weak ending en or c (48, 1). 



your 

3 live m 
Si)rcn 

5$re 



long, cold winter 
[anger, falter SBintet 
langett, fatten s Binter3 
langcn, fatten ©inter 
[cmgett, fatten ©inter 

[angeit, fatten ©inter 
laua.cn, fatten SBinter 
lana.cn, fatten SBintem 
langett, fatten ©inter 



their good old friendship 
tf)rc gutc alte ^reunb'jd)aft 
itner cjutctt altcn ^reuub'febaft 
finer gutcn attcn tfreunb'jd)aft 
ttn - c cjiitc atte $reuub'jd)aft 

tine gutcn attcn ^veunb'jdjaften 
ttner giitctt attcn ftreunb'icbaftcn 
itivcn gutett attcn ftreunb'fdjaftett 

ttnc guten altcn ^-reunb'fdjaftcn 



your new Berlin knife 
5l)r neue$ 53crtt'ner SWeffet 
3tnc^ neuen SBerlfner SKefferd 
Jtncmncucn SBertt'ner SKeffet 
5 f)i* netted Serlf'ner SKeffet 

"oiirc neuen Sertt'ner SHeffer 

Since neuen Serif ner SDcejier 

^snicn neuen 33erft'ner ^ceuertt 

^fjrc neuen ^Berlfner s ??tei"fer 



your affectionate friend 
bein bid) lie'benber tfteunb 
beinc3 bid) lie'benben Ai'cunbcS 
beiucm bid) lie'benben ^-reunbe 
beincn bid) lie'benben ^reunb 

betne bid) lie'benben ^-reunbe 

bcincr bid) lie'benben ^reunbe 

beincn bid) lie'benben ^-reunben 

betne bid) lie'benben #reunbc 



Vocabulary 



tjatt), half($i % i)\ nod), still, yet 
itttereffanr', interesting; liefi, dear 
lie'gen, loo, Qcte'gcn, lie 
mrf)t wafjr ? is it not true f 
ber 9if)etu, Rhine 



ber dtod, bie Mode, coat 
ftolj auf, with a., proud of 
ber Stitljt, bie 3tiif)(e, chair 
un'gliicflicf), unfortunate, unhappy 
toirf '(id), really j o'ber, ^ 



ADJECTIVES: CLASS III, MIXED 5 I 

When standing alone before proper names, fjanj, whole, and I 
Ijail), half, are uninfected : as, 

i. ganj (or f)ai&) Ghtro'pa, all (or half) Europe. 

Exercise 46, German into English 

I. £ie6er §cm3, id) l)abe betn fdjoneS alte3 Q3ndj gefefen. 2 
2. 2)eht neue3 $md) Ijabe id) fyter in metnem 3^ mmer r e ^ ift 1 e () r 
intereffant. 3« 2)u btft fef>r ftol§ auf betn grofte3 SBudj, md)t 
roaljr? 4* 3aroof)t, mein Ite6e3 grdidetn, tmb @te finb and) 
ftotg auf %\)it fdjonen <8ad)cn. 5- 9l6er fjaben ©te 3l)ren jun* 
gen 33rnber mit fetnem griinen %iod gefefjen? 6. Sa, mein guter 
Qkter f)at and) etnen neuen 9vod. 7* 9Ste get)t e3 betner urn 
gliidlidjen, franfen ©djmefter? 3ft fie nod) im 55ette, fiber gefjt 

e3 tt)r fcfyort beffer? 8. 3d) banfe Sfjnen, e3 gef)t ttjr beffer, tmb 
fyeute morgen f)at fie erne fya(6e ©tunbe in ifjrem <Stuf)(e am 
genfter gefeffen. 9- $Q&t betn 33rubcr ba3 fdjone £entfd)(anb 
gefefjen? 10. (It unb mein $ater fyabcn ganj Guropa gefeljen. 

Exercise 47, English into German 

II. Fred, have you seen my beautiful new book ? 12. No, 3 
my dear Jack, I have not seen it ; is it an interesting book ? 
13. Yes, I have already read it, and it is a very interesting 
book. 14. When we are in Germany, we shall live in a little 
old village on the Rhine. 15. And I shall go to school with 
my young cousin. 16. I have never seen your young cousin ; 
but if he is at home, I shall see him this evening ; is he dili- 
gent ? 17. He is a very diligent boy. 18. We have read 
much, and we shall see all Germany. 19. Will your good old 
father also go with you to Germany ? 20. No, he will remain 
in our new house on the lake. 

Inflect "her new shoe," "my young cousin," "your beautiful new 4 
book," " our good old friend," and " his little old house." 



52 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXV. ADJECTIVES: COMPARISON 

I Adjectives, participles, and adverbs are compared by adding 
(e)r and (e)ft to the positive ; the superlative, when predicate, 
is in the dative singular neuter with am (= an bcm, 10, 2): as, 

am roci'fefteu wisest 
am e'betften noblest 



roet'fe wise 
e'bet noble 



metier 
ebter 



wiser 
nobler 



Some adjectives of one syllable have vowel modification ir» 
the comparative and the superlative : as, 

nit old alter older nm hf tcftcn oldest 

arm poor tinner poorer am armftcn poorest 

jnng young jitnner younger am jhitflftcn youngest 

fait cold fhftcr colder nm fhl'tcftcu coldest 

furs short fiir;>cr shorter fim fiir'ftcftcu shortest 

tnng /w/g- (finger longer nm laitgftcn longest 

ftnrf strong fthrfer stronger nm ftnrfftcu strongest 

mnrm warm warmer warmer nm mnrmftcu warmest 



As attributive adjectives, the comparative and the superlative are in- 
flected like the positive: as, 

1. laiigcrcr, fnltcrcr SBintcr 146, 2 1; bicfer fhngcrc, fnltcre Winter 

(48, 2): ^l|r Initflcrcr, tiiltcrcr Winter (50, 2). 

2. (fiitflftcr, ftiltcftcr Winter 146. 21 : bicfer liiugftc, faltcftc Winter (48, 2); 

31)r langftcr, f dttcftcr Winter (50, 2). 

As predicate adjective, the superlative is in the dative singular neuter 
with am 1= an bent, 10, 2) ; as adverb, it is in the dative singular neuter 
with nm to express superlative comparison, and in the accusative singu- 
lar neuter with anf3 (= anf ba$, 10, 2) to express superlative eminence 
(without comparison): as, 

1. bic Xage ftnb jc&t tnng, {finger, nm (fingftcn, the days ai-e now long, 

longer, longest (167, 3). 

2. er futgtftf)im, frfjoncr, nm fdjonften, anfs fcfiintfrc, he sings beautifully, 

more beautifully, most beautifully (of all), most beautifully (= 
very beautifully, without comparison with others). 



ADJECTIVES: COMPARISON 53 

2Btc, as, is used after the positive ; a\$, than, after the com- i 
parative (but a(3 is sometimes used for tDte in expressions like 
jo balb a(y mbg(td), as soon as possible). The persons or things 
compared take the same case : as, 

i. rot ttuc $htt, red as blood. 

2. rotcr a(§ SBlur, redder than blood. 

3. fie Ijat i^rt Itebcr al» td), i-/z<? Z&fc&r /z/w ^//<?r than I do. 

4. fie Ijat if)it (ieber a(3 micf), she likes him better than she does me. . 

5. id) Ijaoe feinen fcefferen tt(3 tfjn, I have none better than he. 

Exercise 48, German into English 

I. jj0?ein lieber 3of)ann, bift bu ber altere ober ber jiingere 2 
©ruber? 2. £>crj bin ber jiingere; mem dlterer ©ruber tft mtt 
bem fleinen |jan3 in bie ©cbjule gegangen. 3- §an£ ift ber 
biimmfte $nabe in ber gait-jen (Sdjule, aber er tft am fteifeigften, 
toemt er in ber ©cfjute tft. 4- 3ft §an3 a ^ er a ^ ou ? 5- 3a, 
idj bin graei Safyre jiinger unb etnen bjafben $opf turner ai§ er. 

6. <paft bu etnen jiingeren better aU trjn ? 7- 9cetn, unb tcf) 
tjabe fetneu biimmeren al£ tljn. 8. SBte getjt e3 beiner atteftert 
(Sctjroefter ? 9. 2>te Xage finb je|t am fuqeften, unb fie gerjt 
jeben toarmett £ag an bie ®ee. 10. Seben £ag rairb fie 
ftarfer unb fctjoner ; <Ste tnerben fief) freuen, menu ©ie fie fefyen. 

Exercise 49, English into German 

II. Your youngest sister is prettier now. 12. She sings 3 
most beautifully and is as proud as a queen. 13. Is not your 
older sister pretty ? 14. She is more beautiful than Anna. 

15. She is not so proud as Marie, but plays more beautifully. 

16. The days are longer now, and they will go to the sea. 

Inflect " their prettiest book," " my oldest house," " our older brother," 4 
44 your youngest horse," and " her warmest friend." 



54 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXVI. ADJECTIVES: IRREGULAR COMPARISON (167,4)" 



m\ 


great, tall 


griifjer 


greater 


am grBftten * greatest 


fliit 


good 


beffer 


better 


am beften best 


Ijodj2 


high 


pfjer 2 


higher 


am l)Bdjjtett 3 highest 


tta()(e) 


near 


nSfier 


nearer 


am nBdjftcn 3 nearest 


Did 


much 


mefyr 4 


mo?-e 


am meiften w^x/ 






mefy'rere 


several 


bic mciftcn ///<? w^/ 


me'nig 


little 


me'nigcr 4 


less 


amroe'itigftcn least 






mtnbcr 


less 


im miit'bcftcn mi ///*? least 


me'mgc /^w 


roc'mgcr 4 


fewer 


bic ttie'mgfrcn the fewest 


(in 


in) 


bcr in'ucrc 


the inner 


bcr fn'ncrfte the inmost [most 


(and 


out) 


bcr tin f>crc 


the outer 


bcr au'fecrftc Jfc outmost, ut- 



Adjectives or participles used as nouns begin with capitals, but are 
inflected like attributive adjectives; but when preceded by adjectives 
with strong endings, they take the weak endings in the genitive plural, 
in the dative singular, and in the nominative and the accusative neuter 
singular: as, 

1. bicfer gutc 9Hte, this good old man (48, 2) ; gutcr filter. 

2. alter !$cfnnntcn, of old acquaintances ; tljm ate altcm iikfantttcn, to 

him as an old acquaintance ; fcilt frfjbnctf ?Utjjtcrc (5$, 6). 

In certain phrases adjectives are used uninfected as nouns ; but if 
inflected to indicate case, they have capitals: as, 

1. alt nub jung (or 8Hfc nub ^tntge) fnmen, old and young came. 

Adjectives after personal pronouns are generally strong ; but in the 
dative singular and the nominative plural they are weak unless used in 
apposition or distributively : as, 

1. t>n armc3 $Hnb, you poor child; Sic firmer, you poor man. {child. 

2. btr armen $liubc, to you poor child; bir f armem ftinbe, to you, poor 

3. mir ^cutfd)en, ice Germans (as a whole, collectively). 

4. ttrir "Scutfrfjc, ''due Germans (individually, distributively). 

Most adjectives from proper names do not begin with capitals: as, 
1. em bcurfdjc§ SBurf), a German book (but, as proper name, ba$ £eutfd)e 
9?Ctd), the German empire ; see also 48, 4). 

1 For grofjeften. 2 When !j is followed by a vowel, the stem has no c. 

8 When f) is followed by a consonant, the stem has c. 4 Uninfected. 



ADJECTIVES: IRREGULAR COMPARISON 55 

Exercise 50, German into English 

1. £u unb bcinc Sdjmeftcr (£dt)a6etl), ijabt iljr et\va§ @ure3 
getan? 2. 9JMne Sdjmefter fyat tfjr SBefteS getan, |>err Scfjmibt. 
3. &$ roaren t)ie(e Seute ba, arm unb retd), ait unb jung, unb 
fie gingen jur 9txd)tcn unb §ur fitnfen 1 ber Strafe. 4. 28tr 
3nngcn gingen immer na()er, 2 unb e» mad)te un£ jefyr ung(ud(td), 
a(3 rotr bie Written unb bie 5Hten fafyen. 5. @3 roaren aud) 
merjrere ^tnber, grofse unb Heine, auf ber ©tra^e, unb rotr fatjen 
groet arme Sftetfenbe. 6. SDte s Jterfenben fatten letn fd)8ne£ $u= 
feere, 3 roaren aber roemger arm a(S miibe. 7. 2U3 rotr nad) §aufe 
famen, rjatte id) bet mir ein neue3 StReffer, ein beut)cf)e3 23ucfj unb 
groet SpfeL 8. 3d) gebe Srjnen ba£ beutfdje SBudj, roed e£ am 
6eften tft. 9- Hub oon btefen groet ftyfeln iff btefer ber beffcre. 
10. 3d) f)abe triete 23itd)er 3U §aufe, gute unb fdjledjte, aber bie$ 
$ud) ift al(erlie6ft 4 unb fdjoner al3 bie meiften metner 53iicfjer. 



Exercise 51, English into German 

11. You poor boy, have you done your best to-day ? 2 
12. Sister Mary and I (168, 3) were with the poor people in 
the street. 13. There were also rich people in the street, but 
there were fewer children. 14. The most of the people were 
unhappy. 15. My sister bought bread and gave it to the 
poor. 16. The poorest people are not always the unhappiest 
if they are diligent. 17. And the most of the richest people 
are not the unhappiest, because they are very diligent. 
18. We are happiest when we work most diligently ; and few 
of us (oon un£) work too (§u) much. 

1 to the right and to the left ; §cmb is omitted (54, 2), as in the English. 
2 immer ll&her, 7tearer and nearer ; immer, always, is so used with a com- 
parative. 3 $UJ3ere, outer appearance, exterior. 
_ * The superlative atlerUebft', most charming, is uninflected. 



5<5 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXVII. ADVERBS 
Many adverbs are compared like adjectives (52, 1, 54, 1), but 
some are irregular : as, 



soonest 

best 
oftenest 

extremely (56, 2) 

worst 

best 



A few superlative adverbs are uninflected (cf. 52, 1): as, 

1. cr i ft l)iid||*t unfrcuitMid), he is extremely unfriendly. 

2. flcljcit 3ic ininiliriift bolb! go as soon as pi 

3. cr iff crft morgetl I)icr, In- will not he here until to-morrow. 

Some adverbs are formed from the stem of the superlative by adding 
citv : as, 

1. iid|i bnitfc bcftcitv, </ I thank you very much. 

2. cr fommt fpiitcftciiC' inorricn unri] A>aufc, he is coming home not later 

than (at the latest) to-morrow. 



baib 


soon 


eljcr ^ 
frttfjcr > 


sooner 


am c'fjeftett 


flcrnfc) 


gladly 


ticber 


rather 


am Uebftcn 


oft 


often 


after 


oftener 


am Ijtiu'figficn 


fcfjr 


very 


mcfjr 


more 


f)6rf)ft ) 
iiuf;crft ) 


Ulict 


badly 


tirflcr 


worse 


am araitcn 


Wofjl 


well 


beffer 


better 


am bcftcit ) 
aufv bene ) 



CY)t,frst; not until, only 

flcfaTltflft, if you please (most pleas- 
antly) 

jitngfr, recently 

(Sttgft, long since 

mb:ilttf)ft f as . . . as possible 

bcftcitv, very much (in the best 
manner) 

frfi Soften*, at the earliest, not be- 
fore 

Ijorijftcni?, at most, at best 



Vocabulary 

mciftcn*, mostly, generally 

nattiftcitv, next time, by and by 

frflihtftcitv, very much (most beauti- 
fully) 

ffla'tcftcttS, at the latest, not later 
than (fpSt, late) 

roc'ittflftcit!?, at least 

fctt, prep, with d., since : fctt cittern 
3abrc, for (since a year 

bet s £Iafc, Me ^tafce, place, square : 
neljmcn 3ic "JMafc ! take a seat 



ADVERBS 57 

To express liking, preference, ox choice, gew(c), ftefcer, or am 1 
Itcdften is used : as, 

i. id) fjabe btc Settling fcljr gcrn, I am fond of tlie newspaper. 
2. id) Icfe gcru (or licbcr, or am (tcOftcn), I like to read (or prefer read- 
ing, or like reading best of all). 

Exercise 52, German into English 

1. SSir bartfert btr beften§ (or fd)dnften3), mir btetbcn Ijeute 2 
ntdjt, toetf bein $ater erft (or frii[)ften3) morgen abenb nacf) 
£)aufe lommt. 2. 23enn e3 ifym nid)t immer arger gefyt, jo 
!ommt er erft 311 im§. 3. ®ann gefjen mir mdglidjft balb §u 
meinem 23ruber. 4. Sr roirb trjertigften^ beine Gutter fet)en f 
nid)t roarjr ? 5- 3amot)(, a6er feit langer Qeit ift fie meiften3 
bei metnem timber. 6. 92ef)men ©ie gefaftigft pa§, mein §err, 
unb lefen @ie biefen $kief! @r ift jihtgft t»ort meiner Gutter 
gefommen. 7- Set) ioerbe ifjn gerne lefen, toenn bit e£ roimfdjeft 
8. 9Jtein timber ge!)t jetjt oft abenb3 in bie &tabt, unb meiften3 
martet meine Gutter auf if)n bis fptit in bie ^acl)t. 9. 9icid)ften3 
lommt er gar nid)t {not at all) nacf) §aufe. 10. 3ft bein 23rief 
an {to) ttm fdjon fertig? 11. O getoiJ3, er ift tdngft gefdjrieben. 
Hftetn timber ift t)od)ft ungludlidj, toenn rair nidjt oft fdjreiben. 

Exercise 53, English into German 

12. Thank you very much, Fred, but I shall go to town to- 3 
day. 13. And if your mother comes, I shall see her as soon 
as possible in town. 14. My mother will not come home till 
to-night. 15. For two years she has lived (13, 1) at my 
younger brother's. 16. She is very unhappy because my 
older brother does not like to work. 17. When he comes 
home, he stays at most only an hour, and then generally goes 
into town. 18. By and by we shall not see him at all; he has 
not worked (13, 1) for a year. 



5§ A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XXVIII. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS 

1 Learn the cardinal numbers, 166, 167. 

2 When not followed by a noun, a cardinal number of one syllable may 
take the strong endings of btefcr in the nominative, the dative, and the 
accusative (8, 2) ; before nouns, gttici and brei do so in the genitive and 
the dative if the case is not otherwise indicated : as, 

1 . t§ finb unf er fiittf e, there are Jive of us. 

2. juicier gnten (or guter) $rcnnbe, of two good friends. 

3 (£in§ before another numeral or before U!)r (58, 5) has the form ein ; 
before a noun, it is inflected like ein, a (20, 1), but has emphasis (often 
printed with spacing, e i n, a common way of showing emphasis) : as, 

1. cr §at cine n $rennb, he has one friend. 

4 4?Uttbert an< ^ £<*nfenb are neuter nouns, with the plural =e : as, 
1. fie fanten 511 ^mnberten, they came by hundreds. 

5 The hour of the day is expressed by a cardinal number, with 
or without the uninflected feminine iU)r, clock (59, 2): as, 

1. toietitet Ul)r ift t§ ? what time is it? e3 ift ein3 (or ein Ufjr), §ttiei 
(or ^roei Uljr), it is 07ie (or one o'clock), two (or two o'clock). 

6 From the cardinal numbers are formed three kinds of words : 

1. The cardinal adverbs, by adding mat, time : as, 

ein'tnfif, once j tan'fenbntaf, a thousand times. 

2. Uninflected adjectives denoting kinds of by adding erlei : as, 

gttJei'erlei See (or $tyfef), two kinds of tea (or apples). 

3. Adjectives denoting fold, by adding fad) (compartment) or fattig 
(fold), 46, 1, 48, 1, 50, 1 : as, 

ein'fatf), simple (one-fold) ; eitt etn'faltiger Sftenfd), a simpleton. 

7 Vocabulary 

bte Stttnu'te, bie SDftnn'ten, minute ber %y\% bie 3&$t, train 

baz 25iertcf f bie $iertel, quarter: ein fyalb, half: fjalb brei, half past two 
SHertet anf gtoet, a quarter past (half of three) [to, by 

one (toward two); brei $iertel anf natf), prep, with d., after, according 

gtoet, a quarter of two (three urn, prep, with a., round, at 

quarters toward two) tiorbei', past: etn§ tJor&ei, past one 






THE CARDINAL NUMBERS 59 

Nouns denoting weight or measure, except feminine nouns 
ending in e, are put in the singular number. The nouns de- 
noting the material weighed or measured are generally unin- 
flected; but, accompanied by an adjective, they take the case 
of the preceding noun or the genitive : as, 

i. (mit) gttiei $fmtb %tz f {with) two pounds of tea. 

2. (mit) gwei £ttffeu (feminine plural) See, {with) two cups of tea. 

3. Ijter ftub stud ^funb guter £ee (or gutett £ec§), here are two pounds 

of good tea; er fjai suiei %\w\\>s guteu £ee (or guteu £cc3), A* has, etc. 

4. tnit stoet SPfitttb gutem £ee (or guteu Xct$) t with two pounds, etc. 

5. gelju fyuf? fyodj, ten feet high. 

Exercise 54, German into English 
1. SBteutet llfjr iff e£? 2. 9^a(^ mehter Ufjr {watch) tft e3 
eto (58, 5), jtoet, gtodtf ; eine Minute, gtoet Sftttmtett nadj (or ttber, 
past) em3; etrt SBtertel auf gtuct (or nad) etns>); gtoangig Sfttnutett 
nadj em3; f)alb gruei; gtocmgtg TOituten nor gtuet (or tit groangig 
SDcimtten $wti); bret SBtertel auf gtoet (or etn SStertet oor greet) ; eute 
Wimite, gtoet Sfttnutert bor groet; tin§ borbet, etc. 3. 5lber metne 
Uf)r gefjt bret 9fttmttert nad) {slow ; t>ov, fast). 4. Urn unebtel 
Uf)r (or Urn ruelcfje gett) gef)t urtfer 3 U 9? 5- tint etn§, etc.; in 
etner fjafben ©tunbe. 6. §ter tft erne Xaffe ftarler £ee, trtnfen 
<3te fie ! 7. S^ f)abe fdjott gtoet Xaffeu uon btefem £ee getrunfen ! 

Exercise 55, English into German 
8. At what time shall you go to Berlin? 9. My train 
goes at nine, five minutes past nine, etc. 10. By my watch 
it is a quarter of seven. 11. But my watch is (goes) six 
minutes fast (Dor). 12. It is now a quarter past nine, and 
my carriage will be here in five minutes. 13. Drink a cup 
of this tea; it is strong and hot. 14. Thank you, but it is 
twenty minutes past nine, and here is my carriage. 15. I 
am a simpleton ! I have bought only two kinds of coffee. 



60 a GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XXIX. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS 

1 Learn the ordinal numbers, 166, 167. 

2 To form the ordinal numbers 1-19, te is added to the cardinals (erfte 
and britte are irregular, and in adjte one t is dropped); after 19, fte is 
added. 

3 From the stems of the ordinal numbers are formed two kinds 
of words : 

1. The ordinal adverbs, by adding tn§ : as, 

erfteng, first; gfoeitettg, secondly; geljuteit^, te?ithly. 

2. Fractions (except Ijatfi, half)) by adding the neuter til in the num- 
bers 3-19 (in adjtel one t is dropped) and ftet after 19 :i as, 

ba§ Srittef, the third j cine tuertet fflltilt, a fourth of a 7nile. 

4 ^fllti, half is inflected like other adjectives except when used alone 
before proper names (51,1) or when compounded to form a numeral : as, 

1. eine f)ai&e Stmtbe, a half hour, half an hour. 

2. att'bert^alfi $u| fang, afoota?id a half 'long (59, 1). 

3. in tuer'tcfjatf) Stmtben, in three hours and a half 

5 Vocabulary 

ber Sotuttug, bic — e, Sunday ber $ii'it, bie 3u'K3, /z//j/ 

ber WidntaQf bie — e, Monday ber 3fugttft', bte — e f August 

ber $ien3tag, bte — e, Tuesday ber ©cptem'&er, bie — , September 

ber 2ftitttt)odj, 2 bie — e, Wednesday ber Drto'fcr, bie — , October 

ber $>otttter§tag, bie — e, Thursday ber 92ot>em'&er f bte — , November 

ber $reitag, bie — e, Friday ber Siegem'&er, bte — , December 

ber Sonn' a&enb, bie — e, Saturday ber $rUf)'(ittg, bie — e, spring 

ber Samgtag, 3 bte — e, Saturday ber (Summer, bie — , summer 

ber San'uar, fric — e f January ber ^perbft, bie — e, autumn 

ber $e'&ruar, bie — e, February ber 2$inter, bie — , winter 

ber Mrs, bie — e, March Sftt'faitg, 9ftttte, Ohtbe 9)lat, /#* &?« 
ber 9tyrtf f bte — e, April ginning, middle, end of May 

ber Stttri, bie 9ftate(tt), ^#y er murbe ge&5'rett, /z*? ««w for*? 

ber Su'nt, bie $u'tti3, /^^ fter&en, ftarfc, ift gcftorbcu, die 

x tet = %i\\, part. 2 See 136, 3. 3 Chiefly Southern. 



THE ORDINAL NUMBERS 6 1 

To ask the day of the week, toeldjer £ag is used ; the day of i 
the month, bcr tt)ictuel(f)te : as, 

i. tueldjer £ag ift fjeute? what day {of the week) is to-day? 

2. bctt tmeiiieftett f)afan ttur Jjeute? wto <$y of the 7?ionth is it? 

Exercise 56, German into English 

1. 28e(cr)en %a§ bjaben roir ^eute, gri£? 2. ^peirte ift Sffton^ 2 
tag. 3. 3)ert roieoielten fcfjreiben (or fjaben) roir fjeute? 4. §eute 
ift ber fiinfte. 5- ©0 fcfjreibe id): Berlin, s Dc,ontag, ben 5. (or 
ben 5ten) Sanuar 1904. 6. 28ann ttmrbe 1 ©cfjiller geboren? 

7. (£r ttmrbe 1 am 10. Sftouember 1759 §u s JJcarbad) geboren. 

8. @eftorben ift er §u SSeimar am 9. SOcai 1805. 9. 3d; tin 1 
and) am gerjnten ^ooember geboren. 10. Sn bem §erbfte be3 
SafjreS — (= fo nnb fo), in bem Satjre 17 — (= fiebgerjntyim* 
bert fo unb fo), in bem SQconat 2tyrit, or (Snbe 9cooember in bem 
Satjre 184- (= a<§ tjefjn I) un bert in ben SBiergtgem) ttmrbe 1 ein 
grower $onig geboren. 11. ©er)ft bn SDcontag 2 nadj Berlin? 
12. 9cein, erft am ©onnabenb 2 bin id) nad) §aufe gefommen. 
i3« 3d) bteibe fjier oon ©omiabenb morgen ben 6. big 2)onner3* 
tag ben 11. Snni 

Exercise 57, English into German 

14. Goethe was x born on August 28, 1749. 15. He died 3 
March 22, 1832. 16. Were (bift) 1 you also not born in the 
month of August ? 17. Yes, I was (bin) 1 born on the fifth of 
August. 18. My brother was (ift, ttmrbe, or roar) 1 born March 
17, 1883. 19. What day of the month is to-day? 20. It is 
' Saturday the twenty-eighth. 21. Father came home (on) Fri- 
day 2 and remained till Monday night. 22. In the middle of 
October we are going to France. 

1 ttntrbe or roar (past) is used of the dead ; Bin (present), of the living. 

2 The accusative is better for future time, the dative for pa st time. 



62 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXX. THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 
The possessive pronouns are inflected like btefer (8, 2) and 
should be distinguished from the possessive adjectives, which 
are inflected like feitt (20, 1) : 

ber, bte, ba§ mei'tuge 1 
ber, bte, bft3 bet'tttge 
ber, bie, ba§ fei'ttige 
ber, bte, bag tyrtge 



matter 


tttettte 


tttettte^ 


be titer 


beitte 


behte§ 


fetttcr 


feitte 


fettte^ 


tfjrer 


tfjre 


lt)ve§ 


uttfrer 


uttfre 


uttfer^ 


eurer 


ettre 


cuer3 2 


tljrer 


ifjre 


tl)re3 


Sfjrer 


3f)*e 


%1)Vt§ 



ber, bte, ba§ tm'frtge 

ber, bte, ba§ eu'rtge 

ber, bie f ba§ tfj'rige 

ber, bte, ba§ $l)'rige 



mine 

thine, yours 
his, its 
hers, 62, 2 



ours 
yours 

theirs, 62, 2 
yours 



N. 


tf)rer 


t^re ft)re3 


ber tfyrige 


bie tfirige ba§ tfirige 


G. 


tljreS 


tfjrer tf)re3 


bc3 iljrigett 


ber ifirigett be3 tfirigett 


D. 


tfjrettt 


t&rer tftrem 


bcm ttjrigett 


ber ffirigctt bent tfirigett 


A. 


tfirett 


tftre tljreS 


ben tfyrigett 


bie tfirige ba& tfirige 


N. 


tftre 


tfire tfire 


bie Ujrigett 


bie tfirigett bie tfirigett 


G. 


tfirer 


ffjrer tfirer 


ber tljrigett 


ber tfirigett ber tfirigett 


D. 


tfjrett 


tfirett tfirett 


ben tfjrigett 


ben tfirigett ben tljrigett 


A. 


tfire 


tyxe tfire 


bie t^rtgen 


bie tfirigett bie tfirigett 



Vocabulary 



bS§ 9Jleitte, what is mine 
ber $td)ter, bie £>tdjter, poet 
bff§ ©ebid)t', bie ©ebtdj'te, poem 
bie Stebe, /<w/* 
ber $arf, bie $arfe, park 
bS§ D^edjr, bie D'teifyre, r?^/, /aw 
bie ©ette, bte ©ettett, side, page 
ber $er3, bie SSerfe, swy* 



redjt fjafcett, fe r/^/z/ 

tut'redjt \) often, fo wrong 

mt'redjt tittt, with d., <2fo wrong to 

fid) $vfotn t fnd yourself be found 

bort, //^/^ (over there) 

ttttter f prep, with d. or a., under, 

among 
trietteidjt', perhaps 



1 Or, less commonly, ber, bie, bo§ tttettte ; ber, bte, bag beitte ; etc. In the 
spoken language the biefer-forms are the commonest. 2 See 20 2 . 



THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 63 

In the predicate, metrter etc. not only express possession, but 
also distinguish the object possessed. Mere ownership is ex- 
pressed by the uninflected forms, tnetn, bein, etc., unless the 
sentence has the neuter subject e£, bct§, jetted, bteS, or toetdjeg 
(65, 1) referring to a noun that is masculine or feminine : as, 

1 . btefer 9foif tft ber fehttge (or f ettter), this coat is his (that is, his coat, 

belonging to him and distinguished from other coats). 

2. Ijter tft ber Ofatf, cr ift feht, here is the coat; it is his (mere owner- 

ship); but, t§ tft fehter, it is his coat; tft e§ f enter ? is it his coat? 

Exercise 58, German into English 

i. StaxU Dnfet unb meiner ftnb tange im ^arfe ge6(ieben f 
tnettetcrjt fommen fie jegt nad) §auje. 2. 5tuf toelctjer <&ette ber 
(Strafee ift ba3 §au£ 3rjre3 DnfelS unb ba3 Sfyrige? 3. ©eme3 
ift bort am $)3arfe, aber mete tft auf btefer ©ette ber ©trafte. 
4. §ter ftnb ®arl3 SBudjer unb metne. 5- Sftethe ftnb alt, aber 
feme ftnb gcm^ neu. 6. Set, aBer feme $ucf)er ftnb aud) Sf)te, 
unb bte 3t)rigen feine, nictjt roafjr? 7. <Ste fyaben retf)t, unter 
ben (Stebtcrjten be3 beutjdjen ^)ict)ter§ SBtlfjefm duller finben fid) 
folgenbe QSerfe: 

£)a3 9M)t fagt: „3ebem ba$ @eme!" 

£)te Stebe: „3ebem ba3 £)eme!" 

Exercise 59, English into German 

8. See that dog in the garden ; is it yours or mine ? 9. It 
is yours ; but where is my dog ? 10. It is there with mine, 
under the tree. 11. I see the tree, but I do not see your dog 
or mine. 12. Shall we do wrong to Charles's uncle or to 
yours if we go to the Millers? 13. No, but where are our 
hats ? Is that (ba$) mine ? 14. Yes, but this is not mine. 
15. No, yours lies there on the table. 16. Take yours and 
give me mine. 17. Yours is larger than mine. 



6 4 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXXI. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (170, 1) 

ber bie ba§ that 64, 2 

biefer btefe biefel, bte3 this, the latter infl. as at 8, 2 

jener jette jene3 that, the former infl. like btefcr, 8, 2 

beYjemge bie'jemge ba^'jenige that (170, 2) infl. like berfet'be, 64, 2 

berfeffce biefel'fce badfel'fie M* .ra/^ 64, 2 

foldjer foldje fo(d)e3 j«^ infl. like biefer, 8, 2 



N. 


ber 


bie ba£ 


berfefbe 


biefefbe ha&)d'be 


G. 


beffen 


beren beffen 


ht$)d'ben 


berjefben beSjel'ben 


D. 


bent 


ber bent 


bemjefben 


berfefben bemjel'ben 


A. 


ben 


bie bft3 


benfei'bett 


biefefbe baSfel'be 


N. 


bie 


bic bie 


btefefben 


biefefben' biefefben 


G. 


beren 


beren beren 


berjefben 


berfefben berfel'ben 


D. 


benen 


benen benen 


benfefben 


benjerben benfel'ben 


A. 


bie 


hie bie 


biefel'ben 


biefel'ben biefel'ben 



Because of the lack of pronouns in English, ber is often translated as 
an emphatic personal or possessive pronoun : as, 

1. \a, ber fritt id), yes, I am he (cf. z§, 17, 1) ; fie war mtt 2lmta unb be= 
rett $ater, she was with Anna and her (Anna's) father. 

When alone, or after em or fein, foldjer is inflected like an adjective; 
before em, and often before adjectives, the uninflected form fold) is used 
(but see 6s 1 ): as, 

1. foldje $iid)er, such books • ein fulrfje^ Shtd), such a book. 

2. fold) ein $udj, such a book; fo(d) gutem $lamtc f to such a good man, 

fo(d)(e) fdjime SBurmett, such pretty flowers. 



Vocabulary 



blafy, pale; tbt f dead 

bie £e£e, bie ^ejett, witch, hag 

ber ^ots'ljaucr, bie $ol$'\)aMtv f 

woodcutter 
bfi§ Seoett, bie 2euett, life 



SOZargare'te, Margaret: @rete, 

Margery ; ®retd)en f Madge 
ttattten§, of the name of, named 
tief, deep 
ttJoflen, woflte, gewoflt, will, want 



THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 6$ 

$a3 or jene3, that, btc3, this, or nield)e3, which (66, i), is i 
often used to introduce a sentence, the verb of which agrees 
with the predicate nominative (cf. c§ r 17, 1) : as, 

1. ha§ ift ntetne (5d)rocfter, nub bie3 Bin id), that is my sister, and this 

is I j bte3 ftnb ntetne S3ritber r these are my brothers. 

2. toetdje§ ftnb 3fl|tfC @djtt>eftertt? swAacA are your sisters? 

Exercise 60, German into English 

i. £>n etnem 2$albe an ber ©ee tuofjnte etn ^ot^auer, na- 2 
men3 «!peinrid) r ber fjatte 5toet fctjone ®inber, §an3 unb ©retdjert. 
2. 3)iefe toar fixrtf unb jener 5ef)n Sa^r (59, 1 ; or gefjn 3ctf)re) 
alt. 3- 5I6er fie fatten nicfjt btefetbe ^cutter gef)a6t 4. £an* 
fen£ Gutter mar fcfjon fett neun Saljren tot, unb je|t ftarb aud) 
bie ber @rete (171, 2). 5. £)er $ater tear gut gegen «£)an3 unb 
beffen ©cfjtoefter, aber ba§ Sebett ber ®inber toax immer etn unb 
baSfel&e. 6. 5( n benifelbert Xage, ate @rete3 Sautter ftarb, tna^ 
ten fie tief im SSalbe, too fie 53(umen fudjten. 7. (Sine alte 
^eje fam gu thjien, bie tear freimbltd) gegen fie unb fagte: 
„©eib tt)r e3, meine fcfjdnen Slinber, tt)a£ rooftt tfyr?" 8. §)er 
Sunge ttmrbe Ua% antmortete aber: „9)Mter ift Iran! 5U §aufe, 
unb fie liebt folcrje SBfomen ttrie biefe." 

Exercise 61, English into German 

9. Yesterday father took Fred and his (Fred's) brother into 3 
town and bought them hats and books. 10. He showed them 
two kinds of hats and said, " Do you want one of this kind 
(einen fotdjen) or one of this kind?" 11. That is Fred's hat, 
and this is his brother's (that of his brother). 12. These are 
the books. 13. Jack has never had such a good (einen fo gnten) 1 
hat as this (53, 1). 

1 Such a is often expressed by ein f o or fo em (for eitt fold) or fold) ein) ; no 
such, by fein fo: as, fo einen £ut, such a hat; in einem fo grojjeu ©arten, in 
such a large garden ; !eine fo grofeeit 23itd)er, no stick large books. 



66 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XXXII. THE RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS (170) 



ber 


bie 


ba§ 


//z#/, w^tf, which 


infl. like ber at 64, 2 


metdjer 


mcldje 


melcfieg 


that, who, which 


inn. like biefer, 8, 2 


mer 


mer 


toa§ 


whoever, whatever 


infl. like mer at 66, 2 


metdjer 


meldje 


me(d)e3 


which ? what f 


infl. like biefer, 8, 2 


tuer 


mer 


ma3 


who f what f 


66,2 



Singular 


N. 


mer 


who f 


mer 


ma3 


W^fl/ / 


in form, but 


G. 


meffett 


whose ? 


meffett 


meffett 


of what f 


used of both 


D. 


tuem 


to whom f 


mem 







numbers 


A. 


men 


whom f 


men 


ma3 


what ? 



SSefdjer (rel. or interrog.) is not used in the genitive except as an ad- 
jective. Before eitt or an adjective, the exclamatory form meld) is used: as, 

1. &atjer melcfie^ 2?o(fe3? emperor of what people? 

2. me(d) ettte Stabt! what a city.' meld) fdjiitte Gkfiattbe! what pretty 

buildings ! 

In the interrogative or exclamatory phrase mft§ fur (eitt) or ma3 , ♦ ♦ 

fur (eitt), what kind of , the case of eitt depends on the construction: as, 

1. ma3 fitr eitt $au§? what kind of house ? itt mag fitr eittem ^attfe? 

in what kind of house ? ma§ fitr See (or 23tittttett) ! what tea (or 

flowers)\ ma§ fitr eitt fdjimer £mt! what a pretty hat! 

A relative pronoun is never omitted (as is often done in English). 
For emphasis, or when required by the construction, mer is followed by 
the demonstrative pronoun ber : as, 

1. ber $ftatttt, bett id) geftertt fat), the 7nan (that) I saw yesterday. 

2. mer frit!) tarn, bettt gafiett fie, whoever ca?ne early, to him they gave. 

When the antecedent is in the first or the second person (142, 4), the 
relative pronoun ber is used, and if emphatic is followed by the personal 
pronoun; but if the personal pronoun is omitted, the verb of the relative 
clause is put in the third person: as, 

1. bo§ fagft bit, ber bit itttmer mem $rettttb gemefett fiift? and you say 

that, who have always been my friend? 

2. id) bin eitt firmer, ber ttid)t3 fiat, I am a poor fellow that, etc. 



THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS 67 

Demonstrative and relative pronouns that are alike in form 
are distinguished by the position of their verbs : as, 

1 . t§ mar ciit Sftamt, ber mar arm (ber, he, demonstrative, 64, 3). 

2. eS mar eta Sftamt, ber arm war (ber, who, relative, 1 2, 3). 

The relative pronoun ttm£ (not bct3 or raeld)e3) is used after 
a neuter pronoun, or after a neuter adjective used as a noun, 
or in referring to a whole sentence : as, 

1, aUt§ (or \>a$ 23efte), ma§ td) Ijabe, «// (or //«? £*tf) that I have. 

2. er f am ttidjt, ma3 ungiitig mar, /^ *#tf not come, which was unkind. 

Exercise 62, German into English 

1. SSer finb <Ste, ntetn §err? 2. 3)a3 fragen @te, ber @te 
nttr geftern a6enb fpat auf ber ©trafje gefolgt finb, unb beffert 
@o£m geftorben ift? 3- 2$emt (Ste ber finb, ft) finb ©te ber 
gate greunb ber 5Xftert unb ber airmen. 4. SB.eldj fdjone ®tn> 
ber ! SSeffert ®tnber finb ba$ ? Unb mem fyaben ©te ba£ (Mb 
unb bte fdjjonen SHetber gegeben? 5- 3 ra 9 eit ^^t ^ er ^ e f e 
SHnber finb? ®ie§ finb bte Sltnber, beren better unb 3J?utter 
geftern abenb fpat rjter im ©arten raaren. 6. 2)as> SBefte, raa3 
id) 6et mtr rjatte, f)abe id) ifmen fdjon gegeben. 7« 3)er SDrenfd), 
bent tc^ ba3 @elb gegeben fjabe, nnrb attd) morgen abenb fjter 
fetn, unb @tc toerben il)n fefjen. 8. £)a3 finb bte Ketnen SHn= 
ber f benen \§ t)ie ®letber gegeben fjabe. 

Exercise 63, English into German 

9. Are you the man that came this morning, whose little 
daughter is ill ? 10. He is the same man you saw last night 
in the street. 11. Who are these boys? 12. These are the 
boys that were here yesterday. 13. Are you really the boys 
who were here yesterday morning ? 14. Yes, we are the 
same boys ; we are the ones (bte) to whom this gentleman gave 
the money to-day. 15. He has given you all that he has. 



6$ 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXXIII. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, PART I 

after, afle, aUe§, all; before pronominal words or the definite article the 
uninfected form aft is generally used, afte £5ge, every day (but, ben 
gunmen £ag, all day) ; afte nnb jebe r each and all. 68, 3 

bzibt§ f 5eibe§, Beibem, Betbe3, neut. sing., both things; pi., Betbe, Betber, 
etc., both, or bte Betben, etc., the two. toir Betbe, both ^/"^(distributively, 
54, 4) ; ttJtr Betben, we two (collectively, 54, 4) ; afte Betbe, both (distrib- 
utively, 54, 4); fetncr tttht Betben, neither of the two 

etner, etne, tin(t)§, one, or ber eitte f bte etne, ba§ eme, the one. 68, 2 

jeber, jebe, jebc^ f everybody, everything; after ettt (20, 1), inflected like 
an adjective (50, 1). jeber Dim Betben, each of the two 

je'bermann, je'bermann^, everybody 

je'manb, je'mattbCe)^, somebody, anybody 

fetner, feine, fein(e)3, none, nobody. 68, 3 

man, g. eme3, d. einent, a. einen, we, you, they, people, somebody 

nie'manb, nte / manb(e)§, nobody 



N. 


einer etne 


etn(e)3 


ber etne 


bie etne 


ba$ eine 


G. 


etne£ enter 


eine 3 


be$ einen 


ber einen 


be3 einen 


D. 


einem einer 


einem 


bem einen 


ber einen 


bem einen 


A. 


einen etne 


ein(e)3 


ben einen 


bie etne 


ba$ eine 


N. 






bie einen 


bie einen 


bie einen 


G. 






ber einen 


ber einen 


ber einen 


D. 






ben einen 


ben einen 


ben einen 


A. 






bie einen 


bie einen 


bie einen 



After the plurals afle and feine (denoting determinate numbers, " all " 
or " none "), adjectives should have the weak form (=en) : as, 

1. afte gnten Seute, all good people (but, aft or afte feine SBorte, all his 

words, feine being pronominal). 

2. feine gnten Sente, no good people. 

To refer to a person or to persons without indicating the sex, the 
neuter singular is used : as, 

1. afte3 ging nad) £anfe, everybody went home. 



THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 69 

Exercise 64, German into English 

1. .gaben ©te unfern guten 5l(ten gefefyen, liebe3 graulein? i 
2. (£t fam 5U un3 meiften£ aHe bier donate, aber feit einer 
SSodje lommt er affe Xage ; rjeute ift er ben gan-^en Stag geblie- 
ben. 3* ®eftern abenb lam er fpctt mtt meinen betbert Jiingften 
SBriibent. 4. Gsr fagte ^u mt3 : „OTe3, raa3 tc£) rjab.e, ift euer." 

5. £>te beibert ®inber banften ifyn, unb and) id) banfte ifjm fetjr. 

6. 3d) rjabe me fo einert gefeljen rate irjn. 7- @r ift gut gegen 
alle unb jebe, unb letner rairb tun, raa3 er getan Ijat. 8. 3a, 
beibe^ ift raafyr. 9. 9(ft bie ^tnber (ieben itjn, nicfjt raafjr? 
10. 3araof)f, ratr aHe Iteben i()it. 11. ©0 geljt e3 intnter: raenn 
man freunblid) unb gut ift, fo ge()t e3 einem (not it)m) gut. 

12. 5(6 er raa§ raerben <Sie mtt all biefen fdjonen <Sad)en tun? 

13. Wlcm (or (£<§) flopft ! Sft jemanb ba ? 14. 3d) fja&e etraa3 
getjort, aber id) fefye niemanb. 15. Stub betne betben <8d)me= 
ftern bjier? 3d) l)abe feme bou betben geferjen. 16. OTe beibe 
finb t)ier mtt einem unfrer $ettern. 17- 3Se(d)e Hon betben ift 
geftern morgen 311 mtr in bie ^iaU gelommen ? 18. £)ie Heine 
9Inna raar ba mit all ifiren ©atfjen, aber fie §dtte fern ($elb 
bei fid). 19. }Qat jeber rjeute <25elb bet fid) ? 3Benn man in 
bie ©tabt gebjt, fo braucrjt man ®etb. 20. 3d) rjabe rjeute lein^ 
bei mir. 

Exercise 65, English into German 

21. I have all my money with me ; have you yours ? 22. I 2 
have none ; but father sends me money every three weeks. 
23. Will one of your brothers go with us ? 24. Yes, both, 
but none of my sisters. 25. Are your two sisters at home 
now? 26. One of the two is here, and both cousins. 
27. Has neither of you boys (bon end) feaben) been at your 
sister Elizabeth's? 28. No, nobody has sent for us for ten 
days. 29. Bur you two will go to-morrow, 



7o 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXXIV. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, PART II 

anbrer, attbre, attbre^, other, bcr anbre, etc., the other, or ein anbrer, etc., 
another (= a different; another meaning one more is notf) eht or nod) : 
as, ttorf) ettte Xafje, another cupj nod) SBrot, more bread). 70, 2 

(ein) Biftdjen, (a) bit, uninfl. neuter, ttttt ettt fleitt orftdjett S8r5t f with, etc 

ct'tttger, efittge, ci'ntge3, some (two, three, or four), collectively 

ettt paav t a few, some, uninflected neuter, ttttt eitt ttaar Morten, with, etc. 

ef tt»a§ (colloq., ttm§), something, some, uninfl. neut. fo ettt)tt3, J2^ tf M/z/g- 

gettng', enough, uninflected neuter 

tttand)er, mattdje, tttattdje^, many a, a good many, distributively (cf. otel); 
before eitt, and often before adjectives, the uninflected form tttattrf) is 
used, ntattdj (eht) gftrer (or tnattdjcr gttte) SRanit, many a good man 

ntei)r r more, uninflected neuter comparative (54, 1) 

tttefj'rere, mefi/rerer, tnefi/rerett, tnefi/rere, several, distributively 

tttd)t3, nothing, uninflected neuter 

meter, Otetc, Otcfe§, much, many, distributively, or ber Dtete, etc., the mass 
of; mel, much, uninflected neuter, collectively. Otet(e) Stpfel 

tuelrfjcr, ttJClrfje, ttield)e§, some, not used as an adjective 

ttJe'tttger, toe'tuge, ttte'tttgc^, little, few, distributively, or ber toe'ntge, etc., 
the little, the few; (ettt) ttietttg, (a) little, uninflected neuter, collec- 
tively, ttttt ettt tteitt Weittg $rot, with a little bit of bread 

ttJe'tttger, less, fewer, uninflected comparative (54, 1). roe'tuger famett 



N. 


anbrer 


anbre 


anbret 


ber anbre 


bie anbre 


ba$ anbre 


G. 


cmberS 


anbrer 


anber3 


be3 anbertt 


ber anbertt 


be3 anbertt 


D. 


anberm 


anbrer 


anberm 


bcm anbertt 


ber anbertt 


bcm anbertt 


A. 


anbertt 


anbre 


anbret 


ben anbertt 


bie anbre 


ba$ anbre 


N. 


attbre 


anbre 


anbre 


bie anbertt 


bie anbertt 


bie anbertt 


G. 


anbrer 


anbrer 


anbrer 


ber anbertt 


ber anbertt 


ber anbertt 


D. 


anbertt 


anbertt 


anbertt 


belt anbertt 


belt anbertt 


bett anbertt 


A. 


anbre 


anbre 


anbre 


bie anbertt 


bie anbertt 


bie anbertt 



Distinguish attbre^, other, from attber3, otherwise, else, which is used 
uninflected as adverb or pronoun: as, tttdjt anber3, not otherwise; tt>er 
attberg? who else? ttttt tuem etitber^? with whom else? 



THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 7 l 

After the plurals anbre, ei'ttige, maudje, mcfj'rere, tilth, toe'* i 
ttige (denoting indeterminate numbers) and fofdjC (64, 4), adjec- 
tives should have, especially in the nominative and the accusa- 
tive, the strong form (*e; cf. 68, 3) : as, 

1. aubrc gtitc Settle, other good people. 

2. attbm gttter (or gutett) Settte, of other good people. 

Exercise 66, German into English 

1. grt£ wax mtt ein paax Sfrtaben in meinen @arten gegan^ 2 
gen nnb rjatte tnefyrere gute Spfet gefnnben. 2. 3)ann !amen 
anbrer Sente $tnber, etn<8 nad) bent anbcrn. 3- 3)aS etne rjatte 
otele Spfel, bie anbern fatten toenige. 4. „333otIen ®ie %p\d?" 
fragte ber cittefte ^nabe, ber bie meiften Spfet f)atte r „ober l)a- 
ben ©te njeld)e?" 5» „£)anie beften3, id) f)abe mcv)x Sfyfet al3 
U)t, t)abt it)r nid)t3 anbre£?" 6. ft %<§ t;abe mdjtS a(3 Spfel," 
anttoortete er. 7. r ,@tnige Don un3 Ijabcn njemgcr a(* id)." 
8. „^tele rjaben toeing nnb brandjen and) toeniger al§ anbre," 
fagte id). 9. „5l6er loentge Ijaben mcfjr, a(3 fie motion, toeil 
bie, bie btel fjaben, mefyc tooHen." 10. „%atoorj(," fagte er, 
„unb manner (or mancf) ein) 9J?enfd) braud)t fo uiele3 (many 
things) nnb v)at fo toemgeS (few things)." n. pollen ©ie 
nod) ettoa3?" 12. „3d) rjabe 33rot genng nnb genug uon bet= . 
nen 2ipfeln, aber jc£t brandje id) ein fletn btfjdjen ®db." 

Exercise 67, English into German 
13. "Do you want some money?" our mother asked. 3 
14. No, thank you, mother ; we have little, but with a bit of 
money we shall buy many things. 15. Many people have 
enough, but want more. 16. Some people have much money, 
and need little. 17. And some that have little need less. 
18. But those (bie) that have much or little want something 
better (etfua3 93effere£) or something different (ct\va§ anbres). 



72 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXXV. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE OF PECULIAR VERBS 

Verb stems ending in t, b, or m or u preceded by a mute 

(204) generally retain e before ft or t (12,2, 173). Stems 

ending in an s-sound generally retain e before ft, but ef or e is 

often dropped. For liquid stems see 20 2 . 



wait 


talk 


breathe 


open 


sit 




blame 


wander 


timrte 


rebc 


atme 


offne 


ft|e 




table 


roanbre 


trmrteft 


rebeft 


atmeft 


offrteft 


W% 


W 


tabelft 


roanberft 


roartet 


rebet 


aftnet 


i3ffnet 


(tftt 




tabett 


roanbert 


roarten 


reben 


atmen 


bffnen 


ftrjen 




tabeln 


roanbern 


roartet 


rebet 


atmet 


offnet 


m 




tabett 


roanbert 


marten 


reben 


atmen 


offnen 


jtt^en 




tabetn 


roanbern 



In the second and third persons singular of strong verbs, a 
generally becomes a\ an becomes ait; short e becomes short i; 
long e becomes ie in fcefcfj'fcn, command, em^fefjlett, recommend, 
gefdje'fjen, happen, lefcn, read, fdjcren, shear, fcljen, see, and \itiy 
lett, steal. If the stem of such verbs ends in t, the ending et 
is dropped. GJckn, nelntten, and ireteit are irregular. 



hold 


run 


help 


see 


give 


take 


step 


finite 


laitfe 


fjelfe 


fefjc 


gebe 


nefyme 


trete 


pttft 


ioufft 


$Hflt 


fictift 


gfbft, gtbft 


ntmmft 


trtttft 


pit 


lauft 


m* 


jiet)t 


gtbt, gtbt 


rtfmmt 


txitt 


fatten 


lanfen 


tietfcn 


jet)en 


geben 


nerjmen 


treten 


fiattct 


lauft 


^elft 


W 


gebt 


netnnt 


tretet 


fatten 


lanfen 


fjelfen 


jetien 


ge6en 


nefmten 


treten 



effett, eat, of persons 
freffett, eat, of animals 



Vocabulary 

fana.ett, fhtg, gefattgett, catch 
Stttcrn, sttterte, gcjittert, tremble 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD 73 

The existence of persons or of things in their natural sur- 
roundings is expressed by e£ gtbt, there is, there are (literally, 
it gives, that is, nature gives') : as, 

i. in 9(frtfa gtfit e3 Somen, in Africa there are lions. 

2. Ijcnte gibt t§ fyif ef|e f there will be fish to-day (a natural event). 

3. t§ gnu fcinen fdjimeren ©arten at§ biejett, no prettier garden than 

this existed. 

Exercise 68, German into English 

1. 3Skt3 gtbt'g (= gibt eg) Dleueg fjeute? ©djjlaft |)ang nod) 
md)t gut? 2. Deem, er gtttert am gan^en Seibe ben gan^en 
Sag, ber Softer empftef/lt if)m biefe Staffer. 3. ®ieg ift bag= 
fe!6e SBaffer, ba$ mix fo biel f)ilf t r aber jetted rjabe ic^ nidjt. 
4. §altft bu ben £)oftor fur einen greunb? 5. giir einen gu* 
ten greunb; id) glaube, er tut ttnnter fetn £tefteg. 6. <Seirt 
©ofut 3Stt()elm ift fetn guter Often) tfj, er frfjldgt immer meinen 
£mnb. 7- Gr fangt unb fd)(dgt jeben <£>unb, t)m er fie^t, raeil 
etn §unb fetnen jiiugeren SBruber gebtffen v)at 8. D, ba ift 
feanfen^ ©ctjtoefter 3(nna, fietjft bu fie? %&a§ fur einen fdjonen 
|jut fie tragi! 9. C \a, unb bag fdjone SKetb, ba§> fie fjeute 
trdgt, l)at il)r SBruber .'pang ifjr gegeben, eg ift gang neu. 

Exercise 69, English into German 

10. Do you see the old doctor, Jack? 11. If you step to 
this window, you will see him. 12. He is sitting there in the 
garden. 13. Yes, I see him now; he is talking with Frederic. 
14. No better friend than he exists. 15. Do you blame Fred- 
eric? 16. Yes, and the doctor blames him, because he does 
not help his sister. 17. If we wander toward the lake, we 
shall find Anna. 18. There she is with her dog; he is eating 
an apple. 19. You (man) breathe much better here than in 
the house. 



74 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXXVI. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD 
The familiar imperative singular of weak verbs and of luer* 
ben is formed by adding e to the stem. In liquid stems the e 
of the stem is dropped (20 2 ) : as, 



Present Infinitive 

jag-en (stem fag) 

tocmber-tt (stem number) 



Imperative Singular 
fag-e (bu) ! say 

trjcmbr-e (bit) ! wander 



The familiar imperative singular of strong verbs may be 
found by dropping (c)ft of the second person singular of the 
present indicative, except that a (or an) or of the stem re- 
mains as in the infinitive. Of feht, it is the simple stem : as, 



Present Infinitive 


2 Sing. Pres. Indie. 


Imperative Singular 




lef-en 


Hef-eft 


lie§ (bit) ! 


reaa 


nefjm-en 


nimm-ft 


ninrm (bu)! 


take 


ft|-en 


ftfe-eft 


We (ba) ! 


sit 


Irmf-en 


Ifittf-ft 


umf(e)(bu)< 


run 


fiof$-en 


ftBfreft 


ft5tf(e)(bu)! 


pus/ 


fei-rt 


bt-fi 


fei (bu) ! 


be 



fage (bu)! 


say {thou, you) 


lieS (bu)! 


fei (bu) ! 


fagt (IW 


say {ye, you) 


left (ifjr) ! ' 


feib (tlfr) ! 


fagen @tc ! 


say {you) 


lefett <Ste ! 


feien <Ste ! 



The familiar imperative plural of all verbs except feiu is formed by 
adding (e)t to the stem. For the form ending in en see 21 2 . Imperative 
sentences take the inverted order (11, 1; but, unless emphatic, bu or iljr 
is omitted) , and as a rule are followed by an exclamation point. 



Vocabulary 

ba= (bar= before vowels), there, it, bajtt 7 , to it, to them 

them, compounded with preposi- nu)= (Hum before vowels), whej'e, 

tions: as, barauf, on it, o?i them which, compounded with prepo- 

t>axa\l§' f out of it, out of them sitions: as, ttUJttmf, on which 



THE IMPERATIVE MOOD 75 

Before a direct quotation the dative of the indirect object I 
takes %u f to; but when the quotation is indirect, the dative 
alone is used : as, 

i. fie fagt sit bir : „Set gut!" she says to you, " Be good." 
2. id) fage bir, ba% id) gut bin, I tell you that I am good. 

Exercise 70, German into English 

1. ©eftern fagte id) ^u meinem fletnen better ®ctrt duller: 2 
„®omm ^u mir, ®arl, fe£e. bid) auf btefen ©tub/l tmb lieg mir 
au3 betnem SBudje t)or (lte3 . . . bor, mzaT /#)." 2. SBttte, fa- 
gen ©te mir, ma3 Star! ba^u fagte. 3. ©r antraortete: „§eute 
morgen fjabe id) feme Qdt, auer ^ er *ft mem £md), nimm'8 
(= mmm e§) unb lie§ fe!6ft !" 4. §oleit <Ste gefattigft meine 
groet 23iid)er! ©ie Itegen auf bemfetben £ifd)e, ttorauf S^r §ut 
liegt. 5. ©eten Sie fo gut unb fe£en ©ie fid) gu mir, unb 
bann fagen Sie mir ntdjt, mo Sie tjeute morgen gemefen fmb, 
fonbern \va$ ©k getan rjaben! 6. ©erjen ©te! Styr Hetner 
better ftefyt an bcr Xiir. 7. ®omm, bu Kleiner (54, 2, 4), unb 
get) gu SBctt! 8. (& ift rjorje 3ett, bafe bu fdjlftfft; gute 9cad)t f 
fcfjlaf njorjH 9. „@ud)e mid), unb id) gefje §u 2ktt!" antraor- 
kk ber Slleine unb lief au3 bem «£>aufe. 

Exercise 71, English into German 

10. Please go to the table and lay this book on it. 11. Then 3 
go to the door and say to my little cousin that we are going 
to bed. 12. If he runs into the garden, do not follow him. 
13. When he comes into the house, catch him and carry him 
into his room. 14. You will find my prayer book on the little 
table that stands at the bed. 15. Take it and read to him out 
of it. 16. Good night, sleep well. 17. Go to bed yourself, 
my dear friend, and sleep well till to-morrow. 



76 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXXVII. THE CONDITIONAL MOOD (150, 151) 

The past subjunctive of weak verbs except t)abm is like the 
past indicative (173); the past subjunctive of strong verbs 
and of fja&cu differs from the past indicative by having a, 0, 
or it modified and the suffix e retained by all stems. The 
pluperfect subjunctive differs from the pluperfect indicative 
by having [jcirte for fycttte, and ttmre for wax (26, 2, 28, 2, 30, 
i, 2): as, 



Past Indie. Past Subjv. 

jag-te jag-te 

mar roftr-e 

rourbe luurbe 



Plupf. Indie. 

Ijfftte gejagt' 
toar geroe'jen 
roar gerooYben 



Plupf. Subjv. 

f)Stte gejagt' 
inttre geroe'jen 
rottre geroor'ben 



say 



become 



The present conditional of a verb is formed by adding its 
present infinitive to ftiitrbe ) the past conditional, by adding its 
perfect infinitive (32, 1) : as, id) luitrbe fctgen, I should say or / 
should be saying; id) iuiirbe jjetocfett feitt, I should have been: 



Present Conditional 


Past Conditional 


id) rourbe 


jagen 


icf) 


rourbe geroe'jen jein 


bu raurbeft 


jagen 


bit 


roiirbeft geroe'jen jein 


er rourbe 


jagen 


er 


rourbe geroe'jen jein 


rotr rourben 


jagen 


rotr 


rourben geroe'jen jein 


it)x rourbet 


jagen 


it)x 


rourbet geroe'jen jein 


fie rourben 


jagen 


fie 


rourben geroe'jen jein 


.(Sie rourben 


jagen 


<3te 


rourben geroe'jen jein 



Vocabulary 

fi5§ or oBfe, wicked, cross £ut§'rf)ett (dimin. of Suije), Lou 

gar, quite: gar mrfjt, not at all \xvi\x, now, well; \)\tx\)lx' f hither, here 

getotf?', certain, certainly bie Sefjtt'fudjt, longing 

gtitcf lid), happy bie £ante, bie Xanten, aunt 






THE CONDITIONAL MOOD 77 

A conditional sentence in the past subjunctive is either less i 
vivid future ox present contrary to fact; in the pluperfect sub- 
junctive, past contrary to fact (151, 3, 4). In the conclusion 
(but not in the condition) of the sentence, the conditional 
mood (76, 2) may be used instead of the subjunctive : as, 

1. tt>enn fie Ijterfjcr fame, (fo) f tinge fie or (fo) ttmrbe fte ftngen, if she 

came (or should come) here (and she may come), she would sing. 1 

2. menn fte Ijterfyer fame, (fo) fringe fie or (fo) ttmrbe fie ftngen, if she 

were coming here (but she is not), she would sing. 1 

-«■'..«■ « ( (fo) Mite fte gefnngen or 

3. ttienn fte Sterner getommen ttmre, I )[ ; ' . ' ' t t 

( (fo) ttmrbe fte gefnngen tjaoen, 

if she had come here (but she did not), she would have sung. 

Exercise 72, German into English 

1. 9?mt, bu tteber $ctr(, menu bit in3 $au§ gtngeft, fo fan- 2 
beft bu beine Gutter. 2. (gie roiirbe btr betnen neuen |mt 
ge6ett. 3- 2lber loenn bu I)ter Mie6eft, fo gct6e id) btr ben met- 
ne3 ©of)ne3. 4. Sfteut, id) nerjme fetnen ntd)t r «£>err Sculler, 
aber menu id) bet grt| mare, roitrbe tdj irjm ben fetntgen net)* 
men. 5« ©agft bit, bu Kleiner (54, 2), bu rjdtteft beinem ^ru- 
ber ben |)ut genommen, menu bit bet trjm geraefen ractreft? 
6. 2Sa<o roitrbeft bu bagu fagen, menu bu gar ntdjt nacfj |)aufe 
gtngeft? 7- ©et ntdjt bofe, Xante Sutscfjen! Sdj fjabe grofje 
©efjnfucrjt nad) §aufe, unb genrifs raitrbe id) ung(itcfltd) fetn. 

Exercise 73, English into German 

8. Would your aunt be unhappy if she did not remain here? 3 
9. Yes, and we also should be unhappy. 10. If she had not 
come, I should. have gone home. 11. We should have re- 
mained at home, and Aunt Lou would have come to us. 
12. If she were not here, I should not be happy at all. 13. If 
we went home, she would go with us. 

1 Conditions i and 2 are alike and must be distinguished by the context. 



78 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XXXVIII. THE MOOD AUXILIARIES, PART I (200) 



Pres. Infin. 


Past Indie. 


Past Subjv. 


Past Partic. 




biirfen 


burfte 


biirfte 


gebnrff 


may, be permitted 


fijmtcn 


fomtre 


lijnnte 


gefonnt' 


can, be able, may 


ntogen 


ntod|te 


mod)te 


gentodjt' 


may, like 


ntitffen 


nutate 


mitfjte 


aetttttfjtf 


7mist, have to 


fatten 


fofltc 


follte 


gefoHt 


shall, ought 


molten 


ttJollte 


rooflte 


gewoflt 7 


will, want 



Present Indicative 


barf 


fann 


mag 


mufe 


foil 


torn 


barfft 


lanrtft 


mfigft 


mu^t 


foUft 


miaft 


barf 


fann 


mag 


mufj 


foil 


mm 


biirfen 


fonneit 


mogen 


miiffen 


fallen 


rooflen 


biirft 


fount 


mogt 


miifjt 


foHt 


mottt 


biirfen 


fonnen 


mBgen 


miiffen 


fallen 


mo den 



3 The inflection of the other tenses and moods is regular (186, 187). 

4 The mood auxiliaries are generally translated by their Eng- 
lish equivalents, may, can, etc., but these English words are 
so defective in inflection that other words must often be used. 
The mood auxiliaries are inflected with Ijabcn (26, 2) : as, 

1. id) tttttfj, I must; id) Ijabe gcmufji, I have had to. 

2. id) roerbe foniten, I shall be able; id) burfte, I was per?nitted. 



Vocabulary 



Ijer, a separable prefix or suffix 
implying motion toward the 
speaker or the writer, in his real 
or his assumed position (cf. Ijtn) 

fjerauf, up here 

l)erau3', out here 



fjftt, a separable prefix or suffix im- 
plying motion fro?n the speaker 
or the writer, in his real or his 
assumed position (cf. Ijer) 

fjtrnmf , up there 

rjtuaug', out there 



THE MOOD AUXILIARIES 79 

An infinitive generally has $u, to, unless it depends on a I 
mood auxiliary; but when dependent on a mood auxiliary, the 
infinitive itself is often omitted, and its object or its modifier 
appears to belong to the mood auxiliary: as, 

i . er Jjoffte etttmal git gefjett, he once hoped to go; bit tyaft tuet 311 tun, 
you have much to do. 

2. id) faun ntdjt gdjeit, I cannot go. 

3. er Witt l)erau3, aber er famt e3 tticf)t, he wants {to come) out,' but he 

cannot (do) so. Cf. " Murder will out." 

Exercise 74, German into English 

1. Gormen ©ie Ijeute morgen nut un£ getjett, Softer littler? 2 
2. 9?em, mem guter grennb, gefierrt fonnte idj e§, and) morgen 
fritf) roerbe id) nut Sfynen gefjen fonnen, aber rjente fjaue id) em 
paar SBrtefe an atte greunbe m fcfjretben. 3. ^teHetdjt mocfjte 
Sfyr fletner ©ofyn mtt un3 gel)en. 4. ©eftern bnrfte er mieber 
in bte ©d)ute gefjen, foOte aber ntdjt met tint. 5. £)eute farm 
er tool)! rjtrtauS, id) rotH t()n fragen. 6. SStr molten 511 Sfynen 
fjtnaaf unb auf tfjn marten. 7. 35itte, fommen ©ie, <Ste mer- 
ben ntdjt lange anf tt)n marten mitffen. 8. ®arf icf) fragen, 
mie lange ©te rjter mofjnen, |>err 2)oftor? 

Exercise 75, English into German 

9. Will you read this morning? 10. No, I am not permit- 3 
ted to do it, because I ought not to use my eyes. 11. Does 
your brother want to write? 12. He wants to read, but he 
cannot write. 13. He will have to learn it ; he will have to 
write and read letters. 14. Was he permitted to stay at home 
yesterday? 15. Yes, and he wanted to do nothing. 16. To- 
day he must go to school. 17. He will be permitted to go to 
his aunt's to-morrow. 18. May I ask where she lives? 
19. She lives in that little house ; can you see it ? 



8o 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 





bitrfcu 




been allowed" 




fihnteu 




been able 


er tyattt Metfcen 


tnogeit 


• t he would have ■ 


liked 




tnitffctt 




had 




soften j 




. wanted 



XXXIX. THE MOOD AUXILIARIES, PART II (200) 

' The mood auxiliaries have two past participles, one weak 
(ge — t r 78, 1), the other strong ( — en, without ge), exactly like 
the present infinitive (78, 1). This strong form is used when 
an infinitive depends on it : as, 

1. cr f)at e§ gerrutttt, he was able {to do) it (79, 1). 

2. cr §at z§ tint fomtett (not gefonnt), he was able to do it. 



to stay. 



4. er fyattt fitetfien foften, he ought to have stayed. 

2 The strong verbs fjetfjen, bid, faffett, let, cause to, and feljen, see, have 
also old past participles like the present infinitive (80, 1) ; the strong verb 
fjelfen, help, and the weak verb f)6reit, hear, and (less often) \%§\v\ f feel, 
leljrett, teach, lemen, learn, and matfjeu, make, use by adoption the pres- 
ent infinitive for the past participle. They all take the infinitive without 
5U(79> i) : as, 

1. ttitr fefjen fie fdjretben, we see her. writing: 

2. ttJtr fjaoctt fie fcfyretoen feffeu (not gejeljen), we saw her writing. 

3. er tjat mid) fmnmen faffett (not getaffen), he has had me come. 

3 When two infinitive forms stand together in a subordinate 
clause, the tense auxiliary (fjafctt or toerben) is not put at the 
end of the clause, but before the first infinitive or its modifier, 
according to the emphasis (120 1 ): as, 

1. ttJetl er ttrirb gctjcit ttwften, because he will want to go. 

2. mentt er geftern fy'attc (or Ijiitte geftern) Bteiben muff en (not gemufst), 

if he had had to stay yesterday. 

4 Vocabulary 

ftwgie'rett fafjrett, go driving gleitfj (colloquial for fcgletdj'), im- 

f^ajte'ren gef)(e)tt f go walking mediately 

fpagte'reu reiten, go riding fattg'fam, slowly; fdjitefl, quick 



THE MOOD AUXILIARIES 01 

fonnen or mogen means may == be possible ; but fonnett often I 
has the meaning of bitrfen f may = be permitted : as, 
i. ba§ rarnt (or mag) fetn, that may be. 
2. bu fauuft morgen geljcn, you may go to-morrow. 

Exercise 76, German into English 

1. ©utett 9)torgen, §etn^ raiftft bu rjeute morgen mit mir 2 
fpagieren fafjren? 2. $ieten S)anf (»ztf;y> thanks), Staii, aber 
icf) bin nictjt miibe unb modjte lieber (had rather, 57,1) jpagte- 
reit reiten. 3* 3d) fomme gleicf) toieber, id) rutll meine bret 
^Pferbe tjotert laffen, etnS fur mid), ein<3 fur bid) unb ein3 fitr 
meine fTeine ©d)roefter. 4. 5lber bier tft meine ©crjroefter, fie 
mbd)te am liebften fpagieren gefjen. 5- Sdu3n! £>eute morgen 
mollen mir fpagteren getjen unb tjeute abenb reiten. 6. s IBenn 
mir aber geftern fpa§teren gegangen roaren, fo fatten mir in ben 
^ar! gefjen biirfen. 7- 3f)r rjcittet bie Somen feb,en fonnen. 
8. 3Benn id) meinen SSater fyatte lommen laffen, fo fyattm mir 
mit tfjm gefjen fonnen. 9- ©r lonnte roenigften£ bi£ greitag 
bfeiben. 10. 9Iber er roollte nad) granfretd) (79, 1). 11. 3f)r 
ger)t fo fdmelf, ifjr beiben, lafjt un£ langfamer gerjen! 

Exercise 77, English into German 

12. Did you hear my father come into the house? 13. No, 3 
he has not been able to come. 14. If he had come last night, 
he would have wanted to go into the park. 15. We shall not 
be permitted to go into the park to-day; we ought to have 
gone yesterday. 16. But we should have had to go alone, 
and I had rather go with father. 17. He cannot be here to- 
morrow ; if we want to go, we shall have to go alone. 180 My 
older brother will be here Saturday, and we shall be able to 
go with him. 19. He would like best to go to-morrow, and 
we will have him come. 



82 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XL. IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS (191) 

i Six weak verbs have a change of stem vowel in the past in- 
dicative and the past participle : 



°res. Infin. 


Past Indie. 


Past Subjv. 


Past Partic. 




brcimen 


brannte 


bremtte 


gebrannt 


burn 


lentten 


fannte 


fenrtte 


gefannt 


know 


nennett 


uannte 


nennte 


gentmnt 


na?}ie 


remten 


rnnnte 


rertnte 


ift geranrtt 


run, rush 


fertbett 


fanbte 


jenbete 


gejartbt 


send 


Jaenben 


roanbte 


icenbete 


geiDanbt 


turn 



Three weak verbs have a change of stem vowel (and modification) in 
the past subjunctive, also; and they suffer consonantal changes in their 
principal parts, as in English. In the present indicative, ttriffen is in- 
flected like the mood auxiliaries (78, 2, 191, 3): 

brtngen otadjte brcid]te gebrad)t bring, take 

benfen bacfyte bad)te gebadjt think 

ttriffen ttmfcte ttmfjte ■ gettrofjt know 

A collective noun, unless followed by a nominative plural in apposi- 
tion, takes its verb in the singular. The verb is also singular with sin- 
gular subjects regarded separately or as forming a unit; and it may be 
singular (commonly so in the inverted order) when it stands next to a sin- 
gular subject (cf. 168,5): as, 

1 . cine -sKKenge turn Shtubett ttmr (but, eitte Sftettge ®itaben ttmrett) f erttg, 

a crowd of boys was ready. 

2. *pret3, (£f)re, £raft fet bent $ihttg ! glory, honor, power be to the king. 

3. ait mtb jttttjj tam (or famett), old and young came. 

4. fragteft ^n tutb bte SHttber nad) timt? did you and the children ask for 

him ? 

Vocabulary 
fentten, know, be acquainted with, ber (Stefattb'te, ein $efattb'ter, mes- 



as a person or a book 
ttuffett, know, as a fact 
frfjtcfett, send, as a package 
fettben, send messenger or message 



senger, aijtbassador. 48, 1, 50, 1 
fenttett lernett, becojne acquainted 

with (learn to know). 80, 2 
bte ^omnie, bte ^atm'ltett, family 



IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS 83 

Exercise 78, German into English 

1. SBiffett @ie, too |jerr Softer Wiitia tuof)ttt? 2. Deein, 
tdj fenne §errn 2)oftor SDftiHer mdjt nnb ioeijs jxtcTjt, too er 
toof)nt. 3. "paben ©ie feine altefte £orf)ter fetmen gelernt? 
4. Sdj fetme bie Xocfjter gar ttidjt, id) lenne aber §ernt bolter 
TluUtxS better §emrid) (Sdjmibt imb toeifs, too er bie£ Safjr 
geioofynt f)at. 5- Set) fjafce and) ben ©ofm, namenS -fpeing, lett= 
nen lernen (80, 2). 6. 9?mt r geftern iff eitt ®na6e Oon 2)oftor 
duller gerabe (Just) t)ierf)er gerannt, al3 loir au$ bem £)orfe 
rittett. 7. 2)od) rarntte er uo£ nad) (a/ter) imb fragte, toofnn 
totr rittett. 8. %\% loir fragtert, toa§ er Oolite, anttoortete er: 
ff §errtt WiilkxZ §au3 brennt, er tv'ili, bafc 6ie ifjm §ilfe brin- 
gen." 9. 2Bir fanbten i()ttt gleidj mefjrere banner nnb rittett 
fetbft nad) ^jaufe. 10. (Sine SDtettge Seute, alt nnb jung, grofj 
nnb fletn, gtngen gum 2)oftor. 11. Scfj benfe, er mufe ijeute 
toieber 511 §auje feitt. 

Exercise 79, English into German 

12. Do you know the German ambassador in Paris? 

13. Yes, I know him; I got acquainted with him this year. 

14. Has he brought his family with him? 15. No; I do not 
know where the children are. 16. I know one of the boys, 
and I want to send him some books. 17. The books are 
ready; if you can go, take (use brtngen) them to his father. 
18. I do not know where they live. 19. And I have no time 
now, but I will send brother John. 20. Do you know where 
John is? 21. No, but I think I can find him. 22. He knows 
the father and the mother. 23. If he can go, he will be able 
to take (bringen) the books to them. 24. If he cannot go, do 
you think you can go to-night ? 25. I do not know (3d) toeifj 
e3 ttidjt or £>a3 tDetB id) nicfjt), but perhaps I shall be able to go 
to-morrow. 26. I think I can go myself to-morrow. 



84 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XLI. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE (203) 

The so-called prepositions with the genitive are properly 
adverbs or adverbial phrases, on which the genitive depends 
as on a noun. The following are the most important : 

nn'ftatt or )tatt f instead of (in place of). 84, 4 

bte3'fdt(<§), on this side of (biefe ©ette) 

fjctfben or fyal'bev, in behalf of , following the genitive. 84,2 

j5tt'feit(S), on that (or the other) side of(\lm ©ette) 

(cutg§, along (keeping the course of), -sometimes with the dative 

tvofyf in spite of sometimes with the dative 

ftttt ♦ . ♦ ttnfleit, for the sake of. 84, 2 

tttSlj'tenb, during (within the time of) 

Wegeit, on account #/~(by way of), often following the genitive. 84, 2 

^patben, ttntfett, or njegett is compounded when used with the personal 
pronouns, feaibtv may be compounded with other words: as, 

1. met'ttetljaibett, on my behalf ; urn bti'mtmtlzn, for your sake; fei'= 

itcttuegett, on his account. 

2. el)'rctt!jatt>er (or ber (£f)re §aibtv),for honor's sake. 

Compounds of fyatb are an' j?evl) alb, outside (outer half of); itt'nerfjalb, 
inside (with the dative if the genitive is not indicated by inflection); 
5'berljafb, above; mitcvfyalb, below, xut'tcrljalb $erlttt3' f below Berlin. 

5(tt'ftatt or )tatt may be used before an infinitive with §u, or before a 
clause introduced by ba% that: as, 

1. anftatt hk§ gu tun (or mi)tatt baf? er btc§ tat), Mteb er, instead of do- 
ing this he remained. 

Vocabulary 

bie 2tb'ftrfjt, bte Wfidjten, purpose nterfen, merfte, gemerfr, notice 

bie Str'mut, poverty be§ 9Zadjt3, duri?ig the night ( 126, 4) 

baljer', consequently, so nuv f only 

ber $ieb, bte ^tebe, //zz<?/* bS§ Strofj, straw 

fafr, almost; ftn'fter, rtfer£ bie 2£anb, bie SSanbe, wall, of a 

bte §ittte, bie Jpittten, /W house 

$l)'rcin)egeu, on your account toerfett, toarf, gettJorfett, throw: 

leben, tebte, gelebt, &w/, /zV* ttmrf ♦ , . urn, upset 



THE PREPOSITIONS 85 

Exercise 80, German into English 

io @3 leBte einmat etit armer, fefjr armer alter 9ft ann in 
etrter fteinen §utte aufjerfjalb einer grofjert ©tabt. 2. ^n feiner 
§iitte fjatte er nnr gtoet (Stnb/le nnb anftatt etrte^ 23ette3 ein 
rnenig ©trot). 3- ^ro§ feiner 5lrmut famen ludtjrenb ber S^actjt 
gtoet 3)iebe in bie §ufte nnb batten ifym ettna^ §n ftef)(en. 
4. (£3 tnar fo finfter, baf$ bie £>iebe nicf)tg fefyen fonnten, nnb 
fie fatten fein £id)t; bafyer mnftten fie mtt ben .ganben Icings 
ber SSanbe be3 fteinen gimmersg fudjen. 5- Anftatt ettua3 gn 
finben, tnarf einer t)on i()nen einen ©tufjl urn. 6. 2)er arme 
$ltte offnete bie ?Ingen nnb tro(3 ber ginfterniso {darkness) fa!) 
er bie gtnei £)iebe. 7- ®r merlte ifjre 2Ibfid)t, aber anftatt ettoa£ 
gn tun, fagte er gn ifjnen fef)r (angfam: ,Mdm guten greunbe, 
fcr feib grof}e £oren; tfjr f)offt fjter eatm^ be3 9lad)t§ gu finben, 
nnb id) finbe tjier nictjt^ am £age." 8. 28a3 fyattft bn Don 
bem bitten unb oon benen, bie ifjm etnm3 ftet)len toollten? 

Exercise 81, English into German 

9. Shall you go to Germany instead of your cousin? 
10. Yes, but I shall go for the sake of my sister and on your 
account. 11. Does your sister live on this side or on the other 
side of the city? 12. She lives on the other side of the river, 
outside the city. 13. Inside of a week (innerfjatb einer 2Bocf)e) 
we shall be on the other side of the Rhine. 14. For her sake 
we shall live in Berlin almost all (68, 1) winter. 15. We shall 
go to my cousin, who lives below the city. 16. For your 
cousin's sake we ought to live on that side of town (ber ^tabt). 

17. Perhaps on his account we shall live outside Berlin. 

18. During the winter we shall go often to the opera (in bie 
Cper). 19. This winter we shall go to the opera instead of 
going to the theater (84, 4). 



86 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



XLII. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE (203) 
The dative with a preposition generally expresses the place 
where ox from which. 9lari), toward, to, and %n, to, are used 
with the dative although expressing motion toward: 

au§ f out of, of 

anfov, outside, beside, besides. 86, 2 

feet, at, near, with, at the house of, by (not of agency; cf. tion) 
eutgc'gett, contrary to (= merely in the opposite direction to, literally 
or figuratively; cf. guttu'ber, 86, 2), generally following the dative 
(see 87, 2, sentence 1). Cf. " contrary to expectation" 
gegenU'ber, facing, opposite, generally following the dative, er ttJofjttt 

ber £trd)e gegettii bcr r he lives opposite the church 
ttttt, with, of joint action, manner, or means (instrument) 
ttfld), toward, to (never of persons ; cf . git) * t after (of persons or of 

things), according to, sometimes following the dative. 86, 3 
feit, since, f eit gitiei SSodjen, for two weeks (of past time). 86, 2 
t)Ott, of, from, by (of agency, with the passive voice) 
git, to (with the infinitive and words denoting persons and some 
things; but not with the names of countries or of towns, where 
nad) is always used); at (git SSetfttt'; 511 WlWiaq, at noon). 86, 3 

9(ufter and fcit are properly adverbs, not being compounded with verb's. 
Some other adverbs also are used as prepositions (cf . 84, 1) : as, 

1. btnnctt adjt Sagen, within a week. 

2. bet 9 r Jatur / gemii^', according to nafoire. 

3. nSrijft ©oft bcmfe id) bit, next to God I thank you. 

4. 9ftar £). ttcfift fciner £$rau, Max H. together with his wife. 

5. bem ©ejel'e guttnber, in defiance of (in active opposition to) the law. 

With verbs expressing motion, nad), nad) . . . p, or §u following the 
noun, means simply toward, while §u in its usual position (before the 
noun) generally implies arrival at: as, 

1. id) gefye nad) bet <&tabt r I am going to (starting for) town. 

2. Deceit, fjimgern, fdjtefjen nad), bite at, hunger for, shoot at. 

3. tdj gtng (nadj) bem 28a(be git, I went toward the forest. 

4. id) gtng pr Stabt, / w^;z/ A? town (and arrived there). 



THE PREPOSITIONS %7 

When not referring to a person, the dative or the accusa- i 
tive of a pronoun with a preposition* is commonly expressed by 
adding the preposition to the demonstrative adverb ba(r)* or the 
relative adverb ttJo(r)* f or by using another adverb (74, 5): as, 

1. ntntnt bte3 nnb lit$ baran^' (== an§ tfjnt), take this and read in it. 

2. ba§ Siccv, UJOUon' (= Don bent) cr f&rarf), the army of which he spoke. 

3. in ber 8tabt, mo (= in bcr) er tooljttte, in tlie town where he lived. 

4. fett bent Sage, mu (= an bent) er ftarb, since the day that he died. 

5. bie %xi, tttte (= anf bte) id) leote, the way that I lived. 

Exercise 82, German into English 

I. 9Jtetne3 Waters 2Sitnfcf)en {wishes) entgegen (or gmoiber) 2 
ift metn 33ruber au<o bent §aufe gegaugen. 2. 2£a3 au<§ tfjnt 
tuerben foil, toeifj id) ntd)t. 3* Sett bem Xage, too unfre jitngfte 
©djtoefter ftarb, ift er me nadj $aufe gefommen. 4. ^e£t tvoiy 
nen totr bet ber $ird)e, bte ber Untoerfitat gegenitber liegt, aber 
toir gef)ett nte gur Stirdje. 5« Sett bem -lobe {death) ber Wa- 
lk (171,2) fdjtdft Start ntdjt gu §aufe, fonbern in ber &tabt 

6. Unb 5(nna toofjnt in ^art3 bet nnfrer Xante (Sttfabetf). 
7- 2Sir ftnb aufjer un3 unb rotffen gar ntd)t, ina3 rotr tun fok 
ten. 8. ©eftern ift unfer Dnfet <m§ SBerftn §u mtsi gefontnteu. 
9. Gsr toil! un3 nttt fid) net)tnen. 10. £)a ge()t er 5U gufj nadj 
ber £trd)e. 

Exercise 83, English into German 

II. Besides us nobody has lived (13, 1) here for (fett) three 3 
years. 12. We have lived here since (fett) the death of my 
sister. 13. But from to-morrow on (oon utorgen ait) we shall 
live opposite the church. 14. There is my cousin of (au<o) 
Berlin, but we shall not be able to go to Berlin. 15. It is 
now half past five by (nad)) my watch, and you have had no 
letter from home (toon £>ctufe). 16. Will you have something 
to eat (§u effett) or to drink? 



O 5 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XLm. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (203) 

The accusative with a preposition generally expresses the 
place whither; that is, the place toward, to, or into which: 

0t§, till, as far as (properly an adverb; cf. 84, 1, 86, 2), accompanied 

by another preposition when before the definite article 
imrcf), through, by (denoting cause or means, often of persons). 88, 2 
fur, for (= in view of, toward), in behalf of 
gegen, toward, against (= merely in the opposite direction to, literally 

or figuratively ; cf. ttuber). gegen ben ©trom, upstream. 88, 4 
oljne, without (not having; properly an adverb ; cf. 84, 1, 86, 2). 88,3 
itm, round (going toward an object, 1 often with the idea of getting 

it); vm /. ♦ §it, to, used with the infinitive to express purpose 2 
tt)tber f against (= in active opposition to, literally or figuratively; cf. 

gegen), soiber fan Strom, against the current 

l^urd) used as an adverb stands after the accusative: as, 

1. bfc§ gaujc %af)r bitrdj (or Ijinbnrd)'), the whole year through. 

Oljne is often used before an infinitive with gn or before a clause intro- 
duced by bafj, that (cf . 84, 4) : as, 

1 . ofjne iJ)r ttwa§ gu geoen, gtng er fort, without giving her, etc. 

2. gel) ttttfjt, otjne ba% id) c§ toetf?, do not go without my knowing it. 

Words with meanings directed toward an object are fol- 
lowed by gegen (not 511, as often used colloquially) : as, 

1. bic Steoe ®otte3 gegen bic SJlettfdjeit, God's love to mankind. 

2. tanfc gegen ben dtat fetner ^reunbe, deaf to the advice of his friends . 

3. frennbitdj, nn'frcnnbttd), gnt, pfiidj, mt'fjiifftdj, fait gegen bid), 

friendly, unfriendly, good, polite, wipolite, cold to you. 

Vocabulary 

bte $tr'oett, Me Str'oetten, work fdjttrimmen, swim 

ottten, Mt, ask (itm, for a thing) ber Strom, bte SrrBme, stream 

gemin'nen win, gain tEg'tid), daily (Sag) ; fort, away 

ber ^Ziftag, noon (midday) to&nxti)' t through or by which. 87,1 

!To go round an object, you must keep turning toward it, for any other 
direction will take you away from it. 2 Cf. " to compass your designs." 






THE PREPOSITIONS 5 9 

Exercise 84, German into English 

1. llrtfer tieber Skater tft tot, unb totr rjaben mcf)t3 gu effen i 
ober gu trtnfen. 2. 5(6er toer toill fur un<§, mid) unb bid), 
arbetten? 3« Hut ba£ taglidje S5rot 5U getoinnen, mliffen toir 
felbfi ben gangen Zaa, fdjtoer arbetten. 4. 2Iber mo ftnben totr 
bie Arbeit, tooburd) totr unfer tftgltdjeS 23rot getoinnen fonnen? 
5. 2Sir miiffen nad) Arbeit futfjen Hon rjter bt3 (or bt3 nad)) 
Berlin. 6. Unb Don jetjt an U$ 5Utn Xobe (or bis in ben Xob) 
miiffen totr un£ felbft fjelfen. 7- ©8 tft gut fiir un§, baf$ totr 
etnanber gu rjelfen toiffen. 8. Satootjl, fo toerben totr ntd)t urn 
33rot bitten miiffen. 9. Hub fo fonnen toir toiber ben ©from 
fdjtoimmen. 10. Urn totebtel ilt)r (or lint toetcrje Qdt) f°^ eit 
toir nad) ber @tabt fafjren? 11. SStr toollen urn gerjn Urjr 
gerjen. 12. SSteEetcrjt toerben bie Seute freunb(id) gegen un§ fein 
unb nn§ fjetfen, 2Irbett §u finben. 13. 3n ber (Stabt miiffen 
toir Arbeit fudjen unb bttrd) bie Arbeit greunbe getoinnen. 
14. Cfnte 2Irbeit lann man nidjt leben. 

Exercise 85, English into German 

15. The man came into the garden without my knowing it. 2 
16. He was very poor and asked for work. 17. But deaf to 
your advice, I sent him away without giving him anything. 
18. To-day I have sent him a letter through Karl. 19. If the 
man comes again to me, I shall give him work by which he 
can earn his bread. 20. It is hard to swim against the stream 
if you (man) have no friends to help you (einem). 21. When 
people (man) are polite and friendly to us, Ave ought not to be 
cold to them (irgenbeinen). 22. If we are not good to each 
other, who shall help us? 23. If you go as far as Paris and 
find the poor man, be good to him. 24. When you have good 
friends, do not be deaf to their advice. 25. And you will not 
have to ask for your daily bread. 



9° A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XLIV. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE OR THE ACCUSATIVE 

Some prepositions are used with either the dative or the 
accusative : the .dative to express the place where or from 
which (86, i) ; the accusative to express the place whither 
(88, i): as, 

an, 07t (beside), at, by, to, touching or vitally connected with. 90, 3 

auf, 011 (upon), up at, up to, the accusative often denoting the object, 
the limits or the manner of action or of thought. 90, 2, 3 

1) inter, behind 

ttt, in, into 

ite&Ctt, by, beside, near 

fiber, above, over, beyond, about (91 1 ), the dative implying no contact, 
the accusative implying previous inotion toward 

Witter, under, below, a?nong 

t)5r, before, infro7itof,fro7n (because of, being confronted by) 

Sttufdj'ett, between 

Ancient towns were generally built with the market and the public 
buildings in the center, on the higher ground; and so in speaking of 
elevated or of public places, auf is used : as, 

1. auf bent Wlatlte, at the market; auf bte Strafje, into the street. 

2. auf meittcm dimmer, up in my room; auf§ Sanb, into the country 

(which generally looks higher than where you stand). 

2In often denotes a close co7i7iection, while auf is merely local or inci- 
dental: as, 

1. er ift lafjm au eiuem $u|e, he is la77ie in (touching) o7iefoot. 

2. er ift ^rofeffor an ber Xtm&erfitat, he is professor at the tmiversity 

(cf. "on the board of directors," "on a newspaper"). 

3. er ftubtcrt auf ber XlnitJcrjttat, he is studyi7ig at the tmiversity. 

4. gel) an ba§ limit tgau§ I go to (communicate with) that s7Jiall house. 

Vocabulary 

^opffduuer^en, masc. pi., headache fid) nmnbern ituer, with a., wonder at 

auf 233tc'bcrfel)cu, till we tneet agai7i, stefjcu, 509, ge3ogen, draw, move 

au revoir barau', at (beside) it, etc., Sy, 1 

leibcn, (ttt, gelitteu, suffer ttioran', at what, etc., 87, 1 



THE PREPOSITIONS 9 1 

The indirect object is expressed by the dative unless art or 511 1 
is required for the sake of clearness : as, 

1. Ucrlau'fc ntir bcin ^ferb ! sell me your horse. 

2. uerfan'fe t>a§ $Pferb an midj ! sell the horse to 7>ie. 

3. gi& tfjm ben 23ricf an (Stifcbetl)! give him the letter to Elizabeth. 

4. er faitbte eitten 23oteu 511 bir (or an btdj), he sent a messenger to you. 

Exercise 86, German into English 

1. £)ore cmf mid), grig! ©i$t metn jttnger SBruber an ober 2 
au ; bent £ifd)e? 2. (£r fafj aitf bem £ifcfje, a6er jetjt \t%i er 
ftcf) baran. 3- ©r fdjreibt an feinen gretmb, ber in granffurt 
am Wain ttormt. 4- 333enn er fertig tft, too den fair nn3 anf * 
bie Dteife mactjen. 5- 3d) moctjte and) gem gel)en, tuenn 3f)r 
better ntcfjt bofe auf mid) toare. 6. (§<§ gefjt tftm f)eute mor- 
gen fd)led)t, er leibet fef)r an Stopfjcrjmer^en. 7« Scf) ttmnbre 
mid) immer ii6er tr)n, er arbeitet 3U (too) oieL 8. (£r mag t>ie( 
arbeiten, aber id] luetfs nid)t, ttoran er je^t arbeitet. 9. £od) 
f)aben ©ie einen gnten grennb an i()m, er benft immer an ©ie. 
10. Unb ©te braudjen fid) rttcr)t oor il)m 511 fiirdjten. 11. ©r 
ioofjnt itber mir, unb id) mag ifjn fefjr gern. 12. 3ej3t muff en 
mir abfar)ren; rair fafjren itber (3y way of) Berlin. %{\x\ SSteber- 
fel)en ! 

Exercise 87, English into German 

13. Lay this book on the table behind the door. 14. Then 3 
come and sit down beside Mary or between Fred and me. 
15. You sit too much over your books. 16. You ought to 
play more with the boys that live below us. 17. When they 
go to France, you will have to play alone. 18. We shall soon 
move into the country, where you will have the fields and the 
flowers. 19. To-night Professor Miiller will speak on flowers 
(itber bie Wurmen). 1 

1 Ci. oon bir tyredjen, speak of you; ttBer bid) fpredjeu, talk about you. 



92 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XLV. THE SEPARABLE PREFIXES (188) 

A verb is called separable when compounded with a separ- 
able prefix. The important separable prefixes are ab, off; an, 
on; auf, up; au§, out; bti, by (near); ba (bar before vowels), 1 
there; bar, in view; bauott', therefrom; eitt (not trt), into; 
tmpOX f ,up; entge'gctt, against, toivard, to meet ; \z\i f fast; fort, 
on, away; 2 fjchu, home; fjcr, here; ljut, there; lo3, loose; 
ttttt, with; natf), after; uiebcr, down; t)or, before ; oorki', by, 
past; tJorit'ber, past, gone; lueg, away; ineitcr , farther ; urieber, 
again, back; $u, to; ^nrM', back; gufam'ttteit, together. A 
separable prefix receives the principal accent, as in English. 

In the present and past tenses a separable prefix stands at the end of 
its clause (149, 1, 3, 6), except in the transposed order (12, 3): as, 

1. er ftef)t fritf) auf, he gets up early (auf jtefyen). 

2. er ftonb fritij auf, he got up early. 

3. ftcfjc frit!) auf ! get up early. 

03c of the past participle and gu of the infinitive are put between the 
prefix and the verb. But if the infinitive depends on tijerbeu or a mood 
auxiliary, ^\\ is omitted (79, 1): as, 

1. ttieuu cr fritf) auf geftaubeu ttmre, if he had got up early. 

2. er bittct bid) frill) aufjuftefjcu, he asks you to get tip early. 

3. er Urirb (or tuuf) frit!) aufftcfjen, he will (or must) get up early. 

Vocabulary 

ab'faljreu, fufjr ab' f tft ab'gefa^ren, auf madjeu, tuadjte auf, auf gemarfjt, 

start. 72, 3 open 

ao'oe^(e)u, start, go gu'madjeu, close (make to) 

au'faugeu, begin (lay hold on) auf gefj(e)u, rise, of the sun 

au'fommeu, arrive aufftef)(e)n, rise, get up, of persons 

au'gteljcu, dress (draw on) bie ©ouue, bie Sonuen, sun 

augj'jtefyen, undress (draw out) jjera'be, straight, just, exactly 

1 2)a (bar before vowels) is generally compounded with other prefixes: as, 
baran', thereon; OODOU ', therefrom. 2 on, forzvard ; then, away, gone. 



THE SEPARABLE PREFIXES 93 

A short infinitive phrase may stand inside a clause; but 
any infinitive phrase put after a clause should be set off by a 
comma, unless the infinitive is necessary to complete the sense, 
or has an object or a modifier before the verb on which it de- 
pends : as, 

i . e§ fangt git regtten an (or e§ fangt an 5U rcgnen), it begins to rain. 

2. er gtttg, ofjtte JU fpredjett, fort, he went away without speaking. 

3. c§ ift ftf)tt>er, gu (efen, reading is difficult; but, ba$ tft fc^tucr 511 (cfctt. 

4. (B0U1 gelaitg e§ Hjm 511 ftttben (or e3 gelang Ujm, ®otb §u ftnben), he 

succeeded in finding gold. 

Exercise 88, German into English 

1. ^m (Sommer gerjt bte Sonne jefjr friit) auf, unb mtr foil* 
ten and) friit) aufftefjen. 2. 3m SBmter aber getjt fie trie! fpater 
auf, unb mtr braucrjen ntct)t fo frttrj attfgufterjen afe tm ©ommer. 
3. $l6er rnandje Seute fterjen tm 933 inter gerabe fo frttrj auf mie 
tm Sommer. 4- Sftorgen gtefjen mir un3 fetjr friif) an, urn mit 
bem erften 3 u Q e abgufafjren. 5- $)er 3 U 3 9 e W inn M^ IX^r a6, 
mtr miiffen un3 gtetd) aus^ierjen unb gu 33ette gefjert. 6. SBitte, 
macfje bte Stir §u unb bte ^enfter auf! 7- ©3 fangt fcfjon 
an 511 regnen, foil tcf» bte£ genfter aufmatfjen ? 8. 9cur em Item 
btftcfjen. SSolien mtr abfabven, menu e3 morgen regnet? 9. S^a* 
titrticrj, marttm f often mtr aber mit bem erften 3 u g e abfarjrcu? 

Exercise 89, English into German 
10. At what time does the sun rise to-morrow ? 11. It 
(£>ie) rises at a quarter of six. 12. When do you want to 
get up? 13. If our train starts at a quarter past eight, 
we need to get up at seven. 14. My brother is coming 
here to start with us. 15. If it begins to rain, we cannot 
go. 16. It is warm to sleep here; will you open that win- 
dow? 17. I cannot open it. 18. Ought we to start if your 
brother does not come? 19. No, but he will arrive early. 



94 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XL VI. THE INSEPARABLE PREFIXES (189) 

A verb is called inseparable when compounded with an in- 
separable prefix. The inseparable prefixes are unaccented and 
remain attached to the verb : 

he-, be-, round, over, then much or completely, generally making an in- 
transitive verb transitive ; then used in forming verbs from other parts 
of speech, with the idea of providing with: as, 

1. fhtbett, find: befin' 'belt, find, judge (find the surroundings of); tine 

beftuben 8te fid) ? how are you ? 

2. feljett, see: befe'fjeit, examine (look at all round). 

3. fti^ett, sit: beft^'eit, occupy (sit round), possess. 

4. ber 2Birt, host, landlord: bettur'ten, entertain. 

ent= (attt=, emp=), over against, denoting correspondence to, opposition to, 
transition from one state to another, then re7noval from, as being op- 
posed to (cf. \ytx-- and $er=): as, 

1. becfett, cover: entbecfen, discover (remove the cover), reveal. 

2. ba§> $8ovtf word: bie Wntwoxt, answer (swearing over against). 

tx-f from inside out, through and through, getting the meaning up, 
through, etc* from the verb compounded- with it: as, 

1. ftttbett, find: erfiu'bcn, find out, invent; ber (Srfut'ber, inventor. 

2. geben, give: erge'ben, give up, yield. 

ge= r together, denoting union or completio?i, and so sometimes success 
advantage, or pleas2ire (cf. t»er=) : as, 

1. ber 83crg, mountain: Mz ($ebtr'ge, chain of mountains, highland. 

2. f alien, fall: gefaftctt, please (fall in with), d. ; gefaHtg, pleasing. 

3. IjBren, hear: gefjo'ren, belong (be all ears for, as a slave). 

4. (iegen, lie: bie Gfcle'geuljeit, opportunity (lying-together-hood). 

tytt'-, forth, away, gone, tho?-oughly, often with the idea of risk, disadvan- 
tage, or loss, sometimes making an intransitive verb transitive (cf. ge=); 
also in forming verbs from other parts of speech: as, 

1. faufett, buy (trade for): ticrfau'fctt, sell (trade away). 

2. fud)en, seek: ncrfu'djcn, t?y, tempt (seek to your harm). 

%ix~ t asunder, to pieces : as, 

I. bredjett, break: §txhxtd)'tn, break to pieces. 



THE INSEPARABLE PREFIXES 95 

Inseparable verbs are inflected like simple verbs, except that i 
the past participle is without gc, to avoid having two unac- 
cented prefixes standing together (189) : as, 

fcefpretfi'ett befprad)' befprodj'en talk about, discuss 

t>erge'ben Dergab' t>crge'bett give away, forgive 

ticrf^redj'ett tierfprad)' tjerjprodj'ett promise (risky) 
t>erftetf' en tierftecf'te tierftecft' stick away, hide 

tiersei'ljen tiercel)' toersie'fjett pardon, with d. 

Exercise 90, German into English 

1. ©utert SJcorgen, graulem s DculIer, tote beftnben @te fief) rjeute 2 
morgen? 2. ©anj gut, (id)) bartfe, barf id) ma3 mtt Sbjnen 
befpredjen? 3- ^Bttte f bttte, bjaben ®te ma3 entbedt? 4- Sd) 
I)a6e eg Sfynen oerfprodjen, bet ber erften ©elegenbett auf t>a$ @e= 
btrge 311 gebjen, urn ba§> £)orf §u ferjen. 5- ©eftern gtng id) 
unb mem alterer SBruber auf ba$ alk 8d)(oJ3. 6. &§ mar fo 
fdjon, mir moftten alle3 befebjen. 7- SStffen Ste, mem ba$ Sdjlofc 
gebjort? 8. Dcctn, ba§ metfe id) ntcrjt, aber ut) beufe, em greim 
ber bemobut cS je£t. 9. 3Btr ucrfttdjten tn£ ©djlofe gu gebjen 
uub flopftcit an§ £or ( £**&■), aber mir fonnten ntcmanb entbef^ 
fen. 10. £)er £ag mar aber fdjott, unb es> geftet mir a(fe3 feb)r. 
11. Sm atten 3)orfe fatnen mir in etn fleineg 2Strtsrjau3, mo 
man unS aufS fdjonfte bem'irtete. 

Exercise 91, English into German 
12. How are you, Jack? Should you like (9Jcod)teft bu) to 3 
go up on the mountains, to examine the old castle ? 13. I do 
not know who owns the castle, but perhaps we shall be able 
to discover it. 14. I hear he is educating ((agt er f u>bjen) his 
sons at (auf) the university. 15. If we cannot go into the 
castle, we shall not be able to examine much. 16. We must 
go at once if we want to see the village. 17. I think the 
old village will please you very much. 



9 6 



A GERM AX GRAMMAR 



XLVII. THE DOUBTFUL PREFIXES 

$ltrd), through, iikr, over, iim, round, and wtter, 
separable when used literally, and inseparable when used fig- 
uratively; 1 toiefcer, again, back, is separable, 2 and totber, 
against, is inseparable; gutter, behind, and bott f ful/, are gen- 
erally inseparable ; mi$ is inseparable, 3 but the verbs com- 
pounded with it are irregular in form and in accent: 4 as, 

brattg burd)' bwrcfy'gebrmtgen 

burtfjbrang' bwrdjbruug'ett 

feijte ii'&er U'bcrgefe^t 

wberfeij'te fiberfeljt' 

gfng ftm' iun'gegangett 

ftmgfng' umgaug'ett 



i. burdj'briugen 
burrfjbriug'en 

2. U'fcerfefeen 
uberfefc'en 

3. ftm'geljeK 
itmgc^en 

4. nn'terf) alien 
nnterfyal'ien 

5. tt)te f berfel)cn 
tt)tbcrfpred)'cit 

6. ^utterlaf'fen 
ooflbritt'gen 

7. miprau'djett 
mt^ f 6raurf)en 



press through 
penetrate, pervade 
set over, transport 
translate 
go round 
get round, evade 
hold under 
sustain, entertain 



Ijtett un'tcr un'tergefjaltett 

untcr^ieif nnterhaften 

faf) nne'ber ttne'bergefefjeit see again 

nuberfpradV nnbcrforodj'en contradict 

^mterite^' fytuterlaffen bequeath 

Dotfbradj'te tiofl&radjt' accomplish 

mipraudj'te ntiprantfjt' 3 

mt^brandjie gemifj'braurfjt 

In compound nouns and adjectives, these inseparable prefixes are 
accented except in words in which the prefix is followed by more than 
one syllable: as, 

1. ber 2£rbcrf£rud), contradiction; Me ttmge'bmtg, surroundings. 

Verbs are often compounded with two or more prefixes. If an 
inseparable prefix is next to the verb, the participle is without ge, to 
avoid having two unaccented prefixes standing together: as, 

1. nueberatt'faitgen ftng ttrieber an' miebcron'gefaugen . begin again 

2. an'oertrauen uertraitte an' an'Bcrrrant trust 

1 Cf. "look o'ver," "overlook"'; "go un'der," "undergo'." 2 But, tt)teber= 
Ijo'Ien, tt)tebert)ot r te, roieberfyott', repeat. 3 But, mifj'suDerfleljen, to misunder- 
stand. 4 In compounds with mtf3, the participle without ge is preferable. 



THE DOUBTFUL PREFIXES 97 

Exercise 92, German into English 

1. 2£ct3 fur em bitrdj'brtngenber Oiegen ! Saffen ©ie un§ 
bier ein flein bifscrjen btetben! 2. 2tber tjoren ©ie jene burct)= 
brtng'enbe ©timme ! SSal mag ba§ mot)t fein ? 3. 3d) gtaube, 
e«o tft ber ©differ an bent anbent lifer be§ ©ee3, er mitt tjertt^ 
berfommen, urn um§ it'bequfetjen. 4. 3)er 9iegen mirb immer 
ftarfer, unb mir miiffen t)htu'ber (79, 1). 5. 3)er ©differ fcingt 
mieber an ju rufen, roa3 fotten mtr ibm antmorten ? 6. (£r foil 
nidjt ()eru'berfommen, mtr lonnen urn ben ©ee rjerttm'getjen. 
7. 2Sir lonnen e3 geroifi nidjt unternefy'men, itber£ SSaffer 5U faft= 
ren. 8. 3a, eS tft Oiet beffer, rjerum^ugeben. 9. Sir feljen ben 
©differ haib mieber unb fonnen if)m bant'en. 10. petite abenb 
lonnen mtr itjtt nict)t mie'berfef)en. 11. SStr miiffen attein gu 
§aufe btetben, mir bitrfen in unfrer 9lufgabe nict)t3 itberge'tjen, 
mk tjaben Oiet 511 itberfe|'en. 12. SSenn mir in unfern 3im* 
mern ftnb, merben mir bte Qtit nidjt mifjbrau'djen. 13. 9?un, 
lonnen ©ie ba3 ©ebtcfjt miebertjo'len, ba$ mir §u ternen tjaben ? 

Exercise 93, English into German 

14. Come out, Doctor Miiller, and go with me to the lake. 

15. A good boatman lives on the shore, who will take us across. 

16. He takes me across every day if the weather is good. 

17. But if you wish it, we can perhaps go round on the shore. 

18. The wind is piercing ; we ought to stay in our rooms and 
translate our lesson. 19. If we have beautiful weather, we 
can see each other again to-morrow and go to the shore. 
20. Repeat to me the poem that you learned yesterday. 21. I 
have repeated it twice (groeimal), but I will begin it again. 
22. To-morrow I will repeat the other poem that I have to 
learn. 23. We have so much to translate to-day ! And we 
always have too many poems to learn ! 



9 8 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XLVIII. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

Review 76, 1,2, 78, 1, 82, 2, and learn the present, the per- 
fect, the future, and the future perfect subjunctive of fyafcett, 
feht, and toerbett, 175, 177. 

Observe that the stems remain unchanged (cf. the indicative, 174, 176), 
that the connecting vowel e is retained throughout (except fet, for fete), 
and that the endings (except in the third person singular) are the same 
as in the indicative (173). 

The subjunctive may express a wish, a mild commajid, pur- 
pose, concession, mild affirmation, or co7idition: as, 

1. ber ^aifer feee f)ori) ! long live the Emperor! (wish) 

2. geiobt fci (&ott ! God be praised, (wish) 

3. fciett ttrir tttdjt tm'gnrtg ! let us not be unkind, (mild command) 

4. er fommt, bamit' er mid) fefje, he comes that he may see me. (pur- 

pose) 

5. fet er (or er fei) nod) fo arm, be he never so poor, (concession) 

6. t>a§ bitrfte 511 tuet feht, that might be (is probably) too 7nuch. (mild 

affirmation) 

7. menu td) ifyn faf|e, if I should see him. (condition; yy, 1) 

The subjunctive is used in indirect discourse merely to re- 
port what another person has said, whether true or not. 

To distinguish the subjunctive from the indicative when they agree in 
form, the tenses of the subjunctive are changed. But even when the sub- 
junctive is not like the indicative, these changes are often made merely 
for euphony, both in speaking and in writing: 

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 

' Present : er fagt (fagte), er fittge 



Present: er fingt 

( Past: er fagt Oagte), er fange 

Past: er fang 1 _ J Perfect: lv fctgt (fagte), er fiabe gefimgen 

Perfect: er \\&t gefimgen ) ( Pluperfect: er fagt (lagte), er fy&ttt gefimgen 

Plupf. : er fjatte gefimgen = Pluperfect: er fagt (fagte), er Jjarte gefimgen 

_ . . w , .. (Future: er faqt (fagte), ertterbe fingen 

Future: er unrb fmgen = 4 _ _ _ . _,,!_'_ «. ' 

( Pres. Cond. : er ]agt (lagte), er ttmrbe fmgen 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 99 

1. ftC fingt fjClite, she sings to-day j fie fingen Ijente, they sing to-day. 
er fagt, ba% fie Ijente finge (or fiinge), he says that she sings to-day. 

er fagt, ba% fie Ijente fangen (not ftngen, which is either indicative or 
subjunctive), he says that they sing to-day. 

2. fie fang (or §at gefungen), she sang. 

trf) fragte, ob fie gefnngen (jabe (or fyatte), I asked whether she sang. 

3. fie uierben morgen fingen, they will sing to-morrow. 

er fagte, &af? fie morgen fingcn mitrben (not toerben, which is either in- 
dicative or subjunctive), he said that they would sing to-morrow. 

4. er fooflte uleioen, met! er f)ier toof)ne (not tt>ol)nte, which would here be 

taken as indicative), he wanted to stay because (he said) he lived here. 

5. ©ie ttdren jener ^jerr? (you say) you were that gentleinan? 



Exercise 94, German into English 

1. (Siloiberte ber alte Sifter, baft er arm jet (or mare) ? 2 
2. (St fagte mir, baft er im tegten Slriege ©olbat fitr3 $ater= 
lanb genjefen fet. .3- 3SolIte er eine Steftitng, toeil er fetn ©elb 
f)abe (or l)dtte) ? 4- @r toollte (Mb, bamtt er etnen alien ®ame* ■ 
raben befucrjen fonne (or fonnte). 5- @r Ijojfte, baft mtr etoa^ 
fatten (not fjafcen), id omit tott if)n beftfjenfen mitrben (not mer- 
ben). 6. (Et fagte and), baft er nicrjt roett Don tjter roofme (or 
mofmte) unb morgen mieberfommen merbe (or mitrbe). 

Exercise 95, English into German 
7. They wanted to come here to-day because (they said) 3 
they must see you. 8. You say that you do not know them, 
and that they do not live here ? 9. They say that they are 
the sons of your neighbor and live on the lake. 10. They 
asked whether you were at home. 11. At last they said they 
should come back to-night. 12. They said they could not 
stay long because they had no time. 13. Did they say they 
were going home ? 14. Yes, they said their father was ill. 



IOO a GERMAN GRAMMAR 

XLIX. THE COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS 

c'&er, but, however, weakly adversative (cf. afteitt'). 171,5 

allem', but, yet, still, strongly adversative (cf . a'&er) 

bemt, for. 100, 3 

o'bcr, or. 171, 5 

ent'roeber . . . ober, either . . .or. 100, 2, 171, 5 

fouberu, but, following a negative clause and contradicting it 

ttidjt nitr . . ., fouberu aud), not only . . ., btit also 

ttttb, and. 171, 5 

meber . ♦ . nod), neither . . . nor. 100, 2, 171,5 

Coordinating conjunctions do not affect the order of words, 
except that when ettftoeber (unless followed by a pause), tueber, 
or ttutf) introduces a clause, the inverted order is used (11, 1) : 
as, 

1. cr ift arm, afier er tft g(utftttf), he is poor, but he is happy. 

2. eutmeber ift er arm f obcr er ift uuaJutfUtf), ~) either he is poor, or he 
eutmeber, er ift arm, obcr er ift uuglutfUdj, ) ' is unhappy. 

3. mebcr ift cr arm, nocf, ift er reid), neither is he poor, nor is he rich. 

4. Weber idj, ttorf) bu (tft l*eicf) r neither I nor you are rich (here the sub- 

jects are contrasted and the order is not affected). 

betttt meaning for stands at the beginning of its clause; when it means 
then, pray, it stands after one or more words: as, 

1. er ift arm, betm er ift uugtittflirf), he is poor, for he is unhappy. 

2. ma§ unflft bu htnn? what do you want, then? 

In indirect discourse the subjunctive merely repoj'ts what an- 
other person has said (98, 4); the indicative not only reports, but 
indicates the speaker's belief 'in the report. Thus, the indica- 
tive should always be used after verbs in the first person of 
the present indicative (because by using the subjunctive you 
would throw doubt on what you yourself say is true), and 
after words implying certainty, such as feljett, see, e3 ift flat, it 
is clear. 



THE COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS 10 1 

When the indicative is used in indirect discourse (ioo, 4), 
the tense of the direct discourse is retained, except that when 
the principal verb is in the past indicative, a present indicative 
is generally changed to the past (as in English) : as, 

1. fie meifj, bafy er jiutg tft, she knows that he is young. 

2. fie ttm^te, baf; er juug toav t she knew that he was young. 

Exercise 96, German into English 

1. 3)er Sunge fagt, baft mem 9ieffe, ben er gefeften f)abe (or 
fyat), 1 geftmb fet. 2. (SJlauben fie, baft er bie 2Saf)rf)eit fpredje 
(or fprtd)t)? 2 3- Sc§ gttictfle, 06 er bie SSatjrfjett fprtdjt. 
Stttetn id) Ijoffe, baft ber ®na6e beffer tft. 4- 5lber ntdjt ttur 
ber $rgt, fonberrt aud) Sfjr 9ceffe felbft fragt, to aim (Ste eine 
SRetfe mit mtr madjen to often. 3 5- 3d) lann toeber mitgetjen, 
nod) fjter 6Iei6en, beim id) f)abe metner ®ufine oerfprod)en nad) 
2)resben 5U retfen. 6. SSoften 6te erlcauoen, baft id) mttgefje? 
7. 3d) benfe, 9lmta toiirbe (77, 1) fid) frenen, menn ©ie mit- 

gtngen. 

Exercise 97, English into German 

8. I fear that it will rain and that my nephew will not come. 
9. But Miss Smith says the boy she saw 4 this morning in the 
street is your nephew. 10. I do not believe that it is he (bafj 
er es> tft, 17, 1), for he said that he should come to-morrow. 
11. Did you ask Miss Smith when she saw the boy? 3 12. Yes, 
and she said she saw him at nine in the village. 13. Jack 
writes that he is better now and shall come with your nephew. 
14. The doctor says that he is able to come. 15. The doctor 
thinks he will be better here with us. 

1 f)abe (subjv.) = wkom he says he saw (98, 4); Ijat (indie.) = whom he saw. 

2 tyred)e === I doubt that he speaks the truth ; what do they think ? fpridjt = 
I think he speaks the truth; what do they think? 

3 Indirect questions that repeat what may have been direct questions often 
take the indicative. 4 whom she saw (66, 5). 



102 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

L. THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS, PART I 

al$ f when, of a single occurrence in past time, and used therefore only 

with the past tenses of the indicative (or with the historical present = 

the past). Cf. tttemt, 102, 2 
Bet»Dr' or e'fje, before. 102, 2 

bl§ t until; fij (ange . ♦ ., Dt3, until '(103, sentence 6) 
utbetti' with a verb, — ing, of an occurrence simultaneous with that of 

the principal verb, the subject of the two verbs being the same, er 

ftanb anf, tub em er fagte, he arose, saying 
je ♦ ♦ ♦, beft'o, or je . , ., itm fij, ^ . . . the. 102, 3 
natfjbem', after; je narijbem', according as. 102, 2 
feit or feitbem', jzto, of time 
fofealb', as soon as 
fofang'(e), so long as, as long as 
mSfy'renb, while, whereas. 102, 2 
inenn, whenever, when, of a repeated occurrence in past or present time, 

or of a single act in future time. Cf. al§, 102, 2 

Subordinating conjunctions require the transposed order 

(12,3): as, 

1 . al§ er tn3 3i mmer ^ am ( or tommt), f alj (or fteljt) er bid), <?/z coming 

(when he came) into the room he saw you. 

2. ttictttt mir in ber Stabt finb, gef)en mtr in§ Sweater, whenever we are 

in town, we go to the theater. 

3. matjrenb tnir ba maren, lam $ljr SBrnber an, ■zf/w/fe w* were there, 

your brother arrived. 
\ Detoor (or etje) id) ba§ t'Att f ttritrbe td) lieber fterfien, sooner than do 

that, I had rather die. 
5. ttadjbem er t>a§ fyenfter geiiffnet Jjatte, ghtg er %vl 23ett f when (= «/3fer) 

/^ /^df opened the window, he went to bed. 

After the subordinating conjunction je the order is transposed (12, 3); 
after the adverb befto or nm jo the order is inverted (11, 1). In short sen- 
tences je is oftenused instead of befto or nm fo : as, 

1 . je mefjr man §at, befto (or nm fo) meljr mitt man f)aoen, the more we 

have, the more we want. 

2. je eljer, je lieoer, the sooner the better. 



THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS IO3 

Exercise 98, German into English 

1. GsmeS £age3, ate unfer alter greunb m3 3^ mmer ^ am r 
fa!) er tm3 $naben auf bem ©of a ft|en. 2. 23eoor er after ju 
un3 fommen fonnte, ftcmbert toir beibe auf unb etlten auf il)n 
§u. 3. Sir naf)men t()u bet ben g&nbett, iubem totr „©utert 
9)?orgen!" fagten. 4. @r fagte 5U un<8: „©eit id) fyier bin 
(13, 1), bin itf) fer)r glud'tid); toartet t)ter, bte tcfj gurucffomme!" 
uub ging l)inau3. 5- ^acfjbem er fortgegangen toar, fegten rotr 
un3 toieber auf ba$ ©ofa uub bu'eben ba, folange er fort mar. 

6. 2Saf)renb nur fo faften, tarn uufre attefte <Stf)foefter herein 
unb fie laS mit un3 fo iange, bte ber aik §err toieberfam. 

7. 2)enn rotr lefen immer mit einanber, ioenn loir altein gu 
<£)aufe finb. 8. ^e mefyr toir gufammen lefen, um fo meljr ter* 
uen toir. 9. ©obatb ber 5llte raieber fjeretnfam, fetjrte fie in 
iljre ©tube gurucf. 10. $aum mar fie fort, ate ber Slfte nadj 
i'fjr fdjtcfte unb un§ alien fd)dne @efd)enfe gab. 11. SStr fern 
nen ben 5Ilten fctjon oiele Sctfjre, er ift unfer dltefter unb befter 
greunb ; unb man toirb tfyn efjren {honor), folange man filter 
{age) unb ©lite fdjagt {values). 

Exercise 99, English into German 

12. Did you see your old friend as soon as he came into the 
house? 13. No, for he went away while we were in my room. 
14. And he did not come back until you were gone ! 15. He 
says that since he has been (13, 1) here, he has been very 
happy. 16. But do you believe that ? For whenever he 
comes here, he always says the same thing (basfelbe). 17. Yes, 
I believe he is happy as soon as he sees our house. 18. When 
he is here, he reads and plays with us, saying that we are his 
children. 19. After he has gone, we say that we have lost a 
father. 20. For the more we see him, the more we love him. 
21. And so long as he is away, we know we are not happy. 



104 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LI. THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS, PART II (102,2) 

al§, as, than (after comparatives), with the same case after it as before 

it. 1 105, 1 
ai§ 6b f ai§ ruemt, or a(3, as if, in conditions contrary to fact (yy, 1); the 

present or the perfect subjunctive may be used according to 98, 5; 

when ai§ is used alone, the order is inverted (11, 1) 
btt, as, since, seeing that, of the logical cause (see ttJCtl) 
bamtf, that, so that, of purpose, generally with the subjunctive, the indie 

ative implying fulfillment (100, 4) 
baft, that, introducing subject or object clauses, or clauses of purpose or 

of result (100, 4) 
tubem 7 with a verb, — ing, of mild cause, the subject of the verb being 

the same as the subject of the principal verb (cf. inbem, 102, 1) 
vb f whether, if, in indirect questions. 100, 4, 101 3 
oog(etd)', obfd)Mt / , ohtootyV, or mernt , . , aud) {even if), although 
tocU, because, of the actual cause. ba3 £l)ermome'ter fteigt, metl z§ to'&v* 

mcr ttrirb, the thermometer is rising because it is getting warmer ; but, 

$>a ba§ ^ijermome'ter fteigt, nrirb l§ farmer, since the thermometer is 

rising, (I infer that) it is getting warmer. 
iuetttt, if ever (= whenever, of indefinite time; 102, 1), if in conditions 

of all kinds (151) 
Jrjie, however; as, like, with the same case after it as before it. 1 105, 1 

When, with the past indicative, is best translated by al§ or trjafyrertb 
(while, 102, 1); with the pluperfect, by rtadjbettt' (after, 102, 1); with the 
present, by ttietttt (whenever, 104, 1): as, 

1 . ai§ id) f am, mar er fd)on f)ter, when I ca?ne, he was already here. 

2. mafjrettb cr Ijter ttmr, lam id) in3 dimmer, when (while) he was here, 

I ca7ne into the room. 

3. nadjbem er bte§ gefagt fyattc, ging er fort, aft&r saying (after he had 

said) this, he went away. 

4. menu id) morgen nad) bcr <&tcfot gefje, rucrbc id) bid) fefjett, when (if) 

I go to town to-tnorrow, I shall see you. 

1 In English the case after as or than depends on the construction: as, I 
saw nobody younger than he (is) ; I have seen nobody else that I like more 
than (I like) him. 



THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS 105 

To denote identity, al§ r as, is used; similarity, ttrie, as: as, 1 

1. er kfite al§ em ^rht5 f he lived as a prince (which he was). 

2. er lebte ttJte citt ^rtttj, he lived as a prince (which he was not). 

Exercise 100, German into English 

1. S^r better tft fet>r freunbltd) gegen mid); ba er nic^t fyier- 2 
Iier lorn men fonnte, b,at er an mid) gefdjrieben. 2. @3 gibt 
feinen £tfenfd)en, ber frennbtidjer ift ate 3^r ^Bater; benn er Be- 
l)anbelt jebermann meb,r ate grennb benn ate 1 gremben. 
3. 28ie arm er and) immer mare, er roitrbe 2 gtudlid) fein, toeil 
er jo Oiete greunbe I)at. 4. &at er ntdjt fefjr unredjt getan, 
inbem er nid)t gefommen ift? 5- 9cein, ba$ gtmuV id) nidji 
Cbgleid) er nid)t gefommen ift, ()at er nn3 bod) (Mb gefdjidt, 
bamit mir nad) «<panfe gefjen fbnnten. 6. 9(ber menn mir aud) 
itad) §aufe gtngen, glauben 8ie, bafs mir ib,n fefjen roitrben? 
7. ^d) merbe 3t)ren £3rnber fragen, 06 St>r ^ater morgen 
ttrirb gu «<paufe fein fbnnen (So, 3). 8. St t)at mir fd)on ge- 
fdjrieben, bamit loir miffen fonnen, baft er ba ift. 9. (S3 fcrjeint, 
ate ob er ba fei (or mare; or ate fei or mare er ba). 

Exercise 101, English into German 

10. Fred has not come because he is ill. 11. But seeing 3 
that he had to stay at home, he wrote me a letter. 12. He 
asks if we shall go home to-morrow. 13. Although he has 
written, I think 2 he will come that he may see you. 14. Did 
he do wrong in writing this letter? 15. Yes; for he writes 
as if he could not come. 16. Do you think he is better than he 
was yesterday? 17. I think he is better; but he writes as if 
he were very ill. 18. However ill he is (3Ste Iran! er and) 
ift), I think 2 he will be here to-day. 19. I hope he will come. 

1 betm a(§, than as, to avoid the repetition in ctt§ al% ; but some prefer alS 
aU f which is common in the spoken language. 2Sie al§ is colloquial. 

2 A concessive clause is not always followed by inversion (n, i ; cf. 25 *). 



106 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LII. THE PASSIVE VOICE 

The passive voice of a verb is formed by uniting its past 
participle with the inflection of tocrben, ge of gelDorben being 
omitted to avoid an unpleasant repetition, 182, 183. 1 The 
agent is expressed by the dative with fcmt : as, 

1. Me %\\x n>urbe urn fed)3 geijffnct, the door was opened (went through 

the act of being opened) at six. 

2. btc %\\x tfi tJOtt mir geoffnet iuorben, the door was opened by me. 

To express the state resulting from a previous action, rather than the 
act itself, fein is used instead of tuerbett (106, 1): as, 

1. bte %\\x tuar urn fed)§ tUjr geoffnet, the door was open (had been 
previously opened) at six o'clock. 

Many intransitive as well as transitive verbs may be used impersonally 
in the passive voice, the subject e£ being omitted when the inverted order 
is used : as, 

1. t§ ttmrbe gcftern abenb gcian^t, there was dancing last night. 

2. geftem abenb nmrbe getangt, last night there was dancing. 

The passive voice is much less common than in English. It is avoided 
by using man (68, 1), (affen (80, 2, 202), a reflexive verb (18, 3), or the 
present infinitive active: as, 

1. man fagt, ^a\ er arm fet, he is said to be poor. 

2. man §at tfjn fingen Ijorett, he was heard singing (80, 2). 

3. man t)at iljn lommen (affen, they have had him co?ne. 

4. id) mill bir 83itd)er fdjidcn laffen, / will have books sent to you. 

5. er Vafyt etn fgan§ bon mir bantu, he is having a house built by me. 

6. id) Ijabe bent ®nauen tttva§ $u trtnfeu gcben taffen, I have had some- 

thing given the boy to drink. 

7. laffen Sie bon fid) fyihren! let yourself be heard fro?n. 

8. fo (a§ mat f)bren ! let us hear it, then. 

9. c§ taftt fid) ntdji lengnen, it is not to be denied. 

1 o. ob er fjtcr ifr, fragt fid), whether he is here is the question. 
1 1 . e3 tft ntdjt $n em^f eljlen, it is not to be recommended? 

1 With 182, 183, cf. 176, 177, where the position of the past participle is in- 
dicated by a star (*). 2 Cf . " A house to let." 



THE PASSIVE VOICE 107 

Exercise 102, German into English 

1. 2)u bift itid^t r>on betnem Sefjrer gelobt toorben, toeil bu i 
mcfji fleifjig getoefen bift. 2. Sa, SDcama, aber man l)at unS 
fo btete @ebid)te au^toenbig gu lernen gegeben! 3. £eute unb 
geftern fjat man un§ faft ben gan^en Sag getabett, tocil totr ittdjt 
fletfctg feien. 4. 9cun, ba totr im ©tymnafium finb, toirb ber 
Seljrer bofe auf un£, toenn totr nid)t iminer fleijug lernen. 
5. 2)er Seljrer t)at recx)t, unb toenn ifjr trier) t flet^iger toerbet, fo 
toerbet ifjr natitrtid) beftraft toerben. 6. 23ir miiffen rjeute mor* 
gen fef)r fletjgig arbeiten, benn unfre beiben 9lufgaben finb nod) 
ntdjt abgefdjrieben. 7- 5lber e3 fragt fictj, ob toir rjeute aE bk 
9lufgaben abfdjreiben fbnnen. 8. ^eben Sag muf3 man fie alle 
abfdjreiben, benn ber Sefjrer lafjt ftcf) nidjt leicfjt Don un3 $na- 
ben itberreben. 9. Unb toenn er fid) nidjt itberreben lagt, fo 
totrb man tmmer nad)fi£en miiffen, um nod) ein ©ebidjt au^toett* 
big ^u lernen. 10. iPcorgen fjaben toir oielleidjt rein ©ebidjt, 5U * 
lernen, toeil rjeute abettb getan^t toerben totrb. ii. 2lber man 
tjat un£ rjeute fdjtoere 5lufgaben gefteEt. 

Exercise 103, English into German 

12. If you are not more diligent, Charles, you will be blamed ^ 
by your teacher. 13. But if I learn my lesson, I shall cer- 
tainly not be punished. 14. Fred was punished yesterday be- 
cause he had not learned his poem. 15. A poem has to be 
learned (man muf; lernen) by heart every day. 16. For our 
teacher will not be easily persuaded by a small boy. 17. If 
our lesson is not learned, we must stay after school to learn 
it. 18. I cannot copy this poem, for my book has not been 
found (r)at fid) nidjt gefunben). 19. Your book must be found 
(inufj gefunben toerben), and you boys will have to go to school 
to-morrow. 20. For if you do not go, you will be punished 
because you are not more diligent. 



io8 



A GERMAiX GRAMMAR 



Lin. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS I (192) 
Review 22, 1, 28, 1, 30, 1, 2, 32, I? 2, 72, i- 4> 74, 2-4, 76, 1. 

In the strong verbs the past indicative and often the past par-, 
ticiple are formed by a change of stem vowel (9(B(aut), as in the 
strong verbs in English (22, 1, 28, 1 ; cf. "fall, fell, fallen," 
"rise, rose, risen"). 



Pres. Infill. 


Pres. Indie. 
2, 3 Sing. 


Imp v. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 
Subjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


a 






i 




a 




fungen 


fang-ft, -t 


fang(e) 


fing 


fmge 


gefangen 


catch 


tjangen 


f)ang-ft, -t 


f)ang(e) 


Wm 


fringe 


getjangen 


hang,'mtr. 


a 






te 




a 




bfafen 


m-m, -t 


bta§, btafe 


hik§ 


btiefe 


gebfafen 


blow 


braten 


brat-ft, brSt 


brat(e) 


brtet 


briete 


gebratcn 


1-oast 


fatten 


m-% -t 


fali(e) 


fiet 


fiele 


gefatten 1 


fall 


fatten 


balt-ft, Ijatt 


hatt(e) 


tjtett 


tjielte 


getjatten 


hold 


laffen 


taff-eft, 2 lajs-t 


taB 


tiej? 


tie^e 


getaffen 


let, allow 


raten 


rat-ft, rat 


rat(e) 


net 


riete 


geraten 


advise, d. 


ftfjtafen 


fatSf-jl, -t 


fcf)laf(e) 


fdjtief 


frf)Xiefe 


gefdjtafen 


sleep 


oatfen 


bacf-ft, -t 


bacf(e) 


u 

biif 


bu!e 


ft 

gebatfen 


bake 


fasten 


faljr-ji, -t 


fabr(e) 


fiif>r 


fuhre 


gefatjren 1 


go, drive 


graben 


grab-ft, -t 


grab(e) 


grub 


grube 


gegraben 


dig 


taben 


tab-jl, -t 


tab(e) 


I«b 


tube 


getaben 


load 


taben 


tab-eft, -et 
lab-fi, -t 


tab(e) 


fabcte 
titb 


labete 
(Ilbe 


getaben 


invite 


ft^affen 


fcrjaff-ft, -t 


frf)aff(e) 


fdjuf 


jebfife 


geftfiaffen 


create 


fct)tagen 


Wh-% -t 


jd)tag(e) 


fdjtitg 


1*cf)t5ge 


gestagen 


strike 


tragen 


trag-fi, -t 


trag(e) 


tritg 


trUge 


getragen 


carry 


ttmcfjfen 


)vad)\-(e\)t f -t 


ttmefife 3 


\vutf)§ 


roil d)je 


gefoarfjfen 1 


grow 


wafdjen 


tt>afcf>-(e)ft, -t 


toafd)(e) 


mitfet) 


tnUfd)e 


gctt>aftf)cn 


wash 



1 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 



2 OrlaH 



3 Or tvad 



THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS I 109 

Exercise 104, German into English 

1. %o& SBilb meine3. S5etter^ SSilfjetm, ba$ an biefer SBanb 

f)ing, ift f)eruntergef alien. 2. ©eftern ift er m %i)<§ eingelaben 

raorben. 3. 2$ir fatten eine fdjon gebratene (&cm§ unb nem 

6acfene§ S8xot 4. Gr l)at geftern abenb bet un£ gefd)lafen, after 

er fcfjldft me gut 5- ©em Strgt rjat if)m geraten, fortmgeljen, 

unb er ift fdjon nad) £)re3ben gefafyren. 6. 9J?ein fletner SBru* 

ber ®ar( fjangt an if)m mit gan3em ^er§en unb fjctlt tfm fur 

einen alteren SBruber. 7- @r raollte mit if)m fafjrett, aber id) 

fann irjit nict)t fo allctn geljen taffem 8. 3d) (iefj bem Clemen 

uom ©cljneiber einen neuen Dtocf madjen, benn fjeute abenb gibt 

eS em fcfiorte^ ^ortgert 9. Um raiemet Uf)r fdngt ba$ ^onjert 

an? 10. 11m acl)t Wqt. 2)a fcf)(dgt 7 3 fitnf. 11. Unb tjter ift 

Start, raie er geraadjfen ift! 12. SBitte, Start, ruafct) beine |janbe 

unb trag biefen S3rtcf gum (Sdmcibcr! 13- SSenn bein 9?orf nidjt 

fertig ift, fo mufjt bu Ijeute abenb biefclben Eleiber tragcn rate 

geftern. 14. $omm gletd) nad) §aufe f Start. SSie fait ber SBinb 

bldft! 

Exercise 105, English into German 

15. The theater begins at a quarter of eight. 16. You 
ought not to go to the theater, for you do not sleep well. 
17. Let lis stay (98, 3) at home to-night, the wind blows so 
cold. 18. To-morrow we can go driving (80, 4) through the 
woods if the day is warmer. 19. I advise you to stay at home 
to-morrow, for our good old friend William Smith will be in- 
vited to dinner. 20. Shall I wear the same clothes as now? 
21. You will have to wear the same clothes; you have no new 
ones (feme neuen). 22. My older sister is having (lafet ftcfi) a 
new dress made. 23. Yes, and I shall have a new dress made 
for you. 24. Is that your younger brother Charles ? He has 
grown so, that I really do not know who it is. 25. Charles 
will carry your book to Anna when he has washed his hands. 



no 


A GERM AX GRAMMAR 








LIV. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS 


II (192) 




Review 


22, I, 28, I, 30, I, 2, 32 


, 1, 2, 72, 1-4, 74, 2- 


4, 76, 1. 




Pres. Infin. 


Pres. Indie. 
2, 3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 

Subjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


e 






a 




e 




effeu 


iff-eft,ifc-t,ift-t 


IB 


af? 


afc 


gegeffen 


eat 


freffcn 


friff-eft, 1 frifs-t 


f*B 


fr«i? 


fratfe 


gefreffen 


eat 


gebeu 


gtb-ft,gib-ft,-t 


gib, gib 


gs& 


gabe 


gegebert 


give 


(efett 


fief-(ef)t, -t 


lies 


153 


lafe 


gelefeu 


read 


fefjett 


(ief)-ft, -t 


ftef) 2 


fat) 


$¥ 


gefeljen 


7. 

step 


treten 


tritt-ft, tritt 


tr?tt 


trat 


trate 


getreren 3 


uergcffen 


uergtft-t, 4 -t 


rjergtft 


t»ergafe 


ttergafte 


tiergeffcu 


forget 


e 






a 









firemen 


brid)-ft, -t 


brtd) 


brad) 


bradje 


gebrodjen 


break 


Ijetfett 


Pf-ft, -t 


E,itf 


W 


fyiilfe 5 


geljolfctt 


help, D. 


uefjmeu 


mmm-ft, -t 


nimm 


uafym 


rtafyme 


genommen 


take 


fpretfjen 


fj3rirf)-ft, -t 


fprtdj 


fprarf) 


fprScfje 


gefprocfjeu 


speak 


ftefjfen 


ftieljl-ft, -t 


ftid)t 


piW 


ftof)le 5 


geftofjlen 


steal 


fterbeu 


ftirb-ft, -t 


ftirb 


ftarb 


ftiirbe 5 


geftorben 3 


die 


trcffen 


triff-ft, -t 


triff 


traf 


trafe 


getroffeit 


hit, meet 


Derbergen 


nerbirg-ft, -t 


Derbtrg 


rjcrbarg 


Oerbiirge 5 


oerborgen 


conceal 


roerfeu 


toirf-ft, -t 


tt>irf 


worf 


loiirfe 5 


getoorfctt 


throw 


e 
















bewegcn 


betteg-ft, -t 


beroeg(e) 


betuog 


beruoge 


bettJogen 


induce 


fjebcn 


Ijeb-jt, -t 


fyebe,l)eb' 


JjoB 


f)obe,f)fibe 5 


gefjoben 


heave, lift 



The other verbs of this class are as follows (194) : 

e a e t genefett, get well; 3 gefdjefjett, happen; 3 tttcffcit, measure. 

e a : befcljleu, command; berftett, burst ; 3 empfeljlctt, recommend; 
erfdjretfen, ^ terrified ; z geltctt, be worth; fdjelten, scold; ftedjeu, prick; 
tocrberben, spoil; ttJerben, j«*. 

coo: fed)tett,y%-/z/y ftetfjten, braid; meffett, milk; auetten, gush; 3 
ftfjerctt, shear; fdjmelgett, melt; 2, fd)tt)eflcn, swell; 2, ttiebcn, weave. 

1 Or frifj-t 2 Or, exclamatory, ftet)(e) ! /^/ 3 Inflected with fettt (30, 1). 

4 Or tiergiffeft. 6 or ii distinguishes the form from the present, 






THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS II III 

Exercise 106, German into English 

i. 9rnn, grt$ r ctlle £iere nnb alle S5oget freffett, mafyrenb mir 
SLRenfc^en effen, t>erfte^ft bu? 2. SSenn ein SJtenfd) ifet toie ein 
£ier, fo fagt man Don il)tn f bag er freffe. 3. ©t6 mir bein 
fd)dne3 neue3 23nd) f morin man fo bieleS lefen lann! 4. SBetl 
bein guter $ater fo trie! gelefen l)at, fo foCfft bn attdj oie( lefen, 
obgletdj man oft bergijst, toa$ man gelefert tjat. 5- Stef) bm 
9llten, ber am genfter fi|t! 6. (£r bittet mid), baf$ id) tl)m 
ijelfe, benn er fyabe fid) ben 5lrm gebrodjen. 7. 9cimm bein 23ud) 
nnb tntt in beine£ S5ater§ Qtmmer, w° tofr Qeftern abenb lafen! 
8. <Sage beinem §errn SSater, bag bem 3)iebe aHe^ genommen 
toorben tft, raa3 er geftoh/kn (jatte. 9. 2U3 id) geftern auf ber 
©trajge mar, traf id) beine Shtfine 3lnna, bie mtt mir baoon 
fpracfj. 10. ©ie berbarg nidjty oor mir. 11. Wan §at ben 
£)ieb tnS ©efangnte gemorfen, mo er je£t ftirbt. 12. 3d) mill 
meinen SSater bemegen, ben £)ieb fretgulaffen (set free). 13. @e^ 
gen ifyn mirb man bie §anb nid)t auffje&en. 

Write in indirect discourse after er fagte, bafj (98, 4, 5, 99, 1) sentences 
4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, making the necessary changes: as, (5r fagte, baft, toeil 
fein guter better ufro. (= unb jo ruetter = <?/£.). 

Exercise 107, English into German 

14. Do not read so much, my good boys; you will spoil your 
eyes. 15. We read because we are fond of reading (57, 1). 
16. Yes, but your father says you read too much and will for- 
get what you read. 17. He says people often forget what 
they have read. 18. Present my compliments (©mpfel)lt mid)) 
to your father and give him this little book. 19. Is this the 
book of which you spoke ? 20. Yes, and if you read it, it will 
help you much. 21. Has anything been taken (106, 4) from 
the thief that was in our house? 22. Yes, everything. It is 
said (106, 4) that he is dying in jail (im ©efartgmjfe). 



112 




A GERMAN GRAMMAR 






LV. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS III (192) 




Review 22, 1, 28, 1, 30, 1, 2, 32, 1, 2, 72, 1, 2, 74, 2-4, 76, 1. 




With bletku, ftnt>ett f fiil)lett, (jafcen, fjiiren, or fcljeu, the present 


infinitive is translated by the English infinitive in -ing: 


as, 


1. er fanb fie fittgen, he found her singing. 




2. er Ijatre eineit $aum bovt ftefjen, /z^ /z^# tree standing there. 


Pres. Infin. 


Pres. Indie. 
2, 3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 
Subjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


i 






a 







' 


begittnett 


begutn-ft, -t 


beginn(e) 


begamt 


begbune 1 


begomten 


begin 
win 


gewtttnett 


geroinn-ft f -t 


gett)inn(e) 


gettiantt 


gerootme 1 


gettJonuen 


rinnen 


rittn-ft, -t 


rittn(e) 


ratm 


rcirtrte 


geromten 2 


run, flow 


fdjn>im= 


fd)tt)imm-ft,-i 


fd)tnim= 


fcfynxtmnt 


fd)tt)om= 


gefrf)ttiom= 




men 




m(e) 




me 1 


men 2 


swim 


finneit 


ftnn-ft, -t 


jtnn(e) 


ftttttt 


fdttrte 3 


gefonnen 


think 4 


ftrimtett 


fpitm-ft, -t 


foitm(e) 


fpamt 


fpbtme 1 


gefpottttett 


spin • 


t 
fiittbctt 


btnb-eft, -et 


binb(e) 


ft 

battb 


banbe 


u 

gebttttbett 


bind 


ftnbett 


ftnb-eft, -et 


ffrtbe 


fanb 


fartbe 


gefunbett 


find 


gettngett 


- — ,geUng-t 





getattg 


getdnge 


geiungeu 5 


succeed 


fdjttmtbett 


fd)rt>iiib-eft, -et 


fd)nrinb(e) 


ftflttmub 


fdjirjdnbe 


gefrf)ttmtt= 
ben 2 


vanish 


fittgett 


ftng-ft, -t 


fmg(c) 


fang 


fdrtge 


gefuttgett 


sing 


ftufett 


ftnf-ft, -t 


fin!{e) 


fan! 


fdnfe 


gefmtfett 2 


sink 


fpringett 


fpring-ft, -t 


foring(e) 


forattg 


grange 


geftmutgen 2 


spring 


trinfen 


trinf-ft, -t 


trinf(e) 


tranf 


trdnie 


getnutfett 


drink 


winben 


ttunb-eft, -et 


nrirtbe 


Wttitb 


mdnbe 


gettmttbett 


wind 


jttmtgen 


$itnng-ft f -t 


£TOing(e) 


swung 


jindnge 


gesnmugett 


force 


The other verbs of this class are as follows (194): 




t a tt: briugett, press, crowd; 2 flingett, sound (mir.)\ rtttge 


tt, wrestle 


wring (tr.) ; fdjlmgctt, sling; fdjttiittgett, swing. 




1 The b represents an earlier ii. 2 Inflected with feirt (30, 1). 


3 Or forme 


(Il2l). 


4 meditate. h 


Generally 


mpersona 


, with D. 


JO, x). 





THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS III 1 1 3 

Exercise 108, German into English 
i. Um toelcfje Qeit ^eginnt ba$ Sweater? 2. (£3 \vixb haib 
beginnen, unb toir finb _ ge§mungen, gfeid) gu gerjen. 3- 3Sor^ 
iiber firatft bu, ©lifabetf)? 4- 3^ benfe baron, tute mir bie 
Bremen au£ ben 5iugen ranncn, al3 icfj ba3 erfte SDZal im Stfjea^ 
ter tear. 5. SDte 2lugen memer <2d)raefter fdjmammen aud) in 
Xranen ; baS Stud (play) mar munberfdjbn. 6. Sn einem fleinen 
(Garten fpann ein ffictbtym unb fang. 7- ©in jungcr Dittter, bem 
e3 gclungen Wat, ifjre Siebe 5U geminuen, Kefj fetn SJSferb iiber 
bie Wlauw fpringen. 8. (£r fab fie fpinnen unb tat r ate roollte 
er tf)r bie §anbe 6inben. 9. 8ie glanbte fic6j in bringenber 
[imminent) ©efat)r unb fan! auf bie ftnie. 10. £er Slitter 
aber marf einige fdjbne ^rdn^e, bie er gemunben fjattc, ibr um 
ben £eib. 11. S)aim marf ber Sitter fid) mit irjr auf<§ Spferb, 
unb bie beiben r>erfd)roanben in bem grofeen 2Ba(be. 12. 2Sir 
merben beute abenb etmas fefyr ^crjone3 fet)en. 13. Set) ()abe 
grofjen £nrft, trinfen mir (98, 3) ein ®taS falter Staffer, efje 
mir bineingeben ! 14. 3eftt mtiffen mir unfre ^(a£e fudjen. 
15. 5Ccfj, tote fdjbn flingt bie 9Jcuftf! 

Exercise 109, English into German 

16. To-night you will find something pretty at the theater. 
17. Drink this coffee before you go. 18. That sounds (flingt) 
good, for I like to drink coffee. 19. The play will be very 
sad, and your eyes will swim in tears. 20. The tears run from 
my eyes if I am very sad or very happy. 21. Will they sing 
to-night ? 22. They will not sing, but the music will be beau- 
tiful. 23. Does the theater begin at eight o'clock (58,5)? 
24. The music will begin at a quarter of eight, and I think we 
shall be at home at half past eleven. 25. If we do not go at 
once, we shall not be able to find our seats before the music 
begins. 26. I fear that the music has already begun. 



H4 




A GERMAN GRAMMAR 






LVI. THE STRONG VERBS 


, CLASS IV (192) 




Review 22, x, 28, 1, 30, i, 2, 32, 1, 2, 72 


*, 2, 74, 


2-4, 76, 1. 




^ _ ' Pres. Indie. 
Pres. Infin. 1 

2, 3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 

Indie. 


Past 

Subjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


ei 




i 




i 




beiftett 


beiB-(ef)t, -t 


beig(e) 


&ife 


btffe 


gebifjen 


bite i 


gleidjeu 


gfetct)-ft, -t 


gteid)(e) 


glttf) 


gltrf)e 


geglitfjett 


be like, D. 


greifen 


gretf-ft, -t 


greif(e) 


griff 


griffe 


gegriffen 


seize 


letben 


(eib-eft, -et 


leib(e) 


att 


ittte 


qtiitttn 


suffer 


rei^en 


rei§-(ef)t f -t 


retB(e) 


rife 


rifje 


gertffen 


tear 


reiten 


reit-eft, -et 


reit(e) 


rttt 


rttte 


gerttten 1 


ride 


frijletdjett 


fcf)feid)-ft, -t 


fcf)(eicf)(e) 


sm% 


fd)(id)e 


gefcfjlit^eu 1 


sneak 


fdjneibeu 


fd)tieib-eft, -et 


fd)neib(e) 


fdjnitt 


Td)rtitte 


gefdjuitten 


cut 


ftfjreiteu 


jd)reit-eft, -et 


fd)reit(e) 


f^ritt 


fdjritte 


gefdjritten 1 


stride 


ftreitcn 


ftreit-eft, -et 


ftreit(e) 


ftrttt 


[tritte 


geftnttett 


strive 


ci 






te 




te 




bieibeu 


bleib-ft, -t 


bteib(e) 


OUeb 


bliebe 


geblieben 1 


re?nain 


letfjen 


(eif)-ft, -t 


teif)(e) 


fteJ» 


Uelje 


geltefjen 


lend 


fdjeinen 


|d)ein-ft, -t 


jdjein(e) 


fcfjten 


fd)iene 


gefdjienen 


shine 2 


fdjreiben 


ftf)reib-ft, -t 


fdjreib(e) 


frfvrieb 


jcfjrtebe 


gefdjriebeu 


write 


fd)reteu 


frfjrei-ft, -t 


icfjrei(e) 


frfjrie 


fcf)riee 


gefd)rt'ett 


cry 


ftf)tt)etgen 


jd)tt>eig-ft, -t 


fdjroeig(e) 


frfiniteg 


l'd)intege 


gefdjttriegen 


be silent 


fteigen 


fteig-ft, -t 


ftetg(e) 


ftteg 


fttege 


geftiegen 1 


climb 


treiben 


treib-ft, -t 


treib(e) 


trteb 


triebe 


getrtebeu 


drive 


tjergct^en 


»er$etl)-ft> -t 


oer 3 ett)(e) 


oer^ie^ 


t)er$iel]e 


tieratefjen 


pardon 



The other verbs of this class are as follows (194): 

ci i i: fitfj beffetftett, apply yourself ; erbteidjett, expire; 1 Qhittn, glide, 
slide; 1 frteifett, pinch; freifrfjett, scream; pfetfen, whistle; fd)letfen, whet; 
fdjletfeen, slit; jdjmetfeen, smite, fling; fpfetfeen, split; ftrcit^en, pass (intr.),i 
smooth (tr.); ttJeidjen, yield 1 

ei ic ie: gebeifyen, thrive; 1 tneibett, shun; preifen, praise; retben, 
rub; fdjetbett, part (tr.), depart; 1 fpcten, spit; roeifen, show. 

1 Inflected with jein (30, 1). 2 Or appear. 



THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS IV 115 

Exercise no, German into English 

i. ©eftern f)at ein grower §unb meitten jitngften 2kuber in 
bie §anb gebtffen. 2. £)ie £)anb fdjmer^te tt)n fefjr, unb er 
fc£)rte laitt; er mollte ftcf) aber nid)t tn3 £)an3 tragen laffen, fon* 
bent etfte gleicfj in fetrt gimmer. 3. 9Q?eine ©ctjraefter ritt g(eid) 
in bie &tabt unb lief} unfern alten 9lrgt fommen. 4. Dbgleid) 
ber Softor ifjn in bie §anb fdntitt, fdjrie ber SUeine gar . nid)t 
5. (£r mitrbe mit bent §unbe gefpiett bjaben, aber man (tefj bie- 
fen gleid) rjinterS §au3 inS gelb treiben. 6. Start ffcielt gent 
mit £wtben, aber er fyatte biefen nicrjt ftreidjeht fallen. 7- 2H3 
ber £)oftor in ba<$ 3^ mmer fd)ritt unb bent ®ar( bie £aare au$ 
bent ©eftdjte ftricfj, ftieg biefer fdjtoeigenb' aitS bent 23ette ; er 
mollte nidjt int SBette liegen bletben (112). 8. $)er 5llte aber 
lief3 ifjtt ntdjt au3ge()en unb nutate ibjn faft in3 35eti ireiben. 
9. G£r foil bem S5oftor neqeirjen, roeit ber meift, tva$ ant beften 
tft 10. 3d) ntbdjte if)n gent feljen, id) I)abe einige SBitctjer mit* 
gebradjt, bie id) tfjm leifjeu mill. 11. Wix fctjetnt, ber Sunge 
gteicfjt feinent tapfern SBruber. 12. SSergeitjen ©ie mir! 3d) mill 
tjier bleiben, bi3 <Sie gefefyen fjaben, ob er fdjldft 

Exercise in, English into German 

13. Where is your brother that the dog bit? 14. He is in 
his room, where he is writing a letter to his sister. 15. Did 
you say Marie rode into town after your doctor? 16. Yes, 
she mounted (ftieg auf) her horse at once and rode to the doc- 
tor's. 17. Mother said that Charles suffered very much, be- 
cause the dog had torn his hand. 18. But he does not want 
to stay at home; he wants to be with the boys. 19. This 
morning mother and I (168, 3-5) went into his room and we 
found him reading (112) out of a book that you had lent him. 
20. It seems to me that he is reading or writing the whole 
day. 21. I hope that he does not suffer now. 



n6 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



LVII. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASSES V AND VI (192) 
Review 22, i, 28, 1, 30, 1, 2, 32, 1, 2, 72, 1, 2, 74, 2-4, 76, 1. 



Pres. Infln. 


Pres. Indie. 
2, 3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 

Subjv. 


Past 

Partic. 


Meaning 


ie 
















btegeu 


bieg-ft, -t 


bieg(e) 


bog 


bBge 


gebogen 


bend 


bieten 


biet-(e)ft, -et 


biet(e) 


bot 


bBte 


geboteu 


offer 


fttegeu 


fUeg-ft, -t 


flieg(e) 


flog 


floge 


geflogeu 1 


fiy 


ftiefjett 


fliet)-ft, -t 


flie^(c) 


m 


fl0l)C 


gefloljen 1 


flee 


ftieften 


fUeMef)t, -t 


ftietf(e) 


m 


fXoffe 


gefloffen 1 


flow 


frieren 


frier-ft, -t 


friev(e) 


fror 


frore 


gefroren 


freeze 


genieftett 


gemejHef)t,-t 


fleniefKe) 


geuoj? 


genoffe 


geuoffeu 


enjoy 


giefjen 


giefHef)t, -t 


0iej3(e) 


0O| 


goffc 


gegoffen 


Pour 


friedjeit 


fried)-ft, -t 


fried)(e) 


frorf) 


frod)e 


gefvodjett 1 


crawl 


rtedjen 


rietf)-ft, -t 


ried)(e) 


rod) 


voc^e 


gerodjen 


smell 


fditeben 


ltf)teb-ft, -t 


jd)teb(e) 


ft^ob 


jctjobe 


gefdjoben 


shove 


fdjte^en 


fd&iejH«f)t, -t 


fcf)ieg(e) 


mm 


Wffe 


gefdjoffeit 


shoot 


fdjltefjen 


fd)fie6-(ef)t,-t 


WieJKe) 


wm 


idjloffe 


gefd)(offen 


shut 


fprie^ett 


fprieB-(ej)t, -t 


jprieB(e) 


)p™% 


fproffe 


gefprofjeu 1 


sprout 


oerbrte= 


oerbrieft- 


toerbrie* 


oerbroft 


Derbrof* 


oerbroffen 


vex 


fjen 


(ef)t, -t 


6(e) 




fe 






oerlterett 


t>ertier-ft, -t 


oerUer(e) 


oertor 


tierlBre 


oertorett 


lose 


Sicken 


m-\t, -t 


Ste^(e) 


m 


she 


gesogen 


draw 11 


a, 6, ft 
















roagen 


tt)ag-ft, -t 


tt)ag(e) 


toog 3 


roBge 3 


getoogett 3 


weigh, tr. 


betrfigen 


betrug-ft, -t 


betrug(e) 


betrog 


betrBge 


betrogen 


deceive 


tfigett 


tSg-ft, -t 


Ifig(e) 


tog 


toge 


gclogen 


lie± 






The other verbs of these classes are as follows (194): 

ie (Class V): fteben, seethe, boil;* ftieben, scatter; 1 triefett, 

drip;* ttnegett, weigh (intr.). 

a, 0, ii (Class VI): $&xen f ferment; 3 \tf)\v&xtn t fester; eribfdjen, 3 
go out, be extinguished; 1 ffirett, choose? 



1 Inflected with fettt (30, 1). 
3 Sometimes weak (172, 4). 



2 Or move (30, 1). 
4 tell a lie. 



THE STRONG VERBS, CLASSES V AND VI 1 17 

Exercise 112, German into English 

1. |)ier finb meine fdjonen 23 lumen, roillft b\x SSaffer barouf 

gtefjen? 2. (£$ toerbriefjt mid) fef)r, fie nidjt fritter gefefyen gu 

fyaben. 3- ©te finb geroig fcfjon, unb ba3 gan^e Qimmer riedjt 

banacf). 4. <*paft bu etntge 23lumen toerloren? 5. Set, jebe3 

Safjr berliere id) ein paar. 6. (B friert jegt, unb id) mug bie 

©lumen t)om gcnfter fdjteben unb ba$ genfter fdjtie^en. 7. Sm 

Sinter, roenn bie $ogel nad) ©iiben geflogen finb, jtefjett roir in 

bie &tabt 8. 2£ir fliefjen nor (Stfjnee unb @& 9. 3m grufc 

ling after, menu bie flatter fprie^en, gterjen roir roieber auf£ 

Sanb I)inau§; benn roir lie6en ba§ fitefsenbe 2Saffer, bie gritnen 

SBaume unb bie SSoget. 10. 3n unferm XSalbt fdjtefjt man M* 

nen $ogel, aber jebcm bieten roir bie ©elegenljcit, in feinem tvfy 

len ©djatten ju fi^en ober fpagteren §u geljen. 11. 3m SSinter 

friedjen feme SSurmer auf ber (Srbe, unb feine $oge( fliegen iiber 

unfern ®bpfen. 12. £)a<3 Gst3 biegt bie ©pigen ber SBaume, unb 

bie (Srbe fiefjt au<3, a(3 ob fie fdjtafe. 13. 5lber bu betritgft bid), 

ntct)t roaf)r, roenn bu fagft, ber SBinter fei nid)t fcfjon? 14. Set* 

roo()t, bu liigft nidjt, unb id) fage mit bir, ber SBinter ift bod) 

and) fcrjon. 

Exercise 113, English into German 

15. Have you poured water on all your flowers? 16. It 
will vex you if you lose some of them. 17. Close the window, 
please, and push the flowers to it (baran). 18. If it freezes, I 
can push them from it. 19. When shall you move into town? 
20. We shall move when the snow comes. 21. When spring 
(171, 3) comes, shall you move to the country again? 22. Yes, 
and you ought to move with us. 23. Mother offers you rooms 
at our house. 24. Thank you, I hope I shall not lose this op- 
portunity of seeing (see sentence 10) you. 25. And we shall 
enjoy (geniefjen) the fields and the woods. 26. I think it will 
freeze to-night. 27. If it freezes, you will lose your flowers. 



n8 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



LVm. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS VII (192) 
Review 22, 1, 28, 1, 30, 1, 2, 32, 1, 2, 72, 1-4, 74, 2-4, 76, 1, 10 1, 1, 101 3 

The verbs here are irregular. Some of them are among the 
most important in the language. 



Pres. Infin. 


Pres. Indie. 
2, 3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 
Subjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


Bitten 


bitt-eft, -et 


Mtte, me 


ut 


bate 


gebetett 


beg, ask 


gefsSren 


gebter-ft, -t 


gebier 


gebar 


gebare 


gebdren 


bear 


gelj^n 1 


geMt, -t 


geb(e) 


0tng 


ginge 


gegangen 2 


g° 


gltmmett 3 


glimm-ft, -t 


gUmm(e) 


glomm 


glbmme 


gegtommen 


glim?ner 


Imuen 


bau-ft, -t 


foau(e) 


JjteB 


biebe 


gef)auen 


hew, cut 


^ci^ctt 


tyiMW, -t 


beiB(e) 


t)te^ 


fyiefte 


geljet^ett 


be called 


flimmen 3 


fUmm-ft, -t 


flimm(e) 


Homm 


fiomme 


geftommeu 2 


cfanb 


fommett 


fomm-ft, -t 


fontm 


lam 


fame 


gefommett 2 


co?ne 


laufen 


lauf-ft, -t 


tauf(e) 


Kef 


liefe 


getaufen 2 


run 


liegen 


iieg-ft, -t 


liege, lieg' 


% 


lage 


getegeit 


lie* 


rufen 


rilf-fi, -t 


ruf(e) 


ricf 


riefe 


geriifctt 


call, cry 


faufen 


fauf-ft, -t 


faitf(e) 


Mf 


foffe 


gefoffett 


drink b 


fang en 


faug-ft, -t 


faug(e) 


fog 


fbge 


gefogen 


suck 


flatten 


fcbatl-ft, -t 


f^att(e) 


frfiattte 


fcfraflete 


pfdjaflt 










fdjoU 


wm 


geftfjotfett 


ring 


fdmau&en 6 


fd)naub-fl,-t 


fcf)iiaub(e) 


fdjnob 


jtf)nobe 


gefdjttoBen 


snort 


fdjmBreit 


fd)roor-ft, -t 


fc^mor(e) 


ftfjumr 
fd)UsSr 


fdjmttre 


gefdjmijrett 


swear 


fttjCtt 


fifrfflft -t 


m, w 


f«f 


fafee 


gefeffett 


sit 


ftefj(e)n 7 


W* "* 


We) 


ftanb 


[tdnbe 
ftihtbe 


geftanbett 


stand 


ftofjen 


PMef)t> -t 


Pl(e) 


fitefj 


ftiefce 


geftff^ett 


push, hit 


tim 


tii-ft, -t 


tS(e) 


m 


tate 


getan 


do 



1 Irregular for gangen (Class I, 108). 2 Inflected with feht (30, 1). 
3 Sometimes weak (172, 4). 4 be situated. 5 Of animals. 

weak (172, 4). 

7 Irregular for ftanben (and ftanb for jhmb, Class I, 108). 



Generally 



THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS VII 119 

Exercise 114, German into English 

i. SJtem fetiger Setter, ®art Gutter, mnrbe am 15. Suit 1834 
gu Berlin ge6oren. 2. 9J?ein ©rofjaater rjiefc grtebrtd) Soulier. 
3. 3d) felbft rjeige grtebrtcfy, unb mem altefter ©otm fjetfjt audj 
griebrid). 4. 3t)r Setter mar fefjr beritrjtnt, rttcfjt matrc? 2)ie 
<Stabt erjdjaflt Don feinem £o6e. 5- Somm mtt! 2Bir tooUert 
biefen §itgel git erflimmen berfitctjett. 6. Sort fannft bu bte 
©tabt Uegen felien, morin mem Setter mofynte. 7. 9lcr) f mie 
fdjon ift bte lit§ftd)t! Sort liegi bte ©tabt! 5Dcan fann jegt 
bte ©tocfett barm lanten fjoren. 8. 3e§t gerjt bte ©onne nnter, 
fie ftetjt rote gltmmenbe3 geuer au$. 9. Ser 5l6enb rufx tm£ 
roieber it ad) §aufe r roir bitrfen ttttfjt (anger fjier ftetjen 6(ei6en. 

10. ©otdje 2)imfefr)ett ! 9J?an farm tmr gang tangfam gerjen. 

11. SSemt man lauft, fto^t man fid) ben gtrfj an einem (Stein, 

12. SamoM, e3 mare beffer, metm mir gu §aufe am fetter fcifeen. 

13. 9ft a it mi'trbe bei alien ^etfigen fdjrooren, ba$ man nie rote* 
ber t)ier(jcrfommen mirb. 14. ©etjen mir jetjt (angjamer it ad) 
§aufe ! 15. 2htd) menn man bnrftig ift, fduft man nid)t, fon* 
bern trtitft. Sangjamer, bttte ! 

Exercise 115, English into German 

16. Did you ask Charles when he was born ? 17. Yes; he 
said that he was born on June 21, 1892. 18. What does he 
do now? 19. When I asked him what he was doing, he said 
that he went to his uncle's every day. 20. He said also that 
his father and his uncle had gone as boys (105, 1) to the same 
school. 21. That his uncle was called Frederick Miller. 
22. The sun has already set. 23. Will you have Charles 
called (ritfeit (affen ; 106, 4) ? 24. I will ask him to stay at our 
house to-night. 25. Then you yourself can ask him what he 
is doing now. 26. Yes ; please ask him if he is permitted to 
stay ; if he stays, we will sit at the fire and talk (reben). 



120 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LIX. THE NORMAL ORDER 

The so-called normal order is, subject with limiting words, 
parenthetical adverb, verb, objects (person before thing), 
predicate adjective or participle, infinitive: 1 as, 

i. ber ffetne %x\% aber §at tfjm (or bent £naben) etnett Sfyfet gegeben, 
. little Fred, however, gave him, (or the boy) an apple. 

2. nub felbft (and), or fogar) Me ©efrfjtdj'te turn 3Uab'bitt nwr mix ganj 

neu f and even the story of Aladdin was quite new to me. 

3. ttJer gab bent £naben $e(b ? who gave the boy money? 

4. toeffett ^mf tft auf bem £tfdje ? ze/te* /W w #;z the table f 

5. er \t\)Xt ben &naben Sftufif, /** teaches the boy music. 

If the two objects are pronouns (or refer to persons), the accusative 
generally precedes the dative : 1 as, 

1. er toirb t§ bir (or btr r 3) ttur letljen, he will oney tend it to you. 

2. fie gab t>a§ £tnb fetner Gutter, she gave the child to its mother. 

Adverbs generally stand in the order of time, place, ?nanner, those of 
time commonly preceding direct noun objects; with two or more adverbs 
of the same kind, the more general (less emphatic) precedes the more 
definite (see sentence 2). 1 An adverb of degree stands before the word 
it limits : as, 

1. er gab tntr geftern auf ber ©tra^e gleicfj etnett 2tofel, he iimnediately 

gave me an apple yesterday in the street. 

2. e§ ftttg geftern nnt gefjn Ufjr an 2 fefjr ftarl an regnen, it began 

yesterday at ten o'clock to rai7i very heavily. 

yiifyt and other negatives are either themselves emphatic and stand 
after the other modifiers of the verb and negative the verb, or stand 
before and negative other emphatic modifiers (such as prepositional 
phrases, predicate adjectives, adverbs of ti7ne, etc.): 1 as, 

1. id) gab tl)m ba§ $ud) nid)t, I did not give him the book. 

2. fie tft ntrfjt nttt tfym fortgegangen, she did not go away with him. 

3. t§ ttrnr nttr nidjt ganj neu, it was not entirely new to me. 

4. l)eute r ntrfjt geftern, to-day, etc. ; ntd)t nttd), fonbern bid), not, etc. 

x Any word may be made emphatic by being put at the beginning or at or 
toward the end of its clause. 2 See 92, 1-3, 94, 1. 






THE NORMAL ORDER I 21 

When, in indirect discourse, ba$, that, is omitted, the sub- 
ordinate clause takes the normal order: as, 
i. er fagt, baf? cr ffet^tg fet, he says that he is diligent. 
2. er fagt, er fei ftetfjig, he says he is diligent. 

Exercise 116, German into English 

i. (Sin alter ffllcmn tjatte einen 33rtef errjaiten unb foflte i£m 
beantroorten. 2. Sr fonnte aber nicrjt fctjreiben unb roar barjer 
in grower SBerlegettljeit. 3- @x ging 511 etnem fetner 9kd)barn, 
urn itjn urn 9vat 511 bitten. 4, ©em Sftadjbar net iron, 5U bent 
alien SfteSner §u getjen, benn ber fd)riebe oft SBrtefe fitr anbre 
£eute. 5. 3)er Sftann folgte bem $late fetne^ 9?ad)bar3 unb 
ging gum 90tener. 6. SDiefer aber antroorrete : „(£g tut mir 
leib, aber id) roerbe roorjl rjeute Sfyreu SBrief nicfjt fdjreiben !on- 
nen, benn id) bin lafjm." 7. £)er 2Ute fagre erftaunt : „<Sie ftnb 
latjm unb fonnen meinen SBrtef nitfjt fcrjreiben ? SDcan .fcrjreibt 
rttcfjt rntt bent gufje, fonbern mtt ber £>anb." 8. £er Slfener 
erroiberte: „;3ct) aucfj." 9. „9(ber mctne £)anbfd)rift ift ferjr 
fd)led)t; niemanb a(3 id) felbft !ann fie lefen." 10. „£)te Seutc 
miiffen nad) mir jdjideu, unt fid} bte Q3rtefe nortefen ftu laffeu." 
11. „3dj !ann alfo tjeute Sf)ren S3rtef nid)t frfjreiben." 
Exercise 117, English into German 

12. The poor man had received some letters, but could 
not answer them. 13. He went therefore to a neighbor and 
asked him for advice. 14. His neighbor sent (fenben) him 
to an old sexton, for he himself could not write. 15. The 
sexton said, "I am lame now and able to write no letters." 
16. But the old man answered (errotbent), "A lame man 
can write letters." 17. "For people write with the hand 
and not with the feet." 18. "Yes, but people cannot read 
my handwriting, and must have it read to them" (see 10). 
19. And he was not willing to write the letter. 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



IX. THE INVERTED ORDER 



In the inverted order the verb stands before the subject: 
In interrogative or in exclamatory sentences introduced by some part 
of the predicate : as, 

i. Ijat er tfjm ba§ 23ud) gegefcen ? did he give him the book? 

2. ti)p gab er tfjm ba§ 23ud) ? where did he give him the book? 

3. ttmtttt fam er ait? when did he arrive? 

4. toa§ Ijat er ittdjt getatt ? what has he not done ? 

5. ttite Ijat e£ bodj geregttet! but how it has rained! 

In imperative sentences : as, 

1. tefen Ste ba§ $ud) tttdjt ! do not read the book. 

2. feteifc bit 311 ^paufe ! you stay at home (74, 4). 

In conditional sentences without tuenn (151): as, 

1. ttmre fie mtr I)ter! if she were only here ! 

2. Ijatte er bid), gefterit gcfitnbett, had he found you yesterday : 

When any word except a conjunction precedes the subject (cf. 11, 1): 
as, 

1. Ijier Ijat er mtdj gefuttbeit, it was here he found me. 

2. gefterit fafj id) tfjtt tm (Garten, yesterday I saw hint in the garden. 

3. ba§ SKeffe? fcerlor id) tm ^arfe, the knife I lost in the park. 

4. aI3 er juriicffattt, fal) er ttttdj, when he returned, he saw me. 

5. fonft Ija&e idj mitt) getrrt, otherwise I was mistaken. 

6. bent ^tefie folgettb, fain tdj Ijterfjer, following the thief I came here. 

In the inverted order, if the subject is a noun or a demonstrative 
(emphatic) pronoun, it is often separated from its verb by an unemphatic 
word or phrase : as, 

1. gab tfjm bte Srfjiuefter ba§ 23udj ? did his sister give him the book? 

2. baitn fattbett fid) tmmer bte ^itfammett, bte „gttt fyrcunb" mit qittattber 

luareit, then those that were good friends with each other were 
always to be fowid together. 

When a word like bod), jebodj / ', or ettbltdj is followed by a pause, the 
normal order is used (120, 1) : as, 

1. bodj fam er ttt3 $au§, nevertheless he came into the house. 

2. bod), er fam ttt3 £Qa\X§, still, he came into the house. 



THE INVERTED ORDER 1 23 

Exercise 118, German into English 
1. Sn einem £)orfe ttmrbe einmal ein alter Waiter blinb. 
2. W\i bem fleinen 2>orfe tnar er genau befannt, unb fo ging 
er ben ganjen Xag ofjrte giifjrer umfier. 3. Gine§ 2Ibenb3 aber 
ttmrbe feine Stocfjter pI5$Kdj frcmf, unb aufjer bem Wat raar 
niemanb 511 §>aufe. 4. 2Hfo mufete er felbft auSgeljett, urn §itfe 
§u futfjen. 5. SSaS follte er }e|t tun? 6. 9hm ftect'te er etn 
brennenbe3 Sidjt in eine Sarcrne, nafjm fie in bie §anb unb. 
ging auf bie Strafje. 7. £a begegnete irjm ein alter SBefannter 
au3 ber Stabt. 8. @(eid) (jiett il)it biefcr an unb fagte: „©inb 
<2ie ein fluger SDfann?" 9. „3o lja6' id) immer geglaubt, aber 
©ie finb fdjon in ^inbtjeit berfaften." 10. „33cfannf(id) finb ®ie 
blinb, aber jetjt tragen Sie eine £aterne ntit einem brennenben 
Sidjte." 11. rr 3l)nen faun e3 roofyt gar nidjt [)elfcn." 12. „3Sa3 
fur eine Xorfyeit ift bat?" 13. w @ui folder £or bin id) nicTjt," 
anhoortete ber 9(ttc, „gfau6en 8ie e3 nidjt!" 14. „SDa3 Sidjt trage 
id) nidjt fi'tr mid), fonbern firr Sie unb 3tj)re<§g(eidjen." 15. „2)enn 
fo fonnen ^ie mid) fefjert unb mir au£ bem 3Sege getjen." 

Exercise 119, English into German 
16. In this old village lived two blind peasants. 17. The 
whole day they could go round alone. 18. But the whole 
evening they had to remain in their little rooms. 19* One 
evening one of them (oon ifjnen) became very ill. 20. Imme- 
diately he wanted to have a doctor come. 21. But how could 
his blind brother seek help? 22. With a light in his hand he 
went out into the street. 23. Soon he met one of his old 
friends. 24. "What are you doing with this light?" asked 
the friend. 25. "Do the blind (bie 33(inben, 54, 2) carry 
lights in the street?" 26. "Without this light you could not 
see me, my good friend," answered the old man. 27. "When 
you see my light, you can get (gerjen) out of my way" (see 15). 



124 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



I 



LXI. THE TRANSPOSED ORDER 

1 In the transposed order the verb (in compound tenses the 
auxiliary) stands at the end of its clause. The transposed 
order is used in subordinate clauses, after subordinating con- 
junctions (102, 1, 104, 1), relative or interrogative pronouns 
{66, 1, 2), and relative or interrogative adverbs (87, 1) : as, 

1. tdj fefje, ba% er fjeute Ijter iff, I see that he is here to-day. 

2. tri) tocif?, iccr l)eitte Ijter tft, I know who is here to-day. 

3. bn£ Bud), tt)orau§ bit jc^t tieft, the book that you now read in. 

4. (fief},) ttrie c§ bocf) geregnet fyat I but {see) how it has rained! 

2 When two or more infinitive forms stand together in a subordinate 
clause, the tense auxiliary (fjafiett, 26, 2, 78, 4, or toerben, 32, 1) is not 
put at the end of the clause, but before the first infinitive or its modifier, 
according to the emphasis (120 1 ): as, 

1. tocnn itf) tt>erbe fcctteut gefyett mitffen, if I shall have to go a begging. 

2. uieit er i^n geftertt t\at (or fjat gefiern) fcfjreiben loffen ttioflett, because 

he wanted to have it written yesterday (80, 1-3). 

3 In the future passive and in the future perfect, when subordinate, the 
auxiliary (roerbeit, 32, 1) stands preferably before the participle : as, 

1 . ttieit bie $rtefe tuerben gcf djriefien tocrben, because the letters will be 

written (the close repetition of roerben is avoided). 

2. tijeit er imrb gcf djrte&en ^of»en, because he will have written. 

4 In a subordinate clause, when the meaning is clear, the tense auxiliary 
Ctjaben, 26, 2, or feitt, 30, 1) is often omitted: as, 

1. ba§ &au§ t tt)orin,tt)ir gefe&t itnb geliebt (Jjabett), the house, etc. 

2. bie $rau, bei ber ttfj geblieben (bin), the woman, etc. 

5 In a subordinate clause, if the subject is a noun or a demonstrative 
(emphatic) pronoun, it is often preceded by an unemphatic word or phrase 
(cf. 122, 5): as, 

1. ttienn biff) bcin $rewtb gefeljeit fyattc, if your friend had seen you. 

2, wentt bei ntir bie getuefen ware, if she had been at my house. 



THE TRANSPOSED ORDER 1 25 

Exercise 120, German into English 
i. ©in ®cmfmcmn fjcttte jtoet Sofme, bon betteti ber erne etn i 
guter unb fletfu'ger ftnaue mar, ber jeben SOJorgctt urn fecp Uf)r 
aufftanb. 2. £)er anbre, ber fef)r faul tear, 6Ite6 6i3 gelm Ufjr 
tm SBette. 3. (SineS Sftorgenl fartb ber ffetfjtge Slnabe bor ber 
5£itre be<3 <<paufe<3 etnen SBeutel mit gtoan^ig SDtorf, tooritber er 
fief) natutitrf) fefjr freute. 4. ©r trug ba<3 (Mb 5U feittem $ater, 
ber e3 nafym unb fogtetdj bamit auf baS (Sdfjtafgtmmer ber Stin= 
ber gtng, mo er ben faulen &naben nod) im SBette fdjfofen fanb 
(112). 5. 9tad)bem er ifm aufgeroecft fyatte, geigte er tfjm ba$ 
(SJelb, inbem er fagte: „3tef), mas bein SBruber gefunben hat, 
meil er jeben 9J?orgen fritf) aufftet)t !" 6. „3d) glanbe, baft bu 
nie fo etrvaZ ftnben toirft, menn bit fo fpat tm Q3ette liegen 
bleibft." 7. 2)er Slnabe, ber nod) [djlafrtg mar, rteb fief) bie 
2(ugen unb fagte: „£>u fjaft gan^ redjt, $ater." 8. „9(6er mir 
fcr)eirtt f baft ber, ber ben ©eutel oerloren hat, mie id), tm S3ette 
fjcttte liegen bleiben fatten, menu er ba$ (Mb f)dtte Befallen 
tooEen." 

Exercise 121, English into German 
9. Once there was a merchant that had two sons, William 2 
and Frederic. 10. William, who was the more industrious 
of the two boys, rose every morning at half past six. 11. But 
Frederic did not rise till (nor) ten o'clock if they did not 
have him waked up. 12. One morning, when William had 
found a purse in front of the house, the father went up to 
Frederic's room and found him lying in bed. 13. He waked 
his son up and said, "You will have to go begging if you 
do not rise earlier." 14. "See what (roas) your brother has 
found because he always rises early." 15. "Yes, father," 
answered the sleepy boy, "but the person (ber) that lost the 
purse ought not to have risen so early." 16, "Then he 
would not have lost his money." 



126 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LXII. THE GENITIVE CASE (84) 

As a rule, a noun in the genitive case should stand after 
the noun on which it depends ; but in proper names, includ- 
ing words like better, Dttfel, etc., and in poetry or in elevated 
style, it may precede the noun on which it depends: as, 

1. ber $ruber be3 $rau(etn3, the brother of the yomig lady (better than 

be§ o"fauiein§ SSrober ; but, $ater3 $W§, father's house). 

2. einer ^^rer f^reuttbe, one of your friends (cf. 126, 2, sentence 6). 

3. bte3 tft tncttt §\\t, unb ba§ ift ber tnehteS SSruberg (or utib fetter tft 

ntetneg $ruber3), this is my hat, and that is the hat of my brother 
(or and that is my brother's). 

The genitive is generally used to express ^/"unless clearness requires 
a preposition: as, 

1 . ein Wlann guteg (or gtttett) 9Jhtte3, a man of good spirit. 

2. td) bin ftljver SJfteittung, / am of your opinion. 

3. genug ber Srdnett, enough of tears. 

4. id) bin ber 2Belt rnitbe, I am tired of the world. 

5. fto(§ dllf feitt ^ferb, proud of his horse. 

6. einige toon $f)tten, some of you (t>on used with two pronouns). 

7. ®imig bott ^reuf?eu, King of Prussia (turn used with titles). 

8. bie ©traj?en turn ^ari3, the streets of Paris (44, 4). 

9. $txv ^rufeffor SftMer an§ Setpjig, Professor Mil Her of Leipzig. 

Proper names stand in apposition without inflection (for nouns denot- 
ing weight or measure, see 59, 1) : as, 

1. ber Btabt 9tom, of the city of Rome; ber Stto'nat Wat, the month of 

May. 

2. ber Olocf meine§ 55ruber3 ®att, the coat of my brother Karl. 

The genitive is used to express the indefinite time within which (cf. 
128, 4, 130, 4): as, 

1. ehte§ Xage§, one day, some day. 

2. Sottntag£ f of a Sunday, Sundays, on Sunday. 

3. tnorgctt^, in the morning; abenb3, in the evening; ttfldjtg (or be§ 

9?adjt§, although 9fatd)t is feminine), at night, (adverbial genitives) 

4. meiue3 2Btffen§, within my knowledge. 



THE GENITIVE CASE 1 27 

Exercise 122, German into English 

1. @g toarett ifjrer fieben. 2. 9cacf)mittagg ober and) a6enb§ 
famen fie oft auf bag ^tmmer meineg £3ruber3, um ^omerS 
SSerfe §u lefen. 3. ©iner con if)ncn f nameng &, ber ber ^ofjn 
eineS armen ^aufmanng roar, tear tnir ber Stebfte. 4. SSemt 
fie gufammen roaren, Bract)te mein Q3ruber metjrere £affen Coffee 
ober Xee herein. 5. Seber trartf aucfj ein, ^ruei ©lag fjeifce 
SJftld). 6. Um 20. §0ldrs, roafjrenb roir fo bet Xifdje faften, 
fam eitenben gufjeg SDoftor Stirctjboff aug 23onn, ^rofeffor ber 
^bjlofoprjie art ber Unioerfitat, fjerein. 7. 9Sir atte fprangen 
auf imb ftartben ba f feineg SSorteg matfjttg. 8. (£r roar aber 
blofj roegen feineg (Sofjneg gefommen, ber em SD^ttglieb unferg 
SBereinS roar. 9. 2)er ^rofeffor fagte, bie Scrjroefter beg $naben, 
ein Slinb Oon fimf^efjn Safrren, retire rticrjt gu |>aufe. 10. &eg 
Scactjinittagg rotire fie auggegartgen uitb nttfjt ^urutf'gefommen. 
11. ©in §ut f ben man im SSaibe gefunben fjatte, roare ber beg 
Slinbeg. 12. „9iiemanb roeift," fagte er, „ruag aug irjr roerben 
roirb, unb id) furcfjte fetjr, fie roirb «£mngerg (or oor hunger) 
fterben." 13. £>er ©or)n eilte nacfj §aufe, unb ein paar feiner 
greunbe ' gingen mil 14. SBafjrenb ber Dtacfjt fanb man bag 

Exercise 123, English into German 
15. Where do your son's friends live? 16. Two of them 
live in the larger of those houses. 17. One of his friends 
lives in Dresden, and one of them is from Paris. 18. Morn- 
ings they walk in my neighbor's forest. 19. Afternoons they 
go up to the old castle. 20. Evenings, when they come 
home, they have a great appetite. 21. They eat three pounds 
of meat, and each drinks one or two cups of coffee. 22. An- 
other ((Sin anbrer) of his friends studies at (auf) the Univer- 
sity of (§u) Berlin. 23. Some day (126, 4) he will be a 
famous professor at (an) the university. 



128 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LXIII. THE DATIVE CASE (86, 90) 

As a rule, the dative without a preposition is used to ex- 
press the indirect object unless clearness requires a preposi- 
tion: as, 

1. gi& ntir nteinen (Stotf ! give me my cane. 

2. e§ tft ntir angencfjm, it is agreeable to me. 

3. fie tft btr treu, she is true to you. 

4. er nafjttt nttr ha§ 3fteffer, he took the knife from me (29, 1). 

5. tyzx tft eitt SSrtcf an Sttfabetfj, here is a letter to Elizabeth. . 

6. Dcrfau'fen Ste ba§ ^pferb an mid) ! sell the horse to me. 

The dative often denotes the possessor or the person affected: as, 

1. id) fyaue mir ben 9lrnt georodjen, I have broken my arm. 

2. er faufte Mr hen Sifd), /z* bought the table for you. 

3. ttteitt $ater tft mir geftorfceit, my father died on 7ne (to my harm). 
The dative is used with many intransitive verbs that in English are 

considered transitive, such as fcegeg'nen, meet; banfen, thank; bienen, 
serve; fofgeu, follow; gefalTen, please; gtauben, believe; ffetfen, help; 
rateu, advise; trauett, trust: as, 

1. er foirb bir fofgeu, he will follow you. 

2. man fiat nth* gerafeu, I have been advised. 

The dative with a preposition is used to express the definite time at 
which (cf. 126, 4, 130, 4): as, 

1. an bent Xage nad) ber Sdjtadjt, on the day after the battle. 

2. in 5tt)et SSodjen, in two weeks. 

3. feit brei SaTjrcit tot f dead for three years (cf. 130, 7). 

4. tJor oiefen $afjren, many years ago; tor einem donate, a 7nonth 

ago. 

When possible, to is expressed by the dative without a preposition 
(128, 1). Otherwise, of persons and to denote purpose (as, SSaffer 511m 
Srtnfen; ber SSeg gur (stabt) it is expressed by gu, to, with d.; of countries 
and towns (the distance of which made arrival uncertain), by the indef- 
inite nad), toward, with d.; before other objects, by an, to (to the side 
of ; 90, 3), auf, {up) to (90, 2), auf ♦ ♦ . %\\, toward, up to, or in, into (90, 1), 
with a. For toward see 86, 3, and gegeit, S8, 4: as, 

1. §n tf)rent 33rttber, to her brother's ; auf ifjn 3U, up to him. 



THE DATIVE CASE 1 2Cj 

Exercise 124, German into English 

1. ($eftertt ging id) 511 ^eing, ber auf feinem 3^ mmer ^ ar ^ x 
itnb fagte ^u itmt: „§ein3, roiEft bu mit einem meiner greunbe 
nad) §etbetberg retfen?" 2. „(&§ mare mtr fieb, mitpgef)ett, 
graulein, aber felt ad)t Xagen ftabe id) etnett better bet mtr." 
3. „$Iufjer un£ ^roet Slnaben ift niemanb 311 §aufe." 4. „3n 
einer 2Sod)e ftnb ^ater unb Gutter roieber §u §aufe, unb mem 
better totit bann nrieber nad) granted), mo er Dor em paax 
Safyren geioobjitt bat." 5- „9cadj)ten s Dtontag merbe id) reifen 
fomten, menu e3 Sfynen angenct)m ift unb mein SBater mir'3 
ertaubt." 6. „2)a3 ift mtr ferjr angenefym," antroortete id); 
„id) roerbe einert 53rief an beinen 95ater (or beiuem 3Sater ei* 
nen SBrief) fdjreiben, urn ifm §u fragen, ob bu mit barfft" 

7. SDarauf fd)rieb id) feinem SBater (or an feineu SBater), unb 
am nad)ften i^orgen friir) er()ielt id) folgenbe ?(nnnort: „(§& tut 
mir fefjr leib, mein tiebe3 grdutem, aber ein alter SBefamtter 
fcrjreibt mir ebcn au£ Spari3, ba£ er urts> (or bei un3) fogteicfj 
einen Keinen S3efud) mad)en raerbe, raenn e£ wt£ gefdllig fet." 

8. „9t6cr nad) biefem 23efudje nrirb ^jeing mitgerjen biirfen." 

9. S)ie3 roar feme f)bfltd)e 2(ntroort auf meinen SBrief. 

Exercise 125, English into German 
10. Will you go with me up to the old castle? 11. I 2 
have not succeeded (113, sentence 7) in finding my father, 
to ask him if I may go. 12. He went to Dresden this morn- 
ing and has not yet come home. 13. But your mother is 
at home; ask her if it is agreeable to her. 14. I must go 
to the castle to-day, because to-morrow we shall move to (in) 
our house in (auf) the country. 15. Well, take (carry) my 
books up to my room to my brother, and I will go to mother 
and ask her. 16. Mother says we may go to (an) the old 
mill (bie TOifjIe) and up to the castle. 



I 30 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LXIV. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE (88, 90) 

i Besides the direct object in the accusative, some verbs 
have a second object in the accusative, as in English : as, 

1. er leljrt mid) ©eogra^fjte 7 , he teaches me geography. 

2. fie nanntcn tyn ben airmen $an§, they named him poor Jack. 

2 Verbs meaning make, choose, appoint, etc., have their second object 
expressed by the dative with gnm or gnr (jit before plurals or possessive 
adjectives; 131, sentence 6): as, 

1. er nintmt fie $m ftvau, he takes her for a wife. 

3 With impersonal verbs the subject (eS) is generally omitted when the 
inverted order is used (122): as, 

1 . mtr tonrbe geraten, / was advised. 

4- The accusative is used to express definitely the extent of ti?ne or of 
space; but it is also used loosely to express the time within which (cf. 
126, 4) or the time at which (cf. 128, 4, 45, 1): as, 

1. ben folgenben %a$ olieo er Ijier, the next day he stayed here. 

2. cinctt Ijatbcn £o£f grower, half a head taller. 

3. ben folgenben £ag ging er fort, the next day he went away. 

4. Stnfang (September, at the beginning of ' Septejnberj Wxitt $n r ni, in 

the middle ofjimej (£nbe ^n'lt, at the end of fuly (60, 5). 

5 The accusative may stand alone (the accusative absolute) : as, 

1. ben $nt in ber £anb ging er ljincm3 f hat in hand he went out. 

2. tour finb atte Ijier, nteine Gutter an^genommen, we are all here with 

the exception of my mother. 

6 For the accusative with prepositions expressing to, see 128, 5. 

7 Care should be used in translating for : as, 

1. mir ttioljnen ijier $af)re ((rtng), we have lived here for years (13, 1). 

2. id) uitte Sie nm SBerjei'fjnng, I beg your (I beg you for) pardon. 

3. er ift fdjon stoan&iq $aljre (or fett gmangig ^afyren) fort f he has been 

gone for twenty years. 

4. e3 ift gut fiir bid), it is well for you. 

5. fdjicfe nad) bem Slr^te! send for the doctor. 

6. er gefjt anf brei $af)re fort, he is going away for three years. 



THE ACCUSATIVE CASE 



131 



Exercise 126, German into English 
1. SStr finb je^t alle f)ier, bie fleirte 9Jtarte au^genommen. 
2. ©eib iv)x ben gangen Sag in ber <2d)ule getoefen? 3. 9cein, 
ben gan^en SDforgen toaren totr ba. 4. £ente nadjmittag finb 
ttrir §ur alien 9Jtu()te gegangen, mo tote eine ©tnnbe ftfdjten. 
5. £>a3 SSaffer tear- gefyn gufc tief, unb nn3 ttmrbe geratcn, 
bort gn fifdjen, aber ftrir fingen feinen gtjd). 6. ®amt madjten 
nrir grit* gu nnferm gitfjrer nnb gtngen in ben SSalb f)tnein. 
7. SBciljrenb nrir SButnten fammelten, nerloren nrir ben 3Bcg nnb 
fonnten tfyn nicljt ttrieberfmben. 8. Gntbftd) famen nrir an em 
lleine^ |)an3 r ba£ tief im 2Sa(be ftanb. 9. £>en §nt in ber 
§anb nnb bk ©d)n(bM)er nnterm 2frme, flopfte grt| letfe cm£ 
%ux3)m. 10. (Sine fefyr Heine 2ttte mtt fdjneetoeifjen §aaren 
matfjte bie Site anf nnb fragte tint, tva§ er tooftte. 11. £)ie 
5Ilte fat) fo llein nnb frfjrecflttf) au3, ba§ nrir feinen 5(ugenb(id 
ftefjen btteben, fonbern in grower (5t(e ba§> 2$eite fndjten. 
12. 9H3 nrir enblid) an3 bent SSalbe roaren, fpielten nrir ein 
llein bijsdjen anf ber SStefe, efje nrir nad) §aufe gtngen. 

Exercise 127, English into German 
13. How many years did you live in Dresden, Miss Miller? 
14. We lived there ten years. 15. But we have not lived 
there for six years. 16. We were advised to go to the coun- 
try. 17. And so we all live here, with the exception of my 
youngest sister. 18. On the day that (%n bent Sage, too) 
we moved here she went to an aunt's. 19. She has lived 
(13, 1) with (bet) this aunt the whole six years. 20. She has 
grown so tall that she is a head taller than brother Harry. 
21. At the beginning of March we shall have her come 
heme. 22. She will remain at home for several years. 
23. Harry works in town all day; but if you remain here 
until this evening, you will be able to see him. 



132 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LXV. PECULIAR CONSTRUCTIONS 

The definite article has some peculiar uses : as, 

1. ber Sftenfd), ?nan, in a generic (general) sense. 

2. ba§ 8fawd)ett ift f)ter berboteu, ;w smoking here. 

3. Staffer Sum Srittfett, ««&r {Jit) for drinking. 

4. tieim 2Iu5tel)eit, $afjren, Gsffen, w^z'/^ dressing, traveling, dining. 

5. smetmal be3 Xage3, /ze/^ # rf^j (distributively). 

The infinitive without ju (and sometimes the past participle) may be 
used to express a command (cf . 74) : as, 

1. um'fteigen ! change cars ! aufgemerft ! attention! 

For the infinitive with btetben, ftnben, fU^(en ? t)aoen, tjBren, or fetjen, 
see 112. $at)ren, tanfen, or reiten may take the infinitive ftoagie'ren, 

80, 4; gefjen may take almost any infinitive : as, 

1. td) gefye bettetn, ftfdjen, I go (a) begging, {a) fishing. 

The infinitive is often translated into English by the past participle 
or the present infinitive passive : as, 

1 . er lie \ ba§ $au§ bon mir banen, he had the house built by me. 

2. id) t)abe bag oft tnm tljm fagen tjbren, / often heard that said of him. 

3. ba§ 23ud) ift bon U\l§ 5U lefett, the book is to be read by us. 

English words in -ing are seldom equivalent to the German present 
participle, but are often used to translate clauses or phrases (133, 1): as, 

1 . fie f a^ tcf cnb ant $enfter, she was sitting at the window reading. 

2. bent ®naben fotgeub, gtng er Ijinein, following the boy he went in. 

3. bie Sente, bie an bcr ©ee mofjnen, the people living at the sea. 

4. id) fat) it)n f elje id) I)ereinfam f I saw Mm before co?ning in. 

5. ba er nidjt tommen fonnte, not being able to conie, he, etc. 

6. er gab mir bie ^panb, inbem er fagte, he gave me his hand, saying. 

7. fie tjorte auf p fingcn, she stopped singing. 

8. t§ getang if)tn f 511 gefjen, he succeeded in going. 

9. er mar ftolj barauf, gegangen %\\ fein, he was proud of having gone. 
10. an^tatt su fbredjen, gtng er fort, instead of speaking he went away. 

With getjen or fomnten the past participle is translated by the English 
infinitive in -ing: as, 

1 . er f am (or gtng) gelaufen, he ca7ne (or went) running. 



PECULIAR CONSTRUCTIONS I 33 

($Hn is sometimes not used where English has a or an: as, I 

1. al3 er ©otbat ttmrbc, on becoming a soldier (so of professions). 

2. er gtng ai§ ttianbernber Sanger, he went as a wandering minstrel. 

3. ai§ 9lr$t mu| er gefjett, being a physician he 7nust go. 

4. al3 ber $rteg 511 (Snbe tt>ar, the war being at an end. 

Exercise 128, German into English 
1. ©eftern morgen flopfte eg, unb id) freute mid) fefyr baritber, 2 
goljann in ber %wc ftefjen gu fefjen. 2. 2)a er fett langer Qtit 
ntd)t Ijter getnefen mar, foUte er einige Xage bet un3 bleiben. 

3. s 2tber er mu^te fdjon fjeute morgen nad) granfretd) reifem 

4. (£r lam fd)tneigenb in3 §au3, unb roafjrenb er Ijier tear, Ia3 
er immer bie Qcttungert. 5. ®t fdjten frof), nnfre fdjonen 58il= 
ber fefjen 3U firnnen. 6. Gsfje er fortging, ftefj er fid) Don mir 
ein fleineS getter attf feinem 3^ mmer madjen, baran fajs er giuet 
(Stttnbett lang unb beantroortete SBriefe. 7. Sd} ging mandjmat 
attf fetn 3^ mmer ni & er §offming, oa & ^J nut ^) m t^itrbe fpre= 
d)en fomten. 8. 9Iber er fdjidte mid) fort, inbem er fagte, ba\\ 
er mid) f pater fcbcn nutrbe. 9. 3dj tear fefjr ungufrieben ha* 
mit, nid)t langer Dei iijm bleiben §u bitrfen. 

Exercise 129, English into German 
10. Now that (ba) we live in the country, I go driving twice 3 
a week with a cousin. 11. My cousin has become a doctor 
and must sometimes come to see my brother. 12. My 
brother cannot go driving or swimming with us. 13. One 
day, when the doctor came into my brother's room, he found 
the poor fellow (ben 5Irmen) writing in bed. 14. He sat 
down by the bed and remained sitting there (for) an hour. 
15. My brother stopped writing and had him read from 
one of the books lying on the table. 16. While the doctor 
sat reading, I remained in my room writing (and wrote) 
letters. 17. Then my cousin and I went fishing (132, 3). 



134 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LXVI. THE SUFFIXES 
i. =&5r, -able, -ible, from the root of geba'ren, bear : as, 
fyiYMVf curable j ftdjt'fcar, visible. 

2. =djett, =Iettt (34, 1), =ltttg (36, 1), generally with umlaut: as, 

ba§ SBd'terdjett, dear father, papa, daddy j ba§ $rdttleitt, /««jy 
bet $tttbftttg,jfr«/z^/z>2g7 ber $ritljltttg, spring. 

3. =b(e), -t f =(er)ei' f =ljett, 'idt, =frf)aft, -t, =ttttg, generally abstract or 
collective (141, 3, 4), and generally feminine: as, 

bte SJZSgb (mogen), maid; bie f^rcubc (freuett), y^yy ba§ (SJetttSFbe 
(malen), painting; bie (SJrB^e (grofj), great?iess; bie Ofeiteret', 
cavalry; bie ©djtftt'fjett, beauty ; bie ^rettttb'ttdjfett, friend- 
liness; bie ^remtb'fdjaft, friendship; bie (^efciirt' (gebS'ren), 
birth; bie SBar'tutttg, warning. 

4. =el, the instrument, almost always masculine: as, 

ber $etfel, cover; ber $Iitgel (fftegen), a/%. 

5. =(e)tt, =ent f -#*, ^ generally with umlaut: -as, 

golbett, golden; fil&ertt, silver; f}ol§ertt, wooden. 

6. =er, =Ier f =tter, the agent, masculine, generally with umlaut: as, 

ber (Partner, gardener; ber Refiner (teller, cellar), waiter. 

7. =cr f uninflected adjectives from names of towns (48, 4): as, 

® flitter Coffer, Cologne water. 

8. =tjaft (Ijaben), of the natwe of, -ish: as, 

ftta'&ettljaft, boyish; le&'ljaft, /zw/k. 
9- -iflr -J> generally with umlaut: as, 

ntdcfjttg (bie 9Jcad)t), mighty; gcfdt'ltg (gefal'len), pleasing. 

10. =itt, feminines from masculines, generally with umlaut: as, 

bie QJrtt'ftit (©raj), countess; bte ffij'ttigut, queen. 

11. =tf<J), <?/5 -z>A, sometimes belittling: as, 

rij'tttifd), Roman; ftttbifdj, childish, babyish (cf. =Udj). 

12. =ltdj, -like, -ly, generally with umlaut : as, 

ftttbltdj, childlike; tttijgttd), possible; rBtttdj, reddish. 

13. =n>3, -less: as, freuttblo3, friendless. 

14. =tu3, =fdl, neuters or feminines, generally abstract (141, 4)'- as, 

ba§ (SJeljetttt'ttt^, secret; bie Srub'fat, trouble. 

15. =fattt f -some: as, furdjt'fattt, fearsome, timid; lattg'fattt, j/^u'. 



THE SUFFIXES I 35 

Exercise 130, German into English 
1. %o& tft eine recite |)an3franenferjre: £a£ feme Unrein- 
licpeit Oor beiner %i\x auffommen, fonft ttrirb fie btr and) \v& 
$>au§ getragen. 2. Stegt fie after nor ber %ixi, fo tft fie ge= 
rot§ and) imnenbig ba^tnter. 3, 2tber in bent SSorte ttegt, 
je nad)bem man ben 9cad)brucf tegt, ein meljrfadjer @inn. 
4. ©agft bn: Slefjre oor beiner Xiir, fo iff 3 eine Serjre ber 
Dtein lid) kit, banfen^mert nnb inert, ba$ bn fie befolgft, fiebe 
§au3frau! 5. ©agft bn: Sler)re nor beiner Xitr, fo iff£ fcfyon 
ettoa<§ einbringltdjer. 6. %ud) r beiner Xitr foltft bn leinen 
©rfjmut) laffen, gefd)toeige benn bafjinter. 7. ©agft bn aber: 
®ef)re nor beiner %wc, fo fjeifjt'S: ®imtmere bicf) nm anbrer 
£ente getter nicrjt nnb beffere melmefjr beine eignen! 8. II nb 
ba ift e3 erft redjt ein golbener 5Ipfel in fitbenter (Srfjale, nnb 
ba gilt's nidjt bloft ber §an3fran, fonbern nn3 alien. 9. ©3 
erinnert nnS an ba$ SSort nnfers £errn, baf} mir erft ben 
SBalfen any bem eignen 5Iuge gieljen follen, el)e loir anf be£ 
SBrubers ©plitter beuten. 10. SDcir tnifty oorfommen, al3 foil- 
ten mir ba$ ©pridjtoort in ber breifadjen iBetonung feiner 3£orte 
inert fatten nnb befolgen. n. 2)er auftere ®d)mn§ ift allemat 
ein timber bes intoenbigen nnb fein ^orbote gewifj ! 

Exercise 131, English into German 
12. If we .let uncleanliness thrive before our doors, it will 
be carried into our houses. 13. The proverb says, " Sweep 
before your door." 14. But the meaning of this proverb is 
threefold. 15. If we lay the emphasis on (anf) the first 
word, then the proverb teaches us cleanliness. 16. Let 
us lay the emphasis on the third word and try to see the dirt 
before our own doors. 17. If there is (73, 1) dirt before the 
door, there is certainly dirt inside. 18. It is better for us 
(130, 7) first to pull the beam from our own eye (see. 9). 



I 36 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

LXVII. COMPOUND WORDS 

Compound nouns are formed and accented pretty much as 
in English. The principal accent generally falls on the ac- 
cented syllable of the first part of the compound, and the 
secondary accent on the accented syllable of the last part : as, 

bct§ SHtt'bermdb'djeit, nurse j ber ^lu^'gang', exitj bte ($a3'beleud)= 
tangggefett'fdjaft, gas company. 

When in forming compounds the same consonant would occur three 
times in succession, one of these is dropped unless the word is hyphened 
or has a consonant following the repeated consonant. A few words 
always have one consonant dropped : as, 

ba§ ^et'tftd), sheet, $ett=titd) ; fttcf'ftnfffret ()iid-)iofc\vei), free from nitro- 
gen; but, ben'nodj (berm, notfj), yet, still: ba§ ^xWttl (britt, Sett); ber 
mt'tas (SDUtte, Sag). 

Compound nouns have almost always the gender and the inflection of 
their last part : as, 

bte (Sjar'tenarbett, bte (^ar'tettarbeitett, garden work (ber ©arteit, bte 
Weit); but, bte Wnt'tvovt (ba§ SBort), ber Mitt'tooty (bte 2Bocf)e). 

Stems are often joined without change, or, more often, the first stem 
takes the ending (e)§ or (c)tt of the genitive singular, or er or (e)tt of the 
genitive plural : 1 as, 

1. ber Slp'feUJOum, appletree; ber Q&vofy/tiatZY, grandfather; \M $a'= 

tuort, consent (yes-word); blttt'felrot, dark red; tttett'ftfjettleer, 
deserted (empty of people); §e(b= ititb (^ar / tettfriirf|te, field a7id 
garden fruits j £$tt'genbfuft Ultb 4etb, the joy and sorrow of youth; 
ber ScfjuFjunge (bte ©cfjute, final e of feminines often being 
dropped), schoolboy. 

2. ba§ 28irt§ljau!§, innj ber (^ebftrr^tag (bte ©eburt / ), birthday; ber 

Ste'be^brtef (bte Siebe), /<re/* letter; elj'rcttljalber (bte ©tyre), _/»r 
honor's sake. 

3. ba§ SBflr'ierbud), dictionary; bte ®tta / !6ettfd}ulc, foyj' school; ba§> 

^rau'enflofter, nunnery, cloister. 

1 Originally stems were connected by vowel suffixes, which were afterwards 
dropped, or appear as C or i: as, ber Sa'geMeb, idler; ba§ Se'febucfj, reader; 
bie ©art'fc^aut, creeps (goose skin) ; ber Srau'ttgam, bridegroom. 



COMPOUND WORDS 137 

Exercise 132, German into English 
1. Das Atmen besteht darin, daB unsre Lungen wie ein 1 
Blasebalg Luft einziehen und wieder ausstromen lassen. 

2. Die Luft, die wir einatmen, soil rein und frisch sein. 

3. Sie ist rein, wenn sie keine gesundheitsschadlichen Stoffe 
enthalt, und frisch, wenn sie nicht zu heiB und nicht zu kalt 
ist. 4. Ein Bestandteil der eingesogenen Luft wird von der 
Lunge zuriickbehalten und zu alien Teilen des Korpers hinge- 
fiihrt. 5. Es ist der Sauerstoff, der sich mit dem Blute ver- 
mischt. 6. Die ausgeatmete Luft enthalt die fur Menschen 
und Tiere schadliche Kohlensaure (49, 1). 7. Es erfordert 
nur ein wenig Aufmerksamkeit, um jeden Raum, den wir 
bewohnen, der frischen Luft zuganglich zu machen. 8. Vor 
alien Dingen ist es notig, die Zimmer fleiBig zu liiften. 
9. Durch Raucherungen wird die schlechte Beschaffenheit 
der Luft wohl verdeckt, aber nicht verbessert. 10. Hin- 
gegen ist das Aufstellen von Blattpflanzen fur das Atmen von 
Vorteil. 11. Am besten wirkt die Herstellung von Luftzug. 
12. Besonders in den Schlafzimmern sollte man auf reine 
Luft halten (auf. . . halten, be particular about). 13. Deshalb 
sollte des Morgens beim Auf stehen das erste sein, die Fenster 
des Schlafzimmers weit zu offnen. 14. Auch sollte man die 
Decken und Bettiicher einem griindlichen Luftdurchzuge 
unterwerfen, ehe man das Bett macht. 15. Solche kleine 
Gesundheitsregeln dienen mehr zur Erhaltung des Wohl- 
befindens und des Lebens als manche vielgepriesene Mittel. 

Exercise 133, English into German 
16. The air that we breathe should contain no matter 2 
injurious to health (see 3). 17. Our rooms should (sollten) 
be accessible to the fresh air. 18. Before we go to bed, 
and when we rise, we should open the windows wide. 



138 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 
LXVIII. THE GERMAN SCRIPT 



9? J 



J> 



A a B b 



C c D d 



/E . e F /f 




'H //h 



^^" 




s^ 



K k L 



w**> d?. 



Mm No o /? ^p 




SIT 

X Q /q R r S ' s t 



ry 



U u Y y W w X ^x 



Y ^y ^ZZ 




THE GERMAN SCRIPT 



I 39 



A" a" 



(7 



0" o" 






jf 



Au 



Au 



y Eu 






ck 



' SZ 







MO A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



(24^^^p67^4>/z&?^ ^2^^<>^ik^^^^^^^^^^^ 






^CJ^/W^tfer C^/^//^^/ ^^^^^^^^^^^7 



yOc^>/^y \st^^z?/<7z^^ s^frfPf^r, ^/^/>u sp/&t<^^/^/* 






J^y, 



"t^cJ^fz^ /Ptpi^ CJ^^v^o^pd * 



J-trU^^pcJ^/ OaJ^ 



^4<2C s44frtt4/^* 



/ 



FORMS AND CONSTRUCTIONS 



SOME ESSENTIALS OF ENGLISH AND GERMAN GRAMMAR 

Nouns, or Names (34-45, 152-163) 

A common noun is a name applicable to all of a class of persons, I 
places, or things. In German all nouns and all words used as nouns are 
written with initial capitals (for pronouns see 169, 2, 3): as, child, ®utb ; 
city, ®tabt ; apple, 2ttof el. 

A proper noun is a name applicable to one person, place, or thing: as, 2 
Fred, %x\% ; Berlin, %txi\\\' ; Monday, 9ftontag. 

A collective noun is a name that in the singular is applicable to a 3 
group of objects. In English it takes a singular or a plural verb accord- 
ing to the sense (see 82, 3): as, The family is (or are not) all here. 

An abstract noun is a name applicable to a quality: as, beauty, 4 
<Sd)imijett. 152, 3 (the endings at 40 1 include many abstract nouns). 

A verbal noun (another name for the infinitive in -ing) is a name 5 
applicable to an action or a state: as, sleeping, bets ©djlnfen. 

There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. Many 6 
nouns that are called neuter in English are in German classed as mascu- 
line or feminine. 152,2-4, 153. 

Adjectives (20, 46-55, 58-61, 166, 167) 

Some adjectives merely limit the meaning of a noun, while others 7 
express a quality : as, those trees; green trees. 

The numeral adjectives limit the number of objects, and are either 8 
cardinal (as, one man, fifty men; 58) or ordinal (as, the first man, the 
fiftieth man; 60). 

Adjectives formed from proper names (141, 2) are called proper 9 
adjectives. In English they are wiitten with initial capitals, but not in 
German unless they are part of a proper name (54, 5; see also 48, 4) : as, 
a German book, em beutfd)e3 23utf), 

141 



142 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



Pronouns (16, 18, 62-71, 168-170) 

1 A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun : as, He (John) says that 
they (Mary and Tom) are here. 

2 In the personal pronouns the first person denotes the speaker or the 
writer; the second person, the person addressed; the third person, the 
person spoken or written of (16; for the cases see 8). You (142, 3) is 
plural in form and takes a plural verb, but is used in speaking either to 
two or more persons or to one person (cf. <Sie, 6, 2). 







First Person 


Second Person 


Third Person 




N. 


/ 


thou (6, 2) 


he she 


it 


Singular 


G. 
D. 


my ', 7nine 
me 


thy, thine 
thee 


his her(s) 
him her 


its 
it 




A. 


me 


thee 


him her 


it 




N. 


we 


ye, you 


they they 


they 


Plural 


G. 


our(s) 


your(s) 


their{s) their(s) 


their{s) 


D. 


us 


you 


them the?n 


them 




A. 


us 


you 


the?7i them 


them 



A relative pronoun (66) joins a subordinate clause to a principal 
clause by referring to some word or words (in the principal clause) called 
its antecedent; and it agrees with its antecedent in gender, person, and 
number : as, This is the ma7i whom you saw. The relative pronouns are 
who (masculine or feminine), which (neuter), that (masc, fern., or neut.), 
as (masc, fern., or neut.: as, Such as I have), and what (neuter): 



Singular 
or 


N. 
G. 
D. 


who 
whose 


which 
whose 


that 


as 


what 


Plural 


A. 


whom 


which 


that 


as 


what 



5 The interrogative pronouns are who, which, and what, and are in- 
flected like the relative pronouns (142, 4). 



ENGLISH AND GERMAN GRAMMAR 1 43 

Verbs (172-202) 

The subject of a verb is in the nominative case. A noun or a pronoun 
used in the predicate is in the nominative case and is called a predicate 
nominative : as, 

1 . The ?nan went away. 

2. Father was elected (as) chairman. 

3. It was she. 

The direct object is in the objective (= the accusative) case without 
a preposition. The indirect object is in the objective (= the dative) case 
with or without to or for v as, 

1. John struck hi?n. 

2. Mary gave the book to me (or, Mary gave me the book). 

There are two voices : the active voice, which represents the subject 
as acting; the passive voice, which represents the subject as receiving 
action: as, 

1. John struck James. 

2. James was struck by John. 

A transitive verb has both the active and the passive voice. In the 
active voice it may have a direct object (143, 2) and a second object 
called a predicate object. In either voice it may have an indirect 
object: as, 

1. They elected hi7n (as) guardian for her. 

2. The book was given {to) me by my father. 

An intransitive verb has only the active voice. It cannot have a 
direct object, but may have an indirect object (143, 2) : as, 

1. Florence is sitting in her room. 

2. The estate passed to my brother. 

A reflexive verb has for its object a reflexive pronoun ; that is, a pronoun 
that refers to the same person, place, or thing as the subject of the verb 
(18): as, 

1. How do you fnd yourself? (= How are you?) 

2. He is dressing (himself). 1 

1 With some reflexive verbs in English the object may be omitted. 



144 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



1 An auxiliary verb helps in the inflection of verbs: as, He is going, 
has gone, will go. 

2 An impersonal verb has the impersonal subject it: as, It snows. 

3 The indicative mood is used in stating facts or in asking questions; 
the subjunctive mood (which in English is now generally replaced by the 
indicative), in statements of condition or of doubt: as, It is so. Is it so? 
If it be so. 

4 The subjunctive mood is generally introduced by if, although, provided, 
that, until, or a similar word. 



Present Subjunctive (147, 2) 


Perfect Subjunctive (147, 2) 


1. HI be 


If / have been 


2. If thou be 


If thou have been 


3. If he be 


If he have been 


1. If we be 


If we have been 


2. If ye ox you be 


liye. ox you have been 


3. If they be 


If they have been 


Past Subjunctive (147, 3) 


Plupf . Subjv. (or Indie. ; 147, 3) 


1 . If / were 


If / had been 


2. If thou wert 


If thou hadst been 


3. If he were 


If he had been 


1. If we were 


If we had been 


2. liye ox you were 


liye ox you had been 


3. If they were 


If they had been 



Future Subjunctive (147, 4) 

1. If I shall be 

2. If thou shall be 

3. If he shall be 

1 . If we shall be 

2. liye ox you shall be 

3. If they shall be 



Future Perfect Subjunctive (147, 4) 
If / shall have been 
If thou shall have been 
If he shall have been 

If we shall have been 

If ye ox you shall have been 

If they shall have been 



8 In the future and the future perfect subjunctive the auxiliary is shall 
(or shall) in all persons (cf. the indicative, I shall, thou will, etc., 146, 147). 



ENGLISH AND GERMAN GRAMMAR 1 45 

The present and the past subjunctive active of English verbs except I 
be (144, 5, 6) are like the indicative (146, 1,2), except that the second and 
third persons singular of the present subjunctive are like the first person 
singular; as, 

Present Subjunctive ■ Past Subjunctive 

1 . If / love If / loved 

2. If thou love If thou lovedst 

3. If he love If he loved 

1 . If we love If we loved 

2. If ye ox you love, etc. If ye or you loved, etc. 

Perfect: If I have loved, etc. (144, 5) ; pluperfect: If I had loved, etc. 2 
(144, 6) ; future and future perfect : If / shall love, If / shall have loved, 
etc. (144, 7). 

The present tense denotes the occurrence or the continuance of an action 3 
or a state in present time (6, 12, 22, 24): as, 
1. I love, I am loving (146, 4). 

The so-called historical present tense is sometimes used for the past: 4 
as, When I go in, the thief sees me and leaps out of the window. 

The past tense denotes the continuance or the repetition of an action or 5 
a state in past time (6, 14, 22, 24): as, 
1 . I loved, I was loving ( 1 46, 4) . 

The future tense denotes the occurrence or the continuance of an action 6 
or a state in future time (32) : as, 

1. I shall love, I shall be loving (146, 5). 

The perfect tense denotes the occurrence or the contimiance of an action 7 
or a state completed in present time (26, 28, 30) : as, 
1. I have loved, I have been loving (146, 4). 

The pluperfect tense denotes the occurrence or the continuance of an 8 
action or a state completed in past time (26, 28, 30) : as, 
1. I had loved, I had been loving (146, 4). 

The future perfect tense denotes the occurrence or the continuance of 9 
an action or a state completed in future time (32) : as, 
1. I shall have loved, I shall have been loving (146, 5). 



146 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



The Indicative Active (143, 144, 1-3) 



Present Indicative (145, 3) 



Perfect Indicative (145, 7) 





1 . / love, I am loving 


7 have loved, etc. 




2. Thou loves t 


77z6>z/ hast loved 




3. He loves 


He has loved 




1 . We love 


We have loved 




2. Ye or You love 


Ye or You have loved 




3. They love 


They have loved 


2 


Past Indicative (145, 5) 


Pluperfect Indicative (145, 8) 




1 . / loved, I was loving 


I had loved, etc. 




2. Thou lovedst 


Thou hadst loved 




3. He loved 


He had loved 




1 . We loved 


We had loved 




2. Ye or K?# loved 


Ye ox You had loved 




3. 77^ loved 


They had loved 


3 


Future Indicative (145, 6) 


Future Perfect Indicative (145, 9) 




I. I shall love, etc. 


7 shall have loved, etc. 




2. Thou wilt love 


Thou wilt have loved 




3. 77? will love 


He will have loved 




1 . £F<? shall love 


We shall have loved 




2. K? or You will love 


Ye or You will have loved 




3. 7/^j «//// love 


They will have loved 


4 


Interrogatively -.Do 1 1 love ? 


Had he been loving? Etc. 


5 


In questions in future time 


the auxiliary in the first and se 



persons is shall (or shall) ; for in asking a. question the same auxiliary is 
used that is expected in the answer: as, 



1. Shall I love ? etc. 

2. Shalt thou love? 

3. Will he love? 

1 . Shall we love ? 

2. Shall ye ox you love? 

3. Will they love? 

1 Do occurs also in emphatic forms: 



Shall I have loved? etc. 
Shalt thou have loved? 
Will he have loved? 

Shall we have loved? 
Shall ye ox you have loved? 
Will they have loved? 

, He does love, They did love. 



ENGLISH AND GERMAN GRAMMAR 



147 



The Indicative Passive (143, 144, 1-3, 176, 182) 

The passive voice of an English verb is formed by joining its past 
participle (indicated below by a star, *) to the inflection of the verb be 
(147, 144)- 



Present Indicative (182 


*) 


Perfect Indicative (182, 1) 




1. I am 


* 


/ have been 


* 


2. Thou art 


* 


Thou hast been 


* 


3. He is 


* 


He has been 


* 


1 . We are 


* 


We have been 


# 


2. Ye or You are 


* 


Ye or You have been 


* 


3. They are 


* 


They have been 


# 


Past Indicative (182, 2 


) 


Pluperfect Indicative (182, 2 


) 


1 . / was 


* 


/ had been 


* 


2. Thou wast 


* 


Thou hadst been 


* 


3. He was 


* 


He had been 


* 


1. We were 


* 


We had been 


* 


2. Ye or You were 


* 


Ye or You had been 


* 


3. They were 


* 


They had been 


* 


Future Indicative (182, 


3) 


Future Perfect Indicative (182 


,3) 


1. I shall be 


* 


/ shall have been 


* 


2. Thou wilt be 


* 


Thou wilt have been 


# 


3. He will be 


* 


He will have been 


* 


1 . We shall be 


* 


We shall have been 


% 


2 . Ye or You will be 


* 


Ye or You will have been 


* 


3. They will be 


* 


They will have been 


# 



Interrogatively: Am I loved? Was he being loved? Etc. See 146,5. 

Awkward progressive forms like He had been being loved should be 
avoided. Sometimes a verbal noun (141, 5) may be used instead: as, 
The sled had been two days making. 

Can = ability j could =past or conditional ability; may —permission 
or possibility; might = conditional possibility; must = necessity or co?n- 
pulsion; ought = duty; shall = command or promise; should = con- 
dition or obligation; will = determination or pro?nise; would =past or 
conditional willingness. 148, 78, 1, 4. 



148 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



The English Potential Verbs 178, 1, 3, 4, 147, 7, 186) 

Can, may, might, must, should, could, and would are used with the 
present or the perfect infinitive (without to) to form pote?itial verb 
phrases (147, 7). 



Present Potential Active 

1 . I can, may, 7?iight, must, or 

should love 

2. Thou canst, etc., love 

3. He can, etc., love 

1. We can, etc., love 

2. Ye or You can, etc., love 

3. They can, etc., love 

Perfect Potential Active 

1. I can, etc., have loved 

2. Thou canst, etc., Z^^ loved 

3. 7fe £V2?z, etc., ^tfw loved 

1. /^ ^#;z, etc., have loved 

2. K? or You can, etc., 7z<zt/£ loved 

3. 7#£y a?;/, etc., ^#2/£ loved 

Present or Past Potential Active 

1 . T could or would love 

2. Thou couldst or ivouldst love 

3. He could or would love 

1 . H 7 ^ could or would love 

2. Ye ox You could ox would love 

3. They could ox would love 

Pluperfect Potential Active 

1 . 7 could or would have loved 

2. 77w« couldst, etc., ^#7^ loved 

3. Tfe <:0z//4 etc., /fow /tfw.7 

1. J^> could, etc., /ztfw /<97/^ 

2. K<? or Fb« could, etc., /mw loved 

3. 77z<?y could, etc., /ztfw /<?7/^ 



Present Potential Passive 
7 ^z/z, w^y, might, must, or 

should be loved 
Thou canst, etc., &? loved 
He can, etc., <fe loved 

We can, etc., <fe loved 

Ye or K?# <r««, etc., be loved 

They can, etc., be loved 

Perfect Potential Passive 
I can, etc., ^^7^ been loved 
Thou ca?ist, etc., have bee7i loved 
He can, etc., have been loved 

We can, etc., have been loved 

Ye or You can, etc., have been loved 

They can, etc., have bee7i loved 

Present or Past Potential Passive 
I could or would be loved 
Thou couldst or wouldst be loved 
He could or would be loved 

We could or would be loved 

Ye or You could or would be loved 

They could or would be loved 

Pluperfect Potential Passive 
I could or would have been loved 
Thou couldst, etc., have been loved 
He could, etc., have been loved 

We could, etc., have been loved 
Ye or You could, etc., have been loved 
They could, etc., have been loved 



ENGLISH AND GERMAN GRAMMAR 1 49 

Sentences, Conjunctions, Adverbs, and Prepositions 
A clause is a group of words that contains a subject and a predicate. I 
If it makes a complete thought, it is a principal (or independent) 
clause (or sentence) ; if it does not make a complete thought, it is a 
subordinate (or dependent) clause (149, 3): as, 

1. I shall go (principal clause) if it snows (subordinate clause). 

A phrase is a group of words that does not contain a subject and a 2 
predicate (149, 3): as, 

1 . The lords of the earth; on the mountains j by and by. 

A clause or a phrase is named according to its use : as, 3 

1. The book that lies on the table (adjective clause, limiting book). 

2. The book on the table (adjective phrase, limiting book). 

3. I read when I can (adverbial clause, limiting read). 

4. I read at night (adverbial phrase, limiting read). 

5. That he is here is fortunate (subject clause, noun). 

6. You know that he is here (object clause, noun). 

7. The thought that he is here cheers me (appositive clause, noun). 

In an imperative sentence (which expresses a com??tand or a request) 4 
the subject is omitted unless emphatic : as, Go / You go, I will stay. 

A coordinating (or coordinate) conjunction joins sentences or parts 5 
of sentences that have equal rank (149, 1-3): as, 

1. The sun went down, and it grew dark indoors and outdoors. 

A subordinating (or subordinate) conjunction joins a subordinate (or 6 
dependent) clause to a principal clause (149, 1): as, 
1. I shall go where you go. 

Adverbs limit verbs, adjectives, or adverbs: as, 7 

1. Walking fast he fell down; too red; pretty slowly. 

A relative (or conjunctive) adverb joins a subordinate (or dependent) 8 
clause to some word or words in a principal clause (149, 1): as, 
1. He went when he saw the light. 

A preposition used with a noun or a pronoun (in the objective case) 9 
forms an adverbial or an adjective phrase (149, 2, 3): as, 

1. Wilt thou live with me in the Garden of Allah? 



I50 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

English Conditional Sentences (151) 
A conditional sentence contains a subordinate clause called 
the condition (or protasis) and a principal clause called the 
conclusion (or apodosis). The conditional clause is generally 
introduced by if, unless, provided, or a similar word or phrase 
(for German conditional sentences see 151): as, 

If it assume my noble father's person, 

/'// speak to it, though hell itself should gape 

And bid me hold my peace. 

In simple conditions the present and past tenses of the indicative are 
generally used: as, 

1. If you are well, I ani glad. 

2. Although he was here, I did wot see him. 

In more vivid future conditions (expressing probability) the condition 
has the present indicative or the present subjunctive (sometimes the future 
or the future perfect subjunctive, 144, 7, 145, 2) ; the conclusion has the 
future indicative (or some equivalent form) : as, 

1 . If I go and fight and win, what will she then say ? 

2. For murder, though it have no tongue, will speak. 

3. If you shall find this true, do not blame him. 

In less vivid future conditions (expressing possibility') the condition 
has the past subjunctive or a past potential verb phrase with should; the 
conclusion has a potential verb phrase with could, might, should, or would 
(148) : as, 

1. If I went and fought and won, what would she then say ? 

2. Would he go if yotc asked (or should ask) him ? 

Conditions contrary to fact (expressing non -fulfillment) are either 
present or past. If present, the condition has the past subjunctive ; the 
conclusion, a potential verb phrase with could, might, should, or would. 
If past, the condition has the pluperfect subjunctive; the conclusion, 
a potential verb phrase with could, might, should, or would (148) : as, 

1. If I wished (but I do not wish), / could go. 

2. If I had wished (but I did not wish), I could have gone. 



CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 151 

German Conditional Sentences (77, 1, 150) 
Simple Present or Past Conditions (cf. 150, 2) 

1. menu er fiierfier fommt, > 

* ,1 \. u r(fo ) 2 ftngt er, 

fommt 1 er Ijterficr, > Vl ; ' B r 

if (or whenever, 104, 1) -#<? comes here, he sings. 

2. menu er fiierfier gefommen ift, > 

ift 1 er fiierfier gefommen, > u J 9 s^uugew, 

^"(or whenever, 104, 1) ^<? £«/^? ^<?r£, ^ .ra^g - . 

3. menu er fiierher lam. ) „ „ 
fam 1 er fiterfier, ) " J ' b ' 

z/"(or whenever, 104, 1) -^ *:<27/z£ ^m?, /z*? .ra/Z£-. 

The More Vivid Future Condition (cf . 1 50, 3) 
I. menu er fjterfier fommt, ) < (fo) 2 mirb er fingen, 
fommt 1 er *)ierfier, > ( (fo) 2 fingt er f 

if (or whenever, 104, 1) he comes here, he will sing. 

The Less Vivid Future Condition (cf . 1 50, 4) 
1. menu er fiierher fame, ) < (fo) 2 fange er, 

fame 1 er fiierfier, > ( (fo) 2 toiirbe er fingen, 

if he came (or should come) here, he would sing $ 

The Present and Past Contrary to Fact Conditions (cf. 150,5; 77, 1) 

1. metm er fiterfier fame, > < (fo) 2 f tinge er, 
fame 1 er fiierfier, > ( (fo) 2 toitrbe er fingen, 

if he were coming here (but he is not coming), he would sing? 

2. menu er fjterfier gefommen mare, ) ( (fo) 2 fiatte er gefungen, 
mare 1 er fiierfier gefommen, > 1 (fo) 2 mitrbe er gefungen hafien, 

if he had come hei'e (but he did not come), he would have sung. 

itoemt, if, may be omitted, and the inverted order used (122, 1, 3). 

2 After a clause of concession (see ofjgIeich / r 104, 1) or of condition, fo is 
often used to sum the clause up. When toenn is omitted in conditional 
clauses (footnote 1), fo is regularly used. 

3 The less vivid future and present contrary to fact conditions agree in 
form, and must be distinguished by the context. 



152 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



THE INFLECTION OF NOUNS (34-45, 152-163) 


Feminines 

remain 
unchanged 
in singular 


Classes III and V have no feminines ; Class IV has 
no neuters 


Strong 


Weak 


Mixed 


Class I 


Class II 


Class III 


Class IV 


Class V 


Singular 


N. 











— 





of 

masculines 

and 


G. 

D. 


— § 


— W* 1 

-(e) 2 


-(e)S 1 

-(e) 2 


-(e)* 

-(e)n 


-(e)** 1 
-(e) 2 


neuters 


A. 


— 


— 


— 


-(e)n 


— 




N. 


U 


u e 


^_er 


-(e)n 


-(e)n 




G. 


u 


u e 


— er 


-(e)tt 


-(e)n 


Plural 
of all 


D. 

A, 


<^(n)3 




-^-tvn 
— er 


-(e)n 

-(C)tl 


-(e)n 
— (c>tt 


nouns 




a, o f n 

sometimes 
modified 


a f o, u f an 

generally 
modified 


a, 0, n, an 

always 
modified 







The Gender of Nouns according to their Meanings 4 
Masculine: Most large males, large birds, fish, stones, mountains, non- 
German rivers; days, months, seasons, phenomena of the weather (as, 
ber ©djnee, snow), points of the compass. 

Feminine: Most females (except ba§> SSeib, woman, and nouns ending 
in cfjen and (em); trees, plants, flowers, fruits (except ber Sttofek, apple)-, 
small birds, insects; numbers ; abstract names; German rivers (except ber 
£ecfi, ber 9Kam, ber 9cccfar, ber 9?rjem). 

Neuter: Materials; metals (except ber Starjl, steel)-, the young of ani- 
mals; countries (except those always having the definite article: as, Me 
©c&toeift, Switzerland), cities; infinitives and other words (not denoting 
persons) used as nouns ; the letters. 

1 In nouns of one syllable, writers generally use the ending e§. 

2 In nouns of one syllable, writers generally use the ending e except after 
a preposition or before a vowel. 3 See 34, 3. 

4 The gender of many nouns is shown by the form or the ending (153). 
That of many others must be learned from the dictionary. 



THE GENDER OF NOUNS BY CLASSES I 53 

The Gender of Nouns according to their Classes 

Class I (34, 35, 152, 154, 155) I 

Masculine: Most nouns ending in unaccented el, en, er; ber Mfc, 
cheese. 

Feminine : bie 9)?utter, mother, Me £od)ter, daughter. 

Neuter : Some nouns ending in unaccented el f en (including all infini- 
tives used as nouns, 141, 1), er; all diminutive nouns ending in cfreu, 
leitt ; most nouns of the form ($e — e. 

Class II (36, 37, 152, 154, 156) 2 

Masculine : Most nouns of one syllable ; all nouns ending in trf), \% 
ling ; many nouns, mostly of foreign origin, ending in l f n, r, t, and ac- 
cented on the last syllable. 

Feminine: About 35 nouns of one syllable; all nouns ending in tunft; 
some nouns ending in nt3, fol. 

Neuter : About 60 nouns of one syllable ; most nouns ending in nt3, 
fat; many nouns of foreign origin (not denoting persons), ending in I 
tt, r, t, and accented on the last syllable. 

Class III (38, 39, 152, 154, 158) 3 

Masculine : 8 nouns of one syllable ; ber ^rrtunt, mistake, ber OfJetdjtum, 
riches. 

Neuter : About 60 nouns mostly of one syllable ; almost all nouns end- 
ing in titm. 

Class IV (40, 41, 152, 154, 160) 4 

Masculine: About 20 nouns of one syllable; all nouns ending in e 
denoting males ; many nouns of foreign origin, mostly denoting persons, 
ending in t, and accented on the last syllable. 

Feminine: About 75 nouns of one syllable; all feminine nouns of 
more than one syllable, except bie Gutter and bie Xodjter (Class I) and 
nouns ending in funft, nt3, or fat (Class II). 

Class V (42, 43, 152, 154, 162) 5 

Masculine : A few irregular nouns ; almost all nouns of foreign origin 

ending in or. 

Neuter : A few irregular nouns ; some nouns of foreign origin ending 

in I, nt. 



154 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



NOUN 



How to determine the Class of a Noun 

fList i, below? Class V (162) 
' monosyl- J List 2, below? Class III (158) 
labic? I List 3, below? Class IV (160) 
[if not, then Class II (156) 
? Class IV (161) 

' Class V (162) 
Class I (155) 



' masculine? 



polysyl- 
labic ? 



feminine? 



. neuter? 



monosyl- 
labic ? 

polysyl- 
labic ? 



monosyl- 
labic ? 



List 1, below 
=el, =ett, =cr? 
-turn? Class III (158) 
If not, then Class II (156) 
List 4, below? Class II (157) 
If not, then Class IV (161) 
flutter, £orf)ter? Class I (155) 
J =lttttft f =m8, =fal? Class II (156) 
[if not, then Class IV (160) 
List 5, below? Class V (162) 
List 6, below? Class III (158) 
If not, then Class II (157) 



polysyl- 
labic ? 



=ef f =en, =er, =d)ett, =Iein, @e — e? 

Class I (155) 
-m§, =fal? Class II (156) 
List 5, below? Class V (162) 
List 6, below? Class III (158) 
If not, then Class II (156) 

List 1 : Masculines, Class V (162): SSauer, 9cad)6ar, ©djmerg, See, ©taar, 
Strati, SSetter. 

List 2: Masculines, Class III (1 58): ©eift, ©ott, Sei6, Warm, Drt, Otcmb, 
2Balb, 23urm. 

List 3: Masculines, Class IV (160): S3ctr, SBurfd), Shrift, fjfelS, giirft, 
©raf, §etb, £err, .Spirt, 3Jlenfdj, SJcolrr, Starr, CcfjS, $rm$, Spa§ f £or. 

List 4: Feminines, Class II (157): 9lngft, 9lrt, S3cmf, SBraut, 93tufi, fyauft, 
grudjt, ©cm§, §anb, gjaut, ®raft, M), ®unft, Suft, Sufi, Sttadjt, 9Jcagb, 
SKauS, Stodjt, SRot, 9fotfj, ©tabt, 2Banb, SSurjt 

List 5: Neuters, Class V (162): Shtge, Sett, (htbe, £>emb, Cf)r. 

List 6: Neuters, Class III (158): Stmt, S3ab, SBanb, SBitb, SBlatt, SBrett, 
SSucf), 3>adj, Sorf, (Si, fyncf), Safe, 8^, © e ^» ©entatf)', ©entuF, ©efrfjiedjt', 
©eitdjt'; ©efpenft', ©ettxmb', ©Ta§, ©lieb, ©rab, ©ra§, ©itt, £aupt, #au§, 
£olg, £)orn, ftofpitat', £ufjn, £aI6, £mb, £teib, £orrt, £raut, Samm, Sanb, 
Stcfjt, Sib, Steb, Sotf), 3Rauf, 9£eft, partb, «ftab, Dtegtment', 9£ei§, Otinb, 
©djilb, (2ct)lo^, ©djroert, SpttaP, Sal, Sucfi, =tum, s #otf, 28am§, 2Set6, Sort. 






NOUNS: CLASS I, STRONG 



NOUNS: CLASS I, STRONG (34, 35, 152, 154) 



155 



Masculine : Most nouns ending in unaccented e(, en, er ; ber $Sfe, 
cheese. 

Feminine : bte Gutter, mother, bie Xofyttt, daughter. 

Neuter: Some nouns ending in unaccented el, en (including all infini- 
tives used as nouns), er ; all diminutive nouns ending in d)en, letn \ mos t 
nouns of the form $e — e. 



this wagon 


the mother 


the painting 


the 7iame 


btef er SSagen 


bte Gutter 


ba§ (SJemaVbe 


ber 9?ame(n) 




e3 


§ ber Gutter 


be§ ©emaVbe^ 


be3 9?amett3 




em 


ber Gutter 


bem ©emSl'be 


bent 9?amen 




eit 


bte Gutter 


ba$ ©emSt'be 


ben 9?amen 




e 


bte ^iitter 


bte (^emat'be 


bte 9?amert 




er 


ber Gutter 


ber ©emSFbe 


ber Seamen 




Ctt 


ben s Mttern 


ben ©emal'ben 


ben ^amen 




e 


bte Gutter 


bte ©emSi'be 


bie 9?amen 



The following masculines have a, 0, tt modified in the plural (34, 2) : 



ber liefer 


liefer 


y?<?/#(arable) 


ber Saben 


SSben 4 


shop, store 


ber %p\d 


tpfel 


apple 


ber Mangel 


Mangel 


want 


ber 33oben 


Robert 1 


ground 


ber Mantel 


Mantel 


cloak 


ber 33riiber 


93rflber 


brother 


ber 9iagel 


%5gei 


nail 


ber $aben 


gaben 2 


thread 


ber £fen 


€fen 


stove 


ber ©artert 


(Mrten 


garden 


ber ©attet 


©attel 


saddle 


ber ©ra&en 


©rtiben 


ditch 


ber 'Scfmabel 


Sd)nabel 


beak [law 


ber £)afen 


ipttfen 


harbor 


ber ©d]iuager 


SdituSger 


brother-in- 


ber jammer 


jammer 


hammer 


ber $ater 


$Ster 


father 


ber §anbel 


^cirtbel 3 


business 


ber SSoget 


SBogel 


bird 



A few masculines are inflected like ber 2Sagen except that the final 
in the nominative singular is generally dropped : 
ber £rriebe(n) grteben peace 
ber £»-unfe(tt) gunfen spark 
ber (^ebcmFe ©ebcmFen thought 
ber ©efaFle(n) ©efat'len favor 
ber ©laube(n) ©lauben faith 



n 4 



ber §aufe(n) §aufen heap 

ber 9tame Seamen na7ne 

ber 6ame(n) ©amen seed 

ber @d)abe(n) (2tf)Sben harm 

ber SSillefn) SBttten will 



x Or Soben. 2 0r gabett. ^^anbtl, qtiarrel{s). 4 But, ^en'fterldben, shutters. 



i 5 6 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



NOUNS: CLASS II, STRONG (36, 37, 152, 154) 
Masculine : Most nouns of one syllable ; all nouns ending in id), to., 

Itttg ; many nouns, mostly of foreign origin, ending in 1, it, X, t, and 

accented on the last syllable. 

Feminine: About 35 nouns of one syllable; all nouns ending in frtttft; 

some nouns ending in tttg, fo(. 

Neuter : About 60 nouns of one syllable ; most nouns ending in tttg, 

f 51 ; many nouns of foreign origin (not denoting persons), ending in J, 

tt, r f t, and accented on the last syllable. 



this tree 


the hand 


the year 


//*<? secret 


Meier $8aum 


bte £mnb 


bag garjt 


bag ©efjeim'nig 




eg 


eg 


ber §cmb 


be§ SafjreS 


beg ©e^eim'tuffeS 1 




em 


e 


ber £anb 


bent ^afjre 


bent ©efjeim'ntffe 




ett 




bie £>anb 


ba§ Safjr 


bag ©eljetfn/nig 




e SSaum 


e 


bte .<pdnbe 


bte Sab,re 


bte ©eljeim'nifje 




er 


e 


ber Jpanbe 


ber ^a^re 


ber (Steljeim'ttiffe 




en 


ett 


ben foanben 


bett ^afjrett 


bett ©e^eittt'niffett 




e 


e 


bte foartbe 


bte gab,re 


bit ©efjeim'niffe 



About 45 masculines of one syllable are without modification in the 
plural, of which the following are the more important : 



ber ?lrm 


9Irme 


arm 


ber ^}ab 


^fgbe 


path 


ber Srntt 


Some 


cathedral 


ber $unft 


^unfte 


point 


ber Xrucf 


3)rudfe 2 


fa'int 


ber 9tuf 


3ftttfe 


call 


ber ©rab 


©rabe 


degree 


ber ©djuft 


©djufte 


rascal 


ber $aU 


£atte 


sound, ring 


ber (sdjfilj 


3cf)ilf)e 


shoe 


ber £>ilf 


£mfe 


hoof 


ber ©toff 


©tone 


stuff 


ber £tmb 


£mnbe 


dog 


ber =fucf| 


=fiid)e 


seeking 


ber Saut 


Saute 


sound 


ber Sag 


Sage 


day 


ber Wlonb 


s J3tonbe 3 


7noon 


ber Sljrott 


Srjrone 


thro?ie 


ber £rt 


Crte 4 


place 


ber SSerlttfi' 


SBertuft'e 


loss 



1 Before case endings the § of tti§ is doubled. 

2 But, in compounds, =briicfe. 3 But, Sftortben, months. 
4 £)rte, places, connected; Drter (158, ^.places, separate. 

5 As, Sefiitty, visit ; one neuter, ba% ®e\ud)', request. 



NOUNS: CLASS II, STRONG 



157 



The most important feminines 


of one syllable are as f 


ollows : 


bie Sfttgft 


tngfte 


anxiety 


bie Ihmft 


Mnfte 


art 


bie Stjt 


fljte 


ax 


bie Suft 


Sitfte 


air 


bie 33anf 


SBcmfe * 


bench 


bie Suft 


Sitfte 


pleasure 


bie 23raut 


SBraute 


bride 


bie Wad)t 


9JMd)te 


might 


bie SBruft 


SSriifte 


breast 


bie 901 agb 


9Jl8gb'e 


maid 


bie $auft 


gaufte 


fist 


bie 9ttaug 


SJftaufe 


mouse 


bie grudjt 


griidjte 


fruit 


bie 9cad)t 


9cdd)te 


night 


bie ©ang 


©anfe 


goose 


bie 9J6t 


Stote 


need 


bie Jpanb 


§dnbe 


hand 


bie 9cuB 


92iiffe 


nut 


bie £>aut 


§dute 


skin 


bie ©tabt 


©tSbte 


city, town 


bie Sraft 


Mfte 


force 


bie 28anb 


SBanbe 


wall 2 


bie £uf) 


Sfifje 


cow 


bie SBurft 


SBifcfte 


sausage 


The most important neuters c 


f one syllable 


are as follows : 


bag SBeet 


SBeete 


bed 


bag $aar 


$.aare 


pair 


ba§ 93eil 


. SSeile 


hatchet . 


bag $ferb 


$ferbe 


horse 


ba§ SBein 


SBeine 


leg 


bag ^Sfunb 


^funbe 


pound 


bag SSrot 


SBrote 


bi-ead 


bag s £uit 


$utte 


desk 


bag Sing 


3)tnge 3 


thing 


bag 9ied)t 


3?ed)te 


right 


bag fyelt 


SrcHc 


hide 


bag 9tcidj 


Dieidje 


kingdom 


bag fteft 


Sfefte 


feast 


bag 9tof)r 


Sftofjre 


reed 


bag ©ift 


©ifte 


poison 


bag Otofc 


• SRoffe 


steed 


bag £>aar 


^aare 


hair 


bag Sdjaf 


©dfiafe 


sheep 


bag ipeer 


£eere 


army 


bag ©djiff 


©djiffc 


ship 


bag £eft 


©cfte 


notebook 


bag Sdnoein 


©djtneine 


hog, pig 


bag $at)r 


Sa^re 


year 


bag Sett 


Seile 


?'ope 


bag Sod) 


3od)e 


yoke 


bag Spiel 


©piele 


play 


bag £hm 


£inne 


chin 


bag Stiicf 


(Stiicf e 


piece 


bag £nie 


£m'e 


knee 


bag Xitx 


Si ere 


animal 


bag Sog 


Sofe 


lot 


bag Xor 


Sore 


gate (160, 4"\ 


bag Wlal 


SKale 


time 


bag SBerf 


SBerfe 


work 


bag s Ma$ 


9JJ5Be 


measure 


bag s £*ort 


SSovte 4 


word 


bag SDfeer 


9fteere 


sea 


bag Belt 


£elte 


tent 


bag 9?e£ 


%e|e 


net 


bag ${d 


Biete 


aim 



iSSanfert (161, 2), banks (for money). 2 0f a house. 

4 3&orte, words, connected; SBbrter (158, 5)> words, separate. 



3 Cf. 158,5. 



158 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG (38, 39, 152, 154) 

1 Masculine : 8 nouns of one syllable ; ber ^rrtftm, mistake, ber Otettf)= 
liim, riches?- 

Neuter: About 60 nouns mostly of one syllable; almost all nouns 
ending in rum. 

2 This class has no feminines. 



this man 


the Terror 


the house 


the antiquity 


biefer Wlann 


ber Saturn 


ba§ §au§ 


bU 2fl'tertum 




t§ 


c§ 


bl§ SrrTum^ 


be3 |>auje§ 


bt§ SlFtertum^ 




em 


c 


bem S^Ttim 


bzm |>aufe 


btm Sfl'tertiirrt 




en 




btn ^iT'rurrt 


ba§ £mu§ 


ba§ SUTertum 




e bann- 


er 


bie ^rrTitmer 


bie £)tiufer 


bk SlITertiirrter 




er 


er 


ber ^rr'tumer 


ber §aujer 


ber ^FtertCmer 




en 


em 


btn ^rrTumern 


ben £>aufertt 


ben SttTertiirrtew 




c 


er 


bie 3 rr/ tumer 


bie ftaufer 


bie ^J/tertvimer 



The masculines are as follows : 



ber ©ei[t 


(Mfter 3 


spirit 


ber Otartb 


fRartber 


edge 


ber ®ott 


©otter 


god 


ber SSalb 


SSalber 


foi^est 


ber Set 6 


Seiber 


body 


ber 2$urm 


SSiirmer 


worm 


ber 9)cann 


Scanner 4 


man 


ber ^rrtum 


^rrtumer 


error 


ber Crt 


Crter 5 


place 


ber 3f\etd)tum 


9reicrj turner 


wealth 


The neuters are as follows: 








bo§ Stmt 


Gutter 


office 


bU SSilb 


S3ttber 


picture 


ba§ S3ab 


SBSber 


bath 


ba§ 93fatt 


S3 (alter 


leaf 


bag SBartb 


^Banber 6 


ribbon 


ba§ $rett 


SBretter 


board 



1 ber 53o / felntd)t, rascal, has the plural So'fettricrjter or 93o / fetr>tdjte (156); ber 
SSor'tmmb, guardian, has SSor'munber and SSor'munbe (156). 

2 This important list of monosyllabic masculines may be remembered by 
the sentence, The spirit of God is at every place, from the body of man to 
the worm at the edge of the forest. 

3 ©etfte (156), spirits (as of turpentine). 4 2ftatmen (160), vassals. 
6 Orter, places, separate; Orte (156, 3), places, connected. 

6 But, 53anbe (156), bonds ; ber 33anb, 33dnbe (156), volumes, of books. 





NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG 


159 


bag 23itrf| 


585ct)er 


book 


bag £irtb 


Sinber 


child 


bag ®acf) 


©ftdjer 


roof 


bag Sieib 


Sieiber 


dress 


bag Senf'tnal ©enf'mSler 


1 monument 


bag $orn 


£orner . 


corn, grain 


bag Sing 


Singer 2 


tiling 


bag £raut 


tranter 


herb 


bag S)orf 


©orfer 


village 


bag Samnt 


Satnmer 


lamb 


bag (Si 


(Sier 


e gg 


bag Sanb 


Sanber n 


land 


bag gad) 


gadjer 


specialty 


bag 2id)t 


Sid)ter 12 


light 


bag ga& 


gaffer 


cask 


bag Sib 


fitber 


lid™ 


bag §elb 


f$elber 


field 


bag Sieb 


Sieber 


song 


ba§ ©eib 


©elber 


money 


bag Sod) 


Socher 


hole 


bag ©emacf/ 


©emdcfi/er 3 


roo7n 


bag 2Raf)t 


9Hf)ter 14 


meal 


bag ©emuV 


©etmVter 


feeling 


bag 9Xcau( 


hauler 


mouth 


bag ®efcf)ledjt' 


' ©efd)lecf/ter 


4 sex 


bag 9Zeft 


defter 


nest 


bag ©eftcbt' 


©efid] / ter 5 


face 


bag s $fanb 


$Pfanber 


pledge 


bag ©efpenft' 


©efpen'ftet 


ghost 


bag 9tab 


DiSber 


wheel 


bag ©erpanb' 


©erocin'ber 6 


; garment 


bag Regiment 7 ffi^vmxi'izx™ regiment 


bag ©lag 


©fafer 


glass 


bag Dteig 


Dxetfer 


twig 


bag (Meb 


©lieber 


limb 7 


bag 9£inb 


iRinbcr 


neat 


bag ©ra6 


©rSber 


grave 


bag 8cf)i(b 


<3d)i(ber 16 


signboard 


bag ©rag 


©rSjer 


grass 


bag ©cfitofj 


©tf)toffer 


castle 


bag ©At 


©liter 


estate 


bag ©djtoert 


@d)roerter 


sword 


bag £>attpt 


£>dupter 8 


head 


bag 2 pita V 


©pitS'ter 


hospital 


bag £mug 


§aufer 


house 


bag 2a t 


25ler 17 


valley 


bag Jpolg 


£>i)I§er 


wood 


bag Sud) 


Silver 18 


cloth 


bag £>orn 


Corner 9 


horn 


bag Sot! 


SBolfcr 


people 


bag SofpttaK 


$ofpit3'(er l0 hospital 


bag s 23arrtg 


SSftmfer 


jacket 


bag £mhn 


^u^ner 


hen, fowl 


bag 23ei6 


SSeiber 


woman 


bag Salb 


£dt6er 


calf 


bag SSort 


Sorter 19 


word 



1 Or SenFmate (156). 2 Singer, with contempt, creatures (157, 2). 3 Or 
©emacf/e (156; poetic). 4 OrSefdjledj'te (156; poetic). h %t\\fy it {\zfi), visions. 
6 Or ©enmn'be (156; poetic). 7 Or member. 8 But, 311 §aupten be§ 23ette§, «/ 
the head of the bed. 9 iporne (156), £z'#a?j 0/ horn. 10 Or §ofpita r te (156). 

11 Sanber, countries (definitely bounded) ; Sanbe (156), lands (indefinite regions ; 
also poetic). ^Sidite (156), candles. 13 Generally, Stu'genttb, eyelid. 14 Or 
9Ra*jle (156). 15 iRegtmen'ter, in speaking of the army ; otherwise, 9tegimen / te 
(156). 16 But, ber £tt)i(b, (SdjUbe (156), shield. 17 Or 2a(e (156 ; poetic), 

18 £ucfje (156), kinds of cloth. 19 Sorter, words, separate; SSorte (157, 2), 

words, connected. 



i6o 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 






NOUNS : CLASS IV, WEAK (40, 41, 152, 154) 

Masculine : About 20 nouns of one syllable ; all nouns ending in c 
denoting males; many nouns of foreign origin, generally denoting per- 
sons, ending in t, and accented on the last syllable. 

Feminine: About 75 nouns of one syllable; all feminine nouns of 
more than one syllable,! except bie Sfttttter and Me Xotfyttv (Class I) and 
nouns ending in fnnft, ttt§, or fat (Class II). 

This, class has no neuters. 



this fool 




the boy 


the feather 


the queen 


bief cr Sor 




btt Stmge 


bie $eber 


bie SB'nigm 




e£ 


en 


be3 ^ungen 


ber $eber 


ber ^B'nigin 




em 


en 


bem ^ungen 


ber $eber 


ber £3'nigm 




en 


en 


bm Sungen 


bie $eber 


bie ^B'night 




e 


en 


bie Sungen 


bie Sebertt 


bie £6 / nigmncii 2 




er 


en 


ber Sungen 


ber $ebern 


ber SB'nigmnen 




en 


en 


ben ^ungen 


ben f^ebern 


ben ^B'ntgmnen 




e 


en 


bk 3 un 9 ett 


bie fjcbem 


bit S'o'nigumen 



The most important masculines of one syllable are as follows: 



ber 93 Sr 


95Sren 


bear 


ber <t>trt(e) 


grirten 


shepherd 


ber 93urfdj(e) 


23urfdje(n) 


fellow 


ber SOtenfd) 


5)tenfc6en 


5 ?nan 6 


ber (Shrift 


Kfirtften 


Christian 


ber 90cofjr 


SDlofiren 


Moor 


ber f$el§ 3 


Self en. 


rock 


ber Tcarr 


■Warren 


fool 


ber fyiirft 


^iirften 


prince 


ber Cd)§7 


Ccfijen 


ox 


ber ®raf 


©rafen 


COU7lt 


ber ^rm$ 


^rtngen 


prince 8 


ber $etb 


£)elben 


hero 


ber ©pat* 


&pa$m 


sparrow 


ber £>err 4 


§erren 


master 


ber %lt 


Soren 


fool (157,2) 


1 This includes all nouns ending 


in tV, \t f , if; 


in, ion 7 ; 


fiett, !eit; fdjaft, 


ung, tat 7 ; and most nouns ending in 


I, UK'. 






2 Before case endings 


the n of in is 


doubled. 


3 Or ber gelfen (155). 



4 Singular irregular: ber £>err, be§ £>errn, bem §errn, ben £errn. 

5 Also, ba§> SDtenfcf), SD^enfctjer (158), hussy. 6 mankind, mortal, as distin- 
guished from the lower animals. 7 Or ber £>ti)fe. 8 See ^ring in the general 
vocabulary. 



NOUNS: CLASS IV, WEAK 



161 



Among the important polysyllabic masculines are the following : 



ber 3(buolat 


' StbootVten lawyer 


ber Some 


SBroen 


lion 


ber Stffe 


Slffen 


ape 


ber 9ceffe 


S^effen 


nephew 


ber S3ote 


33oten 


messenger 


ber 9$ ate 


$aten 


godfather 


ber 3)eutfct)e 


Seutfdjen 


German (54, 


2) ber ^oef 


SPoe'ten 


poet 


ber Srbe 


Srben 


heir 


ber ^reufje 


^reufjen 


Pritssian 


ber gatfe 


fallen 


falcon 


ber Dftabe 


O^aben 


raven 


ber grango' 


[egrango'fe 


a Frenchman 


ber Otiefe 


IRtef en 


giant 


ber |mfe 


^afett 


hare 


ber ©djulge 


©dnilgen 


mayor 1 


ber £)eibe 


§eiben 


heathen 


ber ©d)urfe 


©cfatrfen 


wretch 


ber ^mfar' 


^mfS'ren 


hussar 


ber ©flaoe 


©flatten 


slave 


ber $itbe 


Svlbert 


Jew 


ber ©of bat' 


©olba'ten 


soldier 


ber Sunge 


Sungen 


boy 


ber Jiirfe 


Siirlen 


Turk 


ber Snabe 


$naben 


boy 


ber Ulan 7 


Ula'nen 


lancer 


The more importa 


nt feminines oi 


one syllable 


are as follows : 


bie ftrt 


Irten 


kind 


bie ^ffitfjt 


$f listen 


duty 


bie 23at>n 


58ar)nert 


road 


bie $ oft 


^ often 


post office 


bie 23anf 


33anfen 2 


bank 


bie £htat 


Cuaten 


tor?nent 


bie 33urg 


S3urgert 


castle 3 


bie ©d)ar 


©d)aren 


crowd 


bie gatrrt 


garjrten 


passage 


bie ©dtfdjt 


©d)id)ten 


layer 


bie gee 


geen 


fairy 


bie ©d)(ad)t 


©d/lad)ten 


battle 


bie glut 


gluren 


field, plain 


bie ©thrift 


©draften 


writing 


bie glut 


gluten 


flood, tide 


bie ©d)ulb 


©djulben 


debt 


bie gomt 


gormen 


for?n 


bie See 4 


Seen 


sea 


bie gratf)t 


gradjten 


freight 


bie ©par 


©puren 


trace 


bie grau 


grauen 


w 07n an 


bie ©tirn(e) 


©tirnen 


forehead 


bie grift 


griften 


time, respite 


bie Eat 


Saten 


deed 


bie $agb 


^agben 


chase 


bie Sour 


Souren 


tour 


bie 


Soften 


costs 


bie Sur(e) 


Efiren 


door 


bie Baft 


Saften 


burden 


bie Ufjr 


Ltrjren 


clock 5 


bie Sift 


Siften 


cunning 


bie SSaljt 


SSarjien 


choice 


bie Wlaxl 


s I>carfen 


boundary 


bie SBBelt 


SSelten 


world 


bie ?0larfcr) 


Sftdrfcrjen 


marsh 


bie 35f)I 


^arjfen 


number 


bie 3feuH 


9cutten 


naught 


bie Qdt 


3etten 


time 



1 Of a village. 2 53cmfe (157, 1), benches. 3 stronghold. 

4 ber ©ee (162, 4), lake. 5 Or watch. 



l62 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



NOUNS: CLASS V, MIXED (42, 43, 152, 154) 
Masculine : A few irregular nouns ; almost all nouns of foreign origin 

ending in or. 

Neuter : A few irregular nouns ; some nouns of foreign origin ending 

in f, m. 

This class has no feminines. 



this peasant 


the state 


the doctor 


the museum. 


bit) er SBauer 


ber Stoat 


ber Sof'tor 


bM SJhife'um 




t§ 


3 


be3 StaateS 


bU Sof'torS 


bU 9Kufe'umS 




cm 




btm Staate 


bem SDof'tor 


btm Sftufe'um 




Ctt 




ben ©tacit 


ben Softer 


ba§ SKitfe'itm 




c 


n 


bk Staaten 


bte %nlWxvx 


bie SDhtfe'en 1 




er 


n 


ber (Staaten 


ber Softo'rett 


ber ^Dcufe'en 




en 


it 


ben Staaten 


ben %&WxtVL 


btn SOfafe'en 




e 


it 


bte Staaten 


bie Softo'ren 


bte Wlufi'tn 



4 The most important masculines and neuters are as follows: 



ber S3auer beg 23auerg 2 

ber 9cacf)6ar beg 9?ad)6arg 3 

ber Srf)mer§ beg Sdjmer^eg 

ber See (cf . 161,2) beg Seeg 

ber ©tout beg Staateg 

ber Strati beg Strafjleg 

ber better beg SBetterg 

ber ©of'tor beg $of tor§ 



bag 2iucje 
bag 93ett 
bag (Enbe 
bag foerrtb 
bag SntereHe 
bag €f)r 
bag Stu / btum 
bag ^coterial 7 

1 Nouns ending : 
Sofft'lken, fossil. 



bH Stugeg 
beg Setteg 
beg ©nbeg 
beg §embeg 
beg .^nterei v feg 
beg £f)reg 
bU Stu'btumg 
be^ s Fcaierialg / 



bie 93auern 
bte 9cad)6ant 
bie Sdjmergen 
bie Seen 
bie Staaten 
bte Straiten 
bte SSettem 
bte Softo'ren 

bte Slug en 

bte S3etten 

bie Ghtben 

bte £>emben 

bte ^ntereffen 

bie Cljren 

bte Stu'bten 

bte Sftateria'Iien 1 



neighbor 

pain 

lake 

state 

7'ay 

cousin 

doctor 

eye 

bed 

end 

shirt 

interest 

ear 

study 

?naterial 



O.V and IV have the plural in ien : as, ba§ ^offfF, bte 
2 Or be§ Saltern. 3 Or beg Stadjoarn. 



NOUNS: PROPER NAMES 1 63 

NOUNS : PROPER NAMES (44, 45, 47, 1, 49 1 ) 
Proper names of persons not preceded by Mefer-words or fein-words 
(io 1 , 20 1 ) are inflected in the genitive ($ r en3; but see 44, 3, 4), and 
titles (except §err, Mr., and added titles like ber Ch'fte, First, which are 
always inflected) are left uninflected : as, 

1. ^Srittj ^>einrirf)3 Snefe (cf. tnit ^rtn$ ^etnrirf); 33riefe an ^rmj 
^einrid)) ; £>errn ^rofeffor ^ottor Start Sftfillerd 2h*iefe ; £aijer 
§riebridj 2$UljeIm3 be3 (Srften 23riefe; fyrennb 9ftttfler3 SBricfe ; 
®avt§ nnb 9)Zarie3 SBrief e ; 8avte unb 9)Zarie3 $reunb (but see 
163,4)- 
As a rule, proper names of persons preceded by Mefer-words or fem- 
words (io 1 , 20 1 ) are left uninflected unless depending on nouns that stand 
after them; but even then they are left uninflected if ending in an s-sound 
or a vowel: as, 

1. &te SSriefe ber Gttfafcetlj ; bic $riefe eine3 $oettje (in a generic sense; 

cf. ber, 132,1); bie Srtefe be§ grofjen ^riebrid). But, be3 grofjen 
$riebrtd)3 SBricfe; be3 ^errn ®arl %)lMtv$ 23riefe (cf. ttttfetrS 
(2of)ue3 &axl 23rtefe f the name $arl being in apposition with 
(5of)ne3 and left uninflected) ; bie SBrtefe ^fjrer $raulcin £od)ter 
(cf. 169, 1, sentence 5). 

2. bie $riefc be3 gro^eu Qtoetfje; be3 grofjen ©octlje Sriefe. 

When titles are preceded by biefer-words or fein-words (io 1 , 20 1 ), the 
titles are inflected unless considered a part of the proper names (but §err 
is always inflected, 163, 1), and the proper names are left uninflected. 
When there are two or more titles, only the first is inflected : as, 

1. be§ ^>erm ^rofcfforS Soulier ^riefe (but, be3 £errn WiMcr§ 

23ricfe) ; bit Sriefe be3 ^rinsen ^etnrttf) ; bie SBriefe be§ $rciu= 
hin§ Gutter, 

2. bie SSriefe unferS Softor Martin Sutfjer; an $orb be§ ftiirft %\§mavd. 

3. bie 83riefe be3 ^rofeffor^ (or, be3 ^perrtt ^rofeffor) ^oftor Ravi 

Gutter. 

When proper names are joined in authorship or in ownership, only 
the last name is inflected, as in English: as, 

1. SJtetier unb 9)Znflcr3 SBudj'ijanblung, Meyer and Miller's bookstore. 

When t)0tt is used to denote locality (that is, a person's descent} the 
word before Don is inflected ; but if the turn is honorary, the word after 
tion is inflected: as, 

1. 9Ue£anberS Don £mmfio(bt $rtefe; be3 £imtg3 toon (Sngfanb ^Briefe. 

2. ^ricbricf) Don 8djifler3 SBriefe. 



164 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

ADJECTIVES: CLASS I, STRONG (46,47) 



long, cold winter 
long cr, fait er 23 inter 1 



cu, 


en 


em, 


em 


en, 


en 


e, 


e 


er, 


er 


en, 


en 


e , 


e 



good old friendship 
gute alte fyreunb'jdjaft 
gtltcr alter ftreunb'jdjaft 
guter alter ^reunb'fdjaft 
gute alte a-reunb'jdjaft 

gute alte fyreunb'jdjaftett 
guter alter ^reunb'fdjaftett 
guten alten Srreunb'fdjaftett 
giltc alte ftreimb'jdjaftett 



I cold water 

gtlte^ falteS Staffer 

gfiteit fatten SSafferS 

gittem faltem Staffer 

gitteS falter 23affer 

gute !alte SSaffer 

guter falter SSaffer 

guten fatten SSafferti 

gute falte SSaffer 



cold, biting winter 
falter, fdjnei'benber SSinter 
fatten, fcfjnet'benben 23tnter3 
faltem, fdjnei'benbem ^Sinter 
fatten, fdjnei'benbeit 2$tnter 

falte, fdjuei'benbe Winter 

falter, fdjnei'benber SBtnter 

fatten, fdjnet'benben 23intern 

falte, fdjuei'benbe 28inter 







ADJEC 


TIVES : CLASS II, WEAK (48, 49) 


this long, cold winter 


the good old friendship 


btef cr tang e, fait 


e 28 inter 


bie gute alte fjreunb / fc^aft 




e3 


en, 


en 


§ ber guten alten f^retmb'fdjaft 




em 


en, 


en 


ber guten alten greunb'fdjaft 




en 


en, 


en 


bie gute alte fjfreunb'fdjaft 




e 


en, 


en 


bie gitten alten Sreimb'fdjafteti 




er 


en, 


en 


ber guten alten fyreunb'ftfjaftett 




en 


en, 


en 


n ben guten alten f$reunb / fc^aftcn 




e 


en, 


en 


bie giiten alten tfreunb'fdjaftctt 



1 Cf. rot unb gelfie ©latter (=rot / get6e ©latter), orange (red-yellow) leaves 
(rote unb get6e S&[atttT=red leaves and yellow leaves). 

2 Some strong forms like gutei 3Jfute§ still occur. 



ADJECTIVES: CLASS III, MIXED 
ADJECTIVES : CLASS II, WEAK (continued) 



165 



the new Berlin knife 


//z<? never-to-be-forgotten winter 


ba§ neue SBerlt'ner STceffer 
be3 tteuctt 33erlt / ner SKefferS 
bent tteuctt SSerft'tter 2Ee[fer 
bag neue SBerK'tter SDleffer 


ber me gu bergef'feube SSinter 
be3 uie gu bergeffettbctt Winters 
bent uie §xt bergeffenbett SSittter 
bett uie §u bergeffeubett SBiuter 


bie neuen SSerlt'tter Sftefjer 
ber tteuctt SSertf'tter SKeffer 
bett tteuctt SBerlt'tter Stteffertt 
bte ueuett SBerlt'tter 2fteffer 


bte uie 51X bergeffenben SGSittter 
ber uie git bergef'fenbett SBinter 
bett uie git bergeffeubett SGSttttertt 
bit uie git bergeffeubett 28 inter 



ADJECTIVES: CLASS III, MIXED (50, 51) 



your long, cold winter 
Sljr laug er, fait er Winter 



e3 


ett, 


ett 


cm 


ett, 


ctt 


ctt 


ett f 


ett 


e 


ett, 


ett 


er 


ett, 


ctt 


ett 


ett, 


ctt 


e 


ett, 


ett 



their good old friendship 
tfjre gutc alte fSrreuttb'fdjaft 
tfjrer gutett altett ^reunb'fdjaft 
ffjrer gitteu altett greunb'fdjaft 
tljre gitte altc greuttb'fdjaft 

tljre gutett altett ^reunb'fdjaftett 
tljrer gutett altett greunb'fdjaftett 
tfjrett gutett altett ^retmb'fdjaftett 
tljre gutett altett greunb'fdjaftett 



your new 
5f>r neue£ 
5^rcS ueuett 
Jljrettt ueuett 
Sfjr neuc3 

S^tc ueuett 
Silver ueuett 
Sfjren ueuett 
5^rc ueuett 



Berlin knife 
SBerlt'tter SOtcffcr 
SBcrl^ner 9tteffer3 
SSerlt'tter SKeffer 
Serfi'ner Sfteffer 

5BerIt / ner Sfteffer 
Serlt'tter 9fteffer 
SSerlf'ner SKeffertt 
SBerli'tter SKeffer 



your affectionate friend 
beiu btcf) lie / 6enber $reuub 
betne3 bid) tie / 6euben ftreuttbeS 
beiuettt bid) lie / 6enbett $reunbe 
beinctt btcf) lie / 6eubett ?yreuub 

beinc btcf) lie'benbett greunbe 

beiucr btcf) tie'benbett fyreuttbe 

betuett bid) lie'benbett fyreunbett 

beinc btcf) lie'benbett fyreuttbe 



1 66 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



ADJECTIVES: THE 

Cardinal Numbers (58, 59) 

9M 1 naught 

1 ein§ one (58, 3) 

2 greet two (58, 2) 

3 brei three (58, 2) 

4 bier 

5 fihtf 

6 fecfjg 

7 fieben 

8 adjt 

9 neutt 

10 gerjtt 

11 elf 

12 gtoolf 

13 bretgerjtt 

14 t)ierger)rt 

15 fiinfger)ri 

16 fedjgeljtt* 
11 fiebgetjn 3 

18 aerjtgefjn 

19 neungefjn 

20 gmangtg 

21 etmmbgroartgig (58, 3) 

22 gtDeiunbgtocmgig 
30 brei^ig 3 

40 biergtg 
50 fihtfgig 
60 fecfjgig 3 
10 fiebgig 3 
80 arf)t S tg 
90 neungtg 

100 (ein)rjrmbert 4 

101 rjtmbertimbetrt§ 

121 fjunbert eimmbgroangtg 



NUMERALS (58-61) 

Ordinal Numbers (60, 61) 



ber, b 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, bi 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, bi 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, bi 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 

ber, 



bag erfte 2 the first (60, 2) 

bag groeite the second 

bag brifte the third (60, 2) 

bag bierte 

bag fiinfte 

bag fetfjfie 

bag fte6ente 

bag acfjte (60, 2) 

bag neunte 

bag gefjnte 

bag elfte 

bag grootfte 

bag bretgefjnte 

ba§ btergefjttte 

bag fixnf§er)nte 

bag fect)§er)nte 3 

bag ftebgerjrtte 3 

bag actjtgerjttte 

bag neurtgefjnte 

bag groangigfte 

bag eimtrtbgroangigfte (58,3) 

bag gruemrtbgiDangigfie 

bag bretfjigfte 3 

bag btergigfte 

bag fimfgigfte 

bag fedjgtgfte 3 

bag fiebgigfte 3 

bag acrjtgigfte 

bag neungtgfte 

bag rjunbertfie 

bag tjimbert unb erfte 

bag ljunbert emunbgroangigfie 






e, bag 



1 Me 9?utt, bte Mullen (40, 1), naught, cipher, zero. 
3 Irregular. 4 See 167, 2 



2 See 167, 1. 



ADJECTIVES: THE NUMERALS 1 67 

200 groetrjunbert ber, bie, ba§ ^roetfjunbertfte 

1000 (ein)taufenb (167,2) ber, tie, ba§ taufenbfte 

1001 taufenbunbeinS (167,2) ber, bte, ba§ taufenb unb erfte 
1904 (em)taufenbneunfjunbert ber, bte, ba§> taufenbneunrjunbert unb 

unb tier or neunjebns bterte or neunjefjnfiunbert 

bunbert unb bier (1 67, 2) unb bierte 

2142 5n)eitaujenbein^unbert= ber, bte, bag §tr>eitaufenbembunbert= 
gttetunbbiergtg gtoemnbbterjtgfte 

100000 (ein)fjunberttaufenb (167,2) ber, bte, ba§ fiunberttaufenbfte 

1000000 eine Million 7 ber, bie, ba§ miffion'fte 

2000000 groei SMio'nen ber, bie, ba§ gweimittion'fte 

$er, bte, ba3 erfte, etc., or erfter, erfte, erfte§, etc. (46, 1) : as, I 

1 . erfte3 ^abtt'el, jweiter $er3, first chapter, second verse. 

©in as a numeral is used only in the sense of one (58, 3) : as, 2 

1. em Ijunbert, one hundred; but, fiunbert nub etn Xage or $afire 

(masc. or neut.), a hundred and one days or yea7'sj Ijunbert unb 
etne %latf)t (fern.), a hundred, etc. 

2. ba§ $afir etntanfeubneunljunbert (or neunseljnfiunbert), the year 

igoo; but, taufenbneunfiunbert, a thousand, etc. (of anything). 

The predicate superlative adjective with am (52, 4) is used in com- 3 
paring one object (or group of objects) with itself under specified con- 
ditions, or in comparing different kinds of objects with each other. To 
compare several objects of the same kind with each other, the definite 
article should be used : as, 

1. bie £age ftnb ant langften tm Stt'tti, the days are longest (at their 

longest) in June. 

2. er fiat #bfel, ^fiaumen unb SHrfcficn; bte 2(bfe( ftnb am fieften, he 

has apples, plums, and cherries ; the apples are {the) best (of all). 

3. turn btcfcu £uaben tft $rttj ber ftetnfte, of these boys Fred is the 

S7nallest (boy). 

In comparing the qualities of a single object, or in comparing adjec- 4 
fives not used attributively (46, 48, 50), the adverbs mefjr, am meiftett, 
ttiemger, am rocntgften, etc. (56, 1, 54, 1) are used: as, 

1. er tft mefir ftug aW fietfjig, he is more clever than diligent. 

2. fie tft ntdjt im minbeften fdj ulb, she is not in the least guilty. 



1 68 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 





THE PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS (16, 


17) 




/ 


you 


he she 


it 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


itfj 

meiner 

mir 

mid) 


/ 

of me 

to ox for me 

me 


bit 

b enter 
bir 
bid) 


er fie 
feiner iljrer 
il)m iljr 
ifjn fie 


e3 

feiner 

iljm 

e3 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


mir 
unfer 
un3 
un3 


we 

of us 

to ox for us 

us 


ifyr Ste 
euer 5^er 
end) $ljnen 
end) ©ie 


fie they fie they fie they 
iljrer iljrer iljrer 
iljucn ifjuctt iljnen 
fie fie fie 



The uninflected intensive pronoun feftift, self is used for emphasis in 
all genders, persons, and numbers: as, ber &<ufer fefbft, the emperor him- 
self; felbft ber ®atfer, even the e?nperor. 

When a sentence has two or more connected subjects, the order of 
subjects differs from the English order in having the first person put be- 
fore the second or the third, except for the sake of politeness or for em- 
phasis. The verb is plural and agrees with the first person rather than 
with the second or the third, and with the second person rather than with 
the third: as, 

i. id) unb bn (or id) nnb er, id) unb ®art, etc.) Ijafien tuel gefeljen, you 
and I {ox he and I, Charles and I, etc.) have seen 7nuch. 

2. t>n nnb bein $remtb mart ba t you a?id your friend were there. 

Two or more subjects (especially pronouns) are often summed up in a 
single pronoun before the verb : as, 

i. id) nnb bn, mir moren \>a, you and I were there. 

2. bn nnb er (or bn nnb ®arf), iljr wart ba, you and he (ox you and 

Charles) were there. 

When the subjects are disconnected, and often when they follow the 
verb, the verb agrees with the nearest subject (whether plural or singu- 
lar): as, 

i. meber id), nod) bn fannft geljen, neither I nor you can go. 

2. marft bu Uttb 2Bitt)eun ha ? were you and William there? 



THE PRONOUNS 1 69 

Pronouns agree in gender with the nouns to which they refer (whether I 
denoting persons or not), except that with such nouns as ba§ $ratt(etn f 
young lady, ba§ Sbfjndjctt, little son, they are more likely to take the 
natural rather than the grammatical gender, especially when they stand 
at some distance from the nouns : as, 

1 . mo tft ntetn $nt ? where is my hat ? er (not e§) tft b(J, it is there. 

2. oa§ 9)Hbd)ett, ba§ f)ter tt>ar, ift fort, the girl who was here is gone. 

3. ba§ SDlcibrijen ift nirfjt Ijter, fie ift fort, the girl is not here j she is gone. 

4. ba& TObdjen lieot tljren (or fehtett) $ater, the girl loves her father. 

5. $l)re fyrantein £od)ter, your daughter ($fjre agrees with Xodjter 

instead of with $ranlein)» 

In writing letters, the personal pronouns bit and tljr and the corres- 2 
ponding possessive pronouns bcttt and eiter (168, 1) are usually written 
with initial capitals (cf. 141, 1): as, 

1. abzt ^u Ijdltft ntd)t 233ort, but you do not keep your word. 

In antiquated style the personal pronouns er and fie (third person 3 
singular) and tljr (second person plural) and the corresponding pos- 
sessives fctn, tljr, and eiter (168,1) are used in address and written with 
initial capitals (cf . 6, 2) : 1 as, 

1. f)at (£r Semen $rennb oerloren ? have you lost your friend? 

2. %\i tjabt @nent fyrcnnb oerloren, you (plural or singular, in formal 

address, like Sic, 6, 2) have lost your friend. 

The possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of the personal 4 
pronouns (168, 1). See 62, 63. In titles of high rank are found the 
following possessives, the verb being third person plural (cf. Ste finb, 
6,1,2): 

1. (£tu, (= Ghter 2 or (Sure) ^et'ltgfeit gernfjen, Your Holiness deigns. 

2. @ttJ. (= ©iter 2 or (£ttrc) SDkjeftii'tcn, Your Majesties. 

3. Se. (= Seine) or <&x. (= Seiner g., d.) 2Wajeftiit', His Majesty. 

4. Sljre (or $f)ro 2 ) 2Rajeft8t', Her Majesty. 

5. $ljre SKRajefta'ten, Their Majesties. 

1 Sometimes a noun is used in address : as, toomit farm tct) bem §errrt bierten ? 
with what can I serve the gentleman (= you) ? 

2 An old gen. pi., uninflected, followed by the weak form of adjectives. 



170 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

For the demonstrative pronouns, see 64, 65, 170, 2. Before relative 
pronouns or names with uott, the genitive plural is berer (not beren) : as, 

1. ettt <yrcunb berer, bic arm fittb, a friend of those that are poor. 

2. i>a§ ®efd)(ed)t berer oon SBiUott), the family of the von Billow. 

For the relative and interrogative pronouns, see 66, 67, 142, 4, 5. Of 
the relative pronouns, ber is generally used instead of twlcfjer in the spoken 
language, and is commoner in the written language, 'Ser'jentge, metdjer, 
he who, is a clumsy book expression for ber, ber (or mer, ber, 66, 5 ; or 
simply ber) : as, 

1 . berjetttge, metdjer feittett $rettttb fjat, ift arm (= bcr, bcr feittett $rettttb 

fjat, ift arm ; or mcr fetttett $rettttb f)at f bcr tft arm), he who has 
no friend is poor. 

2. bic (= biejettigett, meftfje) \>a marett, fatten ttid)t3, those that were 

there had nothing. 

3. btejeittgett Settte, meldje (or bic) arm fittb, geoett Otel, people who are 

poor give much. 

Instead of relative pronouns in expressions of time, place, 7nanner, or 
quality, al§, ba r or memt (of time), too (of time or of place), ttrie (of man- 
ner), at§ (of quality) are generally used (cf. 87, 1): as, 

1. an bem £age, al§ (ha, or mo) cr ftarb, on the day that he died. 

2. gtt ber $cit f menu mir jttttg fittb, at the time when we are young. 

3. fettttft bit ba§ Sattb, mo bte gitrottett oftifyett? know est thou the la?td 

where the citrons bloom ? 

4. foldje Stttttbett, mic id) je^t oerfeue, such hours as (142, 4) / now 

pass. 

5. foldje Xatett, at$ oei end) gefdjeljett fittb, such deeds as (142, 4) were 

wrought in you. 

For the indefinite pronouns, see 68-71. To the indefinite pronouns 
belong also ir'gettb, tr/gettbettter, or ir/gettbmeldjer, any at all; plural, 
tr/gettb or tr/gettbmeldje: as, 

1. biefe (£tabt ift grower al§ trgettbettte (or irgettbmetdje) attbre, this city 

is larger than any other. 

2. biefe <Bt'a\>te fittb grower aW irgenb (or irgettbmetdje) attbre, these 

cities are larger than any others. 






THE DEFINITE ARTICIE, ETC. \J\ 

THE DEFINITE ARTICLE (10, 20,2); PUNCTUATION (12,3, 74,4) 

For some peculiar uses of the definite article, see 132, 1 : as, I 

1. Jttiei Wlavt ben $u£, two marks afoot (distributively, 132, 1). 

2. jttieitttat ba§ $afjr, twice a year (distributively, 132, 1). 

3. fie fit^te t!jm bte $anb f she kissed his hand (20, 2). 

In Southern Germany and in the German classics the definite article 2 
is common (often in a possessive sense, where Northern German uses a 
possessive adjective, 20) in such expressions as ber $<tter, bie <Sd)tt)efter, 
ber SBtlljelm. In Northern German this use is restricted to uninflected 
nouns, to indicate the case : as, 

1. bte SDhttter fagr, mother says (Southern). 

2. e§ gefjbrt bent pa*iebridj, it belongs to Frederic. 

Before common nouns of different genders, ber, ettt, etc. must be 3 
repeated (as, ber -SDtcmrt unb bie tfrcm). The definite article is generally 
used with the names of the seasons, the months (except in dates, 60, 5, 
61), and the days ; rivers, seas, lakes, forests, and mountains ; streets and 
squares; proper names ending in ei 7 (as bte Sitrfei', Turkey) and bie ©djtuetg. 

A subordinate clause is set off by a comma (12, 3; cf. 93, 1): as, 4 

1. er iff griper, ai§ bit frift, he is taller, etc.; but, er tft grower al§ bit* 

A comma does not stand before fiber, nod), ober, or unb (100) unless 5 
a complete sentence follows ; even then it may be omitted before nnb if 
the subject following is a personal pronoun that merely repeats the preced- 
ing subject: as, 

1. t§ tft ttmrnt, nnb bte $ijgel fingen, it is warm, and the birds sing. 

2. $rtf? tarn geftern nn(,) unb Ijeutc gefjt er nud) $re3bcu, Fred arrived 

yesterday, and to-day he goes to Dresden (the subject must be 
repeated, as here, when the order of words becomes inverted). 

3. t§ regttetc fturr, fo bfij? id) gctnj na| ttmrbe, it rained heavily, so 

that I got wet through ; but, e3 regnete fo, ba$ id) gnnj ntt^ ttmrbe, 
it rained so, that I got wet through. 

An exclamation or an interrogation point that ends a complete sentence 6 
is followed by a capital letter : as, 

1. bu ftft e§! 28a3 Ijfift bu? 9?id)t3? it is you! What have you? 
Nothing? (but, „28a§ *)aft bu? ftmdj!" fngte er, "What have 
you? Speak /" said he.) 



172 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



THE INFLECTION OF VERBS 

The stem of a verb may be found by dropping the ending 
of the present infinitive. The ending of the infinitive is 
generally en ; but if preceded by t or r, the ending is simply n* 1 

The principal parts of a verb are the present infinitive, 
the past indicative, and the past participle, as in English. 

Verbs are called weak or strong according to their inflec- 
tion, as in English. 

In weak verbs, the past indicative = the stem (1 72, 1) 4- the suffix t or 
et 2 -f- the personal ending e; the past participle = ge (denoting comple- 
tion j 26, i) 3 + the stem + the suffix 1 or et: 2 as, 



Present Infinitive 


Past Indicative 


Past Participle 




fa'g-ett 


(stem fag) 


jag'-t-e 


ge-iag-t' 


say 


toai't-m 


(stem timrt) 


roar't-et-e 


ge-roar't-ct 


wait 


xe'b-ett 


(stem reb) 


re'b-et-e 


ge-re 7 b-et 


talk 


afm-ett 


(stem arm) 


Gt'm-et-e 


ge-afm-et 


breathe 


offn-en 


(stem ijffrt) 


b'ff'n-et-e 


ge-oif'n-et 


open 


ta'bel-n 


(stem robel) 


ta'bel-t-e 


ge-ta / bel-t 


blame 


roan'ber-tt 


(stem mattber) 


mcm'ber-r-e 


ge-raart / ber-t 


wander 



5 In strong verbs, the past indicative = the stem (1 72, 1) with the stem 
vowel changed (22, 1, 192, 1); the past participle = ge (denoting comple- 
tion; 28, i) 3 + the stem (with the stem vowel often changed) + en : as, 



Present Infinitive 
rjaFt-en (stem rjatr) 
fmg / -en (stem ftng) 



Past Indicative 

tjtelt 

fang 



Past Participle 

gc-r)at / t-en hold 
gc-jimg^ett sing 



1 So also in fet=tt, be, and ttMt, do. 

2 To help pronunciation, verb stems ending in t, b, or rtt or tt preceded by 
a mute (204, 2) generally retain e before ft or t (173, 1, 2, 3, 5). Stems 
ending in an s-sound generally retain e before ft, but the e§ or the e is often 
dropped: as, ftl3=e=ft, fit$=t. With the suffixes t and et compare "d" and "ed" 
in "move-d" and "lift-ed" (204, 4). 

3 Verbs of foreign origin ending in ie / ren, inseparable verbs (95, 1), and 
toorbert in the passive voice (182, 183) do not take ge. 



VERBS: THE ENDINGS 



173 



Verbs: the Endings (172, 1, 4, 5, 172 2 , 172 3 ) 





Present 


Past 


Weak or Strong 


Weak 


Strong 




1 


id) 


— e 


— (e)te 


— 




2 


bit 


-(e)* 


— (e)tcft 


-(e)ft 


Indicative 


3 


er 


— (e)t 


— (e)te 


— 




1 


ttitr 


— Ctt 


— (e)tctt 


— Ctt 




2 


tfir 


-(e)t 


— (e)tct 


-(e)t 




3 


fie 


— Ctt 


— (e)tctt 


— en 




1 


id) 


— c 


— (e)te 


-^-e 




2 


bit 


-eft 


— (e)tcft 


^-eft 


Subjunctive 


3 
1 


er 
ttrir 


— c 

— Ctt 


-(e)tc 
— (e)tctt 


^-ett 




2 


tfir 


— et 


— (c)tet 


-^et 




3 


fie 


— Ctt 


— (e)tcti 


—Ctt 




2 


(Jul) 


-(e) 






Imperative 


2 


(tfir) 
@ie 


— (e)t 

— Ctt 






Infinitive 






—(On 






Participles 






— (e)itb 


(0e)— (e)t 


(gc)— ett 



In many strong verbs the second and third persons singular of the 6 
present indicative have vowel change (72,3); when a verb stem ending 
in t has vowel change, the ending et is dropped : 

1. a generally becomes a: as, fia(t-e, ftalt-ft, fiftlt (not fifitt-et). 72, 4. 

2. Short c becomes short t: as, fietf-e, fjtlf-ft, fiitf-t. 72,4. 

3. Long c becomes te in ocfefi'len, cmpfe^lett, gefd)e / ^en, lefeit, fdjereit, 
fefiett, ftcfilcit : as, befefit-e, 6efiefil-[t, ocficfit-t. 194- 

In weak verbs the imperative ends in e. In strong verbs, it may be 7 
found by dropping (e)ft of the second person singular of the present 
indicative, except that a (or an) or of the stem remains as in the infini- 
tive (194). Of fetn it is the simple stem (174, 4). 



174 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



The Tense Auxiliaries : f)iibcn, have (26. 2); fein, be (30, 1) 


INDICATIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


have a?n 


^(2^^ ^<zdT have been 


Ijabe bin 


tjabe 


bin 




b^aft btfl 


w 


bfjl 




l)at ift 


fjat 


txu { P 




fyaben ftnb 


fjaben 


^ finb 


}> geroe'fen 


b,abt feib 


b,abt 


feib 




fyaben jmb 


Ijaben 


jfnb J 




Past 


Pluperfect 


&2dT w^j- 


^# ^/ had had been 


IjStte roar 


b,attc " 


mar 




f)2tte[t roarft 


b,atteft 


roarft 




t)atte id or 


rjatte 


t ~Y., ^ar 








> gebabt' 


> geroe'fen 


fatten roaren 


fatten 


roaren 




tyffttet roart 


ijdttet 


roart 




batten roaren 


batten . 


roaren _ 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall have shall be 


shall have had shall have been 


roerbe 


roerbe 




roerbe 


roerbe 




intrft 


lutrft 




nnrft 


trjtrft 




roirb 
roerben 


\ baben 

roerben 


> fein 


roirb 
tuerbeti 


geljSbt' ttrfrb 
fyaben roerben 


geroe'fen 
fein 


roerbet 


roerbet 




roerbet 


roerbet 




roerben , 


roerben 




njcrben 


roerben 




IMPERATIVE 


INFINITIVES 


have be 


(%x£) fjaben, (A?) (311) fein, (to) be 


t)aht (Mi)! fet (bu)! 


have 


ffabt (tt)r)! fcib (tljr)! 


gefyabt' (35) fyaben, geroe'fen (git) fein, 


fyaben @ie ! feten @ie ! 


(to) have had (to) have been 


PARTI 


CIPLES 


fja'benb, having 


fet'enb, being 


gefyabt', had 


geroe'fen, been 



THE TENSE AUXILIARIES 



175 



The Tense Auxiliaries: fjaben, have (26, 2); feitt, be (30, 1) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


may have 


may be 


may have had may have been 


fjabe 


fei 


tjabt 


fei 1 




rjabeft 


feieft 


fjabeft 


feieft 




Ijabe 
fyaben 


fei 
feien 


fyabe 
fyaben 


uxm f et 

> gerjtfbt' , 

feien 


• geroe'fen 


fjabet 


feiet 


Fjabet 


feiet 




tjaben 


feien 


fjaben J 


feien 






Past 


Pluperfect 


might have 


might be 


might have had might have been 


rjStte 


roare 


rjatte 1 


roare " 




tjatteft 


roareft 


fjattefl 


roareft 




tjatte 
fatten 


roare 
roaren 


ijatte 

fatten 


roare 
>ger)abt' 

roaren 


> geroe'fen 


fjattet 


roaret 


rjattet 


roaret 




fatten 


roaren 


fatten 


roaren 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall have 


shall be 


shall have had shall have been 


roerbe 




roerbe 




roerbe 


roerbe 




roerbeft 




roerbeft 




roerbeft 


roerbeft 




roerbe 
irerben 


• tjdben 


roerbe 
roerben 


• fein 


roerbe 
roerben 


gebjcfbt' tnerbe 
' t)aben roerben 


getne'fen 
'fein 


roerbet 




roerbet 




roerbet 


roerbet 




roerben , 




roerben 




roerben. 


roerben. 




CONDITIONAL 


Present 


Past 


should have 


should be 


should have had should have been 


trurbe 




rourbe 1 




murbe 


roftrbe 




rourbeft 




trjUrbeji 




rofirbeft 


rourbeft 




rorlrbe 
rourben 


> rjaben 


rourbe 
rourben 


► fetrt 


rourbe 

rofirben 


gefjabt' rrjfirbe 

" rjaben rourben 


geroe'fen 
fein 


trjurbet 




rofirbet 




roUrbet 


rourbet 




rourben 




tofirben 




roftrbert. 


rourben. 





176 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



The Tense, Mood, and Voice Auxiliary: wcrbcn, become (32, 106) 


INDICATIVE 


Present 

become 
inerbe * (see 1061) 
ttrfrft * 
trjfrb * 
tuerben * 
luerbet * 
tuerben * 


Perfect 
have become 
bin * 1 

Hit * 

1ft * 
ftnb * 
feib * 
ftnb * . 


'getuor'ben 


Past 

became 
tuiirbe (or tuarb) * 
ttmrbeft (or tuarbft) * 
ttmrbe (or tuarb) * 
tuitrben * 
luui'bet * 
tuuiben * 


Pluperfect 
had beco?ne 
mar * ■ 
roarft * 
War * 
tuaren * 
mart * 
toaren * - 


getosr'ben 


Future 
shall become 
tuerbe * 
tufrft * 
tofrb * 
tuerben * 
tuerbet * 
tuerben * 


» tuerben 


Future Perfect 
shall have beco 
tuerbe * " 
tutrft * 
tntrb * 
irjerben * 
tuerbet * 
irjerben * 


me 

getuor'ben 
fein 


IMPERATIVE 

become 
tuerbe (bu) * 
tuerbet (ir)r) * 
tuerben @ie * 




INFINITIVES 

* ($u) tuerben, {to) be- 

come 

* getoor'ben (5Q) fein, 

{to) have becorne 


PARTICIPLES 

* tuer'benb, becoming 

* geiuor'ben, become 



THE TENSE, MOOD, AND VOICE AUXILIARY 



177 



The Tense, Mood, and Voice Auxiliary: foerben, become (32, 106) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


may become 


may have become 


tnerbe * 


fei * ] 




tnerbeft * 


feteft * 




tnerbe * 
tnerben * 


fet * 
feien * 


►getnuVben 


tnerbet * 


feiet * 




tnerben * 


feien * 




Past 


Pluperfect 


might beco7ne 


might have become 


toitrbe * 


tuSre * \ 




toiirbeft * 


tuttreft * 




toiirbe * 
tniirben * 


tu&re * 
tuSren * 


^getnnVben 


tniirbet * 


tnSret * 




tniirben * 


tuaren * . 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall become 


shall have become 


tnerbe * ] 




tnerbe * ] 




tnerbeft * 




tnerbeft * 




tnerbe * 
trjerben * 


• tnerben 


tnerbe * 
tnerben * 


getuor'ben 
fein 


roerbet * 




tuerbet * 




tnerben * 




tnerben * 




CONDITIONAL 


Present 


Past 


should become 


should have become 


tniirbe * 1 




tniirbe * - 




tniirbeft * 




tniirbeft * 




tniirbe * 
tniirben * 


► tnerben 


tniirbe * 
tniirben * 


getuor'ben 
'fein 


tniivbet * 




trjiirbet * 




miirben * - 




tniirben * 





1/8 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



Weak Verbs: fagen, say; folgen, follow (172, 4) 


INDICATIVE 




Present 


Perfect 


say 


follow 


have said have followed 


fage 


fotge 


t)a6e 


6m 




fagft • 


foigft 


f,aft 


btft 




fagt 

fagen 


folgt 

folgen 


I)at 

t)56en 


- , *f* 

9eW fmb 


>gefolgt / 


fagt 


folgt 


fyaht 


feib 




fagen 


folgen 


l)a6en 


fmb 






Past 


Pluperfect 


said 


followed 


had said had followed 


fagte 


folgte 


fiatte ] 


toar 




fagteft 


folgteft 


rjatteft 


toarft 




fagte 


folgte 


fjatte 


toar 

^gefagt' 


gefoigt' 


fag ten 


folgten 


fatten 


toaren 




fagtet 


folgtet 


f)attet 


mart 




fag ten 


folgten 


fatten 


toaren , 






Future 


Future Perfect 


shall say shall follow 


shall have said shall have followed 


toerbe 


toerbe i 




toerbe 


toerbe 




nrirft 


tofrft 




tofrft 


tofrft 




tofrb 
tocrben 


tofrb 
►iaqett 

toerben 


► folgen 


tofrb 
toerben 


gefagt^ tofrb 
^a6en nierben 


gefolgt^ 
fetn 


toerbet 


loerbet 




toerbet 


loerbet 




roerben 


toerben 




toerben 


toerben ^ 






IMPERATIVE 


INFINITIVES 


j^y 


follow 


(ail) fagen, {to) (git) folgen, {to) 


fage (b 


B) ! folge (bit) ! 


say follow 


fagt (if 


r)! folgt (tt>r)! 


gefdgt / (5u)!ja6en, gefoigt' (5u)fein, 


fagen S 


e ! folgen Sie ! 


{to) have said {to)have followed 



PARTICIPLES 

fa'genb, saying fol'genb, following 

gefagt', said gefotgt / ', followed 



WEAK VERBS 



179 



Weak Verbs: fagett, say; folgen, follow (172, 4) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


may say may follow 


7nay have said may have followed 


fage folge 


fjabe 


fei ' 




fageft folgeft 


t)abeft 


feieft 




fage folge 


fjabe 


fa 
^qefagt' . . 


.gefotgt' 


fag en folgen 


tjaben 


b ' b feten 




faget folget 


t)abet 


feiet 




fag en folgen 


t)56en 


feten _ 




Past 


Pluperfect 


might say might follow 


might have said might have followed 


fagte folgte 


tjtitte , 


tocire 




fagteft folgteft 


fjatteft 


toareft 




fagte folgte 


J)atte 


mare 

Igefagt 7 


> gef otgt' 


fagten folgten 


fatten 


toaren 




fagtet folgtet 


fyattet 


toaret 




fagten folgten 


fatten 


toaren J 


Future 


Future Perfect 


shall say shall follow 


shall have said shall have followed 


ttterbe 1 


toerbe 




toerbe " 


toerbe 




roerbeft 


toerbeft 




toerbeft 


tnerbeft 




toerbe 
toerben 


toerbe 
>faqen 

toerben 


> folgen 


toerbe 
toerben 


gefagt' toerbe 
1)5 ben toerben 


gefolgt" 

fetn 


toerbet 


toerbet 




toerbet 


toerbet 




toerben j 


toerben j 




roerben 


toerben j 




CONDITIONAL 


Present 


Past [lowed 


should say should follow 


should have said should have fol- 


toitrbe -^ 


toitrbe ^ 




toiirbe ^ 


toiirbe -^ 


toiirbefi 


toiirbeft 




toiirbeft 


toiirbeft 




toiirbe 
toiirben 


toiirbe 
•fagen « 

tourben 


> folgen 


toiirbe 
tniirben 


gefagt' toiirbe 

f)aben rourben 


gefolgt^ 

feirt 


toiirbet 


toiirbet 




toiirbet 


toiirbet 




toiirben- 


toiirben - 




toiirben J 


toiirben J 





i8o 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



Strong Verbs: ftngen, sing; finfen, sink (172, 5) 


INDICATIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


sing sink 


have sung have sunk 


ftnge finfe 


tjabe "J 


bin ] 




fingft finfft 


w 


6!ft 




fingt finft 


fjat 


ge= tft 


,ge= 


ftngen fin fen 


f)a Ben 


fung'en ftnb 


funf'en 


fingt ftnft 


f)a6t 


feib 




ftngen finfen 


Ijaben 


ffnb J 




Past 


Pluperfect 


sang sunk 


had sung had sunk 


fang fan! 


f}atte i 


mar -1 




fangft fanfft 


Ijatteft 


roarft 




fang fan! 


Ijatte 


ge= nmr 


ge= 


fang en fan!en 


flatten 


fung'en roaren 


funf'en 


fangt fanft 


pttet 


mart 




fang en fanfen 


fatten J 


roaren J 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall sing shall sink 


shall have sung shall have sunk 


trjerbe ] 


trjerbe 




toerbe 


roerbe 




ttrfrft 


trjtrft 




totrft 


"^ 




ttrfrb 


tntrb 




ttrfrb 


P rofrb 


ge= 


merben 


htnqen 

roerben 


>fin!en 


roerben 


Munq'en 

toerbet 


►junf'en 


toerbet 


roerbet 




iuerbet 


iem 


merben 


toerben . 




roerben , 


roerben j 




IMPERATIVE 


INFINITIVES 


sing sink 


(Sit) fingen, {to) ( S u) finfen, (A?) 


finge (bit) ! finfe (bu) ! 


jzVzg - .rz>z/£ 


fingt (tf)r) ! ftnft (tljr) ! 


gefung / en(5u)f)a6en,gefunf / en(5ii)fein r 


fingen ©te ! finfen ©ie ! 


{to) have sung {to) have sunk 


PARTI 


CIPLES 


fing'enb, singing 


finf'enb, sinking 


gefung'en, sung 


gefunf'en, sunk 



STRONG VERBS 



Strong Verbs: fmgcn, 


sing j firtlett, sink (172,5) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


may sing may sink 


may have sung may have sunk 


firtge ftnfe 


fjabe 


fet 




ftngeft finfeft 


f)56eft 


feteft 




ftnge ftnfe 


f)abe 


ge, fei 


^ 


ftngert finfen 


fjaben 


ftmg'ett fetett 


funf v ert 


ftnget ftnfet 


fmbet 


fetet 




ftngen finfen 


fjaben 


feiett 




Past 


Pluperfect 


might sing might sink 


might have sung might have sunk 


fange fdnfe 


f)dtte - 


tudre 




fangeft fanfeft 


fjdtteft 


toareft 




fange fanfe 


^atte 


ges todre 


fi& 


fang en fanfeit 


rjdtten 


'fimg'en tuarett 


'futtf'ett 


fanget fanfet 


r)Sttet 


tudret 




fang ett fdttfen 


fjiittert - 


tudrett - 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall sing shall sink 


shall have sung shall have sunk 


trjerbe 


tnerbe - 




trjerbe 


trjerbe 




toerbeft 


toerbeft 




tuerbeft 


tuerbeft 




lucrbe 


tuerbe 




trjerbe 


? e= . tuerbe 


ge= 


tuerbett 


hmqett 

tuerbett 


• finfen: 


merbett 


gutter en 

^abett m " ben 
tuerbet 


>fnnf^en 


ruerbet 


tuerbet 




tuerbet 




tuerbett 


tuerbett . 




nierben 


tuerbett _, 




CONDITIONAL 


Present 


Past 


should sing should sink 


should have sung should have sunk 


tuitrbe - 


tuitrbe ■ 




tuitrbe - 


tuitrbe ^| 




tuiirbeft 


tuiirbeft 




tuiirbeft 


tuiirbeft 




roiirbe 


tuitrbe 




tuitrbe 


9 e= tuitrbe 


ge= 


hJiirbert 


• ftngett 

ruiirben 


> finfen 


tuitrben 


fitnq / ett r . t 
,-r tnnrbett 


funf'en 


tniirbet 


tuitrbet 




tuitrbet 


baben r , t 
tuurbet 


fettt 


tuitrben. 


tuiirben- 




toiirbett- 


toitrben- 





A GERMAX GRAMMAR 



The Passive Voice : 


tic ben, /<??'* (106 1 ) 


INDICATIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


am loved 


have been loved 


merbe 




Mn 1 




ttrfrji 




6!ft 




loirb 
toerben 


►geliefct' 


fmb 


geliebt' 
roorDen 


toerbet 




fetb 




roerbett 




jinb J 




Past 


Pluperfect 


was loved 


had been loved 


itmrbe (or icarb) -1 




roar -I 




inurbeft (or roarbft) 




roarft 




ttmrbe (or todrb) 


•getiebt' 


roar 


Qdiebf 


ttmrben 


roaren 


ip or ben 


rovirbet 




wart 




ttmrben J 




roaren - 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall be loved 


shall have been loved 


tticrbe 




roerbe 




tofrft 




trjtrft 




trjfrb 


getiefit' 


irjirb 


gdiebt' 


rrjcrbctt 


trjerben 


Herbert 


lodrben fein 


toerbet 




roerbet 




trjerben . 




merben 




IMPERATIVE 


INFINITIVES 


<fe loved 


geliebt/ ($u) merben, (A?) 


tnerbe (bit) l 


be loved 


trjerbet (tfjr) Igeltebf ! 


geliebt' roorben (511) feirt, 


loerben Sie J 


(to) have been loved 


PARTK 


JIPLES 


geliebt' treVber 


lb, being loved 


geliebt' ivorben 


, having been loved 



THE PASSIVE VOICE 



183 



The Passive Voice : 


Ue&ctt, love (106 1 ) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


may be loved 


may have been loved 


toerbe 




fei ] 




toerbeft 




feteft 




trjerbe 

rcerbett 


> geliebt' 


jet 
feien 


geiiebt' 
toorben 


luerbet 




feiet 




trjerben 




feien 




Past 


Pluperfect 


might be loved 


might have been loved 


toiirbe " 




roare ] 




nmrbeft 




toSreft 




ttmvbe 
ttmrbert 


> gettebt' 


roare 
roSren 


geliebt' 
roorben 


toiirbet 




tt)8ret 




ttmrbert . 




toaren 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall be loved 


shall have been loved 


roerbe * 




roerbe 




rrjerbeft 




tuerbejt 




trjerbe 


getiebt' 


trjerbe 


geUebt' 


trjerben 


' Herbert 


trjerben 


toorben fein 


iuerbet 




roerbet 




tocrben 




trjerben 




CONDITIONAL 


Present 


Past 


should be loved 


should have been loved 


ttriirbe 




toiirbe - 




trjitrbeft 




toiirbejr 




tuiirbe 


gettebt' 


toiirbe 


geliebt 7 


tofivben 


tnerben 


toiirben 


toorben fein 


roiirbet 




roiirbet 




toiirben 




toiirben j 





184 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



Reflexive Verbs: fid) freueit, rejoice (18, 3) 


INDICATIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


rejoice 


have rejoiced 


id) freue mid) 


id) t)a6e mid) " 




bii freuft bid) 


bu f)aft bid) 




er freut fief) 


er f)at fid) 


> gefreut' 


nur freuen un3 


totr fiaben un§ 


fljr freut eud) 


tin* t)a6t eud) 




fie freuen fid) 


fie t)56en fid) 




Past 


Pluperfect 


rejoiced 


/m^ rejoiced 


id) freute mid) 


idj rjatte mid) -1 




bii freuteft bid) 


bu fiatteft bid) 




er freute fid) 


er rjatte fid) 


- gefreut 


trjtr freuten un§ 


rotr fatten une 


ttjr freutet eud) 


irjr t)attet end) 




fie freuten fid) 


fie fatten fid) J 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall rejoice 


shall have rejoiced 


idj merbe mid) ' 




id) merbe mid) " 




bit trjfrfi bid) 




bii rofrft bid) 




er hrfrb fid) 
toil roerben un§ 


> freuen 


er rotrb. fid) 
nur merbenun§ 


gefreut ' 
rjaben 


ffjr tnerbet eud) 




fljr merbet eud) 




fie roerben fid) 




fie merben fid) 




IMPERATIVE 


INFINITIVES 


rejoice 


fid) (§u) freuen, (to) 


freue (bit) bid) ! 


rejoice 


freut (Ujr) eud) ! 


fid) gefreut / (jfl) fjaben, 


freuen <3ie fid) ! 


(/<?) /z^^ rejoiced 


PARTI 


3IPLES 


fic(j freu'en 


), rejoicing 


fid) gefreut 


, rejoiced 



REFLEXIVE VERBS 



I3 5 



Reflexive Verbs: fid) freuen, rejoice (18, 3) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 


Perfect 


may rejoice 


may have rejoiced 


id) freue mid) 


id) fjabe mid) ' 




bu freueft bid) 


bit l)abeft bid) 




er freue fid) 
mir freuen un§ 


er t)abe fid) 
mir I)a6en un§ 


> gefreut' 


ttjr freue t eud) 


ti)r tjabet eud) 




fie freuen fid) 


fie tjaben fid) 




Past 


Pluperfect 


might rejoice 


might have rejoiced 


id) freute mid) 


id) t)dtte mid) -1 




bu freuteft bid) 


bu flatten bid) 




er freute fid) 
mir freuten un§ 


er t)dtte fid) 
nut fatten un§ 


► gefreut' 


tfjr freutet eud) 


tl)r t)dttet euct) 




fie freuten fief) 


fie r/itten fid) J 




Future 


Future Perfect 


shall ?-ejoice 


shall have rejoiced 


idj merbe mid) " 




id) merbe mid) ' 




bu merbeft bid) 




bu merbeft bid) 




er merbe fid) 
iDtr merben un§ 


► freuen 


er merbe fid) 
mtr inerben un§ 


gefreut' 
" i)56en 


tfjr merbet eud) 




tf)r merbet end) 




fie merben fid) _ 




fie inerben fid) j 




CONDITIONAL 


Present 


Past 


should rejoice 


should have rejoiced 


id) miirbe mid) -» 




icf) luiirbe mid) -] 




bu miirbeft bid) 




bu miirbeft bid) 




er miirbe fid) 
mtr miirben un§ 


■ freuen 


er miirbe fict) 
mtr miirben un§ 


gefreut / 
t)56en 


tr)r miirbet end) 




tt)r miirbet eud) 




fie nmrben fid) - 




fie miirben fid) J 





1 86 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



The Mood Auxiliaries : biirf cit f 


nay; fonnen, can; mogen may; 


miiffen, must; fotten, shall; wotten, will 


(78, 80, 148, 200) 


INDICATIVE 




Present 




barf 


!ann mag 


mufe 


foil HJtfl 


barfft 


fannft ntagft 


mu|3t 


fottft nrittft 


barf 


fann mag 


mufj 


foil toitt 


biirfen 


fonnen mogen 


miiffen 


fotten rootten 


biirft 


fonnt mogt 


miif3t 


fottt mo (It 


biirfen 


fonnen mogen 


miiffen 


fotten rootten 




Past 




burfte 


fonnte modjte 


mufjte 


fottte roottte 


burfteft 


!onnteft mocfjteft 


mufeteft 


fottteft toottteft 


burfte 


fonnte mocrjte 


mufcte 


fottte moltte 


etc. 


etc. etc. 


etc. 


etc. etc. 




Perfect 




Pluperfect 


r)a6e 1 
etc. , 


geburft', gefonnt', 


f^atte " 
fjatteft 
Ijatte 
etc. 


geburft', gefonnt', 


gemodjt', gemufst', 


gemody/, gemuBt', 


gefottV, geiootlt/ 


gefottV, gemottt' 




Future 




Future Perfect 


roerbe 




roerbe 


1 


tofrft 


biirfen, fonnen, mogen, 


tofrft 


! geburft' fjaben, 


lofrb 


miiffen, fotten, rootten 


tofrb 


gefonnt' f)56en, etc. 


etc. 




etc. 


1 




IMPERATIVE 


INFINITIVES 


mode 


(bii) ! The other five 


(5Q) biirf 


en, fonnen, mogen, etc. 


luottt 


(ftjr) ! verbs have no 


geburft' ( 


ju) Fjaben, gefonnt' 


luotten 


©ie ! imperative 


(&) S 


iben, etc. 




PARTII 


:iples 




biir'fenb 


fbn'nenb mb'genb 


miif / fenb 


foWenb tool'lenb 


geburft' 


gefonnf gemodjt 7 


gemufet / 


gefottt' geroottt' 



THE MOOD AUXILIARIES 



IS? 



The Mood Auxiliaries 


: biirfen, may; fontten, can; mogen, 


may; 


miiffen, must; foUen, shall; ttoflen, will (78, 80, 148, 200) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 






Present 






biirfe 


fomte 


moge miiffe 


folle 


toofle 


biirfeff 


fonrteft 


mogeft miiffeft 


fofleft 


toolleft 


biirfe 


fonne 


moge miiffe 


folle 


tootle 


biirfert 


fonnen 


mogen miiffen 


follen 


tootten 


biirfet 


fonnet 


moget miiffet 


follet 


toollet 


biirfen 


fonnen 


mogen miiffen 


foffen 


toollen 






Past 






biirfte 


fonnte 


modjte miifjte 


follte 


tooHte 


biirfteft 


fonnteft 


moci)teft miiBteft 


fotlteft 


toollteft 


biirfte 


fonnte 


modjte miiJ3te 


foate 


toollte 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. etc. 


etc. 


etc. 




Perfect 






Pluperfect 




tjabe 






ptte ] 






tjabeft 


geburff, gef onnt' gemodjt', 


ptteft 


geburft^gefonnf 


^emocrjr', 


rjabe 


gemufct', gefott 


' ' , getoollV 


tjatte 


gemuftt', gefollt' 


, geioouY 


etc. 






etc. 








Future 






Future Perfect 




toerbe 






toerbe 






tuerbeft 


biirfert, fonnen 


mogen, 


toerbeft 


geburft' Ijaben, 




toerbe 


miiffen, foffen, 


toollen 


toerbe 


' gefonnf tjaben, 


etc. 


etc. 






etc. 






CONDITIONAL 




Present 






Past 




toiirbe ] 






toiirbe 






toiirbeft 


biirfert, fontten 


mogen, 


toiirbeft 


geburft' l)aben, 




toiirbe 


miiffen, foffen, 


toollen 


toiirbe 


gefonnt 7 fjaben, 


etc. 


etc. 






etc. 







A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



Separable Verbs : luic'bcrfagcn, say again (92) 



INDICATIVE 



Present 

[age ... 1 

« ... 
fagt . . . 
etc. (178, 1) 



nrie'ber 



Perfect 

fjafee ... l 

w . . . • ,. - 

f)at ... [ ^i^bergeiagt 
etc. (178,1) 



Past 
jagte . . . toie / ber 
etc. (178,2) 



Pluperfect 

fjatte . . . ttue'bergejagt 
etc. (178,2) 



Future 
ttjerbe . . . ttne'berjagen. 
etc. (178,3) 



Future Perfect 
jrjerbe . . . mie'bergejagt fjafcen 
etc. (178,3) 



IMPERATIVE 

jage (bit) . . . ttne'ber ! 
etc. (178,4) 



INFINITIVES 

irjie / ber(5u)fagen 
etc. (178,4) 



PARTICIPLES 

ttne'berjagertb, etc. (178,5) 



SUBJUNCTIVE 



jage 
jagejt 
jage 
etc. 



roie'ber 



( l 79>*)\ 



fyabt . . . 
r)a6eft ... | 
f)a6e ... I 
etc. (179, i)J 



ttrie'bergefagt 



lagte 
etc 



Past 
. . nrie'ber 



Pluperfect 
f)dtte . . . nri e' berg e jag t 
etc. (179,2) 



tocrbe 
etc 



Future 
. . . ttne'berjagen 

(i79>3) 



Future Perfect 

toerbe . . . nne'bergefagt fjaben 
etc. (179,3) 



CONDITIONAL 



tuiirbe 
etc. 



Present 
„ . . tnie'berjagen 
(i79>4) 



ttmrbe . . . nne'bergefagt T)aben 
etc. (1 79, 4) 



IMPERSONAL VERBS 



Inseparable Verbs : entfa'gen, renounce (94) 




INDICATIVE 


Present 


entfa'ge 


Perfect : ^a6e entfagt' 




etc. (178, 1) 


etc. (178, 1) 


Past: 


entfag'te 


Pluperfect: f)atte entfagt' 




etc. (178, 2) 


etc. (178,2) 


Future : 


toerbe entfa'gen 


Fut. Perf . : toerbe entjagt' f)56en 




etc. (178,3) 


etc. (178,3) 


IMPERATIVE 


INFINITIVES 




entfa'ge (bu) ! 


(tfi) entfa'gen 




etc. (178,4) 


etc. (178,4) 




PARTICIPLES 




entja'genb, etc. (178, 5) 




SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present : 


entja'ge 


Perfect: I)5be entjagt' 




etc. (i79>0 


etc. (179, 1) 


Past: 


entjag'te 


Pluperfect : fjatte entfagf 




etc. (179, 2) 


etc. (179, 2) 


Future : 


toerbe entja'gen 


Fut. Perf. : toerbe entjagK f)S6en 




etc. (179, 3) 


etc. (179, 3) 




CONDITIONAL 


Present : 


toiirbe entja'gen Past : toiirbe entjagt' n,a6en 




etc. (i79>4) etc. (179, 4) 


Impersonal Verbs: H rcgnct, it rams (172, 4, 5) 




INDICATIVE 


Present : 


eg regnet 


Perfect : eg r)at gereg'net 


Past: 


e§ reg'nete 


Pluperfect : eg Ijatte gereg'net 


Future : 


eg totrb regnen 


Fut. Perf. : eg toirb gereg'net f)a6en 




SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present : 


eg regne 


Perfect : eg t)a6e gereg'net 


Past: 


eg reg'nete 


Pluperfect : eg t)dtte gereg'net 


Future : 


eg toerbe regnen 


Fut. Perf. : eg toirb gereg'net l)a6en 




CONDITIONAL 


Present : 


eg toiirbe regnen 1 Past : eg toiirbe gereg'net f)a6en 



190 



A GERM AX GRAMMAR 



Weak Verbs with Peculiarities in Inflection (72, 


1,2) 




PRESENT 


INDICATIVE 




wait 


talk 


breathe 


ope?i 


blame 


wander 


toar'te 


rFbe 


afme 


off'ne 


td'bte 


roan'bre 


toar'teft 


re'beft 


at / meft 


bff'neft 


ta'betft 


man'berft 


luar'tet 


re'bet 


at / met 


off'net 


ta / belt 


nmn'bert 


toar'ten 


re 7 ben 


at'men 


bff'nen 


ta'beln 


nmn'bern 


toar'tet 


re'bet 


afmet 


off'net 


ta'belt 


toan'bert 


roar'ten 


re'ben 


at'men 


off'nen 


ta'beln 


faan'bern 






PAST INDICATIVE 




toar/tete 


re'bete 


at / mete 


bff'nete 


ta'belte 


man'berte 


toar'teteft 


re'beteft 


at / meteft 


b'ff'neteft 


ta'betteft 


man'bcrteft 


toar'tete 


re'bete 


at'mete 


off'nete 


ta^belte 


nmn'berte 


inar'tetcn 


re'beten 


at'meten 


bff'neten 


ta'.betten 


nmn'berten 


tnar'tetet 


re'betet 


afmetet 


off'netet 


ta'beltet 


nmn'bertet 


tuar'teten 


re'beten 


afmeten 


bff'neten 


ta'belten 


man'berten 






PAST PARTICIPLE 




geroar'tet 


gere'bet 


geat'met 


gebff'net 


geta / bett 


geroan'bert 


Strong Verbs with Peculiarities in 


Inflection (72 


3,4) 




PRESENT 


INDICATIVE 




run 


hold 


help 


see 


give 


take 


Icmfe 


Ijalte 


fjetfe 


w 


gebe 


netjme 


taufft 


^altff 


fitlfft 


\m 


gfbft, gttft 


nfmmft 


lauft 


ptt 


fitlft 


m 


gibt, gl6t 


nfnvmt 


laufen 


fallen 


r^etfert 


feljen 


geben 


nefjmen 


lauft 


pallet 


Wt 


mt 


g'ebt 


nefymt 


laufen 


fallen 


ljelfen 


fetjen 


geben 


nel)iuen 






IMPERATIVE (74, 


2) 




taufe (bu) 


Ijalte (bu) 


m (bu) 


! ftec) (bu) 


gtb, g!b (bu) ! 


ntmm (ba) ! 


lauft (tf)r) 


battel (tljr) 


ijelft (t()r) 


! fefit (i$r) 


g'ebt (ti)r) ! 


uefjmt (tr)r) ! 


laufen ©ie 


tjalten ©ie 


. rjelfen ©te 


! feljen ^ie 


geben ©ie ! 


net)men©te! 



IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS 



IQI 



Irregular Weak Verbs (172, 4) 



Six weak verbs and their compounds are inflected regularly (178, 
179), but have a change of stem vowel in the past indicative and 
the past participle: 

Past Subjv. 

brennte 

fennte 

nennte 

rennte 

fenbete 

tuenbete 



Pres. Infin. 


Past Indie. 


brennen 


bronnte 


fennen 


fannte 


nennett 


nannte 


renttett 


rannte 


fenbett 


fanbte 


ttenben 


toanbte 



Past Partic. 




gebrannf 


btirn 


gefannf 


know 


genannt' 


na.77ie 


\\i gerannt' 


run 


gefanbf 


send 


getoanbf 


turn 



Three verbs have a change of stem vowel (and modification) in 
the past subjunctive, also ; and they suffer consonantal changes in 
their principal parts, as in English. In the present indicative (191, 3) 
ttuffen is inflected like the mood auxiliaries (186, 1): 

bringert bradjte bradite gebracbt' bring, take 

benfen bad)te bacbte gebacbt' think 

tmffett ttuftte nroJ3te geitmjjf know 



PRESENT INDICATIVE 



bring e 


benfe 


ir»eiB 


bring ft 


benfjt 


roeifjt 


bring t 


ben!t 


lueiB 


brtngen 


benfen 


tniffen 


bring t 


benft 


toifet 


bring en 


benfen 


tuiffert 


PAST 


INDICATIVE 


brachte 


bad)te 


inuBte 


brad)teft 


badjteft 


JDUBteft 


bracfrte 


bad)te 


nmjjte 


bracf)ten 


badjten 


itmfsten 


bradjtet 


bacbtet 


nmjjtet 


bracfjten 


bad)ten 


ttmfjten 



PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE 

bring e benfe nriffe 

bringeft benfeft teiffeft 

brtnge benfe ttnfje 

bring en benfen njtffen 

bringet benfet toiffet 

brtngen benfen toiffen 



PAST SUBJUNCTIVE 



brachte 


bdebte 


luiiBte 


brdd)teft 


barfjteft 


roiijjteft 


bracbte 


bdd)te 


roitBte 


bradjten 


bdaiten 


ttriifsten 


brarfjtet 


badjtet 


ttmfjtet 


bradjten 


bddjten 


tuitfjten 



192 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

The Strong Verbs classified according to their Vowel Changes 1 



Class 


Pres. Infin. 


Past. Indie. 


Past Partic. 


No. of Verbs 


I 


a 


f i 

1 iC 
[ u 


a 


18 


II 


c 


f a 
1 a 


li 


38 


III 


i 


a 


C 


21 


IV 


ei 


(!. 


a 


38 


V 


ie 








21 


VI 


a, o r it 








8 


VII 


Irregular Forms 


20 



2 Class I: Root Vowel a 

1. a i a: fangen, fjangen. 

2. <* ie a: Blafen, Braten, fallen, 2 fallen, faff en, raten, fd)lafen. 

3. a u a: Bacfen, 2 fafjren, graBen, laben, fdjaffen, 2 fdjlagen, tragen, 
tt)ad)ien, tbafdjen. 

3 ' Class II : Root Vowel e 

1. e a c: effen, 3 freffen, geben, gene'fen, geftfjeTjen, lefen, meffen, fefjen, 
treten, bergef'fen. 

1 For an alphabetical list, see 194. These classes are for drill work in 
giving principal parts and meanings. After being recited, the principal 
parts should be written on the blackboard, in columns : as, 
fang en l)alt en eff en 

I i I I ie I I afel 

ge| a |en ge| a |cn ge|gcffeit 

2 For the past indicative, see 194. 3 For the past participle, see 194. 



THE STRONG VERBS 1 93 

2. c ft OJ befefj'Ien, berften, bredjen, embfeti'tert, erfdjred^en, 1 gelten, fjel= 
fen, nefjmen, 1 fdjelten, jpredjen, ftedjen, ftefjlen, fterben, trejjen, 1 berber/gen, 
herber'ben, inerben, tuerfen. 

3. t ot berrje'gen, fed)ten, flecfjten, Ijeben, melfen, queflen, fdjeuen, 
fdjmelgen, fcfyneu'en, toeben. 

Class III : Root Vowel i I 

1. t ft OX begm'nen, gennVnen, rinnen, fdjnrimmen, ftnnen, fpinnen. 

2. i ft it: binben, finben, bringen, geling'en, flingen, ringen, fdjlingen, 
fd)tt)inben, jcfjttungen, fingen, fmfen, fpringen, trinfen, nrinben, jroingen. 

Class IV: Root Vowel et 2 

1. et t it fid) beftet'^ett, beitfen, erbtei'djen, gteid)en, gfciten, 1 greifen, 1 
fneifen, 1 freiftfien, tetben, 1 pfei'fen, 1 reiBen, retten, 1 fd)leid)en, fdjleifen, 1 jdyteiBen, 
fdnneiften, fdjnetben, 1 fdjrettett, 1 fpleifeen, ftreid)en, ftreiten, 1 meidjen. 

2. ettcie: Metben, gebei'^en, lei^ert, metben, £retjen, retben, fdjeiben, 
foremen, jdjreiben, fc^reien, jdjiueigen, jpeien, ftetgen, treiben, t>er5ei / tjen f 
toeifen. 

Class V: Root Vowel te 3 

te : btegen, bteten, ftiegen, f(tet)en, [He^en, frieren, genie'fjen, giefjen, 
fvted)en, riedjen, fd)ieben, fdjieften, fdjUeften, fieben, 1 fpvieBen, ftieben, triefen, 
berbrie'feen, rjertie'ren, ttuegen, ^k^en, 1 

Class VI : Root Vowel a, o, ft 4 

ft,o,it 0: betru'gen, erto'jdjen, garen, furett, tugen, fdjinarert, ioagett. 

Class VII: Irregular^ e 

bitten, gebci'rett, get)(e)n, glimmen, fynten, ^ei|3ert r ftimnten, fdtnmert, lew* 
fen, ttegen, riifen, faufen, fangen, flatten, jdmauben, fcfyuoren, ftt^en, fteij(e)n, 
fto^en, tutu 

1 For the past indicative and the past participle, see 194* 
2 These verbs are to be learned from the alphabetical list, 1 94. Some of 
them are among the most important in the language. 



194 A GERMAX GRAMMAR 

An Alphabetical List of the Strong and Irregular Verbs (108-119) 



Pres. Infin. 


Pres. Indie. 
2, 3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 

Subjv. 


Past 

Par tic. 


Meaning 


barfen 


bdtf-ft, -t 


barf(e) 


but 


bufe 


gebarfett 


bake 


bcfehlcn 


befieb>ft, -t 


befiebl 


bcfobl 


befobte 1 


bcfoljlcu 


command 


licflct^cu 


befleif5-(ef)t, -t 


befleifte 


bem 


befliffc 


bcfiiffcit 


2 


bcgtuucti 


beginn-ft, -t 


beginn(e) 


begarnt 


begonne 8 


begonnen 


begin 


betfjcu 


beiB-(ef)t, -t 


beife(e) 


m 


biffe 


gebtfjen 


bite 


bergeu 


birg-ft, -t 


birg 


barg 


biirge 4 


geborgeu 


hide 


bcrfrcH 


birft, birft 


birft 


barft 


borfte 1 


geborften 5 


burst 


beroegen 


6etr>eg-ft f -t 


beroeg(e) 


bcniog 


betooge 


bett»5gen 


induce 


biegeu 


bieg-ft, -t 


bteg(e) 


bog 


boge 


gcbogen 


bend 


btcten 


biet-(e)ft, -et 


biet(e) 


bot 


bote 


gebotcn 


offer 


btnben 


binb-eft, -et 


binb(e) 


banb 


bdnbe 


gcbunben 


bind 


bitten 


bttt-eft, -et 


bitte, 6ttV 


bat 


bate 


gebeten 


beg, ask 


btafcu 


6lSf-(cf)t, -t 


bla§, biafe 


blie3 


btiefe 


gcblafert 


blow 


btetbeu 


bletb-ft, -t 


bleib(e) 


blicb 


bliebe 


geblicbctt 6 


remain 


bratett 


brat-ft, brat 


brat(e) 


briet 


briete 


gcbratett 


roast 


brccfien 


brid>ft, -t 


brid) 


bracfy 


bradje 


gebrodjen 


break 


bremten 


brenn-ft, -i 


bremte 


bramtte 


bremtte 


gebrannt 


burn 


brtngert 


bring-ft, -t 


brirtg(e) 


brarfjte 


brtid)te 


gebradjt 


bring 


benfen 


benf-ft, -t 


bertfe 


borfjte 


bdd)te 


a,tbad)t 


think 


brefdjett 


brtt"c^-(e)ft, -t 


brifd) 


braftfj 6 


brofdie 1 


gebrofrfjett 


thresh 


briitgett 


brtng-ft, -t 


brirtg(e) 


broug 


brdnge 


gcbrungcit 5 


press 


biirfen 


barf-ft, barf 





burfte 


biirfte 


geburft 


may 


emttfeblcn 


empfieb(-ft, -t 


empftebl 


em&fafit 


empfoble 1 


cmpfofilctt 


commend 


erbletdjeit 


erbteid>ft, -t 


erbleidje 


erbletcfite 


erb(eid)te 


erMeidjt 6 


turn pale 








erbttd) 


erblidje 


erbtifhen 5 


expi?-e 


edofdjert 


erlifd>(e)ft, -t 


erttfet) 7 


ertof eft 7 


erlbfdje. 


erlofrheu 7 


go out 5 


erfefiretfen 


erfd)rid-ft, -t 


erfd)rid 


erfdjrof 


erfdjrafe 


erfefcrorfen 5 


be terri- 
fied 


effert 


iff-eft, iK iB-t 


iB 


56 


atfe 


gegeffert 


eat 


ffibren 


fSfir-ft, -t 


fabr(e) 


fufif 


fubre 


gcfaljren 5 


go, drive 


fallen 


faU-ft, -t 


faU(e) 


fid 


fiete 


gefatfeu 5 


fall 


faugen 


fartg-ft, -t 


fang(e) 


ft«Jl 


finge 


gefangen 


catch 


ferfjteit 


ftd)t-ft, fid)t fidjt 


W 


fbdjte 


gcfrjtfjtcn 


fight 



1 '6 or ii distinguishes the form from the present. 2 Reflexive, apply your- 
self (18, 3). 3 The u represents an earlier ii (cf. 194 1 ). 4 0r biirge (194 1 ). 
6 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 6 Orbrofdj. 7 Sometimes weak (172,4). 



THE STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS 



195 



Pres.Infin. 


Pres. Indie. 
2,3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 

Subjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


fhtben 


ftnb-eft, -et 


fhtbe 


fanb 


fonbe 


gefnnben 


find 


fiecfyten 


fUcfit-ft, fltdjt 


fUcbt 


fluent 


flbcbte 


geflorfjtcn 


braid 


fCtegett 


flieg-ft, 4 


ftteg(e) 


Pg 


floge 


gefldgen 1 


fly 


fttefjen 


fttefi-ft, 4 


fliefj(e) 


ffl 


ftofje 


geftofyen 1 


flee 


fltefcen 


fUeB-(ef)t, 4 


fftefe(e) 


m 


Pffe 


geftoffen 1 


flow 


frcffen 


friff-eft,2 frife-t 


frifc 


fraf? 


frctfse 


gefreffen 


eat* 


frieren 


frter-ft, -t 


frier(e) - 


fror 


frore 


gefrorett 


freeze 


gttren 


gar-ft, -t 


gfire 


gor 4 


gore 4 


gegoren 4 


ferment 


gebSren 


gebter-ft, 4 


gebtex 


gebar 


gebare 


geboren 


bear 


geben 


gtb-ft, gib-ft, 4 


gib, g{b 


966 


gabe 


gegeben 


give 


gebetljen 


gebet^-ft, 4 


gebeU)(e) 


gebtelj 


gebiefie 


gebieljen * 


thrive 


gefj(e)n 


ge>ft, 4 


gefj(e) 


gt«s 


gtnge 


gegangen 1 


go 


geltngen 


, gcltng-t 





gelang 


gelange 


getungen 5 


succeed 


gelten 


gilt-ft, gilt 


gilt 


gait 


gblte 6 


gegolten 


be worth 


genefen 


genef-(ef)t, -t 


genefe 


gena3 


genafe 


genefen 1 


recover 


genieften 


genie£-(ef)t, -t 


gemejj(e) 


genofj 


genoffe 


genoffen 


enjoy 


geftf)ef)en 


, gefdjiefj4 


— 


gefdjal) 


gefcr)at)e 


geftfjefjen 1 


happen 


geroinnen 


genrinn-ft, -t 


getmtm(e) 


genmnn 


getobrtrte 7 


geroonnen 


win 


gtefjen 


gieMef)t, 4 


giefe(e) 


9*1? 


00 lie 


gegoffen 


pour 


gletdjen 


gleidj-ft, 4 


gtetcfj(e) 


gltdj 


gtidje 


geglicfjen 


be like 


gieiten 


gleit-eft, -et 


gtett(e) 


gittt 


glittc 


geglitten 1 


glide 


glimmen 


gltmm-ft, 4 


glimnt(e) 


glomm 4 


glbmtne 4 


geglom= 
men 4 


glhmner 


graben 


grab-ft, ' 4 


grab(e) 


gru6 


gritbe 


gegraben 


dig 


gretfen 


greif-ft, 4 


greif(e) 


griff 


Qnffe 


gegriffen 


seize 


fiaben 


m, -t 


fja&e 


f)fitte 


Ijatte 


gefjobt 


have 


fatten 


fjalt-ft Salt 


balt(e) 


fjielt 


fiielte 


geljaltett 


hold 


fjangen 


Jjang-jr, 4 


f)ang(e) 


f)tng 


binge 


geljangen 


hang 9 


fatten 


fjau-ft, 4 


f)au(e) 


f)ieb 


^tebe 


geljanen 


hew, cut 


fieben 


r}e&-ft, -t 


fjebe, Ijefc' 


bob 


bobe 9 


geljoben 


heave, lift 


fjciften 


f)etB-(ef)t, 4 


beij3(e) 


W% 


biefee 


geljei^en 


be called 


^elfen 


$ufo 4 


*Uf 


Half 


plfe 6 


geljolfen 


help 



1 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 2 0r frife-t. 3 0f animals. 

4 Sometimes weak(i72,4). 5 Generally impersonal, with d. (195 1 ). 

6 b or it distinguishes the form from the present. 

7 The b represents an earlier it (cf. 195 6 ). 

8 Intransitive. 9 0r pbe (195 6 ). 



196 



A GERM AX GRAMMAR 



Pres. Infin. 


Pres. Indie. 


Impv. 


Past 


Past 


Past 


Meaning 




3, 3 Sing. 


2 Sing. 


Indie. 


Subjv. 


Partic. 




fcnitcit 


fenn-fr, -t 


ferine 


tannic 


fcitntc 


gefannt 


know 1 


fltmmcn 


tlimm-ft, >t 


flimm(e) 


tiomnx 2 


ftommc' 2 


gcflom= 
men 2 


climb* 


flingen 


fting-ft, -t 


ffing(e) 


flnng 


flange 


geftangen 


sound 


fitcifcu 


bteif-ft, -t 


fneif(e) 


fniff 


fniffe 


gefmffen 


pinch 


footmen 


fomm-ft, -t 
fomm-ft, -t 


fomm 


ffim 


fame 


gefommen 3 


come 


tinmen 


fann-ft, faun 





fottutc 


fbnnte 


gefonnt 


can 


fretfd)en 


freifa)-(e)ft, -t 


freifa)(e) 


frifdj 


frifdje 


gefrijdjen 


scream 


fncrfjcn 


frted>ft, -t 


frierfj(e) 


frorf) 


rrotfje 


gefrodjen 3 


crawl 


rnrcn 


fur-ft, -t 


Hire 


for 2 


fore 2 


geforen 


choose 


laben 


lab-ft, -t 


fab(e) 


tab 


lube 


gelabcn 


load 


inbcn 


lab-eft, -et 

(ab-ft, -t 


tab(e) 


labete 
tab 


labete 
lube 


geldben 


invite 


Ittffcn 


laff-eft, 

t&H -t 


fofj 


m 


liefce 


gelaffcn 


let, allow 


(aufen 


lauf-ft, -t 


lauf(e) 


lief 


tiefe 


gelaufett 3 


run 


leiben 


fetb-eft, -et 


(eib(e) 


lift 


(itte 


gelitten 


suffer 


leifjen 


IeUj-ft, -t 


fetf)(e) 


ltcli 


liefje 


geliefjen 


lend 


tefcti 


Uef-(ef)r, -t 


lies 


m 


(afe 


gelefcn 


read 


uegen 


Ueg-ft, -t 


liege 4 


lag 


[age 


gclegcn 


lie 


lUgen 


lug-ft, -t 


lilg(e) 


log 


I3ge 


getagen 


lie 5 


meibett 


meib-eft, -et 


meib(e) 


mieb 


miebe 


gemtcben 


shun 


melfen 


melf-ft, -t 


melfe 


melfte 


melfte 


gemclft 


milk 




milf-ft, -t 




molt 


mblfe 


gemolfen 




meffeit 


miff-eft, 

mitf-i, -t 


miB 


mfifc 


mafje 


gemeffen 


?neasure 


mtftlmgen 


, mifettng-t 





miftlang 


mtfjlange 


mtfcumgen 6 


fail 


mOgen 


mffg-ft, mtfg 





motfjte 


modjte 


gemorfjt 


may, like 


mitfjen 


muB-t, mufj 





mnftte 


miirjte 


gemufet 


must 


nefjmen 


nfmm-ft, -t 


ttltnnt 


naljm 


nSfmte 


genommen 


take 


ncnnen 


nenn-ft, -t 


nennc 


uamtte 


nennte 


genannt 


name 


pfeifen 


pfetf-ft, -t 


pfeif(e) 


m 


Pfiffe 


gepftffen 


whistle- 


preifcn 


preif-(ef)t, -t 


preife 7 


prtc§ 


prtefe 


gepriefen 


praise 



1 be acquainted with. 

3 Inflected with fein (30, 1) 

6 Often impersonal (144, 2), with d. (196 3 ) 



Sometimes weak (172,4). 

Or Keg'. b tell a lie. 

7 Or prei». 



THE STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS 



197 





Pres. Indie. 


Impv. 


Past 


Past 


Past 




Pres. Infin. 


2, 3 Sing. 


2 Sing. 


Indie. 


Subjv, 


Partic. 


Meaning 


qneflen 


quiH-ft, -t 


quid 


gnofl 


qubUe 


geqnoften 1 


gush 


rateu 


rat-ft, rat 


rdt(e) 


riet 


riete 


gcraten 


advise 


rctben 


reib-ft, -t 


reib(e) 


neb 


rtebe 


gerteben 


rub 


rcijjen 


xei&-(ef)t, -t 


tetB(e) 


rife 


rifle 


gcviffen 


tear 


reiteu 


reit-eft, -et 


reit(e) 


ritt 


rttte 


gcritten 1 


ride 


remteit 


rerm-ft, -t 


rertrte 


rannte 


rermte 


gerannt 1 


run 


rtedjen 


riedj-ft, -t 


rted)(e) 


rod) 


rodje 


gcrodjen 


smell 


ringen 


rirtg-ft, -t 


ring(e) 


rang 


range 


gemngen 


wrestle 2 


rtnnen 


rirtrt-ft, -t 


rtrtn(e) 


rami 


ratine 


geronnen 1 


run 


riifen 


raf-ft, -t 


ruf(e) 


rtef 


riefe 


gcnlfen 


call, cry 


faufen 


fcmf-fi, -t 


fauf(e) 


i*ff 


fop 


gefoffen 


drink 


fang en 


faug-ft, -t 


faug(e) 


foO 


foge 


gefogen 


suck 


ftfjaffen 


fd)aff-ft, -t 


fd)aff(e) 


frfjUf 


fdiiife 


gefdjaffen 


create 


fdjaflcn 


fd)all-ft, -t 


fd)alt(e) 


ftt>U 3 


fd)bae 3 


gef pollen 3 


ring 


fdjctbcu 


fdjetb-eft, -et 


fd)eib(e) 


fdjieb 


fdjiebe 


gefdjieben 


paiH 


fdjctnen 


fd) eirt-ft, -t 


fdjeirt(e) 


frfjteit 


fdjiene 


gefdjtenen 


shine 


frficlten 


fdjilt-ft, fdjitt 


fdjilt 


fc^alt 


febbtte 5 


gefdjotten 


scold 


fdjeren 


febier-ft, 3 -t 3 


fdiier 3 


fdjor 3 


f dj ore 3 


gefdjoren 3 


shear 


fdjteben 


fdneb-ft, -t 


fd)ieb(e) 


mb 


fdjobe 


gefdjoben 


shove 


fdjiefjen 


fd)te£-(ef)t, -t 


fd)ie|(e) 


frf)6H 


fcpffe 


gefdjoffen 


shoot 


fdjtnben 


febinb-eft, -et 


fd)trtb(e) 


fdjnnb 


fd]iinbe 


gefdjnnben 


flay 


fcfjlafen 


fefdaf-ft, -t 


fd)taf(e) 


frfjticf 


fdjliefe 


gefdjiofen 


sleep 


fdjfagcn 


fcfjISg-ft, -t 


fctjlag(e) 


fdjlitg 


fdjluge 


gefdjlagen 


strike 


fc^lctc^en 


fcbleid)-ft, -t 


fcb(eid)(c) 


frf)ttd) 


fd)ltd)e 


gefdjitdjen 1 


sneak 


fdjletfen 


rawf-ft -t 


fcbteif(e) 


Wiff 


fd)Uffe 


gefdjUffcn 


whet 


fdjtetften 


fdjleife-(ef)t, -t 


fcb/tei£(e) 


fctiiif? 


fcbliffe 


gefdjttffen 


slit 


fd)Uc£en 


fc£)tteB-(ef)t, -t 


fd)Uefe(e) 


frf)l^ 


fdjloffe 


gefdjioffen 


shut 


fd)lingen 


fdjlmg-ft, -t 


fd)lirtg(e) 


fd)iang 


fcrjCange 


gefdjtungen 


sling 


fdjmetfjen 


fdjmetJ3-(ef)t, -t 


fd)meiB(e) 


fd)tntfe 


fdimtffe 


gefdjmiffen 


smite 


fdjnteljen 


fd)milg-(ef)t r A 


fcbmila 


f^molj 


fcQrrtblse 


gefdjnu){= 
Sen 1 


melt 


fdjnanben 


fd)ttaub-fr, -t 


fdinaub(e) 


f djnob 6 


fdjrtobe 6 


gefd)no6en 6 


snort 


fdjnetben 


fdjrtetb-efr, -et 


fdjneib(e) 


fd)nitt 


fdjrtttte 


gefdjnirten 


cut 


fdjranben 


fdjraub-ft, -t 


fdiraub(e) 


f djrob 3 


fdjrobe 3 


gefdjroben 3 


screw 



1 Inflected with feirt (30, 1). 2 0r zvring. 3 Sometimes weak (172,4). 

^divide; depart (197 1 ). 5 b or ii distinguishes the form from the present. 

6 More often weak (172, 4). 



198 



A GERMAX GRAMMAR 



_ . . Pres. Indie. 
Pres. Infin. 

2,3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 
Subjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


frfjretucn 


fdncib-ft, -t 


fd)reib(c) 


fdjricu 


fdiriebe 


gefdjrieuen 


7.77/6' 


fdjrcicn 


fdirei-ft, -t 


fd)rct(e) 


fdjrie 


fdjriee 


gcfdjrt'cn c?y 


fdjretten 


f dire it- eft, -et 


fdircit(c) 


fdjritt 


fdmtte 


gcfdjrtttcn 1 stride 


fdjMjfircn 


fdjttrier-ft, 2 -t 2 


fd) truer 2 


fcfjttior 


jd) tcore 


gefrfjworen Wester 


fd)tnetgen 


fdjtoeig-ft, -t 


fdjtoeig(e) 


fdjttucg 


fdjtoiege 


gefdjuncgen be silent 


fdjrocUcn 


fdmuU-ft, -t 


fd) trull 


fdjtooU 


fdirobtle 


gcfcfjttJottcn 1 swell 


fd)«)im= 


fdinnmm-ft, -t 


fd)trumrn(e) 


fcfjttmmm 


fd)tt)bm= 


gcfd)tt)om= 




men 








me 3 


men 1 


swim 


fdjnnnbcn 


fdnrmib-eft, -et 


fd)trunb(e) 


fd)foanb 


fdnodnbe 


gefd)tuun= 
ben 1 


vanish 


jdjnringen 


fdjtoing-ft, -t 


fc^toing(e) 


fdjttmng 


fdjtoange gefd)ttmn= 














gen 


swing 


fdjwBren 


fdjtoor-ft, -t 


fcrjroor(e) 


fdjtour 4 


fdjtoure 


gefdjworen 


swear 


feljcn 


itefH't, -t 


ftelj 5 


m 


ffifje 


gefefjen 


see 


fctn 


6i-ft, if-t 


let 


war 


mare 


getnefen 1 


be 


fcuben 


fenb-eft, -ct 


fenbe 


fanbte 2 


fenbete 


gefanbt 2 


send 


jtcben 


fieb-cft, -et 


fieb(e) 


fott 2 


forte 2 


gefotten 2 


seethe 


jtngen 


ftng-ft, -t 


firtg(e) 


fang 


fctnge 


gefnngen 


sing 


finfen 


finf-ft, -t 


firtf(e) 


fattf 


fdnle • 


gcfnnlen 1 


sink 


finnen 


jinn-ft, -t 


firtrt(e) 


fann 


fartne 6 


gefmuten 


think 


fitjen 


fi|-(ef)t, -t 


ftfce, ftfc' 


m 


jSf3e 


gefeffen 


sit 


fallen 


foU-ft, fott 





foflte 


foffte 


gefoflt 


ought 


fpcien 


fpet-ft, -t 


fpei(e) 


ftie 


fptee 


gefot'en 


spit 


ftonnen 


fptnrt-ft, -t 


fpinn(e) 


fpamt 


fpbrtrte 3 


gefponnen 


spin 


jplct^cn 


fpMJ3-(ef)t, -t 


fpletfj(e) 


im 


jp till e 


gefttfiffen 


split 


tyred) en 


fpritt>ft, -t 


fprtd) 


fprad) 


fprSdje 


gefprodjen 


speak 


fprie^en 


fprtcB-(ef)t, -t 


fprtetf(e) 


fordfj 


fproffe 


gefproffen 1 


sprout 


fpringen 


fpring-ft, -t 


fprtng(e) 


fprong 


fprange 


gefprungen 1 


spring 


fie d) en 


fttd)-ft, -t 


frtdj 


ftad) 


ftactje 


geftodjen 


prick 


)tcl)(t)\l 


m-% -t 


m$ 


ftanb 


ftartbe 7 - 


geftanben 


stand 


ftcljleu 


fttef)t-ft, -t 


fticfjl" 


fW 


ftofjte 8 


geftDljten 


steal 


ftcifjen 


fteig-ft, -t 


ftcig(e) 


ftteg 


ftiege 


gefttcgen 1 


climb 


fterben 


ftiro-ft, -t 


fttrS 


ftarb 


ftitrbe 9 


geftoruen 1 


die 


ftieuen ftieb-ft, -t 


ftteb(e) 


ftob 


ftobe 


geftooen 1 


scatter 



1 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 2 Sometimes weak (172,4). 3 Theb represents 
an earlier ii (cf. 199 3 ). 4 OrfdUnor. 5 Or, exclamatory, fie f)(c) ! look! 6 Or 
forme (198 3 ). 7 0r ftihibe (199 3 ). 8 Or ftatUc (199 3 ). 9 See 199 3 . 



THE STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS 



I 99 



Pres. Infin. 


Pres. Indie. 

2, 3 Sing. 


Impv. 
2 Sing. 


Past 
Indie. 


Past 
Sufcjv. 


Past 
Partic. 


Meaning 


fta^cit 


ftoB-(ef)t, -t 


ftoB(e) 


« 


ftiefse 


gefto^en 


push 


ftretdjen 


ftretd)-ft, -t 


ftretd)(e) 


find) 


ftxtcfje 


geftrttfjeit 


stroke 


ftretten 


ftreit-eft, -et 


[treit(e) 


ftrttt 


frritte 


gefiritten 


strive 


iragen 


rrSg-ft, -t 


rrag(e) 


triig 


tritge 


getragcit 


carry 


ireffen 


rriff-ft, -t 


trtff 


traf 


trfife 


geireffen 


hit 


treiben 


freib-ft, -t 


treib(e) 


trieb 


trieb e 


getrteben 


drive 


rreten 


trttt-ft, trttt 


trftt 


trat 


irate 


getreten 1 


step 


triefen 


trtef-ft, -t 


trtef(e) 


troff 2 


rroffe 2 


getroffen 2 


drip 


trinfen 


trtnf-ft, -t 


trmf(e) 


tran! 


tranfe 


getrmtfen 


drink 


triigen 


trug-ft, -t 


trug(e) 


trbg 


trBge 


getrogen 


deceive 


trot 


tit-ft, -t 


tit(e) 


m 


iate 


getan 


do 


oerber= 

ben 
berbrie= 


berbirb-ft, -t 


berbtrb 2 


berbarb 2 


berbiirbe 3 


berborben 2 


spoil 


berbrtefj- 


berbrie= 


bcrbrof? 


bexbroffe 


bcrbroffen 


vex 


\vx 


W, -t 


1(e) 










bergcfjen 


bergtjy-eft, 4 -t 


bergifj 


bergaf? 


bexgftfje. 


bergeffen 


forget 


tocrlieren 


berlier-ft, -t 


berlter(e) 


berlbr 


berlore 


tier lor en 


lose 


nmdjfeu 


toad)f-(ef)t, -t 


toacfife 5 


\vM)$ 


toucfjfe 


gettJodjfen 1 


grow 


miigen 


hmg-ft, -t 


toag(e) 


tobg 2 


totfge 2 


gewbgen 2 


weigh 


maftfiett 


toafcb-(e)ft, -t 


toafct)(e) 


ttmfd) 


toufdje 


getoafrijcn 


wash 


toeben 


toeb-ft, -t 


toeb(e) 


tobb 2 


toobe 2 


gemoben 2 


weave 


metdjen 


toetcfj-ft, -* 


toetcf)(e) 


U5td) 


toidje 


gefotdjen 1 


yield 


tueifen 


toeif-(ef)t, -t 


toete 6 


ttrieS 


toiefe 


geintefen 


si WW 


toenben 


toenb-eft, -et 


toenbe 


wanbte 2 


to en bete 


gemanbt 2 


turn 


toerben 


totrb-ft, -t 


mir 6 


ttmrb 


toiirbe 3 


geworben 


site 


ttJerbcn 


tolr-ft, toirb 


toerbe 


ttiiirbe 7 


toiixbe 


gembrben 1 


become 


merfen 


tottf-ft, -t 


totrf 


ttwrf 


toiirfe 3 


gemorfen 


throw 


nriegen 


toteg-ft, -t 


toieg(e) 


tobg 


tooge 


getobgen 


weigh 


ttrinben 


totnb-eft, -et 


toinbe 


tuanb 


toartbe 


gemuuben 


wind 


ttrifjen 


toeifs-t, tnetB 


totfi'e 


nutate 


ttmfjte 


getting 


know 


ttjollen 


britC-ft, toill 


tootle 


ttiolite 


too ((te 


Qttvoiit 


will 


jeifien 


8et$-fc -t 


3etfj(e) 


Stefj- 


Stefje 


geate^en 


accuse 


Steven 


8fe$-ft -t 


5te^(e) 


500 


5oge 


gejbgen 


draw 


3h>ingen 


gtohtg-ft, -t 


atotng(e) 


gttmng 


gtoange 


gcjmungen 


force 



1 Inflected with feitt (30, 1). 2 Sometimes weak (172, 4). 

3 or it distinguishes the form from the present. 4 Or bergifi-t. 

5 Or ttmdjs. 6 0r toeife. 7 Or marb (24, 3). 



200 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

THE MOOD AUXILIARIES AND Sttffett (78, 80/147,7, 148, 186) 

The forms of the present indicative of the mood auxiliaries (78, 2, 
186) and of luiffeu (82, 2, 191,3) are old forms of a strong past indicative 
(28, 1), and are called praeteritopraesentia, past presents. The principal 
parts of biirfen, for example, were originally biirfett, barf, biirfen (without 
ge, 80, 1 ; cf. 28, 1). For faff en, see 202, 3. The following is a synopsis 
of fonnen with an infinitive (80, 1): 

1. er faun geljen, he can (is able to) go; er fann gegangen fetn, he can 

have gone. 

2. er lountc geljen, he could (= was able to) goj cf . er f bnnre gcfyen, 

he could (= would now be able to) go. 

3. er ttrirb gcf)en fonnen, he will be able to go. 

4. er fjat geijcn fbnucu (not gefonnt, 80, 1), he was able to go. 

5. er fjatte gel)eu fonnctt (80, i),he had been able to go. 

6. er mirb tjaucn geljen fonnen, he will have been able to go. 

7. er roiirbe gei)cn fonncu, he would be able to go. 

8. er niiirbe Ija&en geljen fonnen (such awkward expressions are avoided 

by using the pluperfect subjunctive: er I)atte geljen fonnen), he 
could have gone (= would have been able to go) ; cf . er fottttte 
gegangen fetn, he could have gone (= was able to have gone). 

biirfen, burfte, gebnrft, may, be per?nitted, of possibility determined 
by others; hence, usually expressing permission ox prohibition : as, 

1. barf id) (or er) nidjt fommcn? may /(or he) not come? 

2. bn barf ft itjnt alle§ fagcn, you may tell him everything. 

3. $tnber biirfett md)t afte3 fjarett, children must not hear everything. 

4. <Sie biirfen (= braudjen, need) nnr f (tngefn, you 7ieed only ring. 

5. biirftc er Wof)l fycute gef)Ctt? might he perhaps go to-day? 

6. toeU er Ijarte geljen biirfen (80, 3), because he would have been 

allowed to go. 

fonnen, fonnte, gefonnt, can, be able, of ability; then often of pos- 
sibility (fonnen in the sense of biirfen, be perjnitted, is often found, but 
should be used with caution; 81, 1): as, 

1. er faun ntrfjt (cfen, he tan?iot (is not able to) read. 

2. id) fann fciu £cutfd) (79, 1), I know no German. 



THE MOOD AUXILIARIES 201 

3. er fattu e3 getau Jjabctt, he can (is able to) have done it. 

4. ita$ fattu (or mag; see miigeu, 201, 1) fetu, that may be. 

5. er fottttte ftrfj trrctt, he was possibly mistaken. 

6. bu fauuft jefct f)eretu (79, t), you may now come in. 

7. fatm idj uid)t fjitteitt? bu fauuft e§ ttic^t (79, 1), may I not go in? you 

may (or, more commonly, can) not. 1 

8. er ttrirb fjter ttid)t bleibeu fijtmett, &? w/// not be able to stay here. 

S0Z5gett f Utodjte, gemodjt, may, like, of possibility determined by the I 
speaker; hence, shading into acquiescence, likelihood, or inclination: as, 

1. ba§ mag (or faun; see fonueu, 200, 3) fern, that may be. 

2. er mag tttn, ttm3 er ttritf, he may do what he chooses. 

3. bit magft au3gef)ett f you may go out. 

4. fie mijgett ttad) fa arm fettt, let them be never so poor. 

5. mug eft bit gtfttftid) fcitt! may you be happy ! (Cf. 98, 3) 

6. idj mag ttttfjt ttadj ^aufc (79, 1), I do not want to go home. 

7. fie mag bid) feljr gertt, she likes you very much. 

{gertt (57, 1) ] f should like to -1 

tteucr \ fifciuett, / I had rather I stay. 

am (tc&ftcu J [ should like best to) 

9. c§ mb'djte bod) luofjl aeffer feitt, it would doubtless be better. 

SDtitffett, mtt^te, gemttfjt, must, have to, of necessity or compulsion: as, 2 

1. nm* miiffctt ar'octtcu, we must work. 

2. id) mttfjtc ladjen, I had to laugh. 

3. er tmtft fort (79, 1), he must be off. 

4. bu tttttfft fycraitsS (79, i),you must come out. 

5. er mirb gefjett mitffen, he will have to go. 

6. 8ie tjattett fadjen mitffen (80, 1), you would have had to laugh. 

7. er mit£ reidj feitt, he must be rich. 

8. ba§ mit§ utt'augcucfjm feitt, that ?nust be disagreeable. 

9. bu mitfjteft gut gcgeit if)tt fein, you ought to be good to him. 

10. e§ tat mir teib, ba$ fagett §u muff en, / was sorry to have to say 

that. 

1 1 . er muf?te gufrte'beu feitt, he had to be conteiit. 

x Can should not be used for may except with a negative to express a 
refusal. 



X 



202 A GERMAN GRAMMAR 

Solicit, folltc, gcfollt, shall, ought, of necessity determined by others; 
hence, of moral obligation or duty, destination, shading into mere report: 
as, 

i. bit follft itidjt tbtcn, thou shalt not kill. 

2. bit jolltcft tit bie Sdjitlc gcf)cn, it was your duty to go to school. 

3. 10 cr foil bn3 tun? who shall do that ? 

4. ioa^ foil id) (or cr) tun ? what am I (or is he) to do? 

5. hu fottft ftbltig fcilt, you shall be king. 

6. ttJa£ fottcn bicfc £rancn? what mean these teats? 

7. id) fottte ipast subjv.) e3 tun, I ought to do it. 

8. bu Ijattcft c§ tltlt fottcn (80, i),you ought to have done it. 

9. e§ fottte (= ttntrbe, 151,3) ntir Icib tun, I should be sorry. 

10. er foC bort fcin, he is said to be there. 

11. fie fott if)tt gcfcljctt Ijaocit, she is said to have seen him. 

Swollen, mottte, gemottt, will, wish, am going to, of necessity deter- 
mined by the speaker; hence, of intention, wish, shading to allegation 
(mean, assert, pretend) : as, 

1. id) mitt fommcn, after id) barf t§ nid)t, / want to come, but I cannot. 

2. maun ttrittft bit fort? when do you want to go? (79, 1) 

3. ma£ mottctt mir fagcit? what are we going to say? 

4. id) tootttc eoen fdjret&eit, I was on the point of writing. 

5. er mitt nad) Scrlitt 7 (79, 1), he wants to go to Berlin. 

6. er mitt, bit follft fingett, he wants you to sing. 

7. bie &nt) mitt motjl feinc 9)iilrf| rjeben "? the cow won't give any milk, 

will she ? 

8. er mitt C§ gcfltltbeit fjafcen, he declares he has found it. 

Saffcn, (te$, gctaffcn (80,2, 106,4), let, cause to: as, 

1. er fonnte bie Hugen nicrjt oon tfjr laffen, he could not keep his eyes 

from her. 

2. laf? if)it nur lomiiteit! just let him co?7ie! lafyt un§ gci)en! let us go?- 

3. id) laffc ntir eittcn $orf oott ifjm ntadjen, / am having a coat made 

by him (106, 4). 
5. er Itifjt fid) oittctt, he waits to be asked. 

1 When taff en has the object Utt§, us, its familiar imperative is generally 
plural, even in addressing only one person, the speaker including himself in 
the address. 



THE PREPOSITIONS IN VERSE 



203 



THE PREPOSITIONS IN VERSE (84, 



.9°) 



With c: Hnraeit, mittelS, fraft unb toafjrenb, 

Saut, bermoge, ungead)tet, 
£)6erf)at6 unb unterljalb, 
gnnerfjalb unb aufeerljatb, 
SHeSfelt, j enfeit, Ijalber, toegen, 
©tatt; .and) lang§, gufolge, trot* 
(Steven mit bem (Sent tit) 
£)ber auf bie forage „23effen?", 
SDod) ift Ijier ntc^t §u bergeffen, 
Soft bet biefen lefcten bret 
2lud) ber ®atib ridjtig jet. 

With d.: Wlit, nad), nSdjft, nebft, famt, gegeniiber, 

S5ei, binnen, f e it, Don, gu, guroiber 
Unb ferner aitfjer, au§, entgegen 
©djreib immer mit bem 3) a tit) nieber. 

With^.: Surd) bicf) tft bie SSelt mir fd)on, 

Cfjne bid) nutrb' id) fie ^ off en, 
giir bid) (eb r id) gang attein, 
Urn bid) mitt id) gem erblaffen; 
28 i ber bid) foil fein SBerleumber 
ttngeftraft fidj je bergefm, 
©eg en bicf) fein $einb ftd) raaffnen, 
$dj mitt bit gur ©eite ftefjn. 

Or, Surd), fitr, ofjne, um unb tniber, 
©on ber, gegen fe&e atte 
gmmer mit bem bier ten f$atte. 



With d. or a.: SSittft bu Slntroort auf „2Bo$in?", 
©eij' an, auf, Winter, neben, in, 
liber, unter, bor unb gmifdjen 
^turner mit bem bier ten f^atte; 
SOftt bem britten fe£' fie fo, 
Saf} fie antra orten auf „53o?". 



204 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



GRIMM'S LAW 



Most European languages are related, or cognate, for they have the 
same origin. Our ancestors, coming from Asia, spread over Europe. 
Climate and other conditions changed the people and their language. The 
law governing the changes of the consonants called mutes was discovered 
by the famous German philologist Jacob Grimm. 

To find the English cognate of a German mute, use the figures below. 
Begin with the mute, and follow the arrow to the next letter :i 

K-mutes 4 






P-mutes 2 




T-mutes 3 


/ p \ 




r*\ 


ph b 




th d 

* — «t 


P-mutes • 


P 

b 


( bopbel 
j ^olfter 

j 2Sei6 


becon 

1 




f 


( fjclfen 
j 3cliiaf 


r • 




t 


(Sat 
J Xiir 


) 
s 


T-mutes < 


d 


j banfcn 
j lob 


i " 




s 


( SSaffer 
( §ebn 


j 




k 


( Snide 
\ §ecfe 


i " 


K-mutes < 


g 

ch 


( cieftem 
I Sag 
( brecfien 
} Such 


1 ■ 
1 ■ 



th 




water 
ten 

( b?'idge 
\ hedge 
( yesterday 

\ d a y 

break 
book 



1 In German there are many irregularities. Because of earlier changes, 
or the accent, or the proximity of other consonants, the mutes are often 
unchanged. 2 Or labials (lip consonants). 

3 Or dentals or Unguals (teeth and tongue consonants). 

4 Or gutturals or palatals (throat or palate consonants). 
5 f for ph. G s (for th) = §, ff, fj, <j, or 3. 7 y for ch. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



ft&, off, away 

I'&eub, ber, I'benbe, 
Jjeute a&ettb, to-night 

n / benb§ f evenings, in the evening 

a'ber, but, however (when it stands 
after one or more words), ioo 

a&'fafjrett, filfjr ab', ift ab'gefafjren, 
start. 72, 3 

a6 / ge^(e)n, gfng ab', ift ab'gegangen, 
start, go 

ali'frijret&ett, fcf}rie6 ab', ab / gejcf)rie' 
ben, copy (write off) 

^Ib'fttfit, bte, 5(b / ftd)ten, view, pur- 
pose (end looked at) 

ad), oh 

atf)t f eight: adjt £age, # week 

all, all. See atfer, 68 

aflettt 7 , alone j zov{}.,yet, still. 100 

alFemaf, #/ #// /zV^j 

att(er), afl(e), aU(e§), #//.- atfe Xage, 
eve?y day j afle3, everythi?tg, 
everybody. 68, 1, 3, 4 

aflerlte&ft', most charming 55* 

al3, w/^^ (102), <xy, //^/z 1104): 
at£ bb r at§ menu, at§, «j 2/(104) ; 
benn al§ (al£ ai§), than as (105 1 ) ; 
after nie'manb and similar nega- 
tives, but (cf. 53, 1) 

al'fd, so, therefore (never " also ") 

alt, old : ber 21(te, the old man; 
bte 3l(te, the old woman j gtnei 
9)lo / nat(e) alt r ^wo months old 
f (cf. 59, 1). 52,2,54,2,3 

am = an bent, 10,2 

(in, prep, with d. or a., 0/z (beside), 
az*, <^, /<?. 90, 128, 5 



an'berS, otherwise, else. 70, 3 
att'bertfjaffi, 0«<? tf;z<^ /^^ (half 

of the second). 60, 4 
att'brer, 0/^r. 70 
^n'fang, ber, 2tn 7 fange, beginning: 

Stttfattg 9)Jai, at the beginning of 

May. 130,4 
aVfangen, ftng an 7 , aVgefangen, be- . 

£?>z (take hold of). 72, 3 
aVgeneljm, agreeable. 128, 1 
an'fyalten, f;telt an 7 , aVgefjatten, 

hold to, stop. 72, 3 
aVfamnten, tarn an', ift dVgefimt* 

men, arrive 
5tnna, bte, Anna. 171,2 
ait3 = an ba3. 10, 2 
ait'ftatt or ftatt, prep, with g., in- 
stead of 84, 1 
3lnt / tt»ort f bte, Sint'roorten, answer, 

gender irregular, 134, 3 
aut'toortett, ant'roorteie, geanfwor* 

tet, answer 
aVjieljett, sog an 7 , aVgejogen, dte-w 

(draw on) 
2tyfe(, ber, #pfef, 0^/*. 155, 3 
Styrtf', ber, 4^rz7. 171,3 
9(r / 6eit, bte, 2(i v beiten, work 
ar'&citen, ar'beitete, gear'beitet, work 
arger, worse. 56, 1 
2trm, ber, Sfrme, arm. 1 ^6, 3 
arm, poor (52, 2) ; ber 2(rme, /^ 

^<?<?r ;/z<2/z (54, 2) 
Str'mitt, bte, poverty 
Slrgt, ber, Strgte, physician, doctor 
at'men, at'mete, geat'met, breathe: 

Stamen, ba§, breathing 



205 



and) 



206 



bet 






aucf) f also, too 

atif, prep, with d. or a., on (upon), 

up at, up to (90, 1), for (of 

future time, 130, 71: nuf . . . 

$tt up to, toward \ [28, 51 
Suf'gabe, btc f Sluf'gaben, lesson 
auf'gclKc)n, gfttg auf , iff aufgegatts 

gen, m*, of the sun 
auf'ljebcn, tjob auf, auf'geljoben, lift 

up 
auf' fommcit, tarn nuf 7 , tft auf'gefonts 

men, #/7.y<?, thrive 
ouf'madjen, mnd)te auf, aufgemadjt, 

open 
^lufmerffamfcit, bte, attention 
auf' fpringen, fprnng nuf 7 , ift nuf'ge= 

fprungen, sprang tip 
auf / fte^(c)n f ftattb nuf 7 , ift nuf'ge= 

ftnnben, rise, get up, of people : 

2faf ftefjen, ba^ f rising, of people 
Stitf fteUctt, ba§, setting up, placing 
aufuiecfcn, roecfte nup, nufgetuecft, 

wake somebody up 
9iuge, ba3, Slugen, eye. 42, 4 
^lu'gettbittf, ber, moment (wink of 

an eye) 
SlugttfK, ber, A ugust. 171,3 
au3, prep, with d., out ofof 86 
auS'atmtn, ntmete au§', nuS'gentmet, 

breathe out 
auS'gel^ejn, gmg nttc/, ift nu§'ge= 

gnugen, go out. 30, 1 
au£'(affen, fieft aits', au3'geln[fen, 

/<?#?/<? <?&/, <?#&//. 72, 3 

auS'itefjuten, uafjut au§ / , au§'ge= 
110 mm en, /#£<? 02//, except. 72, 3 

ausf'feijen, fnf) nus', aus'gefefyen, /#<?/£, 
appear. 72, 3 

2lu3'fid)t, bte, 2lus'fid)ten, wi?w (out- 
look) 

auS'ftriimett, stream out, escape 



auS'ttJCitbtg, £y te/-/ (turn inside 
out) 

nufjcr, prep, with D., outside, beside, 
besides. 86 

Oliver, outer: 2ht$ere(&), ba#, out- 
ward appearance, exterior 154.21 

au'ftcrfjalb, prep, with g., outside 
of 84, 3 

ait'fjicrft, extremely. 56, 1 

au^'stcfjen, §og au§', aus'gejogen, 
ujidress (draw out) 



batfen, bit!, gebnefen, £a£i. 72, 3 

$af)it'ljof, ber, 23nf)n'bi5fe, station 

hath, soon. 56, 1 

fatten, ber, S3nlfen, beam, timber 

batten, baute, gebnut, build 

Matter, ber, SBauern, peasant. 42, 4 

SBaunt, ber, SSaume, *m? 

be=, &?-, round, over. 94 

beant'roorten, bennt'nmrtete, bennt's 

tuortet, answer, transitive 
befelpten, befall', befolj'ien, with d. 

and A., command a person a 

thing. 72, 3 
befin'ben, befnnb', befun'ben, reflex., 

find (find the surroundings of), 

feel. 18, 3, 94 
befol'gen, befolg / te, befofgt 7 , follow 

closely, observe. 94 
begeg'uen, begeg'nete, tft begeg'net, 

with d., meet 
begiu / itcu f begantt', begon nen, begin, 

commence 
bcfyal'teu, bebtctt', bdjaFten, keep 
bctjau'bcln, befym'belte, bcrjau / bclt T 

handle, treat 
bet, prep, with d., at, near, with, at 

the house of, by (not of agency). 86 



betfceS 



207 



6S3 



bct'be3, both, two. 68 

betm = bet bent. 10, 2 

SBeitt, ba3 f Seine, &w*, /<?£• 

bet^en, btf$, gebtffen, bite 

befamtt', acquainted: S3efatttt / te(t , ) r 

ber f acquaintance (54, 2) 
befannt'ltd), as everybody knows 
Serg, ber, Serge, mountain 
Serltn', ba3, Berlin 
Sertt'ner, of Berlin. 48, 3, 4 
berftljmt', famous 
SSeftfjaf'fettfjett, bie, Sefdjaf'fenljeitett, 

quality, condition 
befdjcnfen, beftfjenf'te, befdjenft', 

present 
befdjnrbtgen, beftfntl'btgte, befdjuFs 

bigt, accuse 
befe'ljen, befafy', befe'fjen, examine 

(look at all round). 72,3,94 ■ 
beftlf en, befajs / f bejeffen, possess (sit 

round or over). 94 
bcfoit'bcr^, especially 
bcfurettyen, bejpvad/, bejprodj'en, 

/^/^ about, discuss. 94 
beffcr, better, am beften, foj/. 54, 1 
bcpfern, befjerte, gebeffert, improve 
Sefianb'tctl, ber, Seftanb'tetle, */*- 

ment, part 
bcfte / ^(c)n f beftanb', beft&Vben: be= 

fte'ljen aa3 (d.), consist of; be= 

fte'ljen in (D.), consist in 
beften^, very much. 56, 3, 4 
Sefte(3), %&$, best. 54, 2 
beftra'fen, beftraf'te, btftxaft', punish 
SJefndj', ber, Sefit'clje, z/w# 
befiVdjen, bejild/te, bejucbt', visit 

(search round for). 94 
Seto'nnng, bte, Seto'mmgen, accent, 



npJi 



emp /lasts 



betrit'gcn, betrog', rjetro / gert f deceive 
Rett, ba§, Seitcn, bed. 42, 4 



bet'teln, bet'telte, gebeftelt, beg 

Settler, ber, Settler, beggar 

Set'titd), ba3, Set'rudjer, sheet. 
136,2 

Sentet, ber, Seutel, purse 

beoor 7 , conj., before. 102 

beroe'gctt, beroog', betno'gen, induce 

benrir'ten, betuir'tete, beroir'tet, enter- 
tain. 94 

bemo^nen, betDofm'te, beroofmf, in- 
habit, live in. 94 

btegen, bog, gebogen, bend 

$$itx / f)an§, bc§, Sier/^aufer, inn 

bteten, bot, geboten, offer 

Stlb, i*a§ f Stlber, picture 

but, am. 6 

btnben, banb, gebunben, bind 

btnnen, prep, with d., within. 86, 2 

bt3, prep, with A., until, as far as, 
(88); conj., (fo tange* ♦ . ,) bt3, 
until (102) 

btfjdjcn, t>a§, bit. 70 

bttte, please ( = id) bttte, / beg) 

bitten, bat, gebeten, ash, beg: bitten 
nnt (a.), ask for 

Sla'febalg, ber, Sla'febalge, bellows 

blafcn, bites, geblafen, blow. 72, 3 

blaft, pale 

Slatt, M§, flatter, leaf 

f&iatt'pfiaiitfr bte, Slatt^flan^en,/^- 
liage plant 

bfan, blue. 52, 1 

btetben, blteb, ift geblteben, remain, 
stay. 112 

bltnb, blind. 88, 4 

bloji f merely, simply 

Slftmc, bte, ^SiumtYi, flower 

Stftt, U§, blood 

Sonn, ba§, Bonn, a city 

Sih'fc, bte, Sorjen, purse 

bM or bBfe, wicked,. angry 



"**OtC 



208 



bit 






it> 5 1 c , bcr, Soten, messenger 
brnteit, brict, gebraten, r<ww/. 72, 3 
brnitdicn, braudjte, gebraurfjt, need 
br$djen, bradj, ge6rod)en, break. 72,3 
brcmten, brannte, gebrannt, burn. 

82, 1 
^ricf, bcr, SBriefe, /<?//V?r 
brtitiKit, bradjte, gebradjt, bring, 

take. 82, 2 
$rot, bo*, SBrote, £;r^ 
SBraber, bcr, ^viiber, brother. 1 55, 3 
SJiidj, baci, S -Bud)cr, &ra£ 
Gutter, t»ie f footer 

S) 

b. f). ( = btt3 f)cif?t), that is 

ba f there, then j when (170, 3); as, 

since, seeing that (104) 
£arf), ba£, Xiidier, roof 
babnrd)' ', thereby {through this, 

through that, etc., 87, 1) 
bafjeV, consequently, so 
batjin'tcr, behind it, etc. 87, 1 
bamtt', with it, with them (87 , 1) ; 

j<9 //W, //W, in purpose clauses 

(104) 
bancd)', of (after) zV, of them. 87, 1 
£anf, bcr, thanks 
banfen, banfte, gebanft, with d., 

thank: (id)) banfc, (7) thankyou 
b an! ' en£ it) err, meritorious 
bann, a^« 

bn(r)=, ///£';-£. 74, 5, 87, 1 (cf. 92, 1) 
barring #/* or #/ (beside) z'/or M^wz, 

£y it, etc. 87, 1 
bnrauf, on (upon) it or them (87, 1), 

thereupon 
barau^', #zz/ <?/"# or them. 87, 1 
barf, may. 78, 80, 200 
baring in it, in this. 87, 1 



bnrit'bcr, over it. at it. 87, 1 
bnji, conj., //W. 104, 1 
bntrin', of it, of them. 87, 1 
bn:,H', to #, to them. 87, 1 
^etfc, bie, 3)edEcn, covering, ceiling 
bctit, beine, bein, thy, your. 20 
betner, beine, beine§, thine, yours 

(62) : ba3 £einc, w/W z> yours 

(54, 2) 
bcnf'cit, bad)tc, gebadit, //*/>/£ (82, 2): 

benfen an (a.), //m«£ 0// benfen 

t»dn (d.), have an opinion of 
benn, conj., y»r (iooj; adv., ///£//, 

_^ray (100, 3) 
ber, bie, ba§, />&?. 10, 20, 2, 39, 1 
ber, bie, ba§, /fta/. 64, 65, 1 
ber, bie, bas, that, who, which. 66 
beVjemge, bie'jenige, bffs'jenige, 

that. 64, 170, 3 
berfefbe, biefel'be, bagfet'be, ///*? 

same. 64 
be^fjalb', 071 that account 
beft'o, j<? much, all. See je, 102 
bcu'ten, beu / tete, gebeu'tet, point, 

indicate 
bentfd), German: $eutfdje(r), ber, 

German (54, 2) 
Sentfdjlanb, ba§, Germany 
SJegem'ticr, ber, December. 171,3 
£td)tcr f ber, ©idjter, ^W/ 
^teb, ber, £te6e, thief 
btcnen, biente, gebient, with d., serve 
Wiener, bcr, 3)iener, servant 
Qieud'tfia,, ber, Tuesday. 171,3 
btc3, this. 65, 1 
bicfer, biefe, btefeS or bieS, this, the 

latter. 8, 64 
btc$'fett(S), prep, with g., on this 

side of. 84 
$ing, baS, Singe, //zz'flg-. 159 2 
btr, bid), thou, you. 16 



fcotf) 



209 



etfreuett 



borfj, still, nevertheless, pray. 33,1 

Softer, ber, ©otto'rett, doctor. 42, 4 

^Ott'tter^tag, ber, Thursday. 171,3 

S)orf, ba§, S)i3rfer, village 

bort, //zm? 

bret, ///r#?. 58, 2 

brei'fatf), threefold. 58, 6 

2>re3bett, ba3, Dresden 

bu, thou, you. 16 

buntm, stupid. 52, 2 

^unFelljeit, bie, darkiiess 

burcf), prep, with a., through, by (88) ; 
adv., through (88, 2) 

burtfj'brittgettb, piercing (of the 
cold), soaking (of rain) 

burdjbrinc^enb, piercing, shrill 

burdj'fjattett, fiteb buret) 7 , burch'ges 
ftauen, <r?/^ (hew) through 

bitrfen, bitrfte, geburft, ?/ztfy, be per- 
mitted. 78, 80, 200 

$>ttrft, ber, A&zVj/ 

bitr'ftett, biir x ftete, gebiir'ftet, impers., 
be thirsty. 16, 5, 144, 2 

burftig, thirsty 



efiett, y«j/ 
ebel, noble. 52, 1 
e'fje, conj., before. 102 
e'fjer, adv., before, sooner. 56, 1 
@fjre r bte, Gftren, honor 
@t, ba§ f GsHer, ^ r ^ 
eigen, tfsew. 20 2 
©tie, btc, haste 

etlett, etlte, ijt geeilt, hurry, hasten 
eitt, m£?. 92, 1 

cut, eirte, em, a, an (20); 0/^(58, 3) 
enter, eine, em(e)e, 0//*. 68, 1, 2 
eiucm'ber, 07ie another ; each other. 
18,2 



ettt'atmett, at'mete etn / , ein'gearmet, 
breathe in 

eitt / bfittgttrf), impressive, forcible 

ei'tttger, et'nige, ei'nige^, some, jo, 1, 
7h 1 

eht'Iabcn, lub ein', ein'gelaben, m- 
*z/zV<?. 72, 3 

ettt'tttal, once (one time). 58, 6 

ettttttaF, once on a time, so?ne day; 
just, only, pray 

ettt paaY, several. 70 

ein'faugett, jog em', em'gefogen, 
suck in 

eitt^iefjen, gog em', em'gegogen, 
draw in; ?nove (30, 1) 

©t§, ba3, zV* 

©U v fa&Ctl), bie, Elizabeth. 171,2 

©ntttta, bic f Emma. 171,2 

empfefj'Ien, empfafiF, empfof/(en, 
reconwiend, commend. 72, 3 

emyor', ?//. 92,1 

Ghtbe, ba§ r (Enben, <?//^. 42, 4, 130, 4 

eitblid), #/ last 

Cllt-f over against. 94 

entbetf'en, entbecFte, entbecft 7 , dis- 
cover. 94 

etttge'gett, prep, with d., contrary 
to, generally following the dative. 
86 

etttfjal'ten, etttljielt', entfjal'ten, con- 
tain. 72, 3 

ettt'ttieber ♦ ♦ ♦ o'ber, either .. .or. 1 00 

er, fie, e§, he, she, it. 16, 87, 1, 
169,1 

er=, from inside out. 94 

(Srbe, bte, (Srben, earth, ground. 41 * 

erfor'bern, erfor'berte, erfor'bert, re- 
quire 

crfrcu'ett, erfreu'te, erfreut 7 , delight : 
reflex., fid) be3 £ebett§ erfrett'en, 
enjoy life. 18, 3 



crfjaltcn 2 ] 

crljai'tcn, cvliielt', evtial'ten, keep, 

maintain, receive. ~i. 3 
(yrlinrtititfl, bic, preservation 
criit'ncrn, erin'nerte, erin'nert, re- 
mind 
crfiii'tcu, erfal'tele, erfaTtet, reflex., 

catch cold. 1 8, 3 
crflim'mcn, erflomm', erflom'men, 

elimb. ascend 
erfnu'ben, crlaub'te, erlaubt', with 

D., allow, permit 
crfd|ar(cn f erjclialTte (or erfdjofl), er= 

fdjafft 7 (orerftffoFlen),^"^, resound 
erft, first; not until, only (56, 2); 

erft rctf)t, all the mo?-e 
crftatutt', astonished 
erftcity, first. 56,3 
crrot / bcrn, emu'berte, ernn'bert, reply 
e3, it. 16, 17, 1, 87, 1, 169, 1 
gfjett, atf, gegej'jen, eat (72, 3): gu 

cffcil, /<? eat 
et'ttJa^ (colloquial, toa3), jw//<?- 

thi?ig,some, any: fo ettt)a3, j#£>& 

a thing. 70 
ty\tf) t you,yotiselves. 16, 18 
euer, cure, euer, jtfz/r. 20, 3 
eurer, eure, euer§, yours. 62 
(Juro'pa, ba^, Europe 



fafjrcu, fufjr, ift gefaljren, ^0, drive, 

ride. 72, 3 
fatten, ftel, ift gcfaHen, fall. 72,3 
$ ami 7 tie, bte, tfanu'lien, family. 

141,3 
fangcu, fhtg, gefangen, ££/£/*. 72, 3 
fa ft, almost 
fauf f £7.27 

Jyc'bruar, ber, February. 171,3 
$ct)(cr, ber, %lty.tx, fault 



o frcucn 

Tvctb, bav«, J$t\btc, field 

Jycuftcr, baz f ^venucr, window 

fertt(e), far, distant 

fertig, finished, ready 

ftft r fast, firm. 92. 1 

Jycucr, bnc, %tVLtt,fire 

fiubcit, fanb, gefunben,j£«dT; reflex., 

be found 1 106, 41. 112 
finger, ber, finger, finger 
finfter, dark 
$tfd), ber, %\\ti\z, fish 
fifteen, fifdjte, §t\\\&\\, fish 
fytfrfjer, ber, %\\S)tx, fisherman 
ffcijjig, diligent, industrious 
ftiegen, flog, ift geftogen,^ 
ftietjen, fiof], ift geffoljen, ./&£.* fttcfjen 

tor (p.), flee from 
ftiegen, floft, ift geflofien, _/?<?«/ 
ftiiiti, ber, Sfluffe, nwr (fftefjen) 
fotgeu, fotgte, ift gefolgt, with d., 

follow 
fort, 0/2, forward, away, gone 
fort'gefj^u, gtng fort 7 , tft forage* 

gattgen, go away 
fort'fdjitfen, fd)irfte fort', forages 

jdlicft, send away 
fragen, fragte, gefragt, ask a person 

a question. .12, 4, 106, 4, 130, 1 
$ranffurt am Wlmn, ba$ f Frank- 
fort on the Main 
£yraniretdj, ba$, France 
$rau, bic,^rauen, woman. wife. Mrs. 
tfrautciu, $>a$ t #\iiuteui, young lady, 

miss 
ftrci'tag, ber, Friday. 171,3 
$rembc(r), ber, stranger. 54, 2 
freffen, fra|, gefriffen, eat, of animals. 

72,3 
frcucn, freute, gefreut,jW<w:.r*(impers., 

144, 2) ; reflex., be glad, be pleased 

(18,3) 






$reuttb 



(^efdjenJ 



$remtb, ber, $reunbe, friend 
freunblidj, friendly. 88, 4 
$riebridj, ber, Frederick). 171,2 
frieren, fror, gefroren, freeze 
frifdj, fresh, sweet (of butter, milk, 

etc.), healthful 
%x\%,\stx f Fred. 44,3, I7 : > 2 
frof}, ^/^. 5 2 , 1 
friif), ^«r/j/ .* morgen frill), to-morrow 

morning 
frtif)(e)ften3, «/ #^ earliest, not be- 
fore. 56, 3 
^rUfjling, ber, grrii^ltnge, spring. 

171,3 
fiifjtcn, fiifjtte, gefiifilt,/^/. 80, 2, 1 12 
ffiljrcn, ffiljrte, geffiljrt, /*a*f 
^Sfircr, ber, gfi^rer, /^awfe/* 
\\\\\] f five. 58,2 
fiinfte(r), tex, fifth. 167, 1 
fiinfunbsttmn^ig, twenty-five 
fiinfotyn, fifteen 
fiir f prep, with a., for. 88 
fiirrf)ten, fiirdjtete, gefiircfrtet, y£#r/ 

reflex., &? afraid (18, 3) 
ftiif?, ber, ftutfe, _/^.' 3" &% <?» 
foot. 59, 1 



gal», ^^. See ge&en 
©and, bie, ©cirtje, ^rare 
ganj, #//, whole, quite. 51 
gar, ^tt/te : gar uirijt, not at all 
(Garten, ber, (Saxttn, garden. 155,3 
ge=, together. 94 
geba / reit, gebar 7 , gebo'ren, bear 
QkbaVbe, t>a§. Q5e6du / be, building 
geben, gab, gegebert, give. 72, 3, 4, 

©ebir/ge, ba3, ©ebtr'ge, {cJiain of) 
mountains. 94 



ge&a'rett, for«. See gelrn'rett 
©ebidjt', bag, ©ebicb'te, poem 
gebrurft 7 , pressed, printed 
GJefaljr', bie, ©efafj'ren, danger 
gefal'tett, gefiel', gefal'len, with d., 

please 
gefaFiig, with d., pleasing 
gefal'ttgft, if you please. 56, 2, 4 
©efaitft/ttid, ba$ r ©efang'tuffe, jail 
gegen, prep, with a., toward, 

against. 88, i, 4 
gegcnu'ber, prep, with d., facing, 

opposite, generally following the 

dative. 86 
gel)(e)tt, gtng, ift gegangen, go, walk. 

22, 4, 132, 3 
gep'rett, getjBr'te, gefjbrt', with d., 

belong 
®eift, ber, ©etfter, spirit. 158, 4 
Qtefb, bad, ©elber, money 
(SJele'gentjeit, bte, (Me'genfieitett, 

opportunity 
gefing'eu, gelang', ift gehmgen, 

impers. with d., succeed 
gelten, gait, gegotten, be worth : ed 

gilt, with d., it concerns 
(SJemaYbe, ba§ f (SemaTbe, painting 

(malen, paint) 
gcmaf? 7 , prep, with d., according to. 

86, 2 
genau / , exact, exactly, welt 
genie^en, genofj', geno] v jen, enjoy 
genitg', enough. 70, 1 
©eogra^ljie', bie, ©eograplji'en, 

geography 
gera'be, straight, just, exactly 
gern(e), gladly (56, 1): gernJjabett, 

like. 57, 1 
©efanb / te(r) r ber, ambassador. 

54,2 
©efdjenf', ba$ f Oejdjenf'e, present 



gcjdmcbcn 



&eer 



gcirfiric'ben, written. See frfjrcibcn 
gefdjtoei'geu, gefcfarieg', gefcfarie'gen, 

be silent about : flcfri)lUCt r gc bcuu, 

( / ) say nothing about 
©eftdjf, b&£, ^kudVlcw face 
geftcru, yesterday: geftcru ntor= 

gen, yesterday morning; geftcru 

a' I) cub, last night 
gcfunb', healthy, well 
©efunb'fattgregel, bic, @efunb'$eit& 

regeln, rule of health 
gcfunb'faitofcfablirfi, injtirious to 

health 
genrin'nen, getoann', geraon'nen, 

win, gai?i 
gcuiiff', certain, certainly 
gettJor'ben, become. See roerben 
gie^icn, gofe, gegojjen, pour 
<&la&, ba£ f ©Icifer, glass. 59, 1 
glauben, glaubte, gegfaubt, believe, 

think 
gleicf», colloquial for fogteid)', at 

once, immediately 
gteicfan, glid), gegltdjen, with d., be 

like 
glia;nten, glomnt (or glimmte), ge= 

glommen (or geglimmt), gliminer 
®lorfe, bie, QMocfen, bell 
gtittflirf), happy 
©oetfa, ber, Goethe, the greatest of 

the Gennan poets. 3 2 
golbcn, golden 

ttott, ber, ©otter, god, God. 158, 4 
$raf, ber, Gkafen, count. 
gretfen, griff, gegriffen, seize 
$rete (diminutive of ^largare'te), 

bie, Margery: Okct'djen, ba^ r 

Gretchen, Madge. 171, 2 
grofjf great, tall (of people). 54 
©ro^untcr, bcr, (Srojj'&ftter, grand- 
father. 155, 3 



gr.ut, j??w# 

griutbltri), fundamental, thorough 

Qntj_good, well (54, 1): mic geljt f8 
3facn? how are you? banfc, C3 
geljt nur gut, thank you. I am 
well; ct'llMv @Htte£, something 
good 1 54, 2). 88, 4 

(Mtc, bie, goodness 

QJtjmna'ftum, ba£, ©ijtnna'ftett, £K*«- 
nasium, a German training school 
for the university. 42, 3 



£mur, ba§, ^aare, hair 

fallen, tjatte, gef)2bt, fe'<?. 26, 2, 
112, 174 

falD, half. 51, 1, 58, 7, 60, 4 

fat&cuor fattier, prep, with g., in be- 
half of, following the genitive. 84 

fatten, t)ie(t, geljalten, hold, keep: 
f)altett fiir (a.), take to be, regard 
as; gotten Hon (d.), think of. 72 

^jattb, bic, £mnbe, hand 

Apanb'fdjrift, bic, ^jaxtb'fdjriften, 
handwriting, jnanuscript 

fangen, f)tng, gefyingen, hang, intr. 
72, 3 

$an$, ber, fack, diminutive of 
Soijatm', John 

fart, &m£ 52, 2 

fatten, l)ieb, gefyiuen, hew, cut 

^paufc(n), bcr, ^aufen, heap. 155,4 

faufigftcn, am, of ten est. 56, 1 

igau8 f ba£, £>ciufer, house 

$ftu£'frau, bic, Jpaus'fvauen, house- 
wife 

^au^frnucntcfac, bie, ^auS'frauetts 
(efaett, precept for housewives 

faben, bob, gefaben, Jieavc, lift 

.£>c~cr, t;av, Jpecvc, army 



£etbelberg 



213 



Ptfft 



^et'bet&erg, H§, Heidelberg 
Ijeiltg, holy: £eilige(r), ber, saint 

(54, 2) 

Ijcim, /<w/^. 92, 1 

^einrtd), ber, Henry. 171, 2 

^>eilt5, ber, Harry, diminutive of 
^einridj, Henry. 44, 3, 171,2 

Jjeift, /W 

^ctf^ett, fyetf, geljetBen, &/, crater 
(80, 2); be called j mean 

$elb, ber, ^etben, hero 

Jpelfeit, fyiif, gdjolfen, with d., fo#. 
72, 3, 4 , 80,2 

l)er, /^r<?, a separable prefix or suf- 
fix implying motion toward the 
speaker or the writer in his real 
or his assumed position (cf. Ijitt) 

fjeraitf, up here. See fyer 

fytvauS'f out here. See Ijer 

Jjerait^fcrutgett, 6rarf)te fjerau^', f)er= 
aus'gebradjt, ^/-zV^ *?&/ 

^eratt^fommen, fam IjerauS', ift f)er= 
aus'gefmnmen, come out 

;£>er&ft, ber f .Sperbfte, autumn. 171,3 

Ijercut', m //^;r. See Ijer 

Ijereut'fommcn, mm fjerein', ift §er= 
ein'gefommen, ^w//* z>z 

^perr, ber, ^erren, master, lord, gen- 
tleman, Mr. 12, 4, 40, 3 

^eVfteflwng, bie, ^er'ftetfungen, 
restoratio?i 

Ijerffber, over here. See fjer 

Ijerifberfotttmett, fam fjeru'ber, ift 
berll'bergef ommen, come over 

ijeritnt', round, about 

^erftm / ge^(e)n f gmg fjeritm', ift Ijers 
um'gegangett, go rotmd 

Ijeritttt'ttierfett, to arf fjeritm', tjerihn'* 
geroorfen, throw round 

tjertttt'terfatlen, fief fjerun'ter, ift ljer= 
un'tergef alien, fall down. 72,3 



fyertJjjr'&rmgett, fcradjte fjerbor', fjers 

bor'gebradjt, bring forth 
£erg, ba§, foergen, heart. 34 s 
fjeittc, to-day: fjeute ntorgen, ^w- 

-morning; fjeute ttadVmfttifg, Mz> 

afternoon; IjeHte a'bettb, //h> 

evening, to-7iight 
^pejc, bie, §eren, wzM 
t)ier, here 

IjierfjeV, hither, here 
£ilfe, bte, grilfen, ^^, «£/.■ 511 

Jptlfe fommen, come to the aid of 
^ptmmel, ber, pummel, sky, heaven 
fjttt, there, a separable prefix or 

suffix, implying motion from the 

speaker or the writer in his real 

or his assumed position (cf. Ijer) 
tytiumf , up there. See Jjitt 
JjtttttttS', out there. See Ijftt 
Ijuutud'gelK^n, gmg IjfnauS', ift Ijftts 

aus'gegangen, go out 
ffinan&'$itfyn t §og Qmaus', ift Ijtits 

au^'gegogen, »z^z/<? <?#/ 
IjfnburaY, through. 88, 2 
fjttteitt 7 , in there. See fyttt 
I)titettt / fallett, fid fjutein', ift fjmem's 

Qtfaiten, fall in. 72, 3 
f)utettt / gef)(c)tt, g!ng tjmeitt', ift Ijfois 

ein'gegangen, go in 
f)ttt / fUl)rett, fSIjrte tjftt', Ijfti'gefSfjrt, 

lead away. See f)tit 
^tnge / geu f tfzz //z£ contrary 
Ijitt'ter, prep, with d. or a., be- 

hijid. 90 
Jjin'terlaffen, liefc fjitt'ter, fjin'terge* 

laffen, leave behind. 72, 3 
tjtttii'ber, over there. See Ijm 
^)irt(e), ber, £irten, herdsman, 

shepherd 
prf), high. 54, 1, 542 
Pttjft, highly. 56,1,2 



$>dd)fte!t$ 



214 



Sfatfet 



JiBrfi 'ftcnS, at most, at bi st. 5 6,3,4 

^of, bcr, Mote, courtyard, farm, 
court 

Jjoffcn, iioffto, getjofft, ^'A 

IjBfiid), courtly, polite (.s>of). 88,4 

^c>off / niinfl f bic, $offmmgen, /w/^ 

fyolcu, lioltc, geljott,./^^ 

$ol§, bite, vuH^ev, wood 

Ijoljmt, wooden 

^ol^fjaucr, bcr, ftol/fiauer, wood- 
cutter 

^pomcV, ber, Homer, the world's 
greatest poet. 171,2 

Ijbrett, prle, gefyBrt, /z<?#r (80, 2, 
112): IjBrcn auf (a.), listen to 

&ttgef, ber, &3get, ^7/ 

^mnb, ber, £unbe, dog. 156, 3 

hunger, ber f hunger: 4punger3 
ftcrbctt, die of hunger 

ljung'eru, Ijtmg'erte, gefntng'ert, hun- 
ger: Ijimgeru uadj (d.), hunger 
for. i 7 i_ 

font, ber, £>iite, >to 

£iirte, bte, £mtten, hut 



id), I. 16 

tf)m, tfjn, him. 16 

tf)r, ye, you. 1 6 

tfjr, /z^r, M*zV. 20 

3>f|r, S^c, £j$t, j*?^. 20 

tfjrcr, tfyre, it)re§, /z<?r.r, theirs. 62 

Sfyrcr, 3^ 3»^ r ^/ yours. 62 

^Qredgletdjen, jw' £*W, people 

like you 
^firernJegen, on your account. 84, 2 
tm = tn bent, ?» ///<?. 10, 2 
tmntcr, always; often with the 

comparative, 55 s 
tit, prep, with d. or a., in, into. 9 



tltbent' with a verb, — ing. 102, 104 

inner, interior. 54, 1 

iit'ucrfyalb, prep, with g., inside 
84,3 

fn3 = ut btiS, into the. 10,2 

tntcreffant', interesting 

tlt'lUCUbtg, inwardly, inside 

tr'gcubeiucr, h/genbeine, ir'gertb- 
ein(e)<?, any at all. 1 70, 4 

trrctt, irrte, gcirrt, reflex., be mis- 
taken. 18, 3 



\a, yes 

^afjr, baS, ^q.\)xz, year 
^an'wx, fox, January. 171,3 
jawdfjf , yes indeed 
^a / lt)ort, bo^, consent (yes-word^ 
je, ever: je . . . bc|Vo (or itm fo), 
je ♦ ♦ ♦ je, the . . . the, with com- 
paratives. 102, 1, 3 
jeber, jebe, jebe§, every. 8, 68 
jc'bermann, everybody. 68 
je'muub, somebody, anybody. 68 
jetter, jene, jenes, //W. 8, 64, 65, 1 
jeu / fcit(^), prep, with g., (on) the 

other side of. 84, 1 
jetjr, ;wz£/.- oott jefct ait, from now on 
ftofyatm', bcr, John. 171, 2 
^u'gcnb, bte, youth 
%\\'\\, bcr, July. 171,3 
jltttg, young. 52,2 
^mtge, bcr, boy. 40, 2 
jitngft, recently. 56, 2, 4 
StVnt, bcr, June. 171,3 



ftaf'fee, bcr, ^^/^ 

^aifcr, ber, ftaifev, emperor 



fait 



215 



la$ 



fait, cold. 52, 2 

&ameraV, ber, £amera / bett, comrade 
hammer, bte, Sammern, chamber 
frttttt, can. 78, 80, 200 
®art, ber, Charles. 171,2 
M'fe, ber, M'fe, cheese. 155, 1 
®cU?e, bie, Imijen, ^/ 
taufen, faufte, gefauft, buy 
^aufmamt, ber, ®aufleute, w*r- 

chant 
Jaunt, scarcely, hardly 
fefyren, fe^rte, gefeljrt, sweep 
fefjrte surittf 7 , returned. See p= 

rucf'feljren 
fein, feme, fern, «#. 20 
feiner, feme, fein(e)3, none, nobody. 

68 
fennen, fannte, gefannt, know (=be 
acquainted with; cf. ttuffen) : 
fennen lernen, ternte fennen, fen= 
nen geferat (or lernen, 80, 2), get 
acquainted with 
®inb, ba§, ®utber, child 
^inb^eit, bie, childhood 
£ird)e, bie, ®ird)en, church : m ber 
$ird)e, dtf church; in bie (or pr) 
$trd)C, to church 
^irrfi^off, ber, Kirchhoff, a man's 

name 
llfir, clear. 52, 1 
&teib, ba§, ®(eiber, dress; plural, 

clothes 
f lein, //#/<?, short (of people) 
^lehte(r), ber, little fellow. 54, 2 
fliugen, flang, gefumgen, sound, ri?ig 
flofcfcn, flopfte, geflopft, knock 
Stofter, ba3, Softer, cloister. 34, 2 
Hug, clever. 52,2 
&na&e, ber, £naben, ^ 
£nic, ba3, 5?m / e, £/z<?<? 
^ijij'lenfanre, bie, carbonic acid 



fontmen, fam, ift gefommen, come 

^B'ntg, ber, HBmtge, >£z>z£- 

^B / Jtigitt, bie, ^omtahmen, queen 

fimuen, fonnte, gefonnt, can, be able, 
may. 78, 80, 200 

^mtjert', ha§ f ^onger'te, concert 

®Opf, ber, St'opfe, head 

^opffdjmerjeit, masc. pi., headache 

^ijrfcer, ber, £orper, body 

Shaft, bit, &m\iz, force 

Jranf, ill, sick. 52, 2 

^rauj, ber, Grange, wreath 

fried) en, frod), ift gefrodjen, creep, 
crawl 

&rieg, ber, £riege, war 

SiH), bie, Mfje, cow 

IUJ)(, ^0/ 

fUm'mertt, fihn'merte, gefihn'ntert, 
reflex., trotible youi'self. 18,3 

mr5, short. 52,2 

fiuft'ne, bie, Shiftmen, cousin (fe- 
male) 



Iiicf| / e(tt, ISdj'elte, getcidj'eft, j;«//i? 

tadien, ladjte, geladjt, laugh 

laben, rub, gelaben, load; invite. 

72,3 
lafjnt, /«^. 52, 1 
Sanb, ba3, Sanber, to^.- auf bem 

fiattbe, m /■//* country; auf3 Sanb, 

/<? //^ country 
long, &«g-. 52, 2 
iange, a long time, long: fo iange 

. . , , M3, until (102, 1) 
lang§, prep, with g. (sometimes d ), 

along. 84, 1 
lang'jant, ^/w 
litngft, long since. 56,2,4 
(S3, m?*/. See tefen 



lafictt 



216' 



Wars 



Inffcn, iter,, getaften, h-t. allow, 

cause to. 72, 3, 80, 2, 106, 4, 202 
I'ntcr'uc, bie, Sater'nen, lantern 
(aitfen, lief, iir gelaufen, run. 72, 3 
laiit, &»df. 52,1 
liiu'tcn, lau'tete, getau'tet, ring 
lebcit, febtc, gelebt, live exist or 

dwell-, iicben, tav, Sebcn, life 
legen, legte, gelegt, /^j 
£cljre, bie, Seljren, precept 
lelircn, leln'tc. gelefjrt, ta^// 
Scorer, ber, ficljrer, teacher 
i'eib, ber, Sleiber, body. 158, 4 
lei d)t, /gAl, eas f 
leibcn, litt, gelitten, jw^?r 
leib ttttt, tat leib, leib gctatt, impers., 

with d., be sorry : e3 tut mtr leib, 

I am sorry (144, 2) 
leitjen, ftetj, getiefjen, &//^ 
lei3 or leife, jvt/?, j0/2f#/ 
fernen, fernte, gciernt, learn. 80, 2 
lefen, la§, gelejen, ;v«^. 72, 3 
leljt, /^ 

ficute, neuter plural, people 
&td)t, bd*, Sifter, %£/ 
licb, dear: e3 tft mir licb, dam glad 
iiicbe, bie, /<?t/* 
lieben, liebte, geliebt, love 
lieber, rather. 56, 1, 57, 1 
£teb, bd§, fiieber, ^/^, ballad 
liegcn, lag, gelegen, lie (recline) 
liegenb, lying, situated 
liitf, &/2 

2ob, ba^ f praise (15 ben) 
lobcn, lobtc, gelobt, praise 
lo$, loose 

£6tt)c, ber, Somen, lion 
^ti'menfjers, bdv, SB'roenljergen, /&?«- 

heart 
fiB'mcntal, ba3, /aww' valley 
fittft, bie, Siifte, ««r, breeze 



litf'tcn, liiftete, getiif'tet, a/r 
I'ufr'bitrd^ug, ber, Suffbutdjjflge, 

airing 
fiuft'-ju.q, ber, SufKjflge, draught 
Uincn, log, gelogen, & (tell a lie) 
fittt'fe, bie, Louisa. 171, 2 
Surfcfjcit 1 diminutive of Sut'fe), 

ba3, Z02/. 171,2 
Sungc, bie, Sungen, ///«£■ 
Suft, bie, Siifte, pleasure 

m 

madjen, madite, gemadtf, ma£«, <&; 

madjen, al3 (ob), act as if. 80, 2, 

130, 2 
9)Zoc^t, bie, SDfcadjte, might, power 
mddjtig, mighty: feineS 2S>orte3 

madjtig, incapable of speech 
SDZabdjcn, bo§, 2Mbdjen, ^/r/ 
mag, may, //£*. 78, 80, 200 
%)lai, ber, May. 171, 3 
9KajeftaY, bie, 3JlajeftS / ten, majesty 
9Wa(, ba3, decile, /!m«* 
ntol (for einntal'), ./wj/, only, pray 
SDiama', bie, mamma. 171,2 
man, eine§, einem, etnen, a/*, ^0*, 

//?£>>, people, somebody, often used 

to avoid the passive voice. 68, 1, 

106, 4 
Mtandj(er), mandj(e), mand)(ee), «««y 

a, a good many. 70, 1, 71, 1 
mand/mal, sometimes, frequently 
SRattn, ber, TOnner, man, husband. 

158,4 
^nr'bad), ba$, Marbach, a village 
Sttnrgare'te, bie, Margaret. 171,2 
SKart'e or tf.ttaric', bie, aftart'efr)^ 

Marie, Ma?y. 171,2 . 
9ttarf, bie, Waif, mark (24 cents) 
s JDitir3, ber, March. 171, 3 



Wlauev 



217 



nadjft 



Matter, bie, Sftaitertt, wall (stone) 
$)la£ r ber, Max. 44, 1, 171,2 
mefyr, more. 54, 1, 56, 1, 70, 1 
VXltyxtXt, several. 54,1, 70,1, 71,1 
ttteljr'fad), several fold. 58,6 
mein, metne, mem, my. 20 
meinett, meinte, gemeint, mean 
meiner, meine, meine3, ?/zz>z<z (62, 1) : 

ba§ 9JJeine, what is mine (62, 3, 

54,2) 
SDM'mutg, bie, pet'ttuttgen, opinion 
meift: am metften, mAr// bie metften, 

the most, most people. 54, 1 
meiften^, mostly. 56, 3, 4 
SJleuge, bk, Sftengen, crowd. 82, 3, 

141, 3 
SDZenfdj, ber, s Dc:enjc^en f man (human 

being) 
merfen, mertte, gemerft, notice 
9Jle3ncr, ber, 9fte§tter, sexton 
meffcn, maft, gemcffen, measure. 72, 3 
SHeffer, ba§, Sfteffer, knife 
SRUd), bie, ztsz'/^ 
mtnber, less. 54, 1 
SlJitmVte, bie, ^ttmVtett, 7ni7iute 
mtr, mid), //ze'. 16 
mifc, ///«•-. 96, 1 
mtPrau'tfjen, miRbraud/te, rntfc 

brand)!', misuse. 96, 1 
mxt, prep, with d., with. 86, 1 
nufbrutgeit, bradjtemft', mtt'gebradjt, 

bring along with me (you, etc.) 
mtt / gel)(e)n f gtng \\\\V , ift mtt'ges 

gangen, £» along with me (you, 

us, etc.) 
Sfttt'glieb, ba3, ^tt'gheber, member 
mtt'fommett, fam mtt', ift mtt / gefom= 

men, come with me (us, etc.) 
Sfttt'tag, ber, ^iit'tage, 710071. 156,3 
Witte, bte, middle : Wittt ^u'tti, in 

the middle of June. 130, 4 



9ftittef, ba3, SDfrttel, means 
W\W\W§, ber, Wednesday. 171,3 
mOgeu, mod)te, gemodjt, /way, like. 

78, 80, 200 
mBg'ftd), possible (mogen) 
mog'lidjft, as . . . as possible. 56, 2, 4 
Sfto'nat, ber, 9^5'nate, month 
9)2mt / tag, ber, Monday 
SDcorgcn, ber, s 3)?orgen, morning: 

morgen, to-morrow j morgen frftf), 

to-morrow 7norning 
mftbe, tired [of with g. or a. ; 126, 2) 
s Jftftf)fe, bie, 9Mf)len, mill 
duller, ber, Miiller, Miller 
S^ufe'itm, ba§, ^uje'en, museum. 

42,3 
Wl\x\\V t bie, marc 
mitf?, «wif. 78, 80, 200 
mitffen, muj^te, gemufct, must, have 

to. 78, 80, 200 
Wltttf ber, courage, spirit 
SOhttter, bie, flitter, mother. 34, 2 

narf), prep, with d., toward, to; 

after, according to, sometimes 

following the dative. 86 
9Zarf) / fiar, ber, 9iad)barn, neighbor. 

42,4 
nadjbem', after: je nadjbem', #<:- 

cording as. 102,1 
^acfj'brutf, ber, 9cad) / briide, */#- 

phasis 
ttarf)f)eV, hereafter, afterwards 
^arfj'mtrtag, ber, 9?ad/mtttage, #/&?r- 

«MMe.« Ijeute natff'mittag, this 

afternoon 
nadj'ffgett, faf$ nacfi 7 , nad^gefeffen, 

stay after school [86, 2 

natf)ft, »£:*/,• prep, with d., next to. 



nrid)ttcnc< 



218 



pvdcbtiQ 



ttadj'ftcn*, next time, by and by. 
56,3,4 

WarfK, bic, Stfadjte, night: b3$9iad}t£, 
during the night (although Niacin 
is feminine, 126, 4) 

nnl)ic), near, sometimes with d. 
54- 1 

italint, took. See ttcfjmcn 

Wjimcut), bcr, Seamen, name. 34,4 

namcii!?, by name, named 

9£atm/, bic, -ftatu'rett, nature 

ttntitr'lid), naturally, of course 

tte&en, prep, with d. or a., by, be- 
side, near. 90, 1 

ttebft, prep, with d., together with, 
including. 86, 2 

Sftcffc, bcr, -Keffett, nephew 

ttefjmctt, nahm, genommen, ta&v 
with d., take from (17,1). 72,3,4 

item, 110 

tteuttcit, ncmnte, gettcntttt, name. 82 

ttett, new : 9?ettc3, news (54,2) 

tten'barfctt, new-baked 

ttid)t, ?/<?/.• tttdjt ttiir ♦ ♦ . , fottbcrtt 
and), not 07ily . . . , but also 
(100, 1). 120, 4 

tttdjtS, nothing. 70, 1 

me,, never 

ttie'bcr, down. 92, 1 

ttic'tlttutb, nobody (68, 1): ttte'tttattb 
al§, nobody but (53, 1) 

nod), j&7/, >^/.- Weber , , . ttod), 
neither . . . nor (100, 1); ttod) 
(citt), another (= one morej see 
attbrcr, 70, 1) ; ttod) eitt'tttal, 0/2^ 
more; ttod) ttidjt, not yet 

ttb'ttfl, necessary 

^JoDcm'bcr, bcr, November. 171,3 

mitt, ;zcwy «/*// (129, 15) 

ltttr, <?«/>/. See ttid)t ttiir . . . , fott= 
bent oud), 100, 1 



6 ! or o() ! O, oh 

6b f whether, if in indirect ques- 
tions. 104,1 
o'bcrljatb, prep, with g., above. 

84,3 
obglctd)', ofcfdjon', obtoofyV, or menu 

. . . aud) (6'7/^;/ . . . if), although. 

104 
£d)£ or Cdjfc, ber, Cd)ien, ox 
o'ber, ^r.- cttt'iocbcr . . . b'ber, 

either . . . or. 100, 1 
Cfett, bcr, Cfen, j/fcw. 155, 3 
bff'ucn, b'jf'nete, geoff'net, open 
oft, often. 52, 2 

bfjne, prep, with A., without. 88, 1 
Of)r, ba3, Cfjrcn, *#r. 42,4 
Cftb'ber, bcr, October. 171,3 
Cnfei, bcr, Cnfel, ««*•/<? 
Crt, bcr, place; pi., Crte, places 

(collectively), Otter, places (dis- 

tributively). 158,4 

$aar, bd§, $aare, pair: cttt paar, 

a few, some (70, 1) ; bicfc paav 
SBortc, these few words 
%&\W , ba^, Paris, a city. 44, 2, 4 
^arf, bcr, Sftorfe, ^zr£. 156,3 
^fcrb, ba3, ^ferbe, horse: jii ^fcrbc, 

#// horseback 
^futtb, ba£, ^funbe, pound. 59, 1 
^Uofooljic', btc, ^ln"loiopl)t v cit, 

philosophy 
%\ai\, bcr, $I&|e, //a^, square: 
ttcljmcn Sic ^laij! te/£v # ^7/, 

o// down 
plbfctid), suddenly 
jjriidjtit], splendid 



^reuftett 



219 



frfjeltett 



$rctr§ett, bft3, Prussia 

^ring, ber, ^rinjen, prince, gener- 
ally the son of sovereign (fjfitrft) ; 
but, ^rtttj fehtc3 $aterlanbe3, 
prince of his native land 

^rofeffor, ber, ^rofeffo'ren, pro- 
fessor. 42, 1, 3 

9iattb, ber, Member, edge. 158, 4 

Oiat r ber, 3ffifre, advice: *Rat fc^affen 
(fcf»affte r gefdjafft), ./?«*/# way 

ratett, riet, geraten, with d., advise. 
72, 3 

Oiau'rfjermtg, bte, SRau'djerwtgen, 
fumigation 

DJaum, ber, DMutne, j^^, raw* 

red)t, right, good: erft redit, #// the 
more; redjt gilt, wry well; rerfjt 
Ijabett, be right j rerfjt tint, dfc rzV/z/ 

9ierf)t, ba§, 9ted)te, right 

re'ben, re'bete, gere'bet, speak, talk 

Oiegen, ber, SRegett, rain 

reopen, reg'nete, gereg'net, imper- 
sonal, rain. 144, 2 

retben, rieb, gerieben, r#£ 

rettfi, ra/*.- arm mtb retd) (or 9(rmt 
tiub 9Jeirf|C r 54? 3), w^ and poor 

^ettfj'tftm, ber, 9kid/ turner, wealth. 
158, 4 

rein, /«r<? 

9ieut / ltrf)feit, bte, cleanliness 

Oietfc, bie, Sftetfen, journey 

rcifctt, retfte, tft gereift, travel 

9iet / fcnbc(r) f ber, jRei'jettben, /rav- 
£&r. 54, 2 

retfjett, rife, gerifjen, tear 

retten, rttt, ift gerttten, ride 

remtett, rarmte, iftgerannt, rtm. 82, 1 

Oiljeiu, ber, i?to*, a river 



rteb, rubbed. See retbett 

rtetf)ett, rod), gerocfjert, J7;z<?// 

Oiiefe, ber, s JUefen, giant 

SKittg, ber, Stirtge, ring 

rimtett, rann, ift geronnen, run, 
flow 

rttt, rode. See reiten 

fitter, ber, fitter, knight 

dtod, ber, 9£ocfe, coat 

9tom, ba§, Rome 

rot, red. 52, 2 (also without modi- 
fication, 52, 1 ) 

*Jh~tbotf, ber, Rudolph. 171, 2 

rufcti, rief, geritfett, call 



r 3 = e3, #. 16 

©atfje, bte, Sadjen, M/«g- 

fagett, fagte, gejagt, say 

fam'meltt, fam'meite, gefam'melt, 

gather, collect 
faft, sat. See fttjett 
fauer, .sw/r. 52, 1 
©au'erftoff, ber, oxygen 
faufett, foff, gefoffen, drink, of 

animals. 72, 3 
fdjoVltd), harmful 
Sdjalc, bte, ©cfjalen, shell: em 

golbctter 9(pfel ttt fUbertter Senate, 

an apple of gold in a picture of 

silver 
fdjamett, fdiSmte, gefdjamt, reflex., 

be ashamed. 1 8, 3 
fcfjarf, sharp. 52, 2 
(5tf)titten, ber, ©cfjatteit, shade, 

shadow 
fcfjeutett, fdjien, gefdnenen, shine, 

seem: mtr fdjeittt, 1/ seems to 

me (130, 3) 
frfjeltett, fdjalt, gefdjolten, scold. 72, 3 



fdjitfen 22 

fdjirfcn, idiidte, gefcfiicft, send, as a 
bundle: fdjirfcn und) (D.), send 
after ox for 
frf|icbcu r idu'b, gefd}56en, shove^push 
fdjteften, icboH, gefefyoffen, shoot 
3ri]iffer, tier, Sdjiffer, boatman 
3d)tUer, bcr, Schiller, a great Ger- 
man poet 
3ri)lnriit, bic, 3rf)(ad)ten, battle 
fd)lafcu, fdilief, gefdjlafew, sleep. 72,3 
fdjlSf'rig, sleepy 
Srfjlaf'sintnter, ba§, (Sdjlafgimmer, 

bedroom 
ftfjlagcn, frfjtug, gefdjlagen, strike, 

beat. 72, 3 
fd)lcd)t, poor, bad 
fd)kid)cn, fdjlitf), ift gefdjftdjen, j»^^, 

creep 
fd)ttej?cn, fdjtojj, gefdjloffen, shut, lock 
8d)to£, ba£, SdjlBffer, /<?*:£, £# j//* 
Sdjmers, ber, Sdnnergen, /«/». 4 2 >4 
fdjmcrsen, fdnnerste, gefctimerjt, pain 
Stfimnfc, ber, ^W 
Sd)nee, ber, j«0«/ 
fdjnee'roeift, snow-white 
fdjnetben, fdntttt, gefdjnitten, cut 
Sdjuctbcr, ber, ©djneiber, tailor 
fdjnell, quick 

fd)im, already, of cou?se. 13,1, 15,1 
fdjouen, fdjonte, gefdjont, with g. or 

A., spare 
fd)Bit, beautiful, pretty: et'ttm^ 
3d)Bne3, something pretty (54,2) 
SdjBu'Ijeit, bic, Sdiou'fjeitcn, beauty 
fdjBitfteit!?, ^^7 much. 56, 3, 4 
fdjretf'lid), tej-rible 
fdjretbcn, fdjrieb, gefdjriefcen, write 
frf)rctcH, fd)rie, gefdjrt'en, cry, scream 
fdjrcitcn, fdjritt, ift gefdjritten, stride 
@ri)ub„ bcr, 3d)itl)e, shoe. 1 56, 3 
fdjlll'big, guilty 



fenfcen 

3ri)iile, bie, Bdmlcn, school: in tor 
auf) bcr 3rf)ulc, at school; in 
bic 1 or sun Sdjiilc, to school 
Sdjtirbutf), bo*?, Sdnll'bfldjer, school- 
book 
frfjniad), «/#z£. 52, 2 
fd] roars, black. 52, 2 
fdjrociflcn, fdmrieg, gefdjroiegen, be 
silent (cease speaking): fdjroct= 
genb, silent 
Sd)roei$, bte, Switzerland. 171, 3 
fdjroellen, fdirooll, ift geid)motIen, j-^^//. 

72, 3 
fd)tt)er, heavy, difficult, hard 
Sdjroert, ba§, 3diroerter, sword 
3djroefter, bie, ©djroeftern, sister 
fdjroimmen, fdjroamtn, tftgefdntiommen, 

swim 
fd)roBren,fdirour(orjd)mor),ge)d)rooren, 

swear 
fed|3, six. 58, 2 
SFe, ber, 8een, lake. 42,4 
See, bie, 8een, sea. 161, 2 
fefjen, fat), gefefjen, see. 72, 3, 4, 

80, 2, 112 
(Sefin'fudjt, bie, longing (feljen, 

fiicfjeri) 
fefjr, -z'^ry, wry. much. 56, 1 
fein, mar, ift geiuefen, £*. 30, 1, 

174 
fein, feme, fein, his, its. 20 
feiiter, feine, feine§, his (62, 1) : bti§ 

Seine, what is his (54, 2) 
feit, prep, with D., since (86, 1); 

conj., since (102, 1) 
fcitbent 7 , conj., since. 102,1 
3cite, bic, Seiten, side 
felbft, self even. 16, 3, 168, 2 
fclifl, blessed, deceased, late 
fenben, fanbte, gefanbt, send messen- 
ger or message. 82, 1 






geptembet 



^ttmme 



©eprem'ber, ber, September. 171,3 

fe^ett, fetrte, gefefit, j<?// reflex., seat 
yourself, sit down (18, 3) 

fid), himself, herself itself them- 
selves, yourself yourselves. 1 8 

fie, she, they. 16 

©ie> you. 6, 2, 16 

fiebett, seven 

filbertt, silver. 134 

fittgett, fang, gefungett, sing 

fatten, fan!, ift gefunfen, sink 

Sinn,' ber, ©inne, j*«j* 

finnen, fann, gefonnen, think, medi- 
tate [on, itber, with A.) 

fttjen, fafj, gefeffert, sit 

©ftaoe, ber, ©flatten, j/a^ 

fo, J6>, thus ; often used to sum a 
clause up, and then not to be 
translated: fo fottge, bt3, until 
(see bt3, 102, 1); tm $af)re fo unb 
fo, in the year blank j for fo etn, 
cin fo, f etn fo, see 65 1 

fobalb 7 , as soon as. 102, 1 

©o'fa, ta§ t ©o / fa§, sofa 

fogleid)', immediately 

©of) it, ber, ©oqne, sou 

fotang / (e), so long as, as long as. 
102, 1 

fo(tf|(cr), folate), foldj(e§), such 
(64, 1, 4, 65 r ); fo tt'tuag (instead 
of foIdje§), such a thing. 71,1 

©olbat 7 , ber, ©otba'ten, soldier 

foK, shall, am to. 78, 80, 200 

foltett, fottte, gefoltt, shall, am to, 
ought, is said to. 78, 80, 200 

©ontmer, ber, ©omtner, summer. 
171,3 

fon'bern, but; nidjt nur . ♦ ♦ , fonbertt 
and), not only . . . but also. 100, 1 

©onn'abenb, ber, Saturday. 171,3 

©ottne, bte, ©onnen, sun 



©onn'tag, ber, Sunday: (be3) 

©0tttttag§, of a Sttnday, Sun- 
days (126, 4). 171,3 
fottft, otherwise 
fpttt, late 
fpS'teften^, at the latest, not later 

than. 56, 3, 4 
fpaftte'ren, fpastex'te, fpagtert', walk: 

fpU5ie / ren faljren, go driving; 

ftoaste'ren geljen, go walking; 

fjmgie'ren lanfen, go running; 

fpajie'ren rettett, go riding 
©$)tel, bft3, ©piete, play, ga?ne 
fptelen, fptette, gefpiett, play 
fpimtett, fpann, gefpomten, spin 
©ph?e, hit, ©pttjen, point 
©plttter, ber, Splitter, splinter 
fpredjen, fpradj, gefprodjen, speak. 

72,3 
©pridj'roort, ba§, ©prtrfj'toorter, 

proverb 
f$jrief?en, fprofe, ift gefproffen, sprout 
fpringen, f prang, ift gefprungen, 

spring 
©root, ber, ©taaten, state. 42, 3 
©tabt, bte, ©tSbte, city, town: nad) 

ber ^tat>t, to town (86, 3) 
ftarf, strong. 52, 2 
^tatt, prep, with G., instead of. 84 
ftecfen, ftecfte (or ftaf), geftecft, sticky 

transitive or intransitive 
ftel)(e)n, ftanb, geftanben, stand 
fteljlen, ftafjl, geftofjlen, steal; with 

d., steal from (29, 1). 72,3 
fteigen, ftteg, ift geftiegen, climb 
©tetu, ber, ©tetne, stone 
fteflen, ftettte, geftellt, place, put 
©teFtnng, bte, ©teFlungen, place, 

situation 
fterben, ftar6, ift geftorben, die. 72, 3 
©timme, bte, ©ttmmen, voice 



«tiruc 



222 



iiberfcftcn 



3rmt(c), t»ic r Sttrnen, forehead 
3roff, bcr, Stojfe, matter. 156,3 
fiol*,, proud (of nuf, with A.) 
ftojjcii, jriejj, geftojjen, $ush 
3trnf?c, bic, SlTajjen, street. 
ftrci'rficln, ftrei'djelte, geftrei'djelt, 

stroke, as an animal 
ftrctdjcn, itvirii, geftridjen, w^w, 

stroke, as hair from the face 
ftrcttcn, ftritt, geftrttten, strive 
3troli, bete, straw 
3trom, bcr, StrBrae, stream 
3tubc, bic, Stiiben, ?v^w 
Stubcnt', bcr, Stuben'ten, student 
ftubtc'rcit, ftubter'te, ffubiert 7 , study. 

172 3 [42.4 

Sru'bium, M$, (Btu'bi'-zn, study. 
3tiif|(, bcr, 3tfit]le, chair 
3tuubc, bte, 3tunben, /w«r 
furijcn, fucfite, gefucrjt, seek, look for 
3itben, ber f south 
fiift, sweet 



ia'beftt, ta'belte, geta^Deft, blame 

Xag, ber, Xage, dfoy. 126, 4, 156, 3 

tSgftrf), daily (-lag) 

%ai, ba§ t X5(er, valley 

Xante, bte, tauten, aunt 

tatlfttn, tanjte, getanjt, dance. 106,3 

tnpfcr, brave 

Xnffc, bic, Staffen, cup. 59, 1 

Xar, bic, Xalen, </<?^ 

tank, deaf. 88, 4 

XcT, bcr, Xcc'c, /*# 

£cU, bcr, Ici(e, part; £eit, ba§, 

Xctlc, x##r<? 
Xfjca'rcr, ba3, Xbea'ter, theater: 

tm Xljca'tcr, #/ ///* theater; in£ 

Xljca'tcr, /<? J!fc theater 



Xfjcoiogic', bic, £fjeologt / en, theology 

ticf, ^5?^ 

Xicr, bri*, Jicvc, animal 

Xi)d), bcr, Jiidic, /«M\- bci Xifcfjc, 

a/ table; jit 2tjd)C, /o dinner 
Xudjtcr, bic, Xod)tev, daughter 
Xob, bcr, ^?M 
Xor, bcr, Xoren,/^/ 
Xor'ljctr, bic, ZoT'fyittn, folly 
tot, dead 
trngcu, tiiig, getragen, carry, wear. 

72,3 
Xrane, bic, Xranen, tear 
traucu, traute, getraut, with d., trust 
Xraum, bcr, Straume, dream 
tromtten, traumte, gctraumt, dream 
trcffen, traf, getroffen, hit. meet (by- 
chance). 72, 3 
tretben, trieb, getrieben, drive 
tretcn, trat, ift getreten, step. 72, 3, 4 
trinfen, trattf, getntnfen, drink: 

git trtttfett, to drink 
trofc, prep, with G. (sometimes with 

d.), in spite of 84, 1 
tun, tat, getan, do 
Xttrdjen, ba§, 22rd)en, little door 
Xftr(c), bte, xiuren, door 

U 

Ftbcl, bad, badly. 56, 1 

fiber, prep, with d. or a., above, 

over, beyond, about (91 1 ). 90, 1 
U6crgc / I)cn, ttbergfng 7 , ubcrgang'en, 

omit. 96, 1 
ttbcrrc'bcn, fiberre / bcte, Sbcrre'bct, 

persuade (talk over). 96, 1 
fi'Dcrfcijctt, fcfcte fi'ber, iKbergejefct, 

set across. 96, 1 
fiber) ci^cn, fibcrjeft'te, SberfetU', 

translate. 96, 1 






Ufcr 



223 



bevftoten 



Itfer, bft3,_llfer, shore, bank 

lli)r, bte, Uljrett, clock, watch. 58,5 

ttM, prep, with A., round: urn . ♦ ♦ 

ttufteu, with g., for the sake of 

(84, 1) ; itm . ♦ ♦ p, to (88, 1) ; 

ftttt fiii, #// //«<? (see je, 102, 1) 
um / ge^(e)u, gfng iim 7 , ift um / gegan- 

gen, go round. 96, 1 
itatflc / i)(e)n, umgtng', umgang'en, £*tf 

round, evade. 96, 1 
itlttfieV, round 

imb, «^^l 1 71 » 5 

uVfremtMttf), unfriendly. 88, 4 

Ult'gfttlf, ba3, misfortune 

mt'gtittflttf), unhappy 

uVgiittg, unkind. 88, 4 

ftn'ljBftitfj, impolite. 88, 4 

Uttt tier jttftt', bte, Uttir>erftt3 / teit, *m/- 

versity 
un'redjt tjafien, r)atte rtrt^redfjt, ifrt's 

rerfjt geliabt, <fe wi r ong 
ttn'retfit tint, tat iht'redijt, itn / recr)t 

getan, do wrong 
iltt'retnttcfjfett, bte, uncleanliness 
\\\\% f us. 16 

mtjer, nnfre, unfer, our. 20 
unfrer, uttfre, imfer§, ours. 62, 1 
unter, prep, with d. or a., under, 

below, among. 90, 1 
mt'tergelKc^t, gtng tm'ter, ifi un'ter= 

gegangen, set, of the sun 
mt'terljafb, prep, with g., below. 

84,3 
mt'tcrm = tttttcr bent, 1 o, 2 
mtternelj'meit, nnternaijm', unter= 

nom'men, undertake. 72, 3, 4, 

96, 1 
ttnterwer'fen, untertoarf, untermor's 

fen, subject. 72, 3, 96, 1 
tttt / 5ttfrtebett f dissatisfied 
itftt), = unb fo wetter, and so forth 



$afer, ber f WAzx, father. 155,3 

M'terdjett, ba3, SSS'terdjen, d5?<w 
father, daddy, dad 

25tt / terlattb, ba$, native land, coun- 
try 

t»er=, forth, away, gone, thoroughly. 
94 

toerfcer'gett, berbarg', berbor'gen, 
hide : uer&er'gen tior (d.), hide 
from. 72,3 

tjerbte'ten, berbot', MtxWitn, forbid 

toer&ef'fent, berbef'ferte, berbef'fert, 
i?nprove (make better) 

tJerbed'en, berbecf'te, berbecfV, cover, 
conceal 

tierber'&en, berbarb', berbor'ben, 
spoil, ruin. 72, 3 

berbrte^en, berbrof} / , berbrof'fen, vex 

herein 7 , ber, ^erei'ne, society, club 

berfat'ten, berfteF, ift berfaFlen,^// 
away, go to ruin. 72, 3 

bergef'fen, bergafe', bergef'fen, for- 
get. 72, 3 

berfait'fett, betlanf'te, berfanft / , sell 

^erlc'gcnfjetr, bie, SBeiTe'genljetten, 
perplexity. 94 

berlte'ren, berlor', berlo'ren, lose 

bermtfdj'cn, bermifcb/te, bermifd^t', 
mix 

$er£, ber, SBerfe, verse 

berfdjte'beu, different 

bcrfdjumt'ben, berfcbmanb', ift ber* 
fcbttnm'ben, disappear 

berfpredj'en, berfpraaV, berfbrotfi'en, 
promise. 72, 3 

toerfte'IKe^t, berftanb', berftan'ben, 
understand 

DerftB'ren, berftor'te, berftbrt', dis- 
turb, trouble 



tocriurfccu 



224 



hictfc 






bcrfft'riicn, beviucb'te, berjudjt', try, 

tempt 
bcr^ci'licn, berjiefj', bergte'ljen, with 

D., pardon (free from accusation) 
better, ber, SSettern, cousin. 42, 4 
biel(cr), biel(e), biel(e§), much^ many. 

54,i, 70,1, 71,1 
bicFgcbrtefen, much praised 
UtcUcirfjt', perhaps [more) 

uiclmcfjr', on the co?itrary (much 
mCY,four. 58,2 
fBitx'ttlf $>a$, SBier/tel, quarter: etn 

$iertc( auf fiinf (or etn $ierre( nad) 

bicr) f a quarter past four; brei 

$iertc( auf fiinf (or ein SBicrtel bor 

fiinf), a qnai'ter of Jive. 58, 7 
Sier^tger, ber, SBter/gtger, a man 

between forty and fifty : In ben 

^ier^igern, in the forties 
^o'gel, ber, ^o'gel, ^^- 155, 3 
$o(f, bfiy f SSMfer, people (nation) 
boll, full. 96, 1 
bon, prep, with d., of from, by (of 

agency, with the passive voice). 

86, 1 
bor, prep, with d. or a., before, in 
front of from (because of). 90, 1. 

See $ierrel 
borbet 7 , by, past. 58, 7 
SBoVbore, ber, tSdx'bottn, forerunner 
bbVfomntcn, font nor 7 , iji Dor 7 ge= 

fotrtmert, occur, appear 
bbVfefeu, la* bor', tior'gdejen, with 

d., mzrt 7 /c? [(fore part) 

SBbVteil, ber, ^or'tetle, advantage 
boril / ber, past, gone 

macfjfen, wildjZ, ifi geraadjjen, grow. 
7 2 , 3 



SBagen, ber, 2B5gen, wagon, car- 
riage 

tuafjr, true : nirfjt mafyr ? is it not so? 

maft/rcnb, prep, with G., during 
within the time of, 84, 1); conj., 
while, whereas (102, 1 1 

SBafjr'fjeit, bic, ©aftr'fjeiten, truth 

2Balb, ber, 23alber, forest. 158, 4 

23Sanb, bte, SScinbe, wall 

tuan'bern, man'berte, ift geroan'bert, 
wander 

maun, when? 

mar, was. See fein 

marb, toarbft, became. 24, 3 

tt) arm, warm. 52, 2 

S^ar'nung, bte, ©ar'mmgen, warn- 
ing 

mar'ren,- ttar'tete, gemar'tet, wait: 
marten auf (a.), wait for 

maritm', why? 

tt>a3, what? tva§ fttr (ein), what 
kind of? 66, 4 

ma£, what (that which). 67, 2 

ttm3 (colloquial for et'ma^), some- 
thing. 70, 1 

mafrijen, tvu)d), geroajcfien, wtfj/z. 
72, 3 

SBafjer, ba§, SBaffer, water 

me'bcr . ♦ ♦ nad), neither . . . nor. 
100, 1 

2Beg, ber, Sege, way 

meg, <w/ of the way, away 

mc'gcn, prep, with g., on account 
of (by way of), often following 
the genitive. 84, 1 

SBcib, i>a$, s 2£ei6er, wife 

mcil, because. 104, 1 

3S>ci / mar, ba3, Weimar, a city 

mcife, wise 

meijj, know. 82, 2 

mcifj, w/«'^ 



ttieit 



225 



itJoKett 



tBtit,*wide, far : M§ 2$ette filcfpett f 

take to your heels (54, 2) 
inciter, farther. 92,1 
toeltf)(er), rnelcfj(e), irelcf)(e§) r which, 

what? 65, 1, 66, 1 
toeldjer, tnetdje, tuelcfieg, zVW, w/z<?, 

which. 66, 1 
tocltfier, melcfje, tnetdjeS, some, mostly 

colloquial. 70, 1 
2$elr, bte, 2Selten, raw/tf 
toenben, tncmbte, getnanbt, turn. 82,1 
toe'ntg, /#//*, toe'ntger, /^jj (54, 1). 

See toe'ntger, 70, 1 
tve'niQt, few (54, 1). See toe'ntgcr, 

70,1 
toc'ntger, roe'nige, toe'mgeS, ##/*, 

/^w; less, fewer. 70, 1, 71, 1 
toe'ntgften-?, #/ to. 56, 3, 4 
toemt, whenever, when, if ever, if 

(102, 104, 170, 3): toenn . . . 

and), even if, although (104) 
toer, roer, rna<§, whoever, whatever. 

66 
toer, iner, roa3, who? what? 66 
toerben, tniirbe, tft geronrben, be- 
come, get: toerben an§ (d.), be- 
come of; toerben jit (d.), turn to. 

106, 176 
toerfen, roarf, geroorfen, throw. 72, 3 
233erf, ba3, SSerfe, ■z£w£, &ra£ 
toerr, worthy : tocrt fjalten, fjtett 

inert, tncrt gefjatten, prize. 72, 3, 4 
SSetter, ba3, SBetter, weather 
tot'ber, prep, with a., against.^SS, 1 
tote, how? however; as, like, with 

the same case after it as before 

it. 53, 1, 87, 1, 170, 3 
ttnVber, again, back. 92, 1, 96, 1 
toteberan'fangen, ffrtg toteber an 7 , 

roteberan'gefangen, begin again. 

72, 3 



toteberljn'kn, mteberfjol'te, toteber* 

rjolt', repeat. 96, 1 
toie'berrnntmen, fam rote'ber, tft tote'* 

bergefnmnten, come back 
S&te'berfefjctt, ba§, seeing again: 

nuf SBtc'berfeljen ! till we meet 

again, ate revoir 
2S?ieje, bte, SBiefen, meadow 
totentel / , how much? (58, 5, 59, 2); 

tote ntete, how many? 
totentef (f)tc : ben totentd^Dten I)a> 

Ben totr fjente ? what day of the 

nio nth is it? 61, 1 
SBittjelm, ber, William. 171,2 
tottf, will, want. 78, 80, 200 
toiflcn : urn . . . tottfen, with G.,_/»r 

///<? sake of. 84, 1 
2Stnb, ber f s J3inbe, wind 
totnbett, rnanb, gerounben, wind 
SBtnter, ber, SBinter, winter. 171,3 
tofr, we. 16 

totrfen, toirfte, getotrft, work 
toirHtd), really 

SSirt^'ljaitS, ba3, SBirtS'pufer, z;z;z 
toifjen, toufjte, gemuftt, know, as a 

fact (cf. f'ennen); with the infini- 
tive, know how. 82, 2 
ton, where? 

ton, where, when. 87, 1, 170, 3 
ton=, where. 87, 1 
2S>od)e, bte, SSndjen, «/**£ 
tonbnrcn/, by which. 87, 1 
toofjeV, from where? See Ijer 
too^tn 7 , whither? where? See Ijttt 
tonf)(, well; perhaps, probably, I 

suppose. 33, 1 
3Bnt)r6eftnben, ba§, good health 
toofjnen, mnfjnte, getnofjnt, live (dwell) 
tonflcn, tonllte, getonllt, will, wish, 

am going to, mean, assert, pre- 
tend. 78, 80, 200 



U> on; it 



226 



Shiifdjctt 



toomtt', with which. 87, 1 
n>o(r):, where. 74.5, 87,1 
roorftii', at which, at what. 87, 1 
ttJoranf, on which. 87, 1 
woriit', in which. 87, 1 
a»ort, b&8, Tcwv/.- pi., SBorte 
(157, 2 , words 1 connected), 
SSorter (158, 5), words (singly) 
nnmVbcr, over which or what? 

about which or what? 87, 1 
ttJODon', of which. 87, 1 
ttmn'bmt, tmm'berte, genmn'bert, 
reflex., wonder or £<? surprised 
(at, fiber, with a.). 18, 3 
toun'berfdjtin, wonderfully pretty 
SShtufdj, ber, SBiinfdje, w«A 
itmnfdjcn, hmnfdjte, genmnfdjt, wish 
toitrbe, became. See toerben 
SBnrm, ber, SSiirmer, worm. 158,4 

3 

5. 58. = 3thtt %$tV\p\tl f for example 

gefjn, £?#. 58, 2 

^ctgctt, getgte, gegetgt, show 

3cit, bte, 3 e ^ ten < *&** 

3ci / tmtg, bte, 3 e ^ turt S en f ^ow- 
paper (times) 

ger=, asunder, to pieces. 94 

Stcfjen, jog, gegogen, <^azw (pull); 
move ,iintr., 30, 1 ) : auf3 Sanb 
^tefjcn, ///<?w /<? the country j in 
bie Stabt Steven, move to town 



dimmer, bo*, dimmer, room . 
Stt'tcrn, git^terte, gejiftert, tremble 
3it, prep, with i>., A', 0/ (86,1) 

after the dative, toward (86, 3) ; 

with the present participle, 49, 2 ; 

Mlf (A.) . . . 5U, toward \ 128, 5); 

5U mtr, />k ?;/t'. 75,1 
5U, adv., /to? 

3ng, ber, 3"^ train (jiefjen) 
git' gang (id), accessible 
5ttm = 5u bcm. 10, 2 
Su'madjcn, mad)te %vJ , sii'gemadjt, 

£/#.$•£, jvh// 
§itr = jit ber. 10, 2 
SnriicF, &zr£. 92, 1 
Snriid'&efjaftcn, bereft juriid', $a* 

ritcPoefjalten, £<^ to£. 72, 3 
jttrittf'fefjren, fe forte guriicf, ift 51U 

ritcf gefefjrt, return. 92, 1 
Surueffommen, fam jurucP, ift gu= 

riicf'gefommett, come back 
pfastl'mett, together. 92, 1. 
jitmrbcr, prep, with d., z« defiance 

of after the dative. 86, 2 
gttmnstg, twenty 
5tt)et, fte/0. 58, 2 

SttJc^f c(n f gtoei'fette, gejhjei'feft, doubt 
$mzVmoi f twice. 58, 6 
5toci / erlct, two kinds of. 58, 6 
5ttmtgen, jtoang, gejnmngen, /^rar, 

compel 
gttrifdjen, prep, with d. or a. t between. 

90, i 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 



a, an, euu 20 [186 

able : be — , fonnen, f otutte, gefonttt. 
accessible, gtYgiingttd) (d.) 
account, =tt)egett, 84, 2 
acquainted with: get — , fettnett 

ternen, terttte fettnett, fettnett ge= 

lernt (or lernen). 80, 2, 3 
advice, diat f ber 
advise, raten, net, geraten (d.) 
affair, ©adje, bte, ©ad)ett 
afraid: be — , fid) fiird)tett, fiirdjtete 

fief), fid) gefirrtf)tet. 18, 3, 19, 1 
after, conj., nadjbettt (102, 1) ; prep., 

nadj (d., 86, 1) 
afternoons, nariymtttag^. 126,4 
again, ttuVber 
against, ttu'bcr. 88, 1 
agreeable, aVgenetjltt (d.). 128, 1 
air, Sufi, bte, Siifte 
all, alter (68), gan$ (51, 1); at — , 

gar ntdjt; — that, afte§ f ttu13 

(67, 2) 
almost, faft 
^/^;/^, a Hem' 
already, fdjdtt 
<^/^, and) 

although, oligtctay. 104, 1 
always, tmmer 

ambassador, ®efattbtc(r), ber. 54, 2 
America, ^tme'rifa, ba§. 44, 2 
among, nttter (D. or A.). 90, 1 
and, Uttb. 17^5 
animal, £ter, bag, Jiere 
Anna, Qtnna, bic. 171, 2 
answer, ant'tuorten, attt'roortete, ge= 

ant'ir.ortet (intr.), Deant'morten (tr.) 



>-, et'nm^ 70, 1 
?, Sln&ettf, ber, ^petfte 
«^/*, 2ltofet, ber, 9lpfef. 155,3 
«r^, 61ft, ftnb. 6, 1 
<z?7/z, Strut, ber, 9trme [gefotnmen 
arrive, at^fr mitten, fattt an 7 , iff an'= 
as, at$ f rote (53, 1, 105, 1); as . . . 

tfj, fa . , , at3 or rote (105, 1) ; as 

if, ai§ ou (104, 1) 
ashamed: be — ,fid) fdjftntett, fdjfimte 

fid), fid) gefd)5mt. 18,3, 19, 1 
ask a question, fragen, fragte, ge= 

fragt {for, nad), d.); — ■ for a 

thing, ittten ittn (a.), bat, gebetett 
at, an (d. or a., 90, 1), urn (a., 88, 1); 

— home, 511 ^panfe; (= at the 

house of) net (d., 86, 1) 
August, Stttgttfr', ber. 1 7 1 , 3 
aunt, Xante, bie, Santen 
away, fart 



back, rote'ber ; come — , ttuVberfom* 

men, fam rtue / ber, ift nuVberge* 

fontttten. 92, 1 
be, fein, mar, ift geroefen (172); rote 

gefjt t§ btr? how are you f 
beat, fdjtagen, fd)lBg, gefd)(agen. 72, 3 
beautiful, beautifully, fdjBtt 
because, tvtil. 104,1 [176 

become, roerbett, tt>urbe, ift getoorben. 
bed, %ttt f ba$ f 53etten (42, 4) ; in — , 

tm SBette ; to — , 511 S3ett 
before, conj., Debar 7 or e'fje (102, 1); 

prep., bar (d., 90, 1) 



beg 



228 



beg, bet'tefn, 6et r telte, gebeftelt 
beggar, Settler, ber, Settler 
begin, oVfnngcn, ftrtg an', ai^^c- 
fangen. 7 2 , 3 

beginning, ^In'fang, ber. 130,4 
behind, ijintcr (D. or a.). 90, 1 
believe, glanben, glanbte, gegtaubt 
below, nn'terljalb (84, 3), nnter«(D. 

or a., 90, i) 
Berlin, ^crlttt', ba3. 44, 2 
beside, uc6eit (d. or a.). 90,1 
besides, an^er (d.). 86, 1 
best, tint beften (54, 1) ; my — 5 ntetn 

*Befte3 (54, 2) 
better, beffer. 54, 1 
between, gtutfrfjeit (p. or a.). 90, 1 
bird, $ijgel, ber, 95SgeL 155,3 
bit, btft'djen, ba§. 70, 1 
bite, betften, bifi, gebijfen 
black, frijroarj. 52, 2 
blame, ta'befn, ta'belte, geta'bclt 
blind, Mittb. 88, 4 
blow, blafen, blie§, geblajen. 72, 3 
boatman, ©d)iffer, ber, 8d)iffer 
&w£, 33ite^i f baS, SBxid)er 
born, gebo'ren 
both, bei'beg. 68, 1 
boy, £nabe, ber, .ftnaben 
bread, $rot, ba$ t 33rote 
break, bredjen, brad), gebrod)en. 72, 3 
breathe, at'men, at'mete, geat'met; 

ein'atnten, 92, 1 [82, 2 

bring, brtngen, brad)te, gebrad)t. 
brother, 23ritber, ber, 93rSber. 155,3 
building, Qdtb'au'bt, ba§, ©ebciu'be 
but, a'ber, ailmV, fon'bern. 100, 1 
buy, fanfen, femfte, gefanft 
by, an or neben (d. or a., 90, 1), t»on 

(D., 86, 1) ; by and by, nttd)ften£ (56, 

3, 4) ; by my watch, nad) ntiincr 

W)r 



cup 
C 



call: be called, Ijctftcn, f)ietf , gebettfen. 

22, 4 
£•#;/, fonnen, fonnte, gefonnt. 186 
carriage, s j!£ngcn, ber, SBagett 
carry, tragen, trug, getvagen. 72, 3 
^j-//^, Sdjfoft, ba3, ©djlo^er 
<r^/^, fangen, fing, gefangen. 72, 3 
^/^ cold, fief? erfaFten, erfdPtete 

fief), fid) erfdrtet. 18,3 
certainly, gettuft' 
Charles, Rati, ber. 171,2 
cheese, £5fe, ber, £aje 
child, Sitnb, ba§, .ftinber 
church, ®ird)e, bte, £trd)en; at — , 

tn ber £trtf)e; to — , tn bie (or 

%m\ SHrdje 
city, Stabt, bte, 8tabte 
cleanli?iess, Oiettttidjfett, bte 
clever, f(ng» 52, 2 
cloister, SHofter, ba§, £(6jtev. 34, 2 
close, fdj(tef?en, fcbloft, gejd)lo[jen 
clothes, ftteiber, bie (neut. pi.) 
coffee, Coffee, ber 
cold, ialt, 52,2, 88,4 
co?ne, fommen, fam, ift gefommen 

(132,6); — out, Jjeran^fontnten, 
. fam tjerans', ift tieraus'gef ommen ; 

have a person — , foutmen Ittffen, 

Heft fommen, fommen laffett (80, 2) 
cool, tnf)( 
copy, ab'fdjretben, fdjrieb W , ab'ge= 

fdjriefcen 
could. See can 
country : in the — , auf bent Sanbe ; 

{jn)to the — , auf3 Sanb 
cousin, better, ber, $ettevn. 42, 4 
creep (= sneak), fdjleidjen, jd)ltc^, ift 

gejd)(td)en 
cup, Saffc, bte, Staffen. 59, 1 



daily 



229 



France 



daily, tBgltdj 

daughter, Xorfjter, bte, £od)ter. 34, 2 

day, £ftg, ber, Sage. 156, 3 

deaf, tank. 88, 4 

<&<zr, (left 

dto/z, £ob, ber 

dfe^, £at, bie, Satett 

did, 14,2, 146,4, 146 1 

dfe, fterben, ftarb, ift geftorbett. 72, 3 

diligent, diligently, ffet'fjij}. 52, 1 

dinner: to — , 5U Xifrf) 

<fiir/, ®(^mu^ ber 

discover, etttbetf'en, entbecf / te, entbecft' 

do, 12, 1, 146,4, 146 1 , tun, tat, ge? 

tan 7 ; w/W are you doing? tt>a£ 

matfjft bit ? 
doctor, Sof'tor, bcr f 35 ofto / ren (42 4), 

3trgt f ber, trgte 
d&g-, £uttb, ber, ^unbe. 156,3 
^r, £ftr, bte, stiirett 
dream, trauntett, traumte, getrdumt 
Dresden, ^re^bett, bag. 44, 2 
«&rjj, $tetb, ba§, £leiber 
drink, trutfett, tranf, getrunfen 
drive, f aljrett, fu^r, ift gefafjren. 72,3 
during, ttJttfj'rettb (G.). 84, r 



each, jebcr, jebe, jebe§. 8 

*?#^ other, einatt'ber. 18, 2 

^r/j/, frftlj. 52, 1 

^^r«, gettnn'nen, geroann', getuon'nen 

earth, drbe, bte, (Srben. 41 1 

easily, letdjt 

*?#/, effett, aB, gegSffen, freffen, fr5f$, 

gefreffen (of animals). 72, 3 
«£#/, afyt 
Elizabeth, ©Iff abetfy, bte, 171,2 



emperor, ®atfer, ber, ®aifer 

emphasis, Stfad)' brucf, ber 

end, (Snbe, ba3, (Snben. 42, 4 

enough, genitg'. 70, 1 

evening, STbettb, ber, Wbenbe; this 

— , fjeute abettb ; — s, abenb3 
every, after (68), jeber (8) 
everything, afle3. 68, 1 [72, 3 

examine, befe'ljett, 6efa^, befe'tjen. 
exception. See 131, sentence 1 
exist. See 73, 1 
<y* , 2tuge, W§, Slugen. 42, 4 



fall, fatten, fief, ift gefaffen. 72, 3 
family, ^ami'Iie, bte, gami'tien 
famous, Serfi^tnt 7 [(d., 88, 1) 

far: as — as, bi§ (A.) or U§ nadj 
father, $ater, ber, $5ter. 155,3* 

171, 2 
fear, fitraytett, fitrcb/tete, gefiinfj'tet 
few, tt)e / ttige ; fewer, tte'tttger. 54, 1, 

70, 1 
field, $efb, U§, ftetber 
yz//^.- the — , ber fitnfte 
find, ftttben, fattb, gefunben. 112 
fire, fetter, bo^, fetter 
_/frj-/, erft 167, 1 
fisherman, $tfd)er, ber, ftifdjer 
five, fiinf. 58,2 
flower, $Utme, bte, SSIumen 
follow, fotgen, folgte, ift gcfolgt (d.) 
fool, £or, ber, Storen 
foot, %vl\, ber, Srlifje. 59, 1 
for, auf (130, 7), benn (100, 1), fett 

(86, 1) ; (= to get,) ttm (88, 1) 
forest, 2Balb, ber, SBalber. 158,4 
forget, dergef'fen, fcergafj', bergef'fen. 

72,3 
France, $rattfretdj, H§. 44, 2 



Fred 



23C 



if 



Fred, fyrife, bcr. 44, 3. 171,2 
Frederic k . ^yrtcb'rid), tier. 171,2 
freeze, fricrcit, fror, gefroren. 1 44, 2 
fresh, frifrf) 

Friday, Jyrci'tafl, bcr. 171,3 
friend, Jyrcnub, bcr, Jrcunbe 
friendly, frennb(id). 88, 4 [(87, 1) 
from, an§ (d., 86, 1) ; — it, batoon 7 
front: in — of »or (d. or a.). 90,1 



garden, ©arten, bcr, ©arten. 155,3 
generally, meifteuS* 56, 3, 4 
gentleman, £err, ber, £>erren. 40 3 
geography, QJeograMie', bic 
Gentian, beutfd). 141,9 
Germany, $)eurfd)lanb, bag. 44, 2 
£*/ (= beco?ne), merben, itmrbe, ift 

gemorben. 1 76 
£*tf »/, ouf / ftc^(c)n f ftanb auf, ift 

aufgeftanben 
^*7/<?, gcucn, gab, gege6en. 72, 3, 4 
^,ge1)(e)n,gtng,iftgegangen (132,3); 

— out, tjhtauS'gefK^n, gfng 

tjinau^', ift Ijinaus'gegangen; — 

round, I)erum / gel)(e)tt 
god, God, @ott, ber, ©otter. 158,4 
Goethe, ®octl)e, bcr. 3 2 , 171,2 
good, gilt (54, 1, 88, 4), fd)6n 
^reatf, grofj. 54, 1 
green, grttn [72, 3 

grow, toadjfen, itmd)<§, ift getuacfyfen. 



half, fydth (58,1); — past eleven, 

ijotb 5ttiotf (58, 7) 
^#;^, ^>anb, bie, §tinbe ; — writing, 

£anbftf)rtft, bie, ^anbfdjriften 

happy, gtfitf'ttrf). 52, 1 



hard, difficult, frf)tt)cr 

Harry, §ettt$, ber. 44,3, 171,2 

hat, £iir, bcr, .sulfite 

have, ^at)cu, Ijatte, gefiabt (1 12, 1 74), 

Idffcu, 1 i e f 3 , gelaffen (80,2); — to, 

miiffcit, muBte, gemuijt (186); — 

do, read, etc., (off en (106, 4) 
he, er. 16 
head, £opf, ber, ftobfe 
hear, IjSren, fjorte, ge()5rt. 80, 2, 112 
heart, $ev%, ba§, Jperjen (34 2 ) ; by — , 

an^roenbig 
help, Ijelfen, fjatf, gefjolfen (d.), 

72,3, 4; £ilfe, bic, £)ilfen 
Henry, ^pein'ridj, ber. 171,2 
her, tljr (20); tljrer, it)r r fie (16, 1) 
here, Ijier, fyierljeV 
hero, £elb, ber, ^etben 
him, feiner, tfjm, it)n. 16 
himself, feflift (16, 3), feiner (18, 1) 
his, fein (20), beffen (64, 3) 
home: at — , p £anfe; go — , nad) 

^trofe gefjen 
hope, Ijjffen, fjoffte, gefjofft 
horse, ^Sfcrb, ba§ f $ferbe 
&?/, ^ei^ 

^0«r, ©tunbe, bic, Stunben 
house, £>an3, ba§ f Jpaufex 
how, n»ie? — many, niic btete? 

— are you? mie geljt e3 5f)nen? 

mie befinben ©ic fin) ? 
however, aber (postpositive, 120,1) 
hungry : I am hungry, c§ Ijnng'ert 

midj, eg tjung'erte mid), U fjfit mid) 

gef)ung / ert. 17 1 , 144,2 
hurry, etten, cilte, ift geeilt 



/, trf). 16 [(104, 1) 

if, ttcnn (104, 1); (= whether,) bb 



ill 



231 



middle 



z'//, fruttf* 52,2 
immediately, fogfeid)', gteidj 
z>z, m/tf, ut (d. or a.). 90, 1 
industrious, ffet'jgig. 52, 1 
inside, in^ttiCttbig 

instead of, Ott'ftatt, ftott(G.). 84, 1, 4 
interesting, ttttereffuttt'. 52, 1 
invite^ ein'laben, tub ein ; ', cin / geta* 

ben. 72, 3 
z>, ift 6, 1, 174 
//, er, fie, U. 16, 169, 1 



/<&:£, $an§, ber. 44, 3, 171,2 
/^/z, ftofjamt', ber. 171,2 
journey, Oieife, bte, fReifen 
/«»^, ^it'ttt, ber. 171,3 



£;#;&, =erlet. 58, 6 
£«#*, SDleffer, ba3, SReffet 
knocks flopfett, ftopfte, gello^ft 

know : (= A? acquainted with,) 
femteu, fannte, gefannt (82, 1) ; 
(= £#00/ as a fact,) ttriffen, 
nmfete, gettmftt (82, 2) 



&£*, ©e2, ber, Seen. 42, 4 

/#*«£, laljm 

land, Saxibf ba§ f Sanber 

large, gr% 54, 1 

last: at — , enb'lidj 

laugh, lateen, ladjte, geladjt ; - - at, 

(adjen fiber (a., 90, 1) 
lay, legen, legte, getegt 
lead, fUfjrett, ffi^rte, gefu^rt 
leant, lernen, lerute, gelernt 



leave, (affen, fiefj, gelaffen. 72, 3 

lend, leifyen, lief), geliefjen 

less, tue'niger. 70, 1 

lesson, SHuf'gabc, bie, Stuf'gaben 

let, laffen, ttefj, gelaffen. 72, 3, 80,2 

letter, JBrief, ber, S3riefe 

/z>, tiegen, lag, gelegen 

light, 2td)t, ba3, Sifter 

like. See 57, 1 ; she would like best, 

81, 2, sentence 4 
&?», SUttie, ber, Stftoen 
little, Hem (52, 1), toe'niger (70, 1) 
live, leBeu, lebte, gelebt ; (= dwell,) 

ttdfjnen, luofmte, gerooljnt 
long, tang (52,2) ; (=a—time,) fange 
look for, fitdjen, fud)te, gefiidjt 
lord, $err, ber, £>erren. 40 3 
lose, Derlie'ren, berlor', berlo'ren 
Lou, Swiften, bft3, 171,2 
love, lieben, liebte, geliebt 
/j^z^, ftegenb. 49, 2 

M 

;;z#/&?, madjen, tnacfyte, getnadjt 
;^a^, SOZann, ber, banner. 158,4 
many, tneler, 70, 1 
March, Wit$ r ber. 171,3 
Marie', Mary, SDtarte', SWart'e, 

SKarieS', < $ftaxi / e(n)3, bie. 171, 2 
master, £err, ber, £erren. 40 3 
J/^^r, 9JZa£, ber. 44, 3, 171,2 
amy,, biirfen, bnrfte, geburft, fonnen, 

fonnte, gefonnt. 186 
me, nteiner, tmr, mid). 16 
meaning, (Sinn, ber, ©inne 
meat, $(eifdj, &&? 
w^/, begeg'iteit, begeg'nete, tft be* 

geg'net (d.). [teute 

merchant, ^auf'mantt, ber, ftauf's 
middle, Wiitti f bie. 130, 4 



milk 



232 



milk. Wi(rf), btC 

Miller, Mullet; Wittier, bcr. 171,2 

mine, mcincr. 62 

minute, StttmVte, btc, SKtnu'tcn 

miss, ^roVleitt, ba$, graVletu 

mistaken : be — , fid) trrctt, irrte fid), 

ftrfj gcirrt. 18,3 
Monday, Won 'tag, bcr (171,3); — 

night, WoVtag a'&cttb 
money, ®clb, bfi3, 65etbcr 
month, Wd'nat, bcr, TO'nate 
more, 52, 1; meljr (70, 1) 
morning, 9)Zorgett, ber, ^ftorgen; 

this — , fyeute morgen; — s, ntor= 

gettS (126,4) 
?;z^/ (52,4); the — , btc mciftClt 

(54, 1); at — , f|6tf)fteit3 (56, 3, 4) 
?nother, Gutter, bie f Gutter. 34, 2 
mountain, Serg, ber, 23erge 
move, Steven, 509, ift ge^ogen 
much, met. 54, 1, 70, 1 [42, 3 
muse'iun, Witfe'itm, ba§, ^Jhtje'en. 
music, SDhifil', bte 
^z/j/, muff en, mufete, gemufjt. 186 
#zj, meiu. 20 
?nyself, fcttft, 1 6, 3 

N 

name: be named, tjet^eu, Ijiefj, ge= 

beifeen. 22, 4 
/zm/, braudjen, braucfyte, gebraud)t 
neighbor, 9Jad)bar, ber, ^adjbarn. 

42,4 
neither, f enter, 68, 1, 69, sent. 15 
nephew, Sfteffe, ber, 9teffen 
never, ttie 
«^7£/, neu. 52, 1 
/«■£■/*/, 9Zac^t f bte, ^ccidjte; last — , 

gefteru a'bettb 
«/^, neutt. 58, 2 



«#, adv., ttetit; adj., feitt (20) 
nobody, nic'maub, memanb(e)8. 68, 1 
none, fctncr, fcine, !ein(e)§. 68,1 
not, mrfjt ; — yet, nod) nidjt. 1 20, 4 
nothing, nid)t3 
now, jetjt 



o'clock, ttljr, bte, 58, 5 

October, Dfto'ber, ber. 171,3 

of, the genitive (126, 2); oon (86, 1) 

<7^r, bietett, 6ot, geboten 

often, oft. 52, 2 

old, alt 52, 2 

0/z (= upon), auf (d. or a., 90, 1) ; 

{= beside,) an (D. or A., 90,1); 

— it, bar auf' (87, 1) 
once, ehtmaT (postpositive) ; at — , 

fogkirf)', gfetrf) 
one, etner. . 68, 1 
only, nitr 
open, bffuett, bff'nete, geoff / net, auf'= 

ntadjen, mad)te auf', auf'gemadjt 
opposite, gegenft'ber (d.). 86,. i 
or, o'ber. 100, 1, 171, 5 
other, attbrer. 70, 1 
ought, foflen, folite, gefoflt. 186 
our, uttfer. 20 
out of, an§ (d., 86, 1) ; — it, batan$' 

(87, 1) 
outside, an'fterljalb (g.). 84, 3 
over, it'ber (d. or a.). 90,1 
own, beft^ctt, bejaf}', befef'fen ; adj., 

ctgett 



painting, GJemoTbe, bft3, ©emSl-'be 
Paris, ^avW, bftS. 44, 2 
park, ^§arf, ber, qSarfe 



past 



233 






past. See 58, 7 (35icrtel and fjatb); 

(of time,) ttarf) (d.) 
peasant, $aner, ber, 93auern. 42,4 
people, Seute (pi.), man (106, 4); 

(= nation,) $ol:f, ba3, golfer 
perhaps, btetfetd)t / [burft. 186 

permitted: be — , biirfen, burfte, ge* 
persuade* nuerre'ben, fiberve'bete, 

Sfeetre'bet. 106, 4 
piercing, bnrrfjbrtng'enb 
//#>/, f^iclcn, pelte, getyiett; ©piel, 

ba§, Spiele; ©tiitf, ba3, ©tiicfe 
please, oitte; frenen, freute, gefreut 

(impers., with a.); gefaffen, ge= 

fief, gefal'len (72, 3 ; d.) 
poem, ©cbid)^, ba§, (Stebidj'te 
polite, ffi'litf). 88,4 [(54,2) 

/<?<?r, arm (52,2); M* — , bie airmen 
pound, ^3futtb f ba3, ^fimbe. 59, 1 
/^/r, gtefjen, gofj, gegoffen [buc^er 
prayer book, (^ebet'bnd), ba§, ©ebet's 
pretty, fdjBlt. 52, 1 
professor, ^rofef'for, ber. 42, 1, 3 
proud {of), ftols (auf, a.) [rainier 
proverb, ©toriayniort, ba3, S^>rtd) / = 
punish, ftrafen, ftrafte, geftraft 
purse, $cntel, ber, SBeutei, SBiirfe, 

bie, SBorfen 
^j/£, frfjieben, fdjob, gefdjoben 
^«/, fteflen, fteUte, geftelit 



quarter, SBicrtet, ba3, SSiertet. 58, 7 
queens ftS'ttigin, bie r fto'mgumen 



nzzVz, reg'tten, reg'nete, gereg'net 
rather: had (or would) — , JttiJdjte 
fteoer 



read, fefen, 153, gelefen. 72, 3 
ready, fer'ttg 

really, fotrf'Ud) [7 2 ,3 

receive, erljal'ten, err)telt r , erljat'ten. 
ra/, tot, 52, 2 [112 

remain, oletben, btieb, ift geblieben. 
repeat, ttricberp'len, roieberljol'te, 

ttneberljott'. 96, 1 
Rhine, 9ttfjetn, ber. 171,3 
r^, retdj. 52, 1 
rw&, reiten, ritt, ift geritten 
?-z>£ (of the sun), anfgef)(e)tt, gmg 

auf 7 , ift auf'gegffngen ; (of persons,) 

a»f / ftc^(c)tt / ftanb auf, ift aufge= 

ftanben 
river, %\v$, ber, ^litffe 
room, dimmer, bft3, dimmer 
round, umtjcr 7 
run, lanfen, lief, ift getaufert (72, 3) ; 

(=flow,) rumen, rarm, ift geronrten 



sad, trau'rtg [84, 1 

sake: for the — of ftttt ♦ ♦ ♦ ttrifletu 
same : the — , berfeFoe. 64, 1, 2 
Saturday, ©onn'afienb, ber. 171,3 
say, fagen, fagte, gefagt. 75, 1 
saying. See tnbem', 102, 1 
Schiller, ©duller, ber. 45 1 , 171,2 
school, ©tfjule, bie, ©djulen; at — , 

in (or ,auf) ber ©d)iile ; to — , in 

bie (or 5itr) ©djitle 
schoolhottse, Sdjule, bie, ^ctjuten 
sea, See, hit f Seen 
seat, %\&% ber, ^(a|e 
see, feljen, falj, gefefjen (72, 3, 112); 

— again, nuVberfefjen (92, 1) 
seeing that, bii. 104, 1 
seek, fudjen, fucfyte, geffidjt 
see?n, fdjeinen, fcrjiert, gefctjienett 



send 



234 



sword 



send, fdjitfen, fdiirfte, gcftfiirft ; — a 

person fit to act, fcnben, fanbte, 

gefanbt (82,1); — after or for, 

fdjirfcn nod) (d.) 
servant, Xicncr, ber, Wiener 
set (of the sun), un'tergelj^n, gtng 

linger, ift un'tevgegangen 
seven, fiebcu 

several, mcf^rcrc. 70, 1 
sexton, 3Re§ner, ber, 9#e§ner 
j/W/, see 146, 3, 5, 32 ; fallen, fotlte, 

gefoat (186) 
she, fie* 16 

shoe, Sdjnf), ber, Sdjufje. 156, 3 
jv$0?r, Ufer, ba§, lifer 
short, fnrj. 52,2 [fotft (186) 

should, see 77, 1 ; foflen, follte, ge= 
j/W, setgen, ^eigte, ge^eigt 
jaafe .■ 071 this — of, bie^ / feit(§) (g., 

84, 1) ; on that (or the other) — of 

ptffeit(S) (g., 84, 1) 
simpleton, ein^falttger SDZenfdj. 58,6 
since, conj. (of time), fett. 102, 1 
•s-zVz^-, ft'ngen, fang, gefungen 
sister, Sdjtoefter, bie, Sdjioeftent 
j-z'/, ftt^en, fafj, gefef'fen; — down, 

fid) feijen, feftte fid), ftcf) gefefct 
jz>, fed)3, 58,2 
j/^z^, Sflaoe, ber, ©flatten 
j-/^, fdjlafen, fdjltef, gefdjlafen. 72, 3 
sleepy, fdjlSf'rtg 
small, fleilt, 52, 1 
Smith, Sdjmibt, ber* 44, 1 
.stz^w, Sdjnee, ber 
j-tf, f ; — . . . as, f8 ♦ ♦ . al§ or 

toic (53, 1, 105, 1); — long as, 

folang / (e) (102, 1) 
soldier', Sotbat', ber, Solba'ten 
some, ein'tger, cin paax, tt'toaS. 70, 1 
something, tt'W&S. 70, 1 
sometimes, mandj'mal. 58, 6 



son, @of)n, ber, 33(nte 
song, ttict), ba$, Cieber 
soon, bail) (56, 1) ; as — as, fotmlV 

(102, 1); as — as possible, ntBg /= 

lidjft balb (56, 2) 
sour, fauer. 52, 1 [72, 3 

jr^£, fpredjen, fprad), gefprod)en. 
splendid, pradj'tig. 56, 2 
spoil, oerber'ben, berbarb', berbor 7 ^ 

ben. 72, 3 
spring, ^rutyitng, ber, $rub/tinge; 

fpringen, f prang, ift gejprnngen 
stand, ftel)(e)n, ftanb, geftanben 
start, atVfafiren, fiir)r W, ift ab'ge= 

fafjren (72, 3), ab / gel)(e)tt, gtng 

56', ift ab'gegangen 
stay, bleiben, blieb, ift gebueben; 

— after school, nadVfttjen, fafc 

nad)', naaYgefeffen 
step, treten, trat, ift getreten. 72, 3 
stop, auf'liBren, fjbrte anf 7 , auf'geljort 
stove, Cfen, ber, £fen. 155, 
stream, Strom, ber, Strome 
street, Strafe, bie, Strain; in 

the — , auf ber Strode 
strong, ftarf. 52, 2 
study, fhtbie'rett, ffubier'te, ftubiert 7 

(i72 3 j; Stibium, $>a§, ©tiVbi=en 

(42,4) 
suddenly, JjIb't^Ud) 
suffer, leiben, litt, getitten [171,3 
summer, Somnter, ber, Sommer. 
sun, Sonne, bte, Sonnen 
Sunday, Sonn'titg, ber. 171,3 
suppose. See 33, 1 
sweep, Jeljrcn, fefyrte, gefefjrt 
sweet, frtfd) (of milk, etc.), ftift. 52, 1 
swim, fdjtoimmen, fd).Mnrm, ift ge= 

fdpommen 
Switzerland, bie @d)tt>et3. 171,3 
sword, Sdjwcrt, bftS, (2d)tuerter 



table 



235 



table, £tftfj, ber, Stfdje 

/!a^, tteljmett, nafjm, genommett 

(29, 1) ; — fl^mj, tt'oerfeijett, fefcte 

5'ber, Q'bergefettf (96, 1) 
talk, ftoredjen, fyrad), geforodjert 

(72, 3) ; re'bett, re'bete, gere'bet 
tall (of persons), groft. 54, 1 
tea, £ee, ber, £eee 
/^^, leljreit, lefjrte, gelefjrt. 130, 1 
teacher, Seljrer, ber, Sefyrer 
tear, £rchte, bie, SrSttett 
tear, retftett, rift, gettffen 
ten, geljtt. 58, 2 
than, ai§. 53, 1 

thank, battfett, bcmfte, gebanft (d.) 
that, ber (64, 1), jetter (8), ba$ (6s, 1), 

baft ; (= who,) bcr (66) ; (= so that,) 

battttt' (104, 1) 
the, bcr (10, 171); — . . . the, je 

♦ . . beft'o (102, 1) 
theater, Xljea'ter, ba3, S^ea'ter; at 

the — , tttt Xljea'ter; /<? /#* — , 

IttS Sfjea'ter 
M^zV, fljr. 20 

the?n, U)rer, fatten, fie. 16, 87, 1 
then, bann 

//zm?, ba, bort (over there). See 1 7, 1 
therefore, al'fi) 
/to*, btefe, bte3 (65, 1 ) 
they, fie. 16 
//«'*/, $>tefc, ber, S)iebe 
M/#£, bettfett, bad)te, gebadjt. 82, 2 
//ford 1 , brttte(r). 167, 1 
thirsty : lam — , t$ bitrftet ttttdj, 1 7 x 
M*y, biefer (8), i>it§ (65, 1) 
those, jene (8, 2), ba3 (65, 1) 
three, brei; —fold, brei'fadj (58,6) 
thrive, auf'fommett, fam auf, ift 

auf'gefommen 



through, bttrrf) (A.). 88, 1 

/*'//, bt3 (a., 88, i) ; not — ,erft (56,2) 

time, gett, bie, ^eiteit 

Ar^ (<?/"), tnubc (g. or a). 24, 4 

/#, an, attf, ttt (a., 128,5); (of per- 
sons,) gu (d., 86, 1 ; cf. 88, 4); (of 
countries and towns,) nad) (D., 
86, 1) ; ttm . . ♦ sit (88, 1) 

to-day, Ijeute 

to-morrow, movgett; — morning, 
tnorgen f rU^ ; — night, morgett 
a'uettb 

to-night, Ijettte a'benb 

too, %VL 

toward, ttadj (D.). 86, 1 

town, <Stabt, bie, <5t5bte ; in — , ttt 
ber Stabt ; into — , ttt bte <Btabt ; 
to — , ttarf) ber <5tabt 

train, 3«g, ber, gilge [uberfetjt' 

translate, tt&erfe^'ett, uberfet/te, 

travel, retfett, reifte, ift gereift 

tree, 23awm, ber, $3aume 

try, fcerfit'djett, oerfild^te, t)erfxirf)t r 

twenty, 5tt)an / 5tg. 166 

twenty-eighth, ber adjtitttbsttiatt^tgfte 

twice, gtuet'tttal. 58, 6 

two, 5«jei (58, 2), fcet'be^ (68, 1) 

U 

uncle, Dttfel, ber, Ottfel 
uncleanliness, Utt'retttlidjfett, bte 
under, ttttter (d. or A.). 90, 1 
unfriendly, tttt'frettttblid). 88, 4 
unhappy, tttt'gfiitfttdj. 52, 1 
university, Haiti erfttSt', bte, Htiiber= 
fitd'tetx [&I3 (102, 1) 

until: prep., bi§ (A., 88, 1); conj., 
up on, up to, attf (A.). 90, 1 
us, ttnfer, un§, im§. 16 [braudjf 
use, gebratt'djett, gebraudj'te, ge= 



valley 



236 



youth 



valley, 2fit, H§, teller 

very, very muck, fefyr 

vex, tjcrbrte^en, berbrofc', berbrof'fen 

village, $orf, bft$, 3>orfer 

W 

ze/#// (y&r), toar'tett (auf, a.), rear's 

tete, geroar'tet 
w^ ?//, aufroetfen, roecfte auf 7 , 

aufgercecft 
«/#/£, f^te'ren ge!j(e)n, gtng fpa= 

gie'ren, tft fpajie'ren gegangen 
wander, ttmn'bern, toan'berte, ift ge= 

roan'bert 
wa?it, molten, tooUte, getooftt. 186 
warm, tt»arm. 52, 2 
was, war; were, waren. 174 
wash, umfdjen, roufcf), geroafdjen. 72,3 
watch, Uljr, bte, Ufyren 
water, Staffer, ba3, SBafjer 
we, ttJtr. 16 

w^r, tragen, tritg, getrdgen. 72, 3 
weather, SBetter, t>a$, ^Setter 
week, 2$orf)e, bic, SSodjen 
a/*//, roof)!, gut (22, 4), nittt (129, 15) 
were, toarft, fear en, to Br eft, etc. 1 74 
what, tva§ ? at — ti?ne, tint ttnetjieF 

Ufjr? urn toetrfje £tit? — day? 

See 61, 1 
«/^«, ai§ or toenn (102), toann? 
whenever, toemt. 102, 1 
where, too; — from? toofjcV? 

(78, 5) 
whether, 00. 104, 1 
which, toeldjer ? (8) ; £>/ — , tooburay 

(87, 1); 0/"— , motion 7 (87, 1) 
while, toSty'renfe. 102, i 



white, tocift. 52, 1 
w/^, bcr ; toer ? 66 
w/W*, ganj. 51,1 (see after, 68, 1) 
whom, ben, bie. 66, 142, 4 
whose, beffen, beren. See ber, 66, 1 
wide, tteit. 52, 1 
wz'//. See 146, 3, 5, 32, 78, 1 
William, SBiltyelm, ber. 171,2 
wzW, 233inb, ber, SStnbe 
window, gfenfter, ba3, #enfter 
winter, Winter, ber, SSSintet, 171,3 
wish, molten, tuottte, geroottt. 186 
with, mtt (d.) ; (= near,) fret (D.). 86 
without, ofjne (A.). 88, 1, 3 
woman, $rau,. bie, ^rauen, S33et&, 

t>a§, 23et6er 
«/<w*fr, 2Satb, ber, SMbex. 158,4 
word, 2S>ort, ba§, 23ovte. 157 * 
wcr^, ar 7 oetten, ar 7 6eitete, gear's 

beitet; 5(r / 6cit, bie, 2(r 7 6eiten; 

2£erf, bag, SSerfe 
awWtf, 233ett, bie, SSelten 
would. See 77, 1 
write, fdjretben, frfjrie6, gefefyrieben ; 

in writing, see tnbem 7 , 104, 1 
wrong, un 7 redjt ; do — , un'redjt tim, 

tat un 7 red)t, un 7 red)t getan 



year, $af)r, ba§, 35^re 
j^, ja ; — indeed, jatoo!)! 7 
yesterday, geftern ; — morning, 

geftern ntorgen 
you, bit, ttjr, 6ie, 16 
young, jung. 52,2 
jK0«r, bein, euer, !5f)r. 20 
yours, bcittcr, eurcr, !5f)rer. 62, x 
yourself, felbft. 16,3 

j^«M, ^ifgenb, bie 



INDEX 



after, ioo, i, 171,5 

^Ib'Iaut, vowel change, 108 

absolute, ace, 130,5; superl., 56,2 

abstract nouns, 134,3, 141,4 

accent, foreign words, 36, 1, 40, 1; 
compounds, 136, 1 

accusative, 8, 130, 143, 2; absolute, 
130,5; extent of time, space, 37, 1, 
1 30, 4 ; future time, 61 2 ; for G. or d. 
of time, 130, 4; as object, 130, 1, 
143,2; with adjectives, see miibe, 
24, 4; with prepositions, 19 2 , 88, 90, 
128,5 

address, persons in, 6,2, 168, 169,2-4 

adjectives, 141, 7-9, 149, 3; Class I, 
46,164!; 11,48; III, 50; compari- 
son, 52, 167, 3, 4; irregular, 54; 
from proper names, 48, 4, 54, 5 ; as 
nouns, 54, 2, 3; with G., 126, 2; D., 
128, 1; a., see miibe, 24, 4; with 
personal pronouns, 54, 4; posses- 
sive, 20; after alte and feine, 68,3; 
after eintije, etc., 71,1; with mand), 
70, 1 ; fold), 64, 4 ; toeld), 66, 3 

adverbial genitive, 126, 4 

adverbs, 52, 1, 56, 149, 3, 167, 4; for 
pronouns, 87, 1, 170, 3; from geni- 
tive, 126, 4; in =en§, 56, 3, 60,3; 
order of, 120, 3 

affirmation, mild, 98, 3 

agent, 106, I 

agreement of verb with subject, 82, 3, 

141,3, 168,3-5, 169,4 
■ alletn', 1 00, 1 

aU(er), 68, 1, 3, 4 

alter ttebft', 55 4 

alS, as, than, 53, 1, 105, 1 ; as if, 104, 
1; when, 102, 1, 2, 104, 2; al§ al§, 
105 1 ; al§ ob, aU tretm, or aU, 104, 1 ; 

17°.3 2; 



am = an bent, 10, 2, 52, 4, 167, 3 ; am 
Itebften, 56, 1, 57, 1 

an, 90, 1, 3, 91, 1, 128, 5 

anberS, 70, 3 

anbrer, 70, 1-3, 71, 1 

Stn'fang, 130, 4 

another. See anbrer, 70, 1 

an'ftatt or jtatt, 84, 1, 4 

apostrophe, 44, 3 [ ID 3> 2 

apposition, 47, 1, 82, 3, 126, 3, 149, 3, 

article, definite, 10 ; contracted, 10, 2 ; 
uncontracted, 39, 1 ; distributive, 
132, 1, 171, 1 ; generic, 132, 1 ; with 
proper names, 49 \ 171, 2, 3; pecu- 
liar uses of, 132, 1, 171, 1 ; repeated, 
171, 3 

article, indefinite, 20; omitted, 133, 1 ; 
repeated, 171, 3 

as, than, case after, 104 1 [54, 2 

attributive, 46, 1, 48, 1, 49, 1, 2, 52, 3, 

and). See obgletd/, 104, 1 

auf, 90, 1-3, 128, 5; auf£, 52, 4 

au§, 86, 1 

aufeer, 86, 1, 2 

au'Berfialb, 84, 3 

auxiliary, 144, 1, 146, 5; fiaben, 26, 2, 
78, 4 ; fein, 30, 1 ; merben, 32, 1 ; order 
of, 80, 3, 124, 2; omitted, 124, 4; of 
moods, 78, 80, 186, 200 

B 

bet, 86, 1 

betbe§, 68, 1 

feebor/, 102, 1, 2 

bin gebo'ren, 61 1 

binnen, 86, 2 

bf§, conj., 102, 1; prep., 88, 1 

btfsc&en, mtt ein flein, 70, 1 

bleiben, 30, 1; with infin., 112 



238 

brennen, 82 
bringcn, 82, 



capitals, 48, 4, 54, 2, 3, 5, 141, 1, 169, 

2, 3, JJ 1 ^ 

cardinals, 58, 166, 167; do not affect 
the endings of adjectives, 47, 2, 
sentence 7 (but see 58, 2, 3) ; adjec- 
tives and adverbs -from, 58, 6 
cases, 8; G., 126; D., 128; a., 130 
catise, ba, irtbem 7 , toeil, 104, 1 
cf. (= Latin c°nfer), compare 
Christian (given) names, 44, 1, 3, 163 
clauses, 149, 1, 3, 6, 8; of cause, ba, 
ittbem', toeil, 104, 1; mild command, 
98, 3; concession, 98, 3, 105 2 ; con- 
dition, 150, 151; manner, 170, 3; 
mild affirmatiott, 98, 3 ; purpose, 98, 

3, bamit', 104, 1; time, 104, 2; de- 
pendent, 12, 3, 149, 1 ; indep., 149, 1 

collective nouns, 82, 3, 141, 3 

comma, 12, 3, 93, 1, 171, 5 

command, mild (imperative subjv.), 
98,3 

comparison, adj., partic, adv., 52, 
167, 3, 4; irregular, 54, 56 

comparative, 52, 1 

compound words, 136 ; accent of, 136, 
1 ; repetition of consonants in, 136, 
2; gender and inflection of, 136, 3; 
how formed, 136,4; suffixes in, 136 1 

concession, 98, 3, 105 2 

conditional mood, 76, 2, 77, 1 

conditional sentences, 77, 1, 150, 151 ; 
simple, 150, 2, 151, 1 ; viore vivid 
future, 150, 3, 151, 2; less vivid 
future, 150, 4, 151, 3; contrary to 
fact, 150, 5, 151, 4 

conjunctions, coordinating, 100; sub- 
ordinating, 102, 104 

consonants, 4, 136, 2 

contrary to fact, 150, 5, 151, 4 

countries and towns, 44, 5, 128, 5 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



ba, conj., 104, 1, 170, 3 

bamit', 104, 1 

bfr§, introductory, 63, 1, 65, 1 

bafy, 104, 1; omitted, 12 1 , 121, 1 

dates, 61 

dative, 8, 128, 143, 2; of the indirect 
object (person affected, person inter- 
ested, possessor), 20, 2, 91, 1, 128, 2 ; 
with or without 3U, 75, 1, 143, 2; 
with verbs meaning tnake, etc., 130, 
2; with in trans, verbs, 128, 3; with 
prepositions, 86, 90 ; of separation, 
29, 1 ; of the time at which, 128, 4; 
of past time, 61 2 

days, 60, 5, 61 

definite article, 10; for poss. adj., 
20, 2 ; with proper names, 171, 2, 3 ; 
peculiar uses of, 132, 1, 171, 1 

bein, 20, 63, 1, 169, 2 

beiner, 62, 63, 1 

demonstrative pronouns, 64, 65, 1, 
67, 1, 170, 1 

benfen, 82, 2 

benn, for, then, 100, 1, 3; than, 105 1 

dependent clauses, 12, 3, 124, 1, 149, 1 

ber, article, 10 ; demon, pron., 64, 1-3 ; 
rel. pron., 66, 1, 6, 67, 1, 170, 2 

berer, 170, 1 

derivation, 134, 136 

beVjenige, 64, 1, 170, 2 

berfeFbe, 64, 1 

biefer, 8, 2, 3, 64; Me§, 63, 1, 65, 1; 
biefer-words, 10 1 (cf. 20 x ) 

bie3'feit(§), 84, 1 

diminutive nouns, 34, 1, 134, 2 

diphthongs, 3 

distributive use of ber, 132, 1 

division into syllables, 4, 2 

bod), nevertheless, 33, 1, 122, 6 

brei, 58, 2 

bit, 18; £>u, 169, 2 

bittd), 88, 1,2 

biirfen, 78, 80, 186, 200 



INDEX 



239 



E 



e dropped from ending or stem, 
20 2 ; in g. and D., 152 1 , 152 2 ; in 
verbs, 12, 2, 72, 1, 74, 1, 2, 4; 
changed to i or ie, 72, 3; in com- 
pounds, 136 1 

e'lje, 102, 1, 2 

ein, 20, 64, 4, 133, 1 ; num. adj., 58, 3 

einctn'ber, 18, 2 

einer, 68, 1. See man, 68, 1 

ei'ntger, 70, 1, 71, 1 

ein paar, 70, 1 

etn§, 58, 3 

ein fo or fo ein, 65 1 

emphasis, by position, 120 1 ; by 
spacing, 58, 3 

emphatic verb phrases, 146 1 

Snbe, 130, 4 

enblidj, at last, 122,6 

English related to German, 1, 204 

entge'gen, 86, 1 

ent'roeber . . . ober, 100, 1, 2 

er, 18; ¥r, 169,3 

Grben, 41 1 

erft, adj., 60, 2, 167, 1 ; adv., 56, 2, 4 

e§, 16, 17, 1, 63, 1 ; omitted, 17 1 , 106,3; 
U gt&t, 7^, 1 

et 7 n)5§ or tofi§, 70, 1 

euer, 20, 63, 1, 169, 2, 3 

euphony, 12, 2, 20 2 , 98, 5, 152 1 , 152 2 

eurer 62, 63, 1 

Qtv. (= (Suer or (Snre), 169, 4 

exclamation point, 74, 4, 171,6 

exclamatory sentence in inverted or- 
der, 122, 1 ; in transposed order, 
124, 1 ; with infin. or partic, 132,2 

existence, e§ gi6t, 73, 1 

expletive, B, 17, 1 

F 

factitive (or second) object, 130, 1 

(sentence 2), 130, 2, 143, 4 
fafiren with fpaate'ren, 132,3 



feminine nouns, unchanged in singu- 
lar, 152, 1 ; with =(e)n in g., d., or 
A. sing., 41 1 ; with =§ in G. sing., 
126,4, 136,4 
finben with infin., 112 
for, 130,7 . [44,3 

foreign nouns, 36, 1, 40, 1, 42, 1, 3, 
fractions, 60, 3, 4 
fuftlen, 80,2; with infin., 112 
fur, 88, 1 ; to3§ fur (ein), 66, 4 
future and fut. pf., 32, 33, 1, 124, 3; 
ill 

G 

gona, 51,1,68, 1 (seealler) [106,1,172 s 

ge=> 26, 28, 92, 3, 94 ; omitted, 95, 1, 

geben, 72, 4, y^> * 

gegen, 88, 1, 4 

gegenu'ber, 86, 1 

gef)(e)n, impers., 22,4; with infin., 
132,3; with partic, 132,6 

gemaV, 86, 2 [152 4 , 169, 1 

gender, 8,2, 141,6, 142,4, 152,2-4, 

generic (general) use of ber, 132, 1 ; 
of ein, 163,2 

genitive, 8, 44,4, 126; adjectives 
with, 126, 2 (sentence 4); of adjec- 
tives, 46, 1 ; of proper names, 
44,3, 4, 163; adverbial, 126,4; °f 
the time within ivhich, 126, 4; posi- 
tion of, 126,1; prepositions with, 
84; verbs with, 19, 1, 127 (sent. 12) 

genug 7 , 70, 1 

gern(e), 56, 1, 57, 1 

German related to English, 1, 204 

gerundive, 49, 2 

flibt, 73, 1 

given (Christian) names, 44, 1, 3, 163 

Gothic, 1 

Grimm's Law, 204 



fia&en, auxiliary, 26, 2, 28, 2, 78, 4, 80, 3, 
124, 2, 4; infi., 174; with infin., 112 



240 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 






fjato, 51, i, 58, 7, 60,4, 84,3 

liallien, fjaloer, 84, 1, 2 

l)cir,cn, 80, 2 

Tjelfen, 80, 2 

§err, 40 3 

&erg, 34 2 

High German, I 

I) inter, 90, 1 

I)Bren, 80, 2; with infin., 112 

hour, 58, 5, 7, 59, 2. See SSiertel, 224 

^unbert, 58,4 

hyphen, 4, 2, 136, 2 



id), 18, 168,3, 5; sometimes omitted, 

see ottte (207), bemfert (208) 
identity, ctl§, 105, 1 
=te / ren, verbs in, 172 3 
iftr, pers., 16, 1, 169, 2, 3; omitted, 
_ 74, 4; poss., 20, 63, 1, 169, 2, 3 
S*)r, 20, 63, 1, 169, 2-4 
tfjrer, ISfyxex, 62, 63, 1 
^fjro, 169,4 

immer with comparative, 55 s 
imperative, 74; infin. or partic. for, 

132, 2; vowel change in, 74, 2 (see 

72,3) 
impersonal verbs, 16,5, 106,3, I 44> 2 > 

H omitted, 17 1 , 106,3, I 3°>3 
tit, preposition, 90, 1, 128,5 
indefinite pronouns, 68, 70, 170,4; 

indef. rel. (fter), 66, 1, 5, 170, 2 
inbem', 102, 1, 104, 1 
indicative, 144,3,145,3-9; pres.,6, 12, 

13, 1 (=Eng. perf.), 22, 24, 72, 78, 

2; past, 6, 14, 15, 1 (= Eng. plupf.), 

22, 24, 82, 1 ; perf.', 26, 28, 30, 78, 4, 

80, 1 ; plupf., 26, 28, 30, 78, 4, 80, 1 ; 

fut. and fut. perf., 32; pass., 106; 

in indirect discourse, 100, 4, 101, 1, 

101 1 , 101' 2 
indirect discourse, subjv. in, 98, 4,5, 

99,1, 100,4, 101 1 , 101 2 ; indie, in, 

100, 4, 101, 1, 101 \ IOI 2 



indirect object, 91, 1, 128, 1 

indirect question, 98, 4, 5, 101 3 

infinitive, 79. 1, 80, 2, 124, 2; position, 
120, 1 ; with JU, 79, 1 ; with urn . . . 
hVi, 88, 1 (see tint); without 511, 79, 1, 
80, 2 ; as noun, 34, 1, 141, 1 ; in -ing 
(often called verbal noun and some- 
times gerund), 1 12, 132, 3, 5, 6, 141, 
5; phrase, 93, 1; for impv., 132, 2 

in / nerl)al6, 84, 3 

interrogation point, 171,6 

interrogative adverbs, 124,1; pro- 
nouns, 65, 1, 66, 124, 1, 142, 5 ; sen- 
tence, 11, 1, 122, 1 

intransitive verbs, 143,5; with fetn, 
30, 1 ; as pass., 106, 3 ; with D., 
128,3 

inverted order, 11, 1, 100,2, 122 

tr / genb(etner), ir'genbtoelcber, 170,4 

irregular weak verbs, 82 



je . . . , beft'o (or urn fo), 102, 1, 3; 
je . . . , je, 102,3; je ttadjbent', 102,1 

jeber, 8, 2, 3, io 1 , 68, 1 ; plural of, 68, 1 
(see atter) 

je'bermann, 68, 1 

jebocf/, however, 122,6 

je'manb, 68, 1 

letter, 8, 2, 3, 10 1 ; jetted, 63, 1, 65, 1 

jeVfeit^), 84, 1 

3efu§ GfjriftuS, g. Sefu Gfjrtfti, d. ^efu 
Gfirtfto, a. ^efttm Gnnftum, vocative 
(case of address) ^efu Gljrtfte ; but 
often uninflected in all cases (171, 2) 

K 

fern, 20, 64, 4, 68,3; fetn fo, 65 1 ; 

fetner, 68, 1 ; fein-words, 20 1 
fennen, 82, 1 

key to the classes of nouns, 154 
fonttnen, with partic, 132,6 
fontten, 78, 80, 186, 200 



241 



Iang§, 84, 1 

laffett, 80, 2, 106, 4, 202, 3 

laufett with fpaate'ren, 132,3 

lefjrett, 80, 2, 1 30, 1 

Iernett, 80, 2 

less vivid ftiture, 77,1, 150,4, 151,3 

Iteber, 56, 1, 57, 1 

liking, preference, choice, 57, x 

liquid stems, 20 2 , 72,2, 74, I 

Low German, I 

M 

madjerr, 80,2, 130, 2 

man, eine£, etc., 68, 106, 4 

martd)(er) f 70, 1, 71, 1 

material weighed or measured, 59, I 

measure or weight, 59, 1 

mef)t, 54, 1, 56, 1, 70, 1; in compari- 
son, 167, 4 

mef/rere, 54, 1, 70, 1, 71, x 

mem, 20, 63, 1 

metner, 62, 1, 63, 1 

mit, 86, 1 

SDfttte, 130,4 

mixed adjectives, 50; nouns, 42 ; pre- 
fixes, 96; verbs, 82 

modal (mood) auxiliaries, 78, 80, 186, 
200; infinitive omitted with, 79, 1; 
two past participles of, 80, 1 (cf. 
80,2) 

modification (Umlaut), 3,2; in nouns, 
34, 2, 36, 2, 38, 2; in verbs, 72,3 

moijett, 78, 80, 186, 200 

monosyllabic nouns, 154; <Seitt, Surt 
(Class I, 155), 172 1 ; Class II, 
156, 157; Class III, 158, 159; Class 
IV, 160, 161, 2; Class V, 162, 4 

months, 60, 5, 61 

mood auxiliaries, 78, 80, 186, 200 ; 
infin. omitted with, 79, 1 : two past 
partic. of, 80, 1 (cf. 80, 2) 

muff en, 78, 80, 186, 200 



N 

*tt, in nom. dropped, 34, 4, 155, 4 

nad), 86, 1, 3, 128,5 

uacfjbem 7 , 102, 1, 104,2 

nadjft, 86, 2 

9?ad)t, be§9?ad)t3, 126,4 

ue6en, 90, 1 

ne&ft, 86, 2 

negatives, position of, 120, 4 

ttemtert, 82, 1, 130, 1 

neuter for masc. or fern., 68, 4 

mcfjt, position of, 120, 4 ; nidjt . . . nuv, 

fortbern cmd), 100, 1 
md)t§, 70, 1 
nie'manb, 68, 1 
nod), conj., see toeber, 100,1; nod) 

(tin), 70, 1 (see attbrer) 
nominative, 8, 1, 2; as subject or in 

predicate, 143, 1 
normal order, 120, 122, 6; if baft is 

omitted, 12 1 , 121 1 
no such, 65 1 
noun clauses, 149, 3 
nouns,34-45, 141, 152-163; Class 1, 34, 

155; II, 36, 156; III, 38, 158; IV, 

40, 160; V, 42,162; proper names, 

44, 163; collective, 82, 3, 141, 3; 

compound, 136 
number, 8,2, 84,3, 141,3, 142,2,4, 

168,3-5 
numerals, cardinal, 58, 59, 1, 166 j 
ordinal, 60, 61, 1, 166 



66, 104, 1 ; a(§ 06, 104, 1 
o / berl)a[6, 84, 3 

o6gleiay, obfdjon 7 , oSlrjofjK, 104, 1 
objects, 16,4, 120, 1, 2, 130,3, 143,2, 
4-6; second object, 130, 1, 2, 143, 4 
oEifcfjon', o&roofit 7 , 104, 1 
ober, 100, 1, 171, 5 
ofjne, 88, 1, 3 
optative (wish), 98, 3 



24- 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 






order of words, normal, 12 1 , 100,2, 
120,121,1, 122,6; inverted, II, I, 
100,2, 122; transposed, 12,3, 124; 
adverbs in, 120,3; negatives in, 
120,4; objects in, 120,1,2; pro- 
nouns in, 120, 2, 122, 5, 124, 5 

ordinals, 60, 166; fractions, 60,3 



paax, etrt, 70, 1 

participle, present, 49, 2, 132, 5 ; past, 
26,1, 28,1, 132,6; of mood aux., 
etc., 80, 1, 2; g> omitted in, 95, 1, 
96, 3, 172 3 ; attributive, 46, 48, 49, 
1, 2, 50; compared, 52; as noun, 
54,2; for imperative, 132, 2; posi- 
tion of, 27, 1, 120, 1, 124, 1 

passive voice, 106, 124, 3, 182 ; avoid- 
ed, 106, 4 

past contrary to /act, fj, 1, 150, 5, 

I5I.4 
peculiar verbs, 72 
person, 66, 6, 142, 2-4 
personal pronouns, 16, 17, 168, 169, 

1-3 ; demonstrative for, 64, 3 ; 

agreement of, 66, 6, 168, 4, 169, 1 ; 

order of, 168, 3 
phrases, 49, 1, 149, 2, 3, 9 
possession, 20, 1, 2, 63. 1, 64, 3, 128, 2 
possessive adjectives, 20; def. article 

for, 20, 2 ; dative of pers. pron. for, 

20, 2, 128, 2 
possessive pronouns, 62, 63, 1, 169, 1, 

4 ; demonstrative for, 64, 3 
possessor, 20, 2, 64, 3, 128, 2 
potential verb phrases, 148 
predicate adjectives not inflected 

except in superlative, 52, 1, 4, 167, 

3, 4 
predicate nominative, 143, 1; geni- 
tive, 126,2 (sent. 2); object, 143, 4 
prefixes, separable, 92 ; inseparable, 

94, 95, 1 ; doubtful, 96 ; two or 

more, 96, 3 



prepositions with G., 84; with D., 86, 
87, 1 ; with a., 88, 87, 1 ; with d. or 1 
A., 90, 87, 1 ; with def. artic, 10, 
2, 39, 1 ; with ba(r)-, too(r)-, 87, 1 ; 
instead of genitive, 44, 4, 126, 2 ; in 
verse, 203 [ I 5 I » 4 

present contrary to fact, 77, 1, 150, 5, 

present indicative of peculiar verbs, 
72; of strong verbs, 22, 72, 1-4; 
of weak verbs, 14, 72, 1 ; n 1 

probability, 33, 1 

progressive verb phrases, 147, 6 

pronouns, demon., 64, 66, 5, 67, 1, 170, 
1; indef., 68, 70, 71, 1, 170, 4; 
intens., 16, 3, 168, 2; interrog., 66, 
1-4, 124, 1, 142, 5; pers., 16, 54, 4, 
66, 6, 142, 168, 169, 1-3; poss., 62, 
63, 1, 169, 1-4; recip., 18,2; reflex., 
18, 143, 6; rel., 66, 67, 1, 2, 142, 4, 
169, 1, 170, 2, 3 

pronunciation, 2-5 

proper names, 44, 45 1 ,49 1 , 126, 3, 141, 
2,163,171,2,3; plural of, 44, 1,44 x 

punctuation, comma in, 12, 3, 93, 1, 
171, 5 ; ex clam, point in, 74, 4, 171, 
6; interrog. point in, 171, 6 

purpose, 98, 3. See bctmft', baft (104, 
1), iim. . . 33 (88, 1) 



question (interrogation) point, 171, 6 

questions, direct, 11, 1, 122, 1, 146, 4, 

5, 147, 5; indirect, 101 3 , 124, 1 



reciprocal pronoun, 18,2 

reflex, pronouns, 18, 143, 6; verbs, 
18, 3, 106, 4, 143, 6 

teiten with fpaaie'ren, 132, 3 

relative adverbs, 87, 1, 124, 1 ; pro- 
nouns, 66, 67, 1, 2, 142, 4, 169, 1, 
170, 2, 3 

rennen, 82, 1 



INDEX 



243 



repetition of attributive words before 
nouns of different genders (but 
often neglected in conversation and 
in poetry, as in English), 171, 3; 
auxil. verbs not generally repeated 
and often omitted, 124, 4; subject 
repeated when order becomes in- 
verted, 171, 5 



=3, plural in, 44, 1, 44 1 

'§ often for e§, it 

fdion, with pres. or past, 13, 1, 15, 1 

script, 138-140 

©e., ©r., in titles, 169, 4 

seasons, 60, 5, 171, 3 

fefjen, 80, 2; with infin., 112 

fein, be, 6, 174; as auxil., 30, 1; in- 
stead of toerben, 106, 2; with predi- 
cate genitive, 126, 2 (sentence 2); 
with infin., 132, 4; omitted, 124,4 

feilt, his, its, 20, 63, I 

fetner, 62, 63, 1 

feit, conj., 102, 1; prep., 86, 1, 2 

fettbem', 102, 1 

felbft (or fel&er), 16, 3, 168, 2 

fenben, 82, 1 

separation, dative of, 2Q, 1, 128, I 

ftcf), 18 

fie, ©te, 16 

similarity, tote, 105, I 

fo> 32, 3, 151 ; (= fold),) 6s 1 ; fo et'tofis 
(= foIdje§), 70, 1 (see et'rociS) ; fo 
lange . . ., 6t§, 102, 1 

fo&aiy, 102, 1 

fofang^e), 102, 1 

fo(ct)(er), 64, 1,4, 71, 1; avoided by 
using em fo, fo ein, tern fo (65 *) or 
fo et'w&S (70, 1) 

fort b era, 100, 1 

space, extent of , 37, 1, 130, 4 

fpasie'ren, 132, 3 

©r., ©e., in titles, 169, 4 

state, 106, 2 



fratt, att'ftatt, 84, 1, 4 

strong adjs., 46; nouns, 34-39; verbs, 
22 (pres., past), 28 (perf., plupf.), 
32 (fut., fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 74, 2, 4 
(impv.), 108-119 (classes), 172, 3, 5 

subject, agreement of verb with, 168, 
3-5, 169, 4; omitted, 17 1 , 106, 3, 
130, 3; repeated, 171,5 (sentence 
2) ; separated from verb or conjunc- 
tion, 122,5, I2 4, 5 

subjunctive, past, plupf., 76, 1, 77, 1 ; 
mood, 98, 144, 3, 145, 1 ; in ind. dis- 
course, 98, 4, 5, 99, 1, 100, 4, 1 01 !, 
ioi 2 , 101 3 ; in a wish (optative 
subjv.), a mild command, ptirpose 
(see batntt', bafj, 104, 1), concession, 
mild affirmation (potential, diplo- 
matic, dubitative subjv.), condition 
(151,3,4), 98, 3 

subordinate clause, 12, 3, 80, 3, 98, 4, 
101, 1, 102, 2, 124, 1 

subordinating conjunctions, 102, 104 

such a, 64, 4, 65 1 

suffixes, 134, 136 1 

superlative, 52, 54, 56; superl. corn- 
par., superl. eminence, 52,4, 167, 3 

supposition, 33, 1 

syllables, 4, 2 



Scmfertb, 58, 4 

tense auxiliary, 26, 2, 28, 2, 30, 1, 

80,3; omitted, 124,4 
tenses, 145, 3-9 
than, case after, 104 1 
the . , . the, 102, 1 (see je . . . , beft'o) 
time of day, 58, 5 ; of week or of 

month, 61, 1 ; within which, 126, 4 ; 

at which, 128,4; extent of , 130,4 
titles, 163, 1, 3, 169, 4 
to, 128, 5 ; toward, 86, 3, 88, 4, 128, 5 
towns and countries, 44, 5, 128, 5 
transposed order, 12,3, 124 
trofc, 84, 1 



244 



A GERMAN GRAMMAR 



. mitten, 84, 1, 2; 



u6er, 90, 1, 91 1 
inn, 88, 1 ; vim 

dm . . . ju, 88, x 
Umlaut, vowel modification, 3, 2 
unb, 100, 1, 171, 5 
unfer, 20, 63, 1 
unfrer, 62, 63, 1 
unter, 90, 1 
un'terrjalo, 84, 3 



verbal noun, 141, 5 

verbs, 143-151, 172-202; stem, 172, 
1 ; vowel change, 108, 192 ; prin. 
parts, 172, 2-5; tenses, 145, 3-9; 
endings, 173; infl. with fjaben, 26, 
2, 28, 2, 78, 4, 80, 3, 1 24, 4 ; with fetn, 
30, 1, 124, 4; separable, 92, 2, 3, 
96, 3, 188; insep., 95, 1, 96, 3, 189; 
strong, 22 (pres., past), 28, 30 (perf., 
plupf.), 32 (fut., fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 
74, 2-4 (impv.), 76, 98 (subjv.), 108- 
119 (classes); weak, 12 (pres..), 14 
(past), 26, 30 (perf., plupf.), 32 (fut., 
fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 74, 1, 3, 4 (impv.), 
82 (irreg.), 76, 98 (subjv.); mood 
auxil., 78, 80, 186, 200; pass, voice, 
106, 182 ; impers., 17 1 , 106,3, 144,2, 
189, 6-8; reflex., 18, 3, 106, 4, 143, 
6, 184 

btet(er), 70, 1, 71, 1 

bon, 44, 4, 86, 1, 91 x , 163, 5 

bor, 90, 1 

vowels, 3, 72, 3, 108, 192 

W 

mSb/teno, conj., 102, 1, 104, 2; prep., 

84, 1 
mtfrb, mSrbfr, 24, 3 



mas, 66, 67, 2; (= et'mas,) 70, 1 ; ma3 

fur (ein), 66, 4 
weak adjs., 48; nouns 40; verbs, 12 

(pres.), 14 (past), 26, 30 (perf., 

plupf.), 32 (fut., fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 

74, 1, 3, 4 (impv.), 82 (irreg.), 76, 98 

(subjv.), 172, 2-4 
meber . . . nocf), 100, 1, 2 
megen, 84, 1, 2 
weight or measure, 59, I 
toetl, 104, 1 
melcrjer, 8, 2, 3; indef., 70, 1; rel., in- 

terrog., 66, 1, 3; melajes, 63, 1, 65, 1 
menben, 82, 1 

me / uig(er), 70, 1, 71, 1 [170, 3 

menu, 102, 1, 104, 1, 2, 122, 3, 151 1 , 
menu . . . aucf). See obgletcf/, 104, 1 
mer, 66, 1, 2, 5, 67, 2, 170, 2 
merbeu, pres., past, 24; auxil., 32, 76, 

2. 80, 3, 106 (pass, voice), 124, 2, 3 
when, 104, 2 
mtber, 88, 1 
mie, as, like, 53, 1, 105, 1 ; however, 

rote . . . aurf), 105,2, sentence 3; 

true al§, 105 1 ; of manner, 170, 3 
mteber, 92, 1, 96, 1 
mtr, 16, 168, 3-5 

wish, 98, 3 

miff en, 82,2 

mo, 170,3; mo(r)=, 87,1 

morjl, 33, 1 

morben, 172 3 

ttmrbe or mar gebo^en, 61 x 



gu, 86, 1, 3; with d., 75, 1, 91, 1 ; with 
infin. (repeated before each infin.), 
79,1, 92,3; omitted, 79,1, 80,2, 
132, 2; with pres. par tic, 49, 2 

jum^ber, 86, 2 

§roet, 58, 2 

amifdjen, 90, 1 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 

111 Hill 11 '111 fl III 1 !,r " 



llllllllUilllilllllIliililll^li^iii 
003 224 982 6 # 



